Téléphone Mobile Tablette Galaxy Tab 3 (10.1) GT-P5210 - Manuels - Samsung

SAMSUNG sur fnac.com - Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung - Revenir à l'accueil

 

 

 

Galaxy Tab 3 (10.1)

Description

Date de distribution Décroissant

Langue

Fichier Décroissant

Manuel de l'utilisateur 2013.07.09 ANGLAIS (EUROPE) 23.33 MB
Manuel de l'utilisateur Téléchargement
Manuel de l'utilisateur 2013.07.08 FRENCH(FRANCE) 24.27 MB
Manuel de l'utilisateur Téléchargement
Instructions de sécurité 2013.06.14 ENGLISH(Australia), ENGLISH(Europe), ENGLISH(Hongkong), FRENCH(BEL), GERMAN(Austria), GERMAN(SWISS), GREEK(Cosmote), ITALIAN(SWISS), PORTUGUESE(European), RUSSIAN(Kazakhstan), CROATIAN, DANISH, DUTCH, DUTCH(BEL), ENGLISH(New Zealand), FINNISH, FRENCH, FRENCH(FRANCE), FRENCH(SWISS), GERMAN, GREEK, HUNGARIAN, ITALIAN, KAZAKH, LATVIAN, LITHUANIAN, MACEDONIAN, NORWEGIAN, POLISH, PORTUGUESE, ROMANIAN, RUSSIAN, SERBIAN, SLOVAK, SLOVENIAN, SPANISH, SWEDISH, UKRAINIAN, UZBEK 0.01MB
Instructions de sécurité Téléchargement
Quick Start Guide 2013.06.14 FRENCH(FRANCE) 0.33 MB
Quick Start Guide Téléchargement

 

Recherche par catégories :

Imprimantes       Téléphones

      GSM            Informatique

Ordinateurs            Galaxy

    Photo                  TV  

Electroménager 

Vidéos : Tutoriels :

 Samsung-GALAXY-S4-Air-View-Tutoriel-Video

Samsung- GALAXY S4 - Air Gesture   - Tutoriel - Video

Samsung- GALAXY S4 - Lecteur optique  - Tutoriel - Video

 Samsung - GALAXY S4 - Smart Scroll  - Tutoriel - Video

 Samsung GALAXY S4 - ChatOn  - Tutoriel - Video

 Samsung GALAXY S4 - S Translator  - Tutoriel - Video

Autres Vidéos :

 Samsung Unleash Your Fingers - Video

 Samsung Unleash Your Fingers : Next Generation Vidéo

 Samsung Vous allez aimer la vitesse Vidéo

Miniature Samsung GALAXY S4 presents Hi Hey Hello, a musical short film

 GALAXY S4 - The Great Gatsby Premiere, Cannes

 Samsung Readers Hub Vidéo

 Samsung Game Hub Vidéo

 

Présentation du Samsung GALAXY Mega

 Smart Switch PC-mobile

 Samsung Spot TV Samsung GALAXY S4 - version 60'  - Video

Miniature Samsung Safari Imaginaire  - Video

Miniature Samsung Spot Samsung Galaxy Note 8.0  - Video

Autres Manuels Utilisateurs ou documentation Samsung :

[TXT]

 Samsung-Vous-allez-a..> 28-Jun-2013 18:32  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-S4-Ch..> 28-Jun-2013 18:08  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-S4-Sm..> 28-Jun-2013 18:05  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-S4-Le..> 28-Jun-2013 17:35  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-S4-Ai..> 28-Jun-2013 17:32  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-S4-Ai..> 28-Jun-2013 17:26  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Jun-2013 09:49  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-1..> 28-Jun-2013 09:46  2.7M

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 24-Jun-2013 15:13  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 24-Jun-2013 15:11  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 24-Jun-2013 15:10  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 24-Jun-2013 15:10  1.9M 

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 24-Jun-2013 11:31  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 24-Jun-2013 11:31  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 24-Jun-2013 11:29  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Jun-2013 11:29  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 24-Jun-2013 11:28  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 24-Jun-2013 11:28  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 24-Jun-2013 11:27  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 24-Jun-2013 11:27  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 24-Jun-2013 11:26  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Jun-2013 11:26  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 24-Jun-2013 11:25  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimante-I..> 24-Jun-2013 07:11  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Fnac.htm        24-Jun-2013 07:07  3.0M

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Jun-2013 07:20  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimante-I..> 20-Jun-2013 07:19  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-LED-SE..> 20-Jun-2013 07:18  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Jun-2013 07:18  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Video-DEL..> 20-Jun-2013 07:17  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 20-Jun-2013 06:59  2.3M 

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Jun-2013 06:59  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 20-Jun-2013 06:59  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camescopes-P..> 20-Jun-2013 06:49  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Video-3D-..> 20-Jun-2013 06:49  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camera-Camco..> 20-Jun-2013 06:47  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-Wirele..> 20-Jun-2013 06:47  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-3D-UN7..> 17-Jun-2013 07:22  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Sma..> 17-Jun-2013 07:22  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 17-Jun-2013 07:22  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-electromenag..> 17-Jun-2013 07:22  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 17-Jun-2013 07:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 17-Jun-2013 07:21  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-electromenag..> 17-Jun-2013 07:20  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 17-Jun-2013 07:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Peripherique..> 17-Jun-2013 07:20  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Video-3D-..> 17-Jun-2013 07:19  2.9M 

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-3D-UN7..> 17-Jun-2013 07:22  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Sma..> 17-Jun-2013 07:22  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 17-Jun-2013 07:22  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-electromenag..> 17-Jun-2013 07:22  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 17-Jun-2013 07:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 17-Jun-2013 07:21  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-electromenag..> 17-Jun-2013 07:20  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 17-Jun-2013 07:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Peripherique..> 17-Jun-2013 07:20  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Video-3D-..> 17-Jun-2013 07:19  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu..> 13-Jun-2013 07:28  3.6M

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Smart..> 13-Jun-2013 07:25  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 13-Jun-2013 07:25  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-LCD..> 13-Jun-2013 07:24  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camescopes-P..> 13-Jun-2013 07:24  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephones-C..> 13-Jun-2013 07:23  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 13-Jun-2013 07:23  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-IT-producten..> 13-Jun-2013 07:23  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 13-Jun-2013 07:23  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu..> 13-Jun-2013 07:22  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Sma..> 13-Jun-2013 07:22  3.0M

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Jun-2013 08:19  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PC-Office-LC..> 12-Jun-2013 08:18  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Home-Applian..> 12-Jun-2013 08:18  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Home-Applian..> 12-Jun-2013 08:18  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Printer-Mult..> 12-Jun-2013 08:18  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Home-Applian..> 12-Jun-2013 08:17  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Home-Applian..> 12-Jun-2013 08:17  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camera-Camco..> 12-Jun-2013 08:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 12-Jun-2013 08:17  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Smart..> 12-Jun-2013 08:16  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 12-Jun-2013 08:16  2.8M 

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Imprim..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Teleph..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-GSM-Ma..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Inform..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Ordina..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Galaxy..> 11-Jun-2013 11:42  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Electr..> 11-Jun-2013 11:42  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Photo-..> 11-Jun-2013 11:42  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-TV-Man..> 11-Jun-2013 11:42  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Liste-Produits-Manue..> 11-Jun-2013 09:51  511K  

[TXT]

 Liste-Manuels-Utilis..> 11-Jun-2013 09:51  379K 

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3170FN-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3170FN-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3175FW-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3185FW-Manuels-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/19-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-S19A300N-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/20ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6220FX-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/24ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6250FX-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/27-Serie7-Moniteur-station-d-accueil-C27A750-C27A750X-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/32-UE32D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6200TS-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/35-35ppm-Copieur-couleur-CLX-9350ND-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/40-UE40D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D6500VS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/46-LE46D550WXZF-serie-5-HD-TV-LCD-TV-LE46D550K1W-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/CLX-3185FW.htm

/SAMSUNG/GalaxyAceGT-S5830.htm

/SAMSUNG/Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/GalaxySIIGT-I9100.htm

/SAMSUNG/GalaxyTab10.1GT-P7500M16.htm

/SAMSUNG/GalaxyTab8.9GT-P7310M16.htm

/SAMSUNG/GalaxyYGT-S5360.htm

/SAMSUNG/Galaxy-Y-S5360-AndroidGT-S5360-Manuels-Utilisateur-et-Guides-Rapide-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/index.html

/SAMSUNG/LE32C350LE32C350D1W.htm

/SAMSUNG/LE40C630LE40C630K1W.htm

/SAMSUNG/LE55C650-LE55C650L1W-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Liste-Manuels-Utilisateur-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Liste-Produits-Manuels-Utilisateur-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-19-UE19D4000WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE19D4000NW-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-19-UE19D4010WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE19D4010NW-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-Galaxy-Mini-2-GT-S6500-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-Galaxy-Y-GT-S5360-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-GT-B5510-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-GT-B7300-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-UE46ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES7000S-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-Utilisateur-et-Guides-Rapide-Samsung-Galaxy-S-II-noir-Open-market-GT-I9100.htm

/SAMSUNG/Micro-chaine-MM-D330DWXZF-serie-3-MM-D330-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/MM-C330D.htm

/SAMSUNG/MM-D330D.htm

/SAMSUNG/N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/N150-NP-N150-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/RSH5UEPN.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-16-MP-Ecran-LCD-3-Compact-Performant-WB700-SAMSUNG-WB700-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-18-XTDVBEUE-SWE-0327.pdf-Suede-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-20120405165711377-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-20-XTDVBEUE-NOR-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-2243QW-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-22-LE22D450WXZF-serie-4-Full-HD-LCD-TV-LE22D450G1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-24-LED-HDTV-%D0%9C%D0%BE%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%82%D0%BE%D1%80-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%B8-3-T24B30-T24B301EW-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-24-LED-HDTV-\xd0\x9c\xd0\xbe\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd1\x82\xd0\xbe\xd1\x80-\xd1\x81\xd0\xb5\xd1\x80\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb8-3-T24B30-T24B301EW-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-305U1A-A02-NP305U1A-A02HK-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-320MXN-3-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-320TSN-3D-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-32-UE32D4000WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE32D4000NW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400EXN-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400TS-3-400TS-3-SIM-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400TS-3D-400TS-3D-SIM-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400UXN-3-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400UXN-3-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-LE40D550WXZF-serie-5-HD-TV-LCD-TV-LE40D550K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE40ES6565U-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-UE40D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D6500VS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-UE40D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D8000YS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-460UT-B-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6535-UE46ES6535U-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-01-XTDVBEUE-ENG-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Anglais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-19-XTDVBEUE-DAN-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Danemark-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-2012_Skype_FIN-0424.pdf-Finlande-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-2012_Skype_NOR-0424.pdf-E-Manual-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-2012_Skype_SWE-0424.pdf-Suede-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-21-XTDVBEUE-FIN-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Finlande-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-Danemark-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES7005-UE46ES7005U-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-UE46D7000WXZF-serie-7

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-51-Smart-3D-Plasma-E555-PS51E555D1K-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-51-Smart-3D-Plasma-E8005-PS51E8005GU-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-55-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6805-UE55ES6805U-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-700TSn-2-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-708SC-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-740SC-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-821SC-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-910MP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-940SC-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-941SC-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Affichage-Dynamique-Murs-d-images-55-Moniteur-LED-UD55A-mur-d-image-bord-fin-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Appareil-photo-numerique-Samsung-ES90-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Appareils-menagers-La-Plaque-Chauffante-Pensez-intelligemment-vivez-simplement-GN641FFXD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Appareils-mobiles-Smartphone-Galaxy-S4-I9505-Android-Impression-GT-I9505-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Appareils-mobiles-Smartphone-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-AQ09UGBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-BN68-04109G-00L05-0228.pdf-LED-TV-Serie-6-user-manual-Anglais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camaras-Alta-definicion-Videocamara-HD-F80HMX-F80SP-Espagne-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ES90-14.2MP-Digital-Camera-FIND-A-PRODUCT-SAMSUNG-ES90-English-Anglais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ST66-SAMSUNG-ST66-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camera-et-Camcorder-NX-NX11-Appareil-photo-compact-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camera-et-Camcorder-NX-NX5-Appareil-photo-compact-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camescopes-Photo-Compacts-numeriques-Samsung-SMART-Kompaktkamera-WB800F-SAMSUNG-WB800F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-AT-T-SGH-I547-Samsung-Galaxy-Rugby-Pro-AT-T-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-AT-T-SGH-I577-Samsung-Galaxy-Exhilarate-Android-Smartphone-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-Sprint-SPH-L300-Samsung-Galaxy-Victory-4G-LTE-Sprint-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-Verizon-Wireless-SCH-I405-Samsung-Stratosphere-a-Galaxy-S-phone-Black-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-VIEW-ALL-SPH-M930-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-CLP-367W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cuisson-Four-Four-compact-Twin-30-L-FQV113T002-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-DA68-01829P.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-DA68-01829P.pdf-SEC-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-DA-E550-CN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-E1720NR-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electrom%C3%A9nager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBWQ-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-Cassette-1-voie-MH026FSEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-Cassette-4-voies-MH035FMEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH020FNEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH026FWEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH035FEEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH035FJEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH052FJEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH052FWEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH060FXEA3A-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH068FXEA4-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH18AP2X-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ09UGFN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ12TSBN.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ12UGBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ18FAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ18UGAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV07PSBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09KBBN.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09PSBX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09UGAX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12KBAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12NSBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PSBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PWAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12UGAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12UGAX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18KBAX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18PSBX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18UGAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV24PSBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-Mistral-AQV09PSBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-Mistral-AQV09PSBN-User-Manuals-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-SH24TA6D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Combines-Refrigerateur-Combine-RB29FEJNDWW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Combines-RL34HGMG-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT41MASW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT50QMSW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59NBPN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59PMSW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT63VBPN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Four-Four-compact-Twin-30-L-FQV113T002-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lavage-Lave-Linge-WF70F5E3U4W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-Lave-linge-EcoBubble-12kg-1400tours-WF1124XBC-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF0702NBE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF1702NHWG-YLE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF70F5E3U4W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBSL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-Gril-23L-SILVER-GS89F-1SPGS89F-1SP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-gril-niche-380-mm-23-L-FG87SST-FG87SST-XEF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-mono-23L-SILVER-ME82V-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-CTN431SC0R-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-CTN431SC0S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-Table-induction-2-zones-7-2-KW-CTN364N006-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-Table-induction-4-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN464FB01-CTN464FB01-XEF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXC4H140EE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXDUH112EE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXTJH036EE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXWNH022EE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-Neo-Forte-EHS-Hybride-NH022NHXEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH160PHXEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH200WHXES-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH300WHXES-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NS0351DXEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NS071SDXEA-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-RVXMHF050EA-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Robot-Aspirateur-Robot-2-murs-Virtuel-Noir-SR8895-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Robot-SR8750-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Sans-sac-SC86H0-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Sans-sac-SC8850-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-electromenagers-Cuisinieres-NE595R0ABBB-Cuisiniere-electrique-de-5-9-pi-noir-NE595R0ABBB-AC-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-electromenagers-Cuisinieres-NE595R0ABSR-AC-Cuisiniere-a-convection-de-5-9-pi-acier-inoxydable-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Sechoir-seche-linge-condensation-8kg-SDC3C801-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Belgique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrig%C3%A9rateur-SBS-A-510-L-Inox%20RSH5TERS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-SBS-A-507-L-Blanc-RSA1TWP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-Side-By-Side-RS6178UGDSR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-RSA1DTMG-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electrom-nager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Entro-SPH-m350-SPH-M350-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Exhibit-4G-Android-Smartphone-SGH-T759-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-NEXUS-SC-04D-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/SamsungGalaxyNoteGT-N7000.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/SamsungGalaxySGT-I9000.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-GT-I9100-SINGAPOUR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-III-GT-I9300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-III-Pub-TV.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-II-noir-Open-market-Manuels-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-Plus-blanc-Orange-GT-I9001-manuel.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open%20market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10.1v-P7100-Android-GT-P7100-M16-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-10-1-LTE-SC-01D-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10-1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels-Mode-d-emploi.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-7.0-Plus-SC-02D-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7-0-Wi-Fi-GT-P3110-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-SC-01C-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-orange-Open-market-GT-S5690-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Y-DUOS-GT-S6102-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Y-Pro-Duos-GT-B5512-RUSSE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Y-Pro-GT-B5510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-Champ-Duos-E2652-GT-E2652W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-E1050-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-E1180-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-E2202GT-E2202-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-E2202GT-E2202-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Android-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Gio-S5660-Android-GT-S5660-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Note-N7000-AndroidGT-N7000-Belgique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Pocket-S5300-Android-GT-S5300-Android-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-S4-I9505-Android-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-S-Advance-i9070-Android-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-SIII-4G-i9305-AndroidGT-I9305-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-S-II-Plus-I9105-Android-GT-I9105P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-S-Plus-i9001-Android-GT-I9001-M8-Belgique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Y-S5360-AndroidGT-S5360-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-GT-B5510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Wave-Y-S5380-Bada-GT-S5380D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-I9250-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-N8000-CN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-P5110-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-S5830_UM_Orange_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110825_Screen-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Home-Appliance-Side-by-Side-RSA1STMG-Arabe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Loader-Top-Load-Washing-Machine-WA10W9-Singapour-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Mounted-Fridge-Freezer-SR365TSS-Nouvelle-Zelande-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-I9300-GT-I9300-Afrique-du-Nord-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-et-imprimantes-multifonctions-Laser-couleur-CLP-365W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-et-imprimantes-multifonctions-Laser-monochrome-ML-2955ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-et-imprimantes-multifonctions-Multifonctions-couleurCLX-9251NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Imprimantes-laser-monochromes-multifonctions-43-ppm-A4-imprimante-laser-multifonction-noir-et-blanc-SCX-6545N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Imprimantes-laser-monochromes-multifonctions-52-ppm-A4-imprimante-laser-noir-et-blanc-ML-5510ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-laser-couleur-multifonctions-A3-35-ppm-A3-imprimante-laser-multifonction-couleur-CLX-9352NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-laser-couleur-multifonctions-A3-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-laser-monochromes-multifonctions-43-ppm-A4-imprimante-laser-multifonction-noir-et-blanc-SCX-6545NX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Copieurs-A3-Multifonctions-CLX-9201NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Copieurs-A4-A3-Copieur-monochrome-SCX-6555N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Imprimantes-Laser-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-680ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Imprimantes-Laser-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-775ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Imprimantes-Laser-Monochrome-ML-6510ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Multifonctions-Laser-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-4705ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatica-LCD-2043SW-Portugues-Portugais-Bresil-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique%20Multifonction-Monochrome-24ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4824FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique%20Ordinateur-Portable-12-5-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B2B-NP400B2B-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-CE117PPT-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-320-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-32-32ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-770ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-360-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-365-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-620ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-775ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-16ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1630-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-16ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1660-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-18ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1865-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-18ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1865W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-24ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-2580N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2160-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2545-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-3710ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-3750ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-4510ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-Monochrome-SL-M2825ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-ML-1674-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2540R-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-ML-6510ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimantes-Photos-SPP-2040-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Inkjet-Imprimante-jet-d-encre-CJX-1050W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD%20770TFT-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-151P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-152B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-170T-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-191T-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-226BW-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-226BW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-22-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T22A300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-23-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-S23A350H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-23-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T23A350-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-24-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T24A350-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-27-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T27A300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-460DR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-B1930N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-BX2231-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-BX2240W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C24B550U-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C27B750X-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-P2470HD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19B350N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19C200NW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19C450MR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-InformatiqueMoniteur-LCD-S19C450MW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22A300H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22B150N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22C300H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24A650D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24A650S-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B300BL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B350H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B750V-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B970D-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27C650D-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T22B300-T22B300EW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T23A750-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T24B300-T24B300EW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T27B750EW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteurs-moniteur-LCD-32-et-plus-ME40B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3185FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-3170FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-3175FN-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-3175FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-6200FX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9201NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9301NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Copieur-couleur-CLX-9350ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Multifonction-A3-A4-couleur-CLX-9352NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Multifonction-Couleur-A4-CLX-8650ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Multifonction-couleur-CLX-4195FW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Multifonction-couleur-CLX-6260ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-16ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-3205-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-16ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-3205W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-19ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-20ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4521F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-33ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-5835FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Copieur-monochrome-SCX-6555N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Fax-monochrome-SF-760P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-3405W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-4833FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-Monochrome-SL-M2875FD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SL-M2875FW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Mutifonction-Monochrome-SL-M2875ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-3200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-4100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-4824FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-4828FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-5637FR-SCX-5637FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-5737FW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8240NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5100P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-6900-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP500A2D-S02FR-2-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie%209-900X1A-NP900X1A-A01FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1A-3G-XE700T1A-H01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1AXE-700T1A-A02FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-12-1-Serie-5-Chromebook-XE500C21-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U3B-NP530U3B-A02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3Serie-9-900X3A-NP900X3A-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U4B-NP530U4B-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z3A-NP700Z3A-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-2-Gamme-Professionnelle-200A5B-NP200B5B-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-S04FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5ANP-300E5A-S06FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5-ANP300E5A-S08FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300V5A-NP300V5A-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B5B-NP400B5B-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-RC-RC530-NP-RC530-S03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S06FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S07FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S08FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-7-Gamer-700G7A-NP700G7A-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-RC-RC730-NP-RC730-S05FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-300V3A-NP300V3A-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-ATIV-Smart-PC-Pro-XE700T1C-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X3C-NP900X3C-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S05FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S0CFR.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S0GFR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF2FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF5FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-S04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-S08FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T05FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T06FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AH-NP300E7A-S04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AH-NP300E7A-S0DFR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AI-NP300E7A-A04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300V3AH-NP300V3A-S02FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-T01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S07FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S0BFR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-NP350V5C-S03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP370R5E-S04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP400B5BI-NP400B5B-AG3FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP400B5B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-A05FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A01FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A06FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP550P5C-NP550P5C-T04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S03FR.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5C-NP700Z5C-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7CH-NP700Z7C-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7C-NP700Z7C-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X1B-NP900X1B-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X3C-NP900X3C-A03FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X3D-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4B-NP900X4B-A01FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-A02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-NP900X4D-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-P500NP-P500-FA01DE-Open-market-GT-C3300K-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-Q320E-NP-Q320-AS02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-Q35-NP-Q35T007-SEF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R510%20NP-R510-XA02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R530E-NP-R530-JT50FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610NP-R610-AS03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS05FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS08FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R620E-NP-R620-FS01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R620E-NP-R620-JS02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R710-NP-R710-ASS1FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R719NP-R719-XA01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R720E-NP-R720-JS03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT07FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT08FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT0BFR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730C-NP-R730-JB03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730-NP-R730-JA05FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RV510I-NP-RV510-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-France-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NQ20-NQ20RP3GH8-SEF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-QX510-NP-QX510-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R590-Crystal-NP-R590-JS01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R730-Red-Gloss-NP-R730-JS01FRManuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Samsung-Chromebook-XE303C12-A02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-A02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-S0AFR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5C-NP300E5C-T02FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7ANP300E7A-A02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0BFR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0CFR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-305E5A-NP305E5A-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-NP370R5E-A02FR-NP370R5E-A02FR-Logiciels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-4-NP400B2B-A03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T03FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X3C-A05FR-NP900X3C-A05FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X3D-A04FR.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X3D-A05FR-NP900X3D-A05FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X4D-A03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV510-NP-RV510-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV515-NP-RV515-S04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-SF310-NP-SF310-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500C21-XE500C21-AZ2FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-H02FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-XE500T1C-A04FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE700T1A-XE700T1A-HF1FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Solutions-d-impression-Multifonctions-laser-Multifonction-couleur-CLX-3300-Version-imprimable-CLX-3300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-N150Plus-NP-N150P-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-N150Plus-NP-N150P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NC110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-N140-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-NC10-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-NC110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-IT-producten-Imprimantes-laser-monochromes-35-ppm-A4-imprimante-laser-noir-et-blanc-ML-3710D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-IT-producten-Ordinateurs-portables-Samsung-Series-9-NP900X3C-A01-NP900X3C-A01BE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Kit-Pieton-Bluetooth-HM1200-Noir-HM1200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LA46C550J1F-CN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-lcd_business_q2.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE19C350-LE19C350D1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE22C452C4H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE26B450-LE26B450C4W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32A466-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32A568-LE32A568P3M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32B450C4W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32D460C9H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE37A466-LE37A466C2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE40A577P2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE40B551A6W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE46C630-LE46C630K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE52A676-LE52A676A1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-Player-50-Blanc-8Go-YP-G50CW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Livres-blancs.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Livres-blancs-Technologie-ReCP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-M_YUKON_2K_WD175ARYKSU_DC68-02631L-05-120810.pdf-SEC-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ME40A-TP40-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ME46A-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ME65B-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ML-2160-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Feature-Phone-GT-E1175T-Anglais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Others-HM3700-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Music-GT-S6010-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Nexus-GT-I9250-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Samsung-GALAXY-S-III-GALAXY-S3-GT-I9300-Singapour-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Smart-Phone-GT-I9505-Suisse-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Tablet-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobilite-Smartphone-Samsung-Galaxy-S4-Impression-GT-I9505-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobilite-Telephone-a-fonction-Rugby-II-de-Samsung-SGH-a847M-SGH-A847M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobilite-Telephone-Intelligent-Galaxy-Q-de-Samsung-SGH-T589R-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Moniteur-grande-taille-Ecrans-grand-format-UD55A-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Monitors-2493HM-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NC190-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-T01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP300E5ZI-NP300E5Z-A09MA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP300V5AH-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP530U3C-A01ES-NP530U3C-A01ES-Espagnol-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-pascal_owners_manual.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-OFFICE-Coree-NT-RF711NT-RF711-PS02G-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-LCD-LED-S22C200BW-Hong-Kong-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-Mono-Multi-function-SCX-3405FW-Hong-Kong-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-couleur-CLX-3305FW-Canada-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3405FW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3405W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-4727FD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope%20-Appareils-photo-Gamme-Compact-14-MP-Ecran-LCD-Tactile-8.9-cm-3-5-Compact-Performant-WB210-SAMSUNG-WB210-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Appareils-photo-Gamme-Compact-Samsung-ST66-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-12-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-essentiel-Samsung-ES80-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-2MP-Ecran-3-hVGA-Smart-Camera-Samsung-WB150F-SAMSUNG-WB150F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-Ecran-avant-LCD-1-5-compact-double-ecran-Samsung-PL120-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-MP-Ecran-LCD-3-compact-style-Samsung-PL210-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-16-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-Style-Samsung-ST77s.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-16-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-Style-Samsung-ST90-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-16-MP-Ecran-LCD-3-Compact-Performant-WB700-SAMSUNG-WB700-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-16-MP-Ecran-pivotant-LCD-Tactile-3-compact-Samsung-MultiView-MV800-SAMSUNG-MV800-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Afrique-du-Nord-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Appareil-photo-numerique-SAMSUNG-WB150F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Appareil-photo-numerique-SMART-DV300F-SAMSUNG-DV300F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ES60-SAMSUNG-ES60.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-NV24HD-SAMSUNG-NV24-HD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-DV90-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL101-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL170-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL210-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL70-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-PL90-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-S850-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-Camera-DV150F-SAMSUNG-DV150F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-Camera-EX2F-SAMSUNG-EX2F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-CAMERA-ST200F-SAMSUNG-ST200F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-Camera-WB250F-SAMSUNG-WB250F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-Smart-Camera-WB850F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-ST560-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-ST65-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-ST95-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-WB100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-WB210-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-WB560-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ST45-SAMSUNG-ST45-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ST500-SAMSUNG-ST500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Definition-Standard-1-8-MP-Ecran-LCD-2.7-6.86-cm-Camescope-SD-Samsung-F50SMX-F50BP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Definition-Standard-5-MP-Ecran-LCD-2.7-6.86-cm-Camescope-SD-Samsung-F700-SMX-F700BP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-5-MP-Ecran-LCD-Tactile-rotatif-3-7-2-cm-Camescope-HD-Samsung-Q10HMX-Q10PP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-Camera-HD-HMX-Q200BP-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-F800BP-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-F80BP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-F90WP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-QF20BP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-Samsung-SMART-Camcorder-QF30-HMX-QF30WP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Appareil-photo-numerique-NX-NX-210-Afrique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-NX10-3-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-NX10-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-NX5-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Systeme-NX-NX100-14-6-MP-Ecran-7-6cm-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Systeme-NX-NX11-14-6-MP-Ecran-7-6cm-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-periph%C3%A9riques-Mini-ordinateur-portable-N102-NP-N102-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Couleur-Laser-CLP-680ND-Colour-Laser-Printer-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Couleur-Laser-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-620ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-LCD-Moniteur-LED-3D-serie-9-S27A950D-de-27-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Mono-Laser-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-ML-1865W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Mono-Laser-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-ML-2165W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Mono-Laser-Imprimante-multifunction-laser-ML-3750ND-ML-3750ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300E5V-NP300E5V-A01MA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300E5V-NP300E5V-A08MA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300V5AH-NP300V5A-S03MA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300V5AI-NP300V5A-A03MA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300V5A-S0CZA-Superbe-encadrement-ultrafin-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP530U3BI-NP530U3B-A01ZA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP530U4C-de-la-serie-5-NP530U4C-A03ZA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP530U4C-S04ZA-serie-5-de-Samsung-NP530U4C-S04ZA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-Ordinateur-portable-serie-9-NP900X3C-A02ZA-de-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-Series-5-XE500T1C-XE500T1C-H01ZA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-Series-9-NP900X3C-Notebook-NP900X3C-A03ZA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-XE700T1A-A01ZA-The-Freedom-of-true-mob.-comp.-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Presentation-du-Samsung-GALAXY-S-4-Video.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Printers-Multifunction-Mono-Laser-Printer-ML-5010ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS42C450-PS42C450B1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS50A566-PS50A566S2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS50C450-PS50C450B1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS50C535-PS50C535C1W-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS51D490A1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS51E530-ZF-PLASMA-51-FULL-HD%20-PS51E530A3W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RE-C21VMS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Refrigerators-26-CU-FT-FRENCH-DOOR-REFRIGERATOR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RR92HAWW-Refrigerateur-une-porte-Monochrome-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RV511-NP-RV511-A06MA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-S23A550H-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SCH-W999-CN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SCX-3200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SCX-4x28-Series-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SGH-D500-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SHV-E210S-S-III-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SHV-E300L-Coree-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SHW-M220L-Coree-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-S-II-HDSHV-E120S-Coree-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SNE-60K_UM_Embedded_KOR_100526-SEC-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Sprzet-komputerowy-i-Drukarki-Notebooki-NP-R710-AS04PL-Pologne-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-Graveur-DVD-Slim-External-8X-DVD-Writer-SE-208AB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-Basic-Kit-64-GoMZ-7PC064B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-MZ-7TD120-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-SSD-840-Pro-128Go-MZ-7PD128-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-SSD-840-Pro-256Go-MZ-7PD256-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-SSD-840-Pro-512GoMZ-7PD512-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-T%C3%A9l%C3%A9phone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-T22B300EW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-T240-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-T260-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Table-induction-3-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN463NC01-CTN463NC01-XEF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-GT-C3310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-Player-mini-2GT-C3310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-S5220GT-S5220-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Galaxy-Camera-Samsung-GALAXY-Camera-EK-GC100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-C3750.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1130-B.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1151-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1170-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E2220.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E2550D.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5230-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5610-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5620.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-B3310bleu-Open-market-GT-B3310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-B5722-noir-Open-marketGT-B5722-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Blue-Earth-bleu-Open-market-GT-S7550-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C3050-noir-Virgin-Mobile-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C3520-GT-C3520-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C520-Hello-Kitty-Open-marketS-GH-C520-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Chat-335-gris-Open-market-GT-S3350-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Corby-Pro-rouge-Open-market-GT-B5310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1050-noir-Open-market-GT-E1050-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1150-rouge-Open-market-GT-E1150-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1310-NRJ-Mobile-GT-E1310B.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E2330-noir-Open-market-GT-E2330B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E250-Open-market-SGH-E250-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E2530-Open-market-GT-E2530-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-F250-Open-market-SGH-F250-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-G600-Open-market-SGH-G600-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J700-SGH-J700G-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J770-Open-market-SGH-J770-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Jetnoir-Open-market-GT-S8000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-5-noir-Open-market-GT-S5560-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-City-blanc-Orange-GT-S5260P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Light-noir-Open-market-GT-C3510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-mini-noir-Open-market-GT-C3300K-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Pixon-noir-Open-market-GT-M8800-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Star-2-noir-Open-market-GT-S5620-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Star-noir-Open-market-GT-S5600-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Style-Open-market-SGH-F480-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Ultra-rouge-open-market-GT-S8300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3100-gris-Open-market-GT-S3100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3500-noir-Open-market-GT-S3500-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5150-gold-Open-market-GT-S5150-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5233W-GT-S5233W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Solid-B2100-rouge-Open-market-GT-B2100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-C180-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E570-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E590-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E840-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-F480G.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-N620-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-R200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-S730-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-U100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-Z360-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Mobiles-Style-Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Oreillette-bluetooth-Kit-Mains-Libres-Bluetooth-HF1000-BHF1000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Oreillette-bluetooth-Kit-Pieton-Bluetooth-HM1700-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-Ace-Plus-GT-S7500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-SIII-mini-GT-I8190-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GALAXY-Y-ProGT-B5510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-B5510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I5800-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I8190-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9000-RW8-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9001-M8-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9003-RM4-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Phone-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-N7100-Afrique-du-nord-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-N7100-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5230-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5369-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5380-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5570-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5750E-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-3-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-C6625-gris-Open-market-GT-C6625-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-550-noir-Open-market-GT-I5500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-GALAXY-Camera%20EK-GC100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Express-GT-I8730-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Nexus-noir-Open-market-GT-I9250-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-blanc-SFR-GT-N7000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-GT-N7000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-noir-SFRGT-N7000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-S4GT-I9505-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-S-IIIGT-I9300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-GT-S5690-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-GT-S5690-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-I9500-GT-I9500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-S6312-GT-S6312-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-marketGT-S5330-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Wave-723-gris-Open-marketGT-S7230E-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-SGH-I320-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Galaxy-Tab-GT-P1000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P3100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P3110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-3-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P6800-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7300-M16-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7500-M32-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7510-M16-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7.0-Wi-FiGT-P3110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablettes-Tablettes-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablettes-Tablettes-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-Wi-Fi-Version-imprimable-GT-P3110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Telephone-coulissant-Samsung-S5200-bleu-SFRGT-S5200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephones-Cellulaires-telephones-intelligents-Samsung-Galaxy-Discover-Version-imprimable-SGH-S730M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV%20Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A465C1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV%20Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV%20Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A676-PS50A676T1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-LCD-Series-5-550-32inch-LE32D550-LE32D550K1W-Belgique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid%C3%A9o-Video-projecteur-SP-P310ME-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-32-UE32D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6500VS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED%20TV-UE40D6200TS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D6300WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D6300SS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D7000LS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D6200TS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D6500VS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D8000YS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D550WXZF-serie-5-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D550C1W.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D550WXZF-serie-5-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D550C1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D8000FS-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE55D6200TS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6530WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D6530WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D7000LS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D7000LS-User-Manuals-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D8000YS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-60-UE60D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE60D8000YS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-64-PS64D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS64D8000FS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE40C750-LE40C750R2W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LED-Smart-TV-LED-3D-UA65ES8000R-serie-8-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LED-UA60D8000YR-Series-8-Smart-3D-LED-TV-UA60D8000YR-Afrique-Fr.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS43D490A1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C490-PS50C490B3W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C6970-PS50C6970YS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C7000YW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS59D6900DS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS64E8000-ZF-PLASMA-64-SMART-INTERACTION-3DPS64E8000GS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6500VQ-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6510WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32ES6100W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3D-UE32ES6300S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40C7700WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6570WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6750WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D8000YQ-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40EH6030W-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A437T2D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6100W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6300S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6560S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6710S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3DUE40ES7000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3DUE40ES8000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40F6500-TV-LED-40-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE40F6500SS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40F7000-TV-LED-40-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE40F7000SL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40F8000-TV-LED-46-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE40F8000SL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6200TS-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6500VH-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6570WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6750WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46EH6030W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6540S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6560S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6570S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3DUE46ES6710S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46F6510-TV-LED-46-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE46F6510SS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46F8000-TV-LED-46-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE46F8000SL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6100W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6900S-ZF-Slim-LED-50-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C7700-UE55C7700WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C8700-UE55C8790XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C8700XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6100W-AQV09PSBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6530S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6540S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES7000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55F8000-TV-LED-55-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE55F8000SL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE65ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-65-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE65ES8000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE65F6400-TV-LED-65-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE65F6400AW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Ampli-Tuner-AV-HW-E551-ZF-Barre-de-son-Format-46-Convertible-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-DVD-SH877-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-DVD-SH893-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-SH897-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D5550WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-3DHT-D5550-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D6750WWXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-C6930W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E4550-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E5200-ZF-Home-Cinema-2.1-Blu-Ray-3D-Bluetooth-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E8200-ZF-Barre-de-son-Blu-Ray-3D-Bluetooth-HT-E8200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-ES4200-ZFHT-ES4200-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-F6550W-ZF-Home-Cinema-5.1-Blu-Ray-3D-Smart-Hub-HT-F6550W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D5000WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-3DHT-D5000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Home-cinema-DVD-5.1-HT-D350WXZF-serie-3HT-D350-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-C5530-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-D4200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-C5300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-E5300-ZF-Lecteur-Blu-ray-Youtube-AllShare-BD-E5300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-E8300-ZF-Enregistreur-Blu-Ray-320-Go-SMART-HUB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-ES6000-ZF-Lecteur-Blu-Ray-3D-SMART%20HUB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-F8500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-F8900-ZF-Lecteur-Blu-ray-3D-avec-disque-dur-Double-Tuner-Wi-Fi-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-BD-P1600A-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P2500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P4600-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-Lecteur-blu-ray-BD-D6900WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3DBD-D6900-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-DVD-DVD-D530WXZF-serie-5-DVD-D530-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Baladeur-MP3-Clip-F3-Noir-2GoYP-F3QB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi%203.6-Noir-8GoYP-GS1CB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4.0-Blanc-8GoYP-G1CW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-5.0-Blanc-8G-YP-G70CW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-P3YP-P3JCB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-R-mix-YP-R1JCP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-S2-YP-S2QB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Samsung-Q3YP-Q3CB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YH-820MW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GI1CW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GI1EW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GS1CW-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-Z5FQW-ELS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D430DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D470DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-MM-D470D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-C330D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-E330D-Micro-chaine-DVD-DivX-ARC-AUX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-E430D-Micro-chaine-DVD-DivX-Double-Dock-USB-Bluetooth-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-ZB7-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-ZB7-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-460DR-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-46-Moniteur-LED-UE46A-mur-d-images-bord-fin-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-55-Moniteur-LED-UD55A-mur-d-image-bord-fin-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-55-Moniteur-LED-UD55A-mur-d-image-bord-fin-UD55A-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME32B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME40B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME46B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME75B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-NL22B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-SUR40-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TC220W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TS190W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Televiseurs-TV-2013-SMART-LED-TV-46-UE46F7000-Version-imprimable-UE46F7000SL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-Cathodique-CW29Z504N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-Cathodique-WS32V54N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD%20-LE22B450-LE22B450C4W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-32-LE32D550WXZF-serie-5-HD-TV-LCD-TV-LE32D550K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE19B450C4H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22A455C1D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22B650-LE22B650T6W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C350-LE22C350D1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C430C4W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22D450G1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE23R86BD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26A456C2D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26A466-LE26A466C2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26B350F1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450E1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450-LE26C450E1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C452C4H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C457C6H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A436T1D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A437T2D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A456-LE32A456C2D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A465-LE32A465C1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A577P2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A676-LE32A676A1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B350F1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B651-LE32B651T3P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C350D1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450E1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450-LE32C450E1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C550-LE32C550J1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C630-LE32C630K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D403E2W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D450G1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32R86BD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32S86BD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32T51B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A457C1D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A568-LE37A568P3M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A626-LE37A626A3M-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A676-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37B530-LE37B530P7W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37B653T5P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37C530F1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37C530-LE37C530F1W.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A457C1D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A466-LE40A466C2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A536T1F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A556P1F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A566P1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A568-LE40A568P3M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A626-LE40A626A3M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A676-LE40A676A1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A856-LE40A856S1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B530P7W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B620T2WXXC-LE40B620R3W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651-LE40B651T3W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651T3P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C530-LE40C530F1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C630-LE40C630K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D503F7W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D550K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40R86BD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A568-LE46A568P3M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A856-LE46A856S1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46B651-LE46B651T3W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C530-LE46C530F1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C650-LE46C650L1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46D550K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-22-UE22D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE22D5000NW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-22-UE22ES5400WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-27-UE27D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE27D5000NW-2-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE32D5000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D5700RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-40-UE40D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE40D5000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-46-UE46D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D5000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG32EA590LS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG40EA590LS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-LE40A796-LE40A796R2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE19C4000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22C4010PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5000NH-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5010NW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22ES5000-ZF-Slim-LED-22-SMART-TV-UE22ES5000W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22ES5410-ZF-Slim-LED-22-SMART-TVUE22ES5410W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22F5000-TV-LED-22-Full-HD-UE22F5000AW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26C4000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26D4003BW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000PH-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000-UE32C4000PW-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C5100-UE32C5100QF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C6000-UE32C6000RW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C6700-UE32C6700US-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C8700XS-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D4003BW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D5720RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH4000-ZF-LED-32-HD-TV-UE32EH4000W-Manuals-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH4000-ZF-LED-32-HD-TV-UE32EH4000W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5000-ZF-LED-32-FULL-HD-UE32EH5000W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5300W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-UE32ES5500W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32F4000-TV-LED-32-HDTV-UE32F4000AW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32F5300-TV-LED-32-Full-HD-Smart-TV-UE32F5300AW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37B6000VW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37C6000-UE37C6000RW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37D5000ZF-UE37D5000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE39EH5003W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B6000-UE40B6000VW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B7000-UE40B7000WW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C6000RH-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C6900VS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5003BW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5720RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40EH5300W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40ES5700S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B7020WW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B8000WW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C5100QW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6000-UE46C6000RW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6710-UE46C6710US-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46EH5300W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TVUE46ES5500W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46F5500-TV-LED-46-Full-HD-Smart-TV-UE46F5500AW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE55C6000-UE55C6000RW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE55C6700-UE55C6700US-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE60EH6000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-43-PS43D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-PDP-TVPS43D450A2W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42A426-PS42A426C1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42A456-PS42A456P2D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42C430-PS42C430A1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42C96HD-PS-42C96HD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS43E450-ZF-PLASMA-43-HD-TV-PS43E450A1W-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS43F4500-TV-Plasma-43-HD-TV-PS43F4500AW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A456-PS50A456P2D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A466-PS50A466P2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B550-PS50B550T4W-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B850-PS50B850Y1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C530-PS50C530C1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50Q96HD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS51E450-ZF-PLASMA-51-HD-TVPS51E450A1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS58B680-PS58B680T6W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS59D530A5W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS63B680-PS63B680T6W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E650-ZF-Double-Dock-Bluetooth-3.0-USB-AUXDA-E650-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E750-ZF-Double-Dock-Pre-ampli-a-lampes-Bluetooth-3.0-USB-AUX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-HW-F450-ZF-Barre-de-son-2.1-Bluetooth-SoundShare-HW-F450-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E750-Afrique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu-ray-HT-E3550-English-Anglais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-3D-TV-TV-UN50ES6350F-Coree-du-Sud-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-LED-UE40B7000WW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-PDP-2012-PS43E450A1R-43-inch-HD-Ready-Plasma-TV-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED-UE32D5000-UE32D5000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED-UE40D5000-UE40D5000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED-UE40D5700-UE40D5700RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TVs-LED-TV-UN55ES8000F-55-Class-54.6-Diag-LED-8000-Series-Smart-TV-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Video-3D-Televiseur-DEL-de-75-po-et-de-serie-7100-2013-UN75F7100AF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UA32ES5500-UA32ES5500R-CN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UA40ES5500-UA40ES5500R-Chine-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UD22B-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE19D4003BW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE26EH4500-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4500W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE32D6530WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE32EH4003W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE37C5100QW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40B6050-UE40B6050VW-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40C6700-UE40C6700US-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40D6510WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-UE40ES5500W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE40ES7000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE40ES8000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46C6805-UE46C6805US-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46C8700XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46D5720RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46D6530WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46S870XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE55C8700-UE55C8790XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES8000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-VC331LLDC6S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-VC331LLMA6S-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-VC-UBL916-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Video-tutorielle-4G-Video.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-723-gris-Open-market-GT-S7230E-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-WEP480-CN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09YWAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ZS31FASAB1S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/SGH-F490.htm

/SAMSUNG/T23A550T23A550.htm

/SAMSUNG/UE40D6500ZFUE40D6500VS.htm

/SAMSUNG/UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES8000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES8000S-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/UE60ES6100WXZF-UE60ES6100W-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Wave575GT-S5750E.htm

/SAMSUNG/WaveIIGT-S8530.htm

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 11-Jun-2013 07:39  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-IT-producten..> 11-Jun-2013 07:39  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 11-Jun-2013 07:39  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jun-2013 07:38  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 11-Jun-2013 07:38  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 11-Jun-2013 07:38  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Peripherique..> 11-Jun-2013 07:37  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jun-2013 07:37  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 11-Jun-2013 07:35  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jun-2013 07:35  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jun-2013 07:35  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 11-Jun-2013 07:35  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 11-Jun-2013 06:53  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jun-2013 06:53  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-Wirele..> 11-Jun-2013 06:53  1.5M 

Samsung-ME40A-TP40-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-UA40ES5500-UA40ES5500R-Chine-Manuels

Samsung-700TSn-2-SSD-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-ME46A-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-NC190-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-320TSN-3D-SSD-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P5110-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-E1720NR-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels

Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels

Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels

SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels

Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels

Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels

Samsung-910MP-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels

Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels

Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels

Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels

Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels

Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels

Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels

Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels

Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels

Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels

Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels

Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels

Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels

Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel

Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels

Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels

Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels

Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels

Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels

Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels

Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels

Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels

Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels

Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels

Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels

Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels

Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels

17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels

40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels

CLX-3185FW Manuels

Galaxy Ace GT-S5830

Galaxy S II GT-I9100

Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16

Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16

Galaxy YGT-S5360

LE32C350 LE32C350D1W

LE40C630 LE40C630K1W

MM-C330D

MM-D330D

Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels

N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels

N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels

RSH5UEPN

SGH-F490

Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000

Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000

Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels

T23A550 T23A550

UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS

UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels

Wave 575 GT-S5750E

Wave II GT-S8530

16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung

16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung

samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels

Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%20Photo-Camescope-Compact-Appareil-photo-numerique-Samsung-ST66-SAMSUNG-ST66-Afrique-Manuels.htm

www.samsung.com Mode d'emploi GT-P52102 À propos de ce mode d’emploi Cet appareil vous permet de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et la technologie de Samsung. Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et les caractéristiques de votre appareil. • Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi, afin de pouvoir l’utiliser correctement et en toute sécurité. • Les descriptions sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil. • Les images et les captures d’écran peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit. • Le contenu de ce mode d'emploi peut différer par rapport au produit ou à votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de ce mode d’emploi, connectez-vous sur le site Web de Samsung : www.samsung.com. • Les contenus de qualité élevée nécessitant une forte utilisation du processeur et de la RAM peuvent avoir une incidence sur les performances générales de l’appareil. Les applications en rapport avec ces contenus peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement selon les caractéristiques de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. • Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier selon l’appareil, votre version logicielle ou votre opérateur. • Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des éditeurs de logiciels autres que Samsung. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de fonctionnement de l’appareil ou de ses applications. • Les logiciels, sons, fonds d’écran, images ainsi que les autres contenus multimédia fourni(e)s avec cet appareil sont concédé(e)s sous licence et leur usage est soumis à une utilisation limitée. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ces éléments à des fins commerciales ou autres constituent une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Les utilisateurs sont entièrement responsables de toute utilisation illégale d’un contenu multimédia.À propos de ce mode d’emploi 3 • Les applications par défaut fournies avec l’appareil peuvent être modifiées ou ne plus être disponibles sans préavis. Si vous avez des questions à propos d’une application fournie avec l’appareil, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Pour les applications installées par l’utilisateur, contactez les opérateurs. • Toute modification du système d’exploitation ou installation de logiciels non officiels peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements et corrompre vos données. Ces actions constituent des violations de l’accord de licence Samsung et annuleront votre garantie. Icônes Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2013 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document, sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics.À propos de ce mode d’emploi 4 Marques • SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. • Les logos Android, Google ™, Google Maps ™, Google Mail ™, YouTube ™, Google Play ™ Store et Google Talk ™ sont des marques de Google, Inc. • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Wi-Fi ®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup ™, Wi-Fi Direct ™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. DivX®, DivX Certified® et les logos associés sont des marques commerciales de Rovi Corporation ou de ses filiales, et sont utilisés sous licence. À PROPOS DES VIDÉOS DIVX DivX® est un format vidéo numérique créé par DivX, LLC, filiale de Rovi Corporation. Ce produit est un appareil DivX Certified® qui a passé des tests rigoureux afin de vérifier qu’il pouvait lire des vidéos DivX. Visitez le site www.divx.com pour plus d’informations et pour obtenir des outils logiciels capables de convertir vos fichiers au format DivX. À PROPOS DE DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND Cet appareil DivX Certified® doit être enregistré pour pouvoir lire des films DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD ou vidéo à la demande). Pour obtenir votre code d’enregistrement, repérez la section DivX VOD dans le menu de configuration de votre appareil. Rendez-vous ensuite sur le site vod.divx.com pour plus d’informations sur les modalités d’enregistrement. Cet appareil DivX Certified® peut lire des vidéos DivX® d’une résolution allant jusqu’à 720 p HD, y compris du contenu Premium. Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Digital Plus et le symbole du double D sont des marques commerciales de Dolby Laboratories.5 Table des matières Démarrage 7 Présentation de l’appareil 8 Touches 9 Contenu du coffret 10 Charger la batterie 12 Insérer une carte mémoire 14 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil 14 Manipuler l’appareil 15 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil 15 Régler le volume 15 Activer le profil Discret Fonctions de base 16 Icônes d’informations 17 Utiliser l’écran tactile 20 Pivoter l’écran 20 Notifications 21 Écran d’accueil 24 Utiliser des applications 24 Liste des applications 26 Aide 26 Saisir du texte 28 Établir une connexion au réseau Wi-Fi 29 Créer un compte 30 Transférer des fichiers 31 Protéger l’appareil 33 Mettre l’appareil à jour Communication 34 Contacts 38 Email 40 Google Mail 41 Talk 42 Google+ 42 Chat + 43 ChatON Web et réseau 44 Internet 45 Chrome 46 Bluetooth 47 Group Play 48 Télécommande intelligente Peel Multimédia 50 Lecteur MP3 51 Appareil photo 57 Galerie 60 Paper Artist 61 Lecteur vidéo 62 YouTube 63 FlipboardTable des matières 6 Paramètres 84 Accéder au menu des paramètres 84 Wi-Fi 85 Bluetooth 85 Utilisation des données 85 Paramètres supplémentaires 86 Mode blocage 86 Profil Voiture 87 Son 87 Affichage 88 Stockage 89 Mode économie d'énergie 89 Batterie 89 Gestionnaire d'applications 89 Services de localisation 90 Écran de verrouillage 91 Sécurité 92 Langue et saisie 94 Cloud 94 Sauvegarder et réinitialiser 94 Ajouter compte 94 Contrôle vocal 95 Accessoire 95 Date et heure 95 Accessibilité 97 À propos de l'appareil 97 Paramètres Google Dépannage Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 64 Play Store 65 Samsung Apps 65 Game Hub 66 Play Livres 66 Play Films 66 Play Musique 67 Music Hub 67 Video Hub 68 Readers Hub 68 Learning Hub Utilitaires 69 Mémo 70 S Planner 72 Polaris Office 75 Dropbox 75 Alarme 76 Horloge mondiale 77 Calculatrice 77 S Voice 78 Google 79 Recherche vocale 79 Mes fichiers 80 Téléchargements Géolocalisation 81 Maps 82 Local 83 Navigation7 Démarrage Présentation de l’appareil Touche Retour Touche Accueil Haut-parleur Capteur de luminosité Touche Menu Connecteur à fonctions multiples Écran tactile Objectif avant Touche Marche/Arrêt Touche de volume Microphone Objectif arrière Témoin lumineux Compartiment pour carte mémoire Haut-parleur Prise audio 3,5 mm Antenne GPS • Ne couvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou un objet. Cela pourrait entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. • N’utilisez pas de protection d’écran. Cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement du capteur. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile.Démarrage 8 Touches Touche Fonction Marche/Arrêt • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pendant plus de 7 secondes pour réinitialiser l’appareil en cas d’erreur fatale, ou s’il ne répond plus ou se bloque. • Appuyer sur cette touche pour verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’appareil. Lorsque l’écran s’éteint, l’appareil passe en mode Verrouillage. Menu • Appuyer sur cette touche pour ouvrir la liste des options disponibles dans l’écran actuel. • Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour lancer l’application de recherche Google. Accueil • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour ouvrir la liste des applications récentes. • Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour lancer l’application S Voice. Retour • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume • Appuyer sur cette touche pour régler le volume de l’appareil.Démarrage 9 Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : • Appareil • Guide de prise en main rapide • Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur. • Les accessoires fournis ont été spécifiquement conçus pour votre appareil et peuvent ne pas fonctionner avec d’autres appareils. • L’aspect et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. • Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Avant tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils sont compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Utilisez exclusivement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Les dysfonctionnements résultant d’une utilisation d’accessoires non homologués ne sont pas couverts par le service de garantie. • La disponibilité de l’ensemble des accessoires dépend entièrement des fabricants. Pour plus d’informations sur la disponibilité des accessoires, consultez le site Web Samsung.Démarrage 10 Charger la batterie Chargez la batterie à l'aide du chargeur avant d'utiliser l'appareil pour la première fois. Vous pouvez également charger l'appareil en le connectant à un ordinateur via le câble USB. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries et des câbles USB homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de la batterie ou endommager l’appareil. • Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, l’appareil émet un signal sonore et affiche un message d’avertissement. • Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, vous ne pouvez pas allumer l’appareil, même si le chargeur est branché. Rechargez la batterie pendant quelques minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil. Charger la batterie avec le chargeur Branchez le câble USB sur l'adaptateur USB, puis la fiche micro-USB sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre appareil. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. • L’appareil peut être utilisé en cours de chargement, mais dans ce cas, le rechargement complet de la batterie risque de prendre plus de temps. • Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil. • Il est possible que l’appareil chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Si la température de la batterie devient trop élevée, le chargement risque de s’interrompre. • Si l’appareil ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung.Démarrage 11 Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez l’appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire, débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant. Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant pas muni d'une touche Marche/Arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise lors du chargement. Vérifier la charge de la batterie Lorsque vous rechargez la batterie et que l’appareil est éteint, les icônes suivantes indiquent l’état du chargement : Chargement en cours Chargement terminé Réduire la consommation d’énergie de la batterie Votre appareil est doté d’options destinées à optimiser l'autonomie de votre batterie. En personnalisant ces options et en désactivant des applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrièreplan, vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil plus longtemps entre deux chargements : • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil, désactivez l'écran tactile en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. • Fermez toutes les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan à l’aide du gestionnaire de tâches. • Désactivez la fonction Bluetooth. • Désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. • Désactivez les applications de synchronisation automatique. • Réduisez la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. • Réduisez la luminosité de l’écran. * Selon le logiciel installé, votre opérateur téléphonique ou votre pays, certaines descriptions de ce mode d'emploi peuvent ne pas correspondre fidèlement à votre téléphone. * Selon votre pays, les illustrations de ce manuel peuvent être différentes de votre téléphone et de ses accessoires. World Wide Web http://www.samsungmobile.com Printed in Korea Code No.:GH68-14139A French. 03/2009. Rev. 1.3 A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut endommager l'audition de l'utilisateur.SGH-U600 Mode d'emploiConsignes de sécurité importantes N'utilisez jamais votre téléphone en conduisant. Garez votre véhicule avant d'utiliser un téléphone en prise directe. Eteignez votre téléphone lorsque vous effectuez le plein de carburant. N'utilisez pas votre téléphone lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une station d'essence ou à proximité de produits combustibles ou chimiques. Eteignez votre téléphone en avion. Les téléphones mobiles peuvent engendrer des interférences. Leur utilisation en avion est interdite et dangereuse. Eteignez votre téléphone à proximité d'équipements médicaux. Les équipements utilisés dans les hôpitaux et les unités de soins sont sensibles aux radiofréquences externes. Respectez la législation ou la réglementation en vigueur. Le non-respect des consignes de sécurité suivantes peut être dangereux ou illégal. Copyright • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. international Bluetooth QD ID: B013219 • JavaTM est une marque ou une marque déposée de Sun Microsystems, Inc. • Picsel et Picsel ViewerTM sont des marques de Picsel Technologies, Inc. • Windows Media Player® est une marque déposée de Microsoft Corporation.1 Interférences Tous les téléphones mobiles peuvent être sujets à des interférences susceptibles d'affecter leurs performances. Réglementations spécifiques Respectez les réglementations spécifiques en vigueur à l'endroit où vous vous trouvez et éteignez toujours votre téléphone lorsque son utilisation est interdite ou lorsqu'il est susceptible de générer des interférences ou d'être une source de danger. Etanchéité Votre téléphone n'est pas étanche. Gardez-le au sec. Utilisation normale Utilisez votre téléphone comme un combiné classique (écouteur plaqué sur l'oreille). Evitez tout contact inutile avec l'antenne lorsque le téléphone est allumé. Appel d'urgence Composez le numéro d'urgence national, puis appuyez sur la touche . Ne laissez pas le téléphone à la portée des enfants en bas âge Conservez le téléphone, ses pièces détachées et ses accessoires hors de portée des enfants. Accessoires et batteries Utilisez uniquement les accessoires agréés par Samsung : batteries, casques et câbles de connexion PC. L'emploi de tout accessoire non homologué pourrait endommager votre téléphone et s'avérer dangereux. Réparation Toute réparation de votre téléphone doit être effectuée par un technicien agréé. Pour plus d'informations sur la sécurité, consultez la section "Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité" à la page 43. • Le téléphone risque d'exploser si vous remplacez la batterie par un modèle inapproprié. • Débarrassez-vous des batteries usagées en respectant les instructions du fabricant.2 À propos de ce mode d'emploi Ce mode d'emploi présente des informations succinctes relatives à l'utilisation de votre téléphone. Différents sigles sont utilisés dans ce mode d'emploi : Signale d'importantes remarques relatives à la sécurité ou aux fonctions du téléphone. → Invite à utiliser les touches de navigation pour sélectionner l'option indiquée. [ ] Désigne une touche du téléphone. Par exemple, [ ] < > Désigne une touche écran dont la fonction est affichée au bas de l'écran du téléphone. Par exemple,

• Appareil photo et caméscope Prenez des photos et enregistrez des vidéos grâce à l'appareil intégré à votre téléphone. Fonctions spéciales du téléphone • Synchronisation avec Windows Media Player Transférez vos fichiers musique vers votre téléphone directement depuis Windows Media Player. • Lecteur MP3 Votre téléphone vous permet d'écouter des fichiers musicaux. Vous pouvez utiliser d'autres fonctions du téléphone pendant la lecture.3 • Retouche d'images Retouchez ou décorez vos photos. • Impression des photos Imprimez vos photos pour immortaliser vos meilleurs moments. • Téléphone sur TV Regardez des photos et des clips vidéo réalisés avec le téléphone sur votre écran de télévision. • Mode hors-ligne Réglez votre téléphone en mode hors-ligne pour désactiver ses fonctions réseau lorsque vous voyagez en avion. • Radio FM Ecoutez vos stations de radio préférées à tout moment et en tout lieu. • Bluetooth Transférez des fichiers multimédias ou des données personnelles et reliez votre téléphone à d'autres appareils via une connexion sans fil Bluetooth. • Visualisation de fichiers Ouvrez des documents de différents formats sur le téléphone, sans les altérer. • Message SOS En cas d'urgence, envoyez un message d'appel à l'aide à votre famille ou à vos amis.4 Tables des matières Contenu de l'emballage 6 Vérifiez qu'il ne manque rien Mise en service 6 Mise en service de votre téléphone Installation et mise en charge du téléphone ...... 6 Mise en marche/arrêt ..................................... 7 Présentation du téléphone............................... 7 Touches et icônes .......................................... 8 Accès aux fonctions....................................... 12 Saisie de texte ............................................. 12 Personnalisation du téléphone ........................ 14 Au-delà des fonctions téléphoniques 16 Fonctions d'appel, appareil photo, caméscope, lecteur MP3, navigateur WAP et autres fonctions spéciales Appels téléphoniques..................................... 16 Appareil photo.............................................. 18 Écouter de la musique ................................... 20 Radio FM ..................................................... 23 Surfer sur le WAP ......................................... 24 Répertoire ................................................... 24 Envoyer des messages .................................. 25 Lire des messages ........................................ 27 Bluetooth .................................................... 28 Fonctions des menus 30 Liste des options des menus Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité 435 Présentation des fonctions Pour accéder aux fonctions, appuyez sur en mode veille. 1 Journal d'appel 1 Contacts récents 2 Appels manqués 3 Appels émis 4 Appels reçus 5 Messages envoyés 6 Messages reçus 7 Tout supprimer 8 Gestionnaire d'appels 2 Répertoire 1 Liste de contacts 2 Ajouter un nouveau contact 3 Groupe 4 Numérotation abrégée 5 Ma carte de visite 6 Numéros personnels 7 Gestion 8 Numéros de service1 3 Lecteur MP3 4 Navigateur 1 Accueil 2 Saisir une URL 4 Navigateur 3 Favoris 4 Pages enregistrées 5 Historique 6 Vider le cache 7 Réglages navigateur 8 Réglages Streaming2 5 Messagerie 1 Créer un message 2 Mes messages 3 Modèles 4 Tout supprimer 5 Paramètres 6 Messages SOS 7 Etat de la mémoire 6 Gestion des fichiers 1 Images 2 Vidéos 3 Musique 4 Sons 5 Autres fichiers 6 Carte mémoire3 7 Etat de la mémoire 7 Calendrier 8 Appareil photo 9 Bluetooth 10 10 Applications 1 Smart search 2 Mémo vocal 3 Radio FM 4 Editeur d'images 5 Vignette 6 JAVA world 7 Fuseaux horaires 8 Calculatrice 9 Convertisseur 10 Minuteur 11 Chronomètre 12 Mémo 13 SIM AT1 11 Réveil 12 Paramètres 1 Heure et date 2 Téléphone 3 Affichage 4 Son 5 Rétroéclairage 6 Assistant d'installation 7 Services réseau 8 Sécurité 9 Réglages de connexion 10 Etat de la mémoire 11 Réinitialiser les paramètres 12 Gestion des clés 1. Uniquement disponible si la fonction est prise en charge par votre carte SIM. 2. Uniquement disponible si la fonction est prise en charge par votre opérateur. 3. Uniquement disponible si une carte mémoire est insérée dans le téléphone.6 Contenu de l'emballage Vérifiez qu'il ne manque rien • Téléphone • Chargeur rapide • Batterie • Mode d'emploi Vous pouvez acquérir différents accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Mise en service Mise en service de votre téléphone Installation et mise en charge du téléphone Les accessoires fournis avec votre téléphone et ceux que vous trouverez chez votre revendeur Samsung peuvent varier selon votre pays ou votre opérateur. Vers une prise secteur 7 Retirer le cache de la batterie Mise en marche/arrêt Présentation du téléphone Vue de face Mise en marche 1. Ouvrez le téléphone. 2. Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée. 3. Si nécessaire, saisissez votre code PIN et appuyez sur . Arrêt 1. Ouvrez le téléphone. 2. Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée. Microphone Écouteur Écran Touche écran gauche Volume Touche appel WAP/ Confirmation Connecteur à fonctions multiples Touches de fonctions spéciales Touches de navigation (Haut/ Bas/Gauche/ Droite) Suppression/ Sortie menu Touche écran droite Touches alphanumériques Marche/arrêtMise en service 8 Vue de dos Touches et icônes Touches Lorsque vous fermez le téléphone, les touches externes sont verrouillées pour empêcher toute utilisation malencontreuse du téléphone par une pression accidentelle. Pour déverrouiller le clavier, appuyez sur [ ]. Touche photo Objectif photo Flash photo Emplacement pour carte mémoire Miroir Maintenez cette touche enfoncée pour allumer ou éteindre le téléphone. En mode veille, permet d'activer ou de désactiver le clavier. Exécutent les fonctions indiquées à la dernière ligne de l'écran. En mode veille, ouvrent directement les menus suivants : • Haut : Mon menu • Gauche/Droite/Bas : vos menus favoris En mode menu, permettent de faire défiler les options.9 En mode veille, lance le navigateur WAP. En mode menu, sélectionne l'option en surbrillance ou confirme votre saisie. Appelle un correspondant ou répond à un appel. En mode veille, affiche les derniers numéros composés, manqués ou reçus. Met fin à la communication. Efface les caractères affichés à l'écran. En mode menu, annule les données saisies et fait revenir l'appareil en veille. Permettent de saisir des chiffres, des lettres et certains caractères spéciaux. En mode veille, maintenez la touche [1] enfoncée pour accéder à votre messagerie vocale. Pour entrer un préfixe international, maintenez la touche [0] enfoncée. Permettent de saisir des caractères spéciaux ou d'utiliser certaines fonctions spéciales. En mode veille, maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée pour activer ou désactiver le mode silencieux. Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée pour insérer une pause entre les chiffres.Mise en service 10 Icônes Les icônes qui s'affichent sur la première ligne de l'écran renseignent sur le statut du téléphone. Ces symboles peuvent varier en fonction de votre pays ou de votre opérateur. Règlent le volume sonore du téléphone. Maintenez cette touche enfoncée pour activer l'appareil photo. En mode photo/caméscope, permet de prendre une photo ou d'enregistrer une vidéo. Puissance du signal Réseau GPRS (2.5G) Connexion au réseau GPRS (2.5G) Transfert de données via un réseau GPRS (2.5G) Réseau EDGE Connexion au réseau EDGE Transfert de données via un réseau EDGE Appel en cours Zone non couverte ou mode horsligne Fonction de message SOS activée Carte mémoire insérée Alarme programmée Navigation sur le WAP Réseau d'itinérance AQV09K&Y@@_Jungfrau_IBIM_F_32437A.indd 1 2011-1-18 14:12:452 Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable dans les pays de l’Union Européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif) Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets professionnels et commerciaux. Promotion d’été rafraichissante Pour échapper à la chaleur des étouffantes journées d'été et des longues nuits sans repos, rien ne vaut le confort d’avoir une maison fraîche. Votre nouveau climatiseur met fin aux chaudes et épuisantes journées d'été et vous permet enfin un repos total. Cet été, combattez la chaleur grâce a votre propre climatiseur. Coût Economique Votre nouveau climatiseur ne fournit pas seulement un refroidissement maximal en été, mais peut aussi s’avérer être une méthode de chauffage efficace en hiver avec les avancées "pompe a chaleur" du système. Le système "Pompe a chaleur" est 3 fois plus profitable, comparé à d'autres appareils de chauffage électrique, ce qui vous permet de réduire davantage les coûts de fonctionnement du climatiseur. Maintenant, grâce a un seul climatiseur, vous pouvez répondre à vos besoins tout au long de l'année. Allure passe-partout Le design élégant et agréable du climatiseur s’harmonise parfaitement à votre espace esthétique et complète votre décoration intérieure. Avec ses couleurs douces et formes aux bords arrondis, le nouveau climatiseur ajoute de la classe a toute pièce. Profitez aussi bien de la fonctionnalité ainsi que de l’esthétique que vous offre votre climatiseur. Fonction La fonction vous permet de définir une température de sommeil confortable tout en économisant de l’énergie et ayant le sommeil hygiénique. UTILISATION INSTALLATION Caractéristiques de votre nouveau climatiseur Sommaire Fonction d'light Cool La fonction de d'light Cool vous permet de conserver la température et l'humidité au niveau le plus confortable. Fonction SPi ( Ioniseur super plasma) La fonction SPi génère de l'hydrogène (H) et de l'oxygène (O2) pour attaquer les contaminants indésirables renfermés dans l'air comme les bactéries, le pollen, et les odeurs. Elle vous permet de mieux respirer, tout comme si vous étiez à proximité d'une chute d'eau, des vagues de l'océan, d'une rivière ou dans les montagnes. Précautions de Sécurité.................................................................3 Vérification avant utilisation.......................................................6 Vérification du nom des pièces.................................................7 Vérification télécommande.........................................................8 Fonction de base...........................................................................10 Réglage de la direction du flux d’air.....................................12 Utilisation de la fonction Turbo..............................................12 Mode ....................................................................13 Régler l'heure courante..............................................................14 Réglage du On/Off timer...........................................................14 Utilisation de la fonction Smart Saver.................................16 Utiliser la fonction SPi ................................................................16 Utilisation de la fonction Auto Clean...................................17 Utiliser la fonction d'light Cool ...............................................17 Utilisation de la fonction Quiet...............................................18 Nettoyage du climatiseur..........................................................19 Entretenir votre climatiseur......................................................21 Dépannage......................................................................................22 Précautions de Sécurité..............................................................24 Choisir l’emplacement d’installation....................................25 Accessoires.......................................................................................28 Fixation de la plaque d’installation.......................................29 Connexion du câble de montage..........................................30 Installation et raccordement du tuyau de montage de l'unité intérieure.............................................................................32 Purge de l’unité interne..............................................................33 Coupure ou prolongation des tuyaux.................................33 Installation et raccordement du tuyau d'évacuation de l'unité intérieure.............................................................................34 Changement de direction du tuyau d’évacuation.........35 Installation et raccordement du tuyau d'évacuation de l'unité extérieur..............................................................................36 Purge des tuyaux raccordés.....................................................36 Réalisation des essais de fuite de gaz..................................39 Fixation en place de l'unité intérieure.................................40 Fixation en place de l'unité extérieure................................40 Vérification finale et essai de fonctionnement................41 Procédure pompe en bas (lors du retrait du produit)..41 Comment faire pour connecter les rallonges de câbles d’alimentation................................................................................42 Installation sous PCB (Optionnel)..........................................43 Ce produit est conforme a la Directive Basse Tension (2006/95/EC) ainsi qu’à la Directive Compatibilité Electromagnétique (2004/108/EEC) de l’Union Européenne. AQV09K&Y@@_Jungfrau_IBIM_F_32437A.indd 2 2011-1-18 14:12:453 FRANÇAIS Précautions de Sécurité Avant d'utiliser votre nouveau climatiseur, veuillez lire attentivement ce manuel afin de vous assurer comment exploiter efficacement et en toute sécurité les nombreuses caractéristiques et fonctions de votre nouvel appareil. Etant donné que le mode d'emploi ci-dessous couvre différents modèles, les caractéristiques de votre climatiseur peuvent différer légèrement de celles décrites dans ce manuel. Pour toutes questions ou information complémentaire, appelez votre centre de contact le plus proche ou consulter en ligne le site www.samsung.com. Symboles et précautions de sécurité importantes AVERTISSEMENT Les risques ou pratiques dangereuses peuvent entraîner des blessures graves ou la mort. ATTENTION Les risques ou pratiques dangereuses peuvent entraîner des blessures corporelles mineures ou des dommages matériels. Suivez les instructions. Débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale. Ne faites jamais cela. Ne PAS démonter. Assurez-vous que la machine soit mise à la terre pour éviter toute électrocution. INSTALLATION AVERTISSEMENT Branchez le cordon d'alimentation dans une prise murale avec les spécifications de puissance du produit et utiliser la prise seulement pour cet appareil. Ne pas utiliser une rallonge.  Ne pas modifier la longueur du cordon d'alimentation et ne pas brancher d’autres appareils sur la même prise murale, car cela peut entraîner un choc électrique ou un incendie.  Ne pas utiliser un transformateur électrique. Cela provoquera une électrocution ou un incendie.  Si la tension / fréquence / l’évaluation du taux actuel est différent, cela peut provoquer un incendie. L'installation de cet appareil doit être effectuée par un technicien qualifié ou une société de service.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique, un incendie, une explosion, des difficultés avec le produit, ou des blessures. Installer un interrupteur et un disjoncteur consacré au climatiseur.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique ou un incendie. Fixer fermement l'unité extérieure pour que la partie électrique de l'unité extérieure ne soit pas exposée.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique ou un incendie. Ne pas installer l’appareil a proximité d’outils chauffants et de substances inflammables. Ne pas installer l’appareil dans un endroit humide, gras ou poussiéreux, dans un endroit exposé aux rayons directs du soleil et de l'eau (gouttes de pluie). Ne pas installer l’appareil près d’un endroit susceptible d’entrainer des fuites de gaz.  Cela provoquera un choc électrique ou un incendie. Ne jamais installer l'unité extérieure sur un mur extérieur élevé oů il pourrait tomber.  Si l'unité extérieure tombe, vous risquez des blessures, la mort ou des dommages matériels. Si vous utilisez un système multiple, l'unité extérieure RJ***ne peut être connectée qu'aux produits européens des séries AQV09Y*/AQV12Y*/AQV18Y*. Cet appareil doit être correctement mis a la terre. Ne reliez pas l'appareil a un tuyau de gaz, une conduite d'eau en plastique ou une ligne téléphonique.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique, un incendie, une explosion ou d’autres difficultés avec le produit.  Ne jamais brancher le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise qui n'est pas mise a la terre correctement et assurez-vous qu'il soit conforme aux codes locaux et nationaux. INSTALLATION ATTENTION Cet appareil doit être positionné de telle sorte qu'il soit accessible a la prise d'alimentation.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique ou un incendie due a une fuite électrique. Installez votre appareil sur un sol plat et dur qui peut supporter son poids.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner des vibrations anormales, du bruit ou des problèmes avec le produit. Installez correctement le tuyau de vidange pour pouvoir effectuer convenablement le drainage de l’eau.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un débordement de l'eau et des dégâts matériels. Lors de l'installation de l'unité extérieure, veillez a brancher le tuyau de vidange pour que le drainage s'effectue correctement  L’eau générée par l'unité extérieure au cours de l'opération de chauffage peut déborder et provoquer des dégâts matériels Particulièrement en hiver, un bloc de glace peut tomber et entraîner des blessures, la mort ou des dommages matériels. UTILISATION AQV09K&Y@@_Jungfrau_IBIM_F_32437A.indd 3 2011-1-18 14:12:464 Précautions de Sécurité ALIMENTATION AVERTISSEMENT Retirez toutes les substances étrangères telles que la poussière ou l'eau des bornes de la prise d’alimentation et des points de contact avec un chiffon sec sur une base régulière.  Débranchez le cordon d'alimentation et nettoyez-le avec un chiffon sec.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique ou un incendie. Sur la prise murale, branchez le cordon d'alimentation dans la bonne direction de telle sorte que le cordon se dirige vers le sol.  Si vous branchez dans la prise le cordon d'alimentation en sens inverse, les fils électriques dans le câble peuvent ętre endommagés et cela peut entraîner un choc électrique ou un incendie. Lorsque l’appareil, la prise de courant ou le cordon d'alimentation est endommagé, contactez votre centre de service le plus proche. Branchez fermement la prise d'alimentation dans la prise murale. N’utilisez pas une prise ou un cordon d'alimentation endommagé ou une prise murale mal fixée.  Cela provoquera un choc électrique ou un incendie. Lorsque vous débranchez le cordon d'alimentation, ne tirez pas sur le fil.  Débranchez la prise d’alimentation en tenant la prise.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique ou un incendie. Ne pas tirer ou plier excessivement le cordon d’alimentation. Ne pas tordre ou nouer le cordon d’alimentation. Ne pas accrocher le cordon d'alimentation sur un objet métallique, placer dessus un objet lourd, l’insérez entre les objets, ou appuyez dessus dans l'espace derrière l'appareil.  Cela provoquera un choc électrique ou un incendie. ALIMENTATION ATTENTION Couper le courant au disjoncteur, si vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil pendant un certain temps ou pendant une tempête/ orage.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique ou un incendie. UTILISATION AVERTISSEMENT Si l'appareil est inondé, veuillez contacter votre centre de service le plus proche.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique ou un incendie. Si l'appareil produit un bruit étrange, si une odeur de brûlé apparait ou si de la fumée sort de l’appareil débranchez immédiatement le cordon d'alimentation et contactez votre centre de service le plus proche.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique ou un incendie. En cas de fuite de gaz (tels que le gaz propane, gaz de pétrole liquéfié, etc), aérez immédiatement sans toucher la prise d'alimentation. Ne pas toucher l’appareil ou le cordon d’alimentation.  Ne pas utiliser un ventilateur.  Une étincelle peut provoquer une explosion ou un incendie. Si vous souhaitez réinstaller le climatiseur, veuillez contacter votre centre de service le plus proche.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner des difficultés avec le produit, une fuite d’eau, un choc électrique ou un incendie.  Pour le produit, un service de livraison n'est pas prévu. Si vous décidez de réinstaller le produit dans un autre emplacement, des frais de construction supplémentaire et des frais d'installation seront facturés.  Veuillez contacter votre centre de service le plus proche, si vous souhaitez installer le produit dans un endroit particulier, comme dans une zone industrielle ou a proximité de la mer où l’appareil pourrait être exposé a du sel dans l'air. Ne pas toucher la prise électrique ou le disjoncteur si vous avez les mains mouillées.  Cela peut entrainer un choc électrique. Ne pas débrancher la prise d'alimentation ou éteindre le climatiseur avec le disjoncteur pendant son fonctionnement  Brancher la prise d’alimentation dans la prise murale ou mettre en marche le climatiseur à partir du disjoncteur peut provoquer une étincelle et entrainer un choc électrique ou un incendie. Après avoir déballé le climatiseur, conservez les matériaux d'emballage hors de la portée des enfants, les matériaux d'emballage pouvant être dangereux pour les enfants.  Ne laissez pas un enfant mettre un sac sur sa tête, il y a risque de suffocation. Ne pas mettre vos doigts ou des substances étrangères dans la prise lorsque le climatiseur est en marche.  Veillez a ce que les enfants ne se blessent pas en insérant leurs doigts dans le produit. Lors de l'opération de chauffage, ne pas toucher la lame du flux d'air avec les mains ou les doigts.  Cela provoquera un choc électrique ou des brulures. Ne pas mettre vos doigts ou des substances étrangères dans l’entrée/sortie de l’air du climatiseu.  Veillez a ce que les enfants ne se blessent pas en insérant leurs doigts dans le produit. Ne pas frapper ou tirer avec force sur le climatiseur.  Cela peut provoquer un incendie, des blessures ou des problèmes avec le produit. AQV09K&Y@@_Jungfrau_IBIM_F_32437A.indd 4 2011-1-18 14:12:475 FRANÇAIS UTILISATION AVERTISSEMENT Veillez à ne pas placer d’objet près de l'unité extérieure qui permettrait aux enfants de monter sur la machine.  Cela peut entraîner de graves blessures pour les enfants. N’utilisez pas le climatiseur trop longtemps dans des endroits mal aérés ou lorsque des personnes infirmes se situent a proximité.  En raison d'un manque d'oxygène qui peut nuire a votre sante, ouvrez la fenêtre au moins une fois par heure. Si une substance étrangère, comme l'eau est entrée dans l'appareil, couper l'alimentation en débranchant la prise de courant et mettre le disjoncteur hors tension, puis contactez votre centre de service le plus proche.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique ou un incendie. Ne pas tenter soi-même de réparer, de démonter ou de modifier l'appareil.  Ne pas utiliser un fusible (comme le cuivre, fil d'acier, etc) autre que le fusible standard.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique, un incendie, des difficultés avec le produit, ou des blessures. UTILISATION ATTENTION Ne placez pas d'objets ou de dispositifs dans l'unité intérieure.  Des goutes d’eau venant de l'unité intérieure peuvent entraîner un incendie ou des dommages matériels. Au moins une fois par an, vérifiez que le châssis de montage de l'unité extérieure n'est pas cassé.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner des blessures, la mort ou des dommages matériels. Le courant maximum est mesuré selon la norme standard IEC pour la sécurité et le courant est mesuré selon la norme standard ISO pour l'efficacité énergétique. Ne pas se tenir debout sur l'appareil ou placer des objets (tels que du linge, des bougies allumées, des cigarettes allumées, des plats, des produits chimiques, les objets métalliques, etc) sur l'appareil.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique, un incendie, des difficultés avec le produit, ou des blessures. Ne pas faire fonctionner l'appareil si vous avez les mains mouillées.  Cela peut entrainer un choc électrique. Ne pas pulvériser les insectes volants avec des insecticides sur la surface de l'appareil.  Cela peut aussi, en plus d'être nocifs pour les humains, entraîner un choc électrique, un incendie ou des problèmes avec le produit. Ne pas boire l’eau du climatiseur.  L’eau peut être nocive pour les humains. Ne pas enfoncer et démontez la télécommande. Ne pas toucher les tuyaux connectés avec le produit.  Cela peut entraîner des brûlures ou des blessures. Ne pas utiliser le climatiseur a des fins spécifiques telles que la préservation du matériel de précision, la nourriture, les animaux, les plantes ou les produits cosmétiques.  Cela peut entrainer des dommages matériels. Évitez d’exposer directement des personnes, des animaux ou des plantes au flux d’air du climatiseur pendant de longues périodes.  Cela peut causer des dommages aux personnes, aux animaux ou aux plantes. Cet appareil n'est pas prévu pour être utilisé par des personnes (y compris les enfants) dont les capacités physiques, sensorielles ou mentales sont réduites, ou des personnes dénuées d'expérience ou de connaissance, sauf si elles ont pu bénéficier, par l'intermédiaire d'une personne responsable de leur sécurité, d'une surveillance ou d'instructions préalables concernant l'utilisation de l'appareil. Les enfants doivent être surveillés afin de s’assurer qu’ils ne jouent pas avec l’appareil. POUR LE NETTOYAGE AVERTISSEMENT Ne pas nettoyer en pulvérisant l'eau directement sur l'appareil. Ne pas utiliser de benzène, de diluant ou d'alcool pour nettoyer l'appareil.  Cela peut provoquer une décoloration, une déformation, des dommages, un choc électrique ou un incendie. Avant de nettoyer ou de procéder a l'entretien, débranchez le climatiseur de la prise murale et attendez que le ventilateur s'arrête.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner un choc électrique ou un incendie. POUR LE NETTOYAGE ATTENTION Faites attention aux arêtes vives lorsque vous nettoyez la surface de l’échangeur de chaleur de l'unité extérieure.  Pour éviter de se faire couper les doigts, porter des gants en coton épais lors du nettoyage. Ne pas nettoyer soi-même l'intérieur du climatiseur.  Pour le nettoyage intérieur de l'appareil, contactez votre centre de service le plus proche.  Pour le nettoyage du filtre interne, reportez-vous à la description «nettoyage du climatiseur.  Ne pas tenir compte de ces instructions peut entraîner des dommages, un choc électrique ou un incendie. AQV09K&Y@@_Jungfrau_IBIM_F_32437A.indd 5 2011-1-18 14:12:476 Gammes d’opération La table ci-dessous indique la gamme de la température et des humidités avec lesquelles le climatiseur peuvent être opérées. Consulter le tableau pour une utilisation optimale. La maintenance de votre climatiseur  En mode de refroidissement, si le climatiseur fonctionne longtemps dans une zone de forte humidité, il peut se former une condensation.  Si la température extérieure descend a -5 ° C, la capacité de chauffage peut diminuer jusqu'à 60% ~ 70% de la capacité spécifiée selon les conditions d'utilisation. Mode Température intérieure Température extérieure Humidité intérieure Refroidissement 16˚C~32˚C -10˚C~46˚C Humidité relative de 80% ou moins Chauffage 27˚C ou moins -15˚C~24˚C - Séchage 18˚C~32˚C -10˚C~46˚C - Protections internes via le système de contrôle de l'unité  Cette protection interne est mise en marche si une erreur interne se produit dans le climatiseur. Type Description Contre l’air froid Le ventilateur interne sera éteint a l’encontre de l'air froid lorsque la pompe à chaleur fait chauffage. Cycle de dégivrage Le ventilateur interne sera éteint a l’encontre de l'air froid lorsque la pompe à chaleur fait chauffage. Anti-protection de la batterie interne Le compresseur est éteint pour protéger la batterie interne lorsque le climatiseur fonctionne en mode Refroidissement. Protéger le compresseur Afin de protéger le compresseur de l'unité extérieure, le climatiseur ne démarre pas immédiatement son fonctionnement. • SilapompeàchaleurfonctionneenmodeHeat,lecyclededéglaçageestactivépouréliminerlegeld’uneunité extérieure qui s’auraient été déposé à basse température. Leventilateurinterneest coupéautomatiquementetredémarréseulementaprèslecyclededéglaçageest terminé. Vérification avant utilisation  La température standard pour le chauffage est de 7 ˚ C. Si la température extérieure tombe à 0 ˚ C ou au-dessous, la capacité de chauffage peut être réduite en fonction de la condition de température.  Si l'opération de refroidissement est utilisée à plus de 32 ˚ C (température intérieure), la capacité de chauffage ne pourra pas refroidir à sa pleine capacité. Mode Température intérieure Température extérieure Humidité intérieure Si les conditions Refroidissement 16˚C~32˚C -5˚C~46˚C 80% ou moins La condensation peut se produire sur l'unité intérieure avec le risque d'avoir soit séchez ou tomber sur le plancher. Chauffage 27˚C ou moins -15˚C~24˚C - La protection a l’intérieure se déclenche alors et le Climatiseur s’arrête. Séchage 18˚C~32˚C -5˚C~46˚C - La condensation peut se produire sur l'unité intérieure avec le risque d'avoir soit séchez ou tomber sur le plancher. Modèle : RJ AQV09K&Y@@_Jungfrau_IBIM_F_32437A.indd 6 2011-1-18 14:12:47 Le contenu de ce mode d'emploi peut ne pas correspondre fidèlement à votre téléphone en fonction de votre version logicielle ou de votre opérateur. www.samsung.com French. 06/2011. Rev. 1.0 Protégez votre acuité auditive • Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé peut endommager votre audition. • Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé lorsque vous êtes au volant peut détourner votre attention et provoquer un accident. • Diminuez toujours le volume avant de connecter des écouteurs à une source audio et réglez le volume minimum nécessaire vous permettant d'entendre votre conversation ou la musique. Pour installer Samsung Kies 1. Téléchargez la dernière version de Kies sur le site web de Samsung (www.samsung.com) et installez le logiciel sur votre PC. 2. Utilisez un câble de connexion PC pour connecter votre appareil. Samsung Kies démarre automatiquement. Si Samsung Kies ne démarre pas automatiquement, double-cliquez sur l'icône correspondante sur votre PC. Référez-vous à l'aide Kies pour plus d'informations.S5830 Mode d'emploi2 Utilisation de ce mode d'emploi Utilisation de ce mode d'emploi Nous vous remercions de la confiance que vous nous accordez en achetant cet appareil mobile Samsung. Cet appareil vous permettra de communiquer et d'accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et la technologie de Samsung. Ce mode d'emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et caractéristiques de votre appareil. À lire avant toute utilisation • Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d'emploi et toutes les consignes qui y sont indiquées avant d'utiliser votre appareil, afin de pouvoir l'utiliser correctement et en toute sécurité. • Les explications fournies dans ce mode d'emploi sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil. • Les illustrations utilisées dans ce mode d'emploi peuvent différer par rapport à l'aspect réel du produit. • Le contenu de ce mode d'emploi peut différer en fonction du produit et de la version logicielle fournie par votre opérateur et peut faire l'objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de ce mode d'emploi, rendez-vous sur le site www.samsung.com. • Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier en fonction de l'appareil, de la version logicielle ou de l'opérateur. • L'élaboration de ce mode d'emploi est basée sur le système d'exploitation Google Android. • Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre région ou des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung n'est pas responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des tiers. • Samsung n'est pas responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l'utilisateur. • Vous pouvez mettre à jour le logiciel de votre appareil mobile en visitant le site www.samsung.com.Utilisation de ce mode d'emploi 3 Remarque—remarques, conseils d'utilisation ou informations complémentaires ► Référence—pages contenant plus d'informations. Exemple : ► p. 12 (reportez-vous à la page 12) → Suivi par—pour modifier l'ordre des options ou des menus, vous devez exécuter une action. Exemple : Depuis l'écran d'accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres → A propos du téléphone (signifie que vous devez d'abord appuyer sur Paramètres et ensuite sur A propos du téléphone) [ ] Crochets—touches de l'appareil. Exemple : [ ] (symbolise la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage) • Les sons, fonds d'écran et images fourni(e)s avec cet appareil sont sous licence pour une utilisation limitée entre Samsung et leurs propriétaires respectifs. Extraire et utiliser ce matériel à des fins commerciales ou autres constitue une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d'auteur. Samsung n'est pas responsable des infractions sur les droits d'auteur commises par l'utilisateur. • Veuillez conserver ce mode d’emploi pour pouvoir le consulter ultérieurement. Icônes Avant de démarrer, familiarisez-vous d'abord avec les icônes utilisées dans ce mode d'emploi : Avertissement—situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser d'autres personnes Attention—situations susceptibles d'endommager votre appareil ou d'autres appareils4 Utilisation de ce mode d'emploi • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • et sont des marques de SRS Labs, Inc. Les technologies CS Headphone et WOW HD sont fournies sous licence de SRS Labs, Inc. • Wi-Fi ®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Toutes les autres marques et droits d'auteur appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs. Droits d'auteur Copyright © 2011 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d'emploi est protégé par les lois internationales relatives aux droits d'auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics. Marques déposées • SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. • Les logos Android, Google Search ™, Google Maps ™, Google Mail ™, YouTube ™, Android Market ™ et Google Talk ™ sont des marques déposées de Google, Inc.Table des matières 5 Préparation ................................................ 9 Contenu du coffret ................................................... 9 Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie ....... 9 Charger la batterie ............................................... 11 Insérer une carte mémoire ................................. 13 Fixer une dragonne .............................................. 16 Démarrage ............................................... 17 Allumer/éteindre l'appareil ................................ 17 Présentation de l'appareil ................................... 17 Utiliser l'écran tactile ............................................ 20 Verrouiller ou déverrouiller l'écran tactile et les touches ......................................................... 22 Présentation de l'écran d'accueil ....................... 22 Accéder aux applications .................................... 24 Personnaliser l'appareil ....................................... 26 Saisir du texte ......................................................... 30 Télécharger des applications à partir d'Android Market .................................................. 33 Télécharger des fichiers à partir du Web ......... 34 Synchroniser des données .................................. 34 Communication ...................................... 36 Appels ...................................................................... 36 Messagerie .............................................................. 40 Google Mail ............................................................ 42 Table des matières6 Table des matières Web ........................................................... 71 Navigateur .............................................................. 71 Cartes ....................................................................... 74 Recherche Google ................................................. 78 YouTube ................................................................... 78 Actualités et météo ............................................... 80 Samsung Apps ....................................................... 81 Android Market ..................................................... 81 Connectivité ............................................ 82 Bluetooth ................................................................ 82 Wi-Fi .......................................................................... 84 AllShare ................................................................... 85 Partager une connexion réseau mobile .......... 87 Connexions PC ....................................................... 88 Connexions VPN .................................................... 89 E-mail ....................................................................... 43 Discuter .................................................................... 45 Social Hub ............................................................... 46 Divertissements ...................................... 48 Appareil photo ....................................................... 48 Galerie ...................................................................... 56 Musique ................................................................... 57 Radio FM .................................................................. 61 Données personnelles ........................... 64 Contacts ................................................................... 64 Calendrier ................................................................ 68 Mémo ....................................................................... 69 Mémo vocal ............................................................ 70Table des matières 7 Appel ........................................................................ 99 Son .......................................................................... 100 Affichage ............................................................... 100 Localisation et sécurité ..................................... 101 Applications .......................................................... 102 Comptes et synchronisation ............................. 103 Confidentialité ..................................................... 103 Carte SD et mémoire ......................................... 104 Langue et clavier ................................................. 104 Entrée et sortie voix ............................................ 106 Accessibilité .......................................................... 107 Date & heure ......................................................... 107 A propos du téléphone ...................................... 107 Outils ......................................................... 92 Horloge .................................................................... 92 Calculatrice ............................................................. 93 Téléchargement ..................................................... 93 Mes fichiers ............................................................. 93 Outils SIM ................................................................ 94 Gestion tâches ....................................................... 94 ThinkFree Office .................................................... 95 Recherche vocale .................................................. 96 Paramètres ............................................... 97 Accéder au menu Paramètres ............................ 97 Sans fil et réseaux .................................................. 978 Table des matières Dépannage ............................................ 108 Consignes de sécurité .......................... 114 Index ....................................................... 124Préparation 9 Préparation Contenu du coffret Sortez l'appareil de son coffret et vérifiez que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : • Appareil mobile • Batterie • Chargeur • Guide de prise en main rapide Utilisez exclusivement des logiciels homologués par Samsung. L'utilisation de logiciels piratés ou illégaux peut occasionner des dommages ou des dysfonctionnements qui ne sont pas couverts par la garantie du fabricant. • Les éléments fournis avec votre appareil peuvent varier en fonction des logiciels et accessoires disponibles dans votre région ou proposés par votre opérateur. • Vous pouvez acquérir d'autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur local Samsung. • Les accessoires fournis sont spécialement conçus pour votre appareil. • Il est possible que certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, ne soient pas compatibles avec votre appareil. Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie Lorsque vous vous abonnez à un service de téléphonie mobile, une carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) vous est remise. Elle permet de vous identifier et contient tous les détails de votre abonnement (code PIN, services en option, etc.). Pour bénéficier des services 3G, vous devez vous procurer une carte USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module).10 Préparation 3 Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM, puce orientée vers le bas. Lorsque l'appareil ne contient pas de carte SIM ou USIM, il est néanmoins possible d'utiliser les services hors-réseau de votre appareil, c'est-à-dire les fonctions autres que GSM et Bluetooth, ainsi que certains menus. Pour installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie : 1 Si le téléphone est allumé, maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre pour l'éteindre. 2 Retirez le cache de la batterie. Veillez à ne pas abîmer vos ongles en retirant le cache de la batterie.Préparation 11 Charger la batterie Vous devez charger la batterie avant d'utiliser l'appareil pour la première fois. Vous pouvez charger l'appareil à l'aide d'un chargeur ou en le branchant sur un PC à l'aide d'un câble de connexion PC. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs et des câbles homologués par Samsung. L'utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l'explosion de la batterie ou endommager votre appareil. Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, l'appareil émet un signal sonore et affiche un message d'avertissement. L'icône de batterie est alors vide et clignote. Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est vraiment insuffisant, l'appareil s'éteint automatiquement. Rechargez la batterie pour continuer à utiliser l'appareil. 4 Insérez la batterie. 5 Remettez le cache de la batterie en place.12 Préparation 3 Branchez l'autre extrêmité du chargeur sur une prise de courant. • Vous pouvez utiliser l'appareil lorsqu'il est en cours de chargement. Toutefois, dans ce cas, il est possible que le rechargement complet de la batterie prenne plus de temps. • Lorsque l'appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l'écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l'instabilité de l'alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur de l'appareil. • Il est possible que l'appareil chauffe lorsqu'il est en cours de chargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n'affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l'appareil. • Si votre appareil ne se recharge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung. › Charger la batterie avec un chargeur 1 Ouvrez le cache du connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre appareil. 2 Branchez la fiche micro-USB du chargeur sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l'appareil. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l'appareil. Les dommages résultant d'une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.Préparation 13 3 Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble de connexion sur un port USB du PC. Il est possible que le rechargement tarde à démarrer, en fonction du type de câble de connexion PC que vous utilisez. 4 Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée (dans ce cas, l'icône ne clignote plus), débranchez le câble de connexion de l'appareil, puis du PC. Insérer une carte mémoire Pour stocker des fichiers multimédia supplémentaires, vous devez utiliser une carte mémoire. L'appareil est compatible avec les cartes mémoire microSD™ ou microSDHC ™ d'une capacité allant jusqu'à 32 Go (en fonction du fabricant et du type de carte mémoire). 4 Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée (dans ce cas, l'icône ne clignote plus), débranchez le chargeur de l'appareil, puis de la prise de courant. Ne retirez jamais la batterie avant d'avoir débranché le chargeur. Ceci pourrait endommager l'appareil. Pour économiser l'énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l'utilisez pas. Le chargeur n'étant pas muni d'un bouton marche/arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l'alimentation. Lorsqu'il est utilisé, le chargeur doit rester à proximité de la prise. › Charger la batterie avec un câble de connexion PC Avant de recharger la batterie de votre appareil à l'aide d'un câble de connexion PC, assurez vous que votre PC est allumé. 1 Ouvrez le cache du connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre appareil. 2 Branchez la fiche micro-USB du câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l'appareil.14 Préparation 1 Ouvrez le compartiment à carte mémoire, sur le côté de l'appareil. 2 Insérez la carte en orientant la puce vers le bas. 3 Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son emplacement jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille. 4 Refermez le cache du compartiment à carte mémoire. Samsung utilise des normes industrielles standardisées pour les cartes mémoire. Néanmoins, il est possible que certaines marques de cartes mémoire ne soient pas entièrement compatibles avec votre appareil. L'utilisation d'une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager votre appareil ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. • Seules les cartes mémoire avec une structure de fichiers FAT sont compatibles avec votre appareil. Lorsque vous insérez une carte formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, votre appareil vous invite à la reformater entièrement. • Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d'effacement et d'écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans votre appareil, le répertoire de fichiers de la carte mémoire apparaît dans le dossier /sdcard. Préparation 15 › Formater une carte mémoire Formater une carte mémoire sur un PC peut entraîner des problèmes de compatibilité avec votre appareil. Formatez la carte mémoire uniquement avec l'appareil. Depuis l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur →Paramètres→Carte SD et mémoire→ Démonter la carte SD → OK → Formater la carte SD →Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n'oubliez pas d'effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes stockées dans votre appareil. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l'utilisateur. › Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer une carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable l'éjecter pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. 1 Depuis l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur →Paramètres→ Carte SD et mémoire→Démonter la carte SD → OK. 2 Ouvrez le compartiment à carte mémoire, sur le côté de l'appareil. 3 Poussez la carte avec précaution jusqu'à ce qu'elle ressorte de l'appareil. 4 Retirez la carte de son emplacement. 5 Refermez le cache du compartiment à carte mémoire. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque l'appareil y enregistre ou lit des informations. Vous risqueriez de perdre des données et d'endommager la carte mémoire ou l'appareil.16 Préparation Fixer une dragonne 1 Retirez le cache de la batterie. 2 Faites passer une dragonne à travers la fente et accrochez-la au point d'attache. 3 Remettez le cache de la batterie en place.Démarrage 17 Démarrage Allumer/éteindre l'appareil Pour allumer votre appareil : 1 Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée. 2 Si vous allumez votre appareil pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l'écran pour procéder à la configuration. Pour éteindre votre appareil, maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre→OK. • Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétant dans les lieux où l'utilisation d'appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. • Pour utiliser les services hors-réseau de votre appareil, c'est-à-dire les fonctions autres que GSM et Bluetooth, activez le mode Avion. Pour ce faire, maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Mode Horsligne. Présentation de l'appareil › Aspect de l'appareil Capteur de proximité Écran tactile Touche Retour Touche Accueil Touche de volume Touche Menu Microphone Écouteur imaginez les possibilités Merci d'avoir acheté ce produit Samsung. Pour obtenir notre service complet, veuillez enregistrer votre produit sur www.samsung.com/register Système Home Entertainment Blu-ray™ 5,1 canaux Manuel d'utilisation HT-E5500 HT-E5530 HT-E5550 HHT-E5500_XU_FRA_0223.indd 1 T-E5500_XU_FRA_0223.indd 1 22012-02-23 오후 2:35:33 012-02-23 오후 2:35:33| 2 Français Consignes de Sécurité Avertissement POUR RÉDUIRE LES RISQUES D’ÉLECTROCUTION, NE RETIREZ JAMAIS LE CAPOT (NI L’ARRIÈRE). LES PIÈCES DE CE PRODUIT NE SONT PAS RÉPARABLES PAR L’UTILISATEUR. VEUILLEZ CONTACTER UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIÉ POUR TOUTE RÉPARATION. ATTENTION RISQUE D’ÉLECTROCUTION NE PAS OUVRIR Ce symbole indique la présence d’une tension dangereuse dans l’appareil, présentant un risque d’électrocution ou de blessures. ATTENTION : POUR ÉVITER TOUT RISQUE D’ÉLECTROCUTION, LA BROCHE LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DOIT ÊTRE TOTALEMENT INSÉRÉE DANS LE TROU PLUS LARGE. Ce symbole indique les directives importantes qui accompagnent le produit. AVERTISSEMENT • Afin de réduire tout risque d’incendie ou d’électrocution, n’exposez jamais cet appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité. ATTENTION • Évitez toute projection d’eau sur l’appareil et ne posez jamais d’objet contenant un liquide dessus (ex : un vase). • La fiche permet de débrancher l’appareil et doit toujours être facilement accessible. • Cet appareil doit toujours être branché à une prise de courant alternatif reliée à la terre. • Pour débrancher l'appareil, il convient de retirer la fiche de la prise murale, il faut donc que cette dernière soit facilement accessible. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASER LAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT PRODUCTO LÁSER CLASE 1 PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 Le lecteur de disque compact est homologué comme produit LASER DE CLASSE 1. L'utilisation des commandes, les réglages ou l'exécution de procédures autres que celles spécifiées ci-dessus peuvent conduire à une exposition à des radiations dangereuses. ATTENTION • DES RAYONS LASER INVISIBLES SONT PRÉSENTS LORSQUE L'APPAREIL EST OUVERT OU QUE LES DISPOSITIFS DE VERROUILLAGE SONT CIRCONVENUS. ÉVITEZ L'EXPOSITION AUX RAYONS. HHT-E5500_XU_FRA_0223.indd 2 T-E5500_XU_FRA_0223.indd 2 22012-02-23 오후 2:35:39 012-02-23 오후 2:35:39Français 3| 01 Consignes de Sécurité Rangement et gestion des disques • Comment tenir le disque - Des empreintes digitales ou des rayures sur la surface d'un disque peuvent altérer la qualité du son et de l’image ou provoquer des sauts. - Évitez de toucher la surface du disque sur laquelle les données ont été enregistrées. - Tenez le disque par les bords afin de ne pas laisser d’empreintes sur sa surface. - Ne collez pas de papier ou d’adhésif sur le disque. • Nettoyage des disques - En cas d’empreintes ou de saleté sur un disque, nettoyez-le à l'aide d'eau additionnée de détergent doux et d’un chiffon doux. - Lors de son nettoyage, essuyez le disque du centre vers le bord. - Rangement des disques  N’exposez pas le disque à la lumière directe du soleil.  Stockez-le dans un endroit frais et aéré.  Rangez-le dans une pochette propre et verticalement. Précautions de manipulation • Évitez toute projection d’eau sur l’appareil. Ne posez jamais d’objet contenant un liquide (ex : un vase) dessus. • Pour éteindre complètement l'appareil, vous devez retirer le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale. Par conséquent, le cordon d'alimentation doit être facilement accessible à tout moment. • Ne tenez pas le cordon d'alimentation avec les mains mouillées. Vous risquez de vous exposer à un choc électrique. • Ne branchez pas plusieurs appareils électriques sur une prise murale. Surcharger une prise murale peut provoquer une surchauffe et donc un incendie. • Entretien du meuble - Avant de brancher un composant sur cet appareil, assurez-vous que celui-ci est hors tension. - Si vous déplacez soudainement l'appareil d'un endroit froid à un endroit chaud, de la condensation pourra se former sur les pièces et la lentille, et occasionner des problèmes de lecture. Dans pareil cas, débranchez l'appareil et patientez deux heures avant de le rebrancher sur la prise d’alimentation. Insérez ensuite le disque et essayez à nouveau de le lire. • Si vous entendez un bruit inhabituel ou décelez un dégagement anormal de fumée ou une odeur suspecte, coupez immédiatement l’alimentation et débranchez la fiche électrique de la prise murale. Puis contactez le service après-vente le plus proche pour obtenir de l’aide. N’utilisez plus l'appareil. Utiliser l'appareil en l’état peut provoquer un incendie ou un choc électrique. • Pour éteindre complètement l'appareil, vous devez retirer le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale. Par conséquent, le cordon d'alimentation doit être facilement accessible à tout moment. Utilisation de la fonction 3D CONSIGNES IMPORTANTES RELATIVES À LA SANTÉ ET LA SÉCURITÉ EN CAS DE VISIONNAGE D'IMAGES 3D. Lisez attentivement les consignes de sécurité avant d'utiliser la fonction 3D. • Certains utilisateurs peuvent ressentir une gêne en visionnant des images de télévision en 3D, comme par exemple des vertiges, des nausées ou des maux de tête. Dès que vous ressentez l'un de ces symptômes, arrêtez immédiatement le visionnage en 3D, retirez les lunettes Active 3D et essayez de vous reposer. • Le visionnage d'images en 3D sur une période de temps prolongée peut occasionner une fatigue oculaire. Dès que vous ressentez une fatigue oculaire, cessez immédiatement le visionnage en 3D, retirez les lunettes Active 3D et essayez de vous reposer. • Des enfants utilisant la fonction 3D doivent être constamment surveillés par un adulte responsable. Au moindre signalement de fatigue visuelle, mal de tête, vertige ou nausée, interrompez immédiatement le visionnage en 3D par les enfants, et laissez-les se reposer. • N'utilisez pas les lunettes Active 3D à d'autres fins (comme lunettes de vue, de soleil ou de protection, par exemple). HHT-E5500_XU_FRA_0223.indd 3 T-E5500_XU_FRA_0223.indd 3 22012-02-23 오후 2:35:40 012-02-23 오후 2:35:40| 4 Français Consignes de Sécurité • N'utilisez pas la fonction 3D ou les lunettes Active 3D en marchant ou en bougeant. En utilisant la fonction 3D ou en portant des lunettes Active 3D en cours de marche ou de mouvement, vous risquez de vous cogner contre des objets, de trébucher et/ou de tomber, et de vous blesser gravement. • Pour bénéficier du visionnage de contenus en 3D, connectez un appareil 3D (récepteur AV ou téléviseur compatible 3D) au port de sortie SORTIE HDMI de l'appareil à l'aide d'un câble HDMI haut débit. Veillez à porter des lunettes 3D avant de visionner le contenu 3D. • Le produit émet des signaux 3D uniquement via le câble HDMI connecté au port de sortie HDMI OUT. • La résolution de l'image vidéo en mode de lecture 3D étant déterminée par la définition de l'image vidéo 3D d'origine, vous ne pourrez pas modifier la résolution de l'image selon vos préférences. • Des fonctions telles que BD Wise, l'adaptation de la taille de l'écran ou le réglage de la résolution peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement en mode de lecture 3D. • Il vous faut obligatoirement utiliser un câble HDMI haut débit pour garantir une émission appropriée du signal 3D. • Lorsque vous visionnez des images en 3D, assurez-vous de vous tenir éloigné du téléviseur à une distance équivalente à au moins trois fois la taille de l'écran. Par exemple, si vous avez un écran 46 pouces, vous devrez rester à une distance de 3,5 mètres (138 pouces) du téléviseur. - Positionnez l'écran à hauteur des yeux pour mieux apprécier l'image en 3D. • Lorsque l'appareil est connecté à plusieurs appareils 3D, l'effet 3D peut ne pas fonctionner correctement. • Ce lecteur ne convertit pas de contenus 2D en contenus 3D. • « Blu-ray 3D » et le logo « Blu-ray 3D » sont des marques de commerce de Blu-ray Disc Association. Copyright © 2012 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd. Tous droits réservés ; il est interdit de reproduire ou de copier tout ou partie de ce manuel d'utilisation sans l'accord préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd. Licence • Dolby et le symbole représentant deux D sont des marques déposées de Dolby Laboratories. • Fabriqué sous licence sous les brevets américains Nº : 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,392,195; 7,272,567; 7,333,929; 7,212,872 et d’autres brevets américains et internationaux accordés et en attente. DTS-HD, le symbole, et DTS-HD et le symbole qui lui est associé sont des marques déposées, et DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential est une marque déposée de DTS, Inc. Ce produit comporte des logiciels. © DTS, Inc. Tous droits réservés. • À PROPOS DES VIDÉOS DIVX : DivX® est un format vidéo numérique créé par la société DivX, LLC, filiale de Rovi Corporation. Ceci est un appareil DivX Certified® qui prend en charge la lecture des vidéos DivX. Pour obtenir les détails et en savoir plus sur les outils logiciels qui vous permettent de convertir vos fichiers au format vidéo DivX, consultez le site Web à l’adresse suivante : divx.com. À PROPOS DU FORMAT VIDÉO À LA DEMANDE DIVX : Cet appareil DivX Certified® doit être enregistré afin de servir à visionner des films vidéo à la demande (VOD) au format DivX achetés dans le commerce. Pour obtenir votre code d’enregistrement, identifiez l’emplacement de la section DivX VOD dans le menu de configuration de votre appareil. Allez sur le site Web vod.divx.com pour obtenir de plus amples informations sur la procédure d’enregistrement. Les appareils DivX Certified® peuvent lire des vidéos DivX® dans une résolution HD de 1080p, y compris les programmes d’appel. DivX®, DivX Certified® et les logos qui leur sont associés sont des marques déposées de Rovi Corporation ou de ses filiales et font l’objet d’une licence. Cette norme est couverte par un ou plusieurs des brevets américains suivants : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274 HHT-E5500_XU_FRA_0223.indd 4 T-E5500_XU_FRA_0223.indd 4 22012-02-23 오후 2:35:41 012-02-23 오후 2:35:41Français 5| 01 Consignes de Sécurité • The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. • Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées de Oracle et/ou ses filiales. D'autres noms mentionnés peuvent être des marques de commerce de leurs propriétaires respectifs. • Ce produit intègre la technique de protection contre la copie applicable aux brevets américains ainsi que d’autres droits de propriété intellectuelle de Rovi Corporation. Il est interdit de tenter de démonter l’appareil et d’en étudier le fonctionnement en vue de le reproduire. • Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™ et les logos y afférents sont des marques de commerce de Blu-ray Disc Association. • iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle et iPod touch sont des marques de commerce d’Apple Inc., déposées aux ÉtatsUnis et dans d’autres pays. • Cet appareil utilise la technologie Cinavia qui limite l'utilisation de copies non autorisées de certains films et vidéos ainsi que leurs bandes son disponibles dans le commerce. Lorsqu'une utilisation interdite d'une copie non autorisée est détectée, un message s'affiche et la lecture ou la copie est interrompue. Pour obtenir de plus amples informations sur la technologie Cinavia, veuillez consulter le « Cinavia Online Consumer Information Centre » (Centre d'informations consommateur en ligne Cinavia) à l'adresse http://www.cinavia.com. Pour toute demande d'informations complémentaires par courrier concernant Cinavia, envoyez une carte postale comportant votre adresse postale à : Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, États-Unis. Cet appareil intègre une technologie brevetée sous licence de Verance Corporation et qui est protégée par le brevet américain 7 369 677 ainsi que par d'autres brevets américains et internationaux accordés et en attente ainsi que par des droits d'auteur et une protection commerciale confidentielle pour certains aspects de cette technologie. Cinavia est une marque de commerce de Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Tous droits réservés par Verance. Il est interdit de tenter de démonter l’appareil et d’en étudier le fonctionnement en vue de le reproduire. • Avis de licence libre - En cas d'utilisation de logiciels libres, les licences libres sont disponibles dans le menu du produit. HHT-E5500_XU_FRA_0223.indd 5 T-E5500_XU_FRA_0223.indd 5 22012-02-23 오후 2:35:42 012-02-23 오후 2:35:42 Cliquez sur une rubrique Questions fréquentes Référence rapide Table des matières Fonctions de base Fonctions avancées Options de prise de vue Lecture/Retouche Réseau sans fil (WB150F/WB151F/WB152F uniquement) Paramètres Annexes Index Ce manuel d’utilisation propose des instructions détaillées pour l’utilisation de votre appareil photo. Veuillez le lire attentivement. WB150/WB150F/ WB151/WB151F/WB152F 1 Evitez d’endommager la vue des sujets photographiés. N’utilisez pas le flash à proximité (à moins d’un mètre) de personnes ou d’animaux. L’utilisation du flash trop près des yeux du sujet peut provoquer des lésions temporaires ou permanentes. Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge ou d’animaux domestiques. Tenez l’appareil, ses pièces et ses accessoires, hors de portée des enfants en bas âge et des animaux. L’ingestion de petites pièces peut provoquer un étouffement ou des blessures graves. Les composants et les accessoires peuvent également présenter des risques de blessure. Evitez toute exposition prolongée de l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures élevées. Une exposition prolongée à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures très élevées peut endommager de manière permanente les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité Respectez toujours les consignes et conseils d’utilisation suivants afin de prévenir toute situation dangereuse et de garantir un fonctionnement optimal de votre appareil photo. Avertissement—situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes Ne démontez pas ou n’essayez pas de réparer vous-même votre appareil photo. Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique ou endommager l’appareil photo. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de gaz ou de liquides inflammables ou explosifs. Vous risquez de provoquer une explosion ou un incendie. Ne laissez pas pénétrer de matériaux inflammables dans l’appareil photo ou ne stockez pas ces matériaux à proximité de l’appareil photo. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo avec les mains mouillées. Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique. 2 Evitez de couvrir l’appareil photo ou le chargeur avec des couvertures ou des vêtements. L’appareil photo peut surchauffer, se déformer ou prendre feu. Ne manipulez pas le cordon d’alimentation ou ne vous approchez pas du chargeur lors d’un orage. Vous pourriez recevoir une décharge électrique. Si du liquide ou des corps étrangers pénètrent dans l’appareil photo, déconnectez toutes les sources d’alimentation comme la batterie ou le chargeur, puis contactez un service après-vente de Samsung. Respectez la réglementation interdisant l'utilisation des appareils photo dans certaines zones spécifiques. • Evitez les interférences avec d'autres appareils électroniques. • Eteignez votre appareil photo à bord d'un avion. Il pourrait photo peut provoquer des interférences avec l'équipement de bord. Respectez les consignes de la compagnie aérienne et éteignez votre appareil photo lorsque vous y êtes invité. • Eteignez votre appareil photo à proximité de tout appareil médical. Il pourrait causer des interférences avec le matériel médical utilisé dans les hôpitaux et les centres de soins. Observez la réglementation en vigeur, ainsi que les mises en garde affichées et les consignes du personnel médical. Évitez les interférences avec les stimulateurs cardiaques. Conformément aux directives des fabricants et du Wireless Technology Research, programme américain de recherche sur les technologies de téléphonie mobile, maintenez une distance minimale de 15 cm entre les appareils photo et les stimulateurs cardiaques pour éviter toute interférence. Si vous pensez que votre appareil photo interfère avec un stimulateur cardiaque ou un appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur cardiaque ou de l'appareil médical pour connaître la marche à suivre. Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité 3 Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité Attention—situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil photo ou d’autres appareils Si vous rangez votre appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo. Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithium-ion authentiques recommandées par le fabricant. N’endommagez pas ou ne chauffez pas la batterie. Cela risque de provoquer un incendie ou des dommages corporels. Utilisez uniquement des batteries, des chargeurs et des accessoires homologués par Samsung. • L’utilisation de batteries, chargeurs, câbles ou accessoires non homologués peut endommager l’appareil photo, provoquer une explosion ou causer des blessures. • Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages ou blessures résultant d’une utilisation inappropriée de batteries, chargeurs, câbles ou accessoires. N’utilisez la batterie que pour l’usage pour lequel elle a été conçue. Un usage non conforme risque de provoquer une décharge électrique ou un incendie. Ne touchez pas le flash en cours de déclenchement. Le flash est très chaud lorsqu’il se déclenche et peut provoquer des brûlures. Lorsque vous utilisez un chargeur, éteignez toujours l’appareil photo avant de débrancher le chargeur de la prise murale. Si vous ne prenez pas cette précaution, vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie. Débranchez le chargeur de la prise murale lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Si vous ne prenez pas cette précaution, vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie. N’utilisez jamais de fiches et de cordons d’alimentation endommagés ou de prises électriques mal fixées lorsque vous rechargez la batterie. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie. Evitez tout contact du chargeur avec les bornes + et – de la batterie. Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique ou provoquer un incendie. 4 N’exercez pas de pression sur l’appareil photo ou ne forcez pas sur ses composants. Vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil photo. Effectuez les manipulations de branchement des cordons, du chargeur et d’insertion des batteries et des cartes mémoire avec précaution. Enfoncer les cordons en forçant ou sans précaution et brancher les câbles ou insérer les batteries et les cartes mémoire de manière incorrecte peut endommager les ports, les prises et les accessoires. Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager ou d’effacer les données qui y sont stockées. N’utilisez jamais une batterie, un chargeur ou une carte mémoire endommagé. Vous risqueriez de recevoir une décharge électrique, d’endommager l’appareil photo ou de provoquer un incendie. Vérifiez que l’appareil photo fonctionne correctement avant de l’utiliser. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de fichiers ou de dégâts résultant d’un fonctionnement incorrect ou d’une mauvaise utilisation de l’appareil photo. Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB du câble USB sur votre appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous inversez le sens de connexion du câble. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de pertes de données. Evitez les interférences avec d'autres appareils électroniques. Les signaux de fréquence radio émis par votre appareil photo peuvent perturber le fonctionnement des systèmes électroniques mal installés ou insuffisamment protégés, notamment les stimulateurs cardiaques, les prothèses auditives, les appareils médicaux et les équipements électroniques domestiques et automobiles. Contactez les fabricants de ces appareils électroniques pour résoudre les problèmes d'interférences éventuels. Pour éviter toute interférence involontaire, utilisez exclusivement des appareils ou des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Utilisez votre appareil photo dans la position normale. Evitez tout contact avec l'antenne interne de votre appareil photo. Transfert de données et responsabilités • Afin d'empêcher tout risque de fuite des données transférées via le réseau WLAN, évitez de transférer des données sensibles dans des zones publiques ou sur des réseaux ouverts. • Le fabricant de l'appareil photo décline toute responsabilité en cas de transferts de données qui porteraient atteinte aux droits d'auteur, marques, lois sur la propriété intellectuelle ou qui seraient contraires aux bonnes moeurs. Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité 5 Informations sur les droits d’auteur • Microsoft Windows et le logo Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. • Mac est une marque déposée d’Apple Corporation. • microSD™, microSDHC™ et microSDXC™ sont des marques deposees de SD Association. • Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Les marques commerciales mentionnées dans ce manuel d’utilisation appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs. • Les caractéristiques de l’appareil ou le contenu de ce manuel d’utilisation peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis, suite à l’évolution des fonctions de l’appareil. • Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser votre appareil photo dans le pays dans lequel vous l’avez acheté. • Utilisez cet appareil photo de manière responsable et veillez à respecter toutes les législations et règlementations en vigueur. • La distribution ou la réutilisation du contenu de ce manuel d’utilisation, même partielle, sans autorisation préalable, est interdite. • Concernant les informations open source, reportezvous au fichier « OpenSourceInfo.pdf » contenu dans le CD-ROM fourni. Organisation du manuel d’utilisation Fonctions de base 14 Faites connaissance avec l’appareil photo et ses icônes ainsi que ses fonctions de base pour les prises de vue. Fonctions avancées 34 Découvrez comment prendre une photo et enregistrer de la vidéo en sélectionnant un mode. Options de prise de vue 53 Cette section explique comment définir les options en mode Prise de vue. Lecture/Retouche 76 Découvrez comment visionner des photos ou des vidéos, et comment les retoucher. Vous apprendrez également comment connecter votre appareil photo à un ordinateur, à une imprimante photo ou à un téléviseur. Réseau sans fil (WB150F/WB151F/WB152F uniquement) 99 Apprenez à vous connecter à des réseaux locaux sans fil et à utiliser les fonctions. Paramètres 120 Cette section décrit les différentes options qui permettent de configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Annexes 126 Cette section reprend les messages d’erreur, les caractéristiques de l’appareil et des conseils pour l’entretien. A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut endommager l'audition de l'utilisateur. En fonction du logiciel de l'appareil ou de votre opérateur, certaines descriptions de ce mode d'emploi peuvent ne pas correspondre à votre appareil. World Wide Web http://www.samsungmobile.com Printed in Korea Code No.:GH68-21920A French. 01/2009. Rev. 1.0Samsung C6625 Guide de prise en main rapide2 Utilisation de ce mode d'emploi Ce guide de prise en main rapide a été spécialement conçu pour vous guider à travers les fonctions et caractéristiques de votre appareil. Icônes Familiarisez-vous d'abord avec les icônes utilisées dans ce mode d'emploi : Avertissement—situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser d'autres personnes Attention—situations susceptibles d'endommager votre appareil ou d'autres appareils Remarque—remarques, conseils d'utilisation ou informations complémentaires X Référence—pages contenant plus d'informations. Exemple : X p. 12 (reportez-vous à la page 12)3 Copyright Les droits sur toutes les technologies et produits inclus dans cet appareil sont la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. → Suivi de—pour modifier l'ordre des options ou des menus, vous devez exécuter une action. Exemple : Appuyez sur → Tous les progr. → Appareil photo (signifie que vous devez d'abord appuyer sur Démarrer, puis sur Tous les progr. et enfin sur Appareil photo) [ ] Crochets—touches du téléphone. Exemple : [ ] (représente la touche marche/arrêt) < > Crochets—touches du téléphone auxquelles sont associées des fonctions différentes selon l'écran. Exemple : (représente la touche écran Sélectionner) • Java™ est une marque de Sun Microsystems, Inc. • Bluetooth ® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. dans le monde entier—Bluetooth QD ID: B013854. • Windows Media Player ® est une marque déposée de Microsoft Corporation.4 • Cet appareil contient un logiciel sous licence MS, une société affiliée de Microsoft Corporation. Microsoft et les logiciels portant le nom de Microsoft sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. Avant d'utiliser cet appareil, veuillez lire les CONDITIONS DE LICENCE MICROSOFT POUR LE LOGICIEL WINDOWS MOBILE 6.1, à la fin de ce mode d'emploi, pour prendre connaissance de différentes informations relatives aux droits et restrictions.5 Informations relatives à la sécurité et à l'utilisation Conformez-vous toujours aux mises en garde suivantes afin de prévenir toute situation dangereuse ou illégale et de garantir des performances optimales. Ne laissez pas le téléphone à la portée des enfants en bas âge et des animaux domestiques Conservez le téléphone, ses pièces détachées et ses accessoires hors de portée des enfants en bas âge et des animaux. L'ingestion de petites pièces peut provoquer un étouffement ou des blessures graves. Installez le téléphone et ses accessoires avec précaution Veillez à la bonne fixation de votre téléphone portable et de ses accessoires dans votre véhicule. Évitez de poser votre téléphone ou l'un de ses accessoires à proximité de la zone d'ouverture des airbags. Si l'équipement téléphonique n'est pas installé correctement, le déclenchement de l'airbag pourrait provoquer des blessures graves. Mises en garde6 Utilisez les batteries et les chargeurs avec bon sens et éliminez les selon la réglementation en vigueur • Utilisez uniquement des batteries homologuées par Samsung et des chargeurs spécifiquement conçus pour votre téléphone. L'utilisation de batteries et de chargeurs non compatibles peut provoquer des blessures graves ou endommager votre téléphone. • Ne jetez jamais une batterie ou un appareil au feu. Respectez la réglementation en vigueur concernant le recyclage des batteries et des appareils usagés. • Ne posez jamais les batteries ou le appareil dans ou sur un appareil chauffant, tel qu'un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur. En cas de surchauffe, les batteries risquent d'exploser. • Veillez à ne pas écraser ou perforer la batterie. Évitez d'exposer la batterie à une pression externe élevée qui risquerait d'entraîner un court-circuit interne et une surchauffe. Évitez les interférences avec les stimulateurs cardiaques Conformément aux directives des fabricants et du Wireless Technology Research, programme américain de recherche sur les technologies de téléphonie mobile, maintenez une distance minimale de 15 cm (6 pouces) entre votre téléphone et le stimulateur cardiaque pour éviter toute interférence. Si vous pensez que votre téléphone vient perturber le fonctionnement d'un stimulateur cardiaque ou d'un appareil médical, éteignez le immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur ou de l'appareil médical.7 Éteignez le téléphone dans les zones potentiellement explosives N'utilisez pas votre téléphone dans une station service ou à proximité de produits combustibles ou chimiques. Éteignez le téléphone dans les lieux où son utilisation est interdite. Votre téléphone peut provoquer une explosion ou un incendie dans ou près des lieux de stockage ou de transfert de produits chimiques ou combustibles ou dans les zones de dynamitage. Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même habitacle que le téléphone, ses composants ou ses accessoires. Réduisez les risques de lésions engendrées par des gestes répétitifs Lorsque vous envoyez des SMS ou jouez à des jeux sur votre appareil, tenez-le de manière détendue, appuyez légèrement sur les touches, utilisez les fonctions spéciales (modèles et saisie intuitive) pour réduire le nombre de touches à manipuler et faites régulièrement des pauses. N'utilisez pas votre téléphone en conduisant Évitez d'utiliser votre téléphone en conduisant et respectez la réglementation concernant l'utilisation des téléphones portables en voiture. Utilisez un kit mains libres pour conduire en toute sécurité. Consignes de sécurité8 Observez toutes les mises en garde et les consignes de sécurité Respectez la réglementation interdisant l'utilisation des téléphones portables dans certains lieux. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires homologués par Samsung L'utilisation d'accessoires non compatibles peut endommager le téléphone ou provoquer des blessures. Éteignez votre téléphone à proximité de tout appareil médical Votre téléphone peut provoquer des interférences avec les équipements médicaux utilisés dans les hôpitaux et les centres de soins. Observez la réglementation en vigueur ainsi que les consignes et mises en garde affichées par le personnel médical. Éteignez le téléphone ou désactivez les fonctions radio lorsque vous voyagez en avion Les téléphones portables peuvent engendrer des interférences avec les équipements aéronautiques. Conformez-vous aux réglementations en vigueur et éteignez votre téléphone ou passez en mode hors-ligne qui vous permettra de désactiver les fonctions radio (GSM + Bluetooth) de votre téléphone. Protégez les batteries et les chargeurs • Évitez d'exposer les batteries à des températures extrêmes (inférieures à 0° C/32° F ou supérieures à 45° C/ 113° F). Les températures très faibles ou très élevées peuvent affecter la capacité de charge et la durée de vie des batteries.9 • Évitez tout contact entre les batteries et des objets métalliques, cela risquerait de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et - et d'endommager les batteries de manière temporaire ou permanente. • N'utilisez jamais de batterie ou de chargeur endommagé. Manipulez votre téléphone avec soin • Évitez tout contact avec des liquides—ils risquent de provoquer des dégâts sérieux. N'utilisez pas le téléphone avec les mains mouillées. L'eau peut endommager votre téléphone et entraîner l'annulation de la garantie du fabricant. • Ne stockez pas votre téléphone dans un endroit poussiéreux ou sale. Ses composants mobiles risquent de se détériorer. • Votre téléphone est un appareil électronique complexe. Protégez-le de tout choc afin d'éviter de graves dégâts. • Peindre le téléphone risque de bloquer ses pièces mobiles et de perturber son fonctionnement. • N'utilisez ni le flash ni l'éclairage du téléphone trop près des yeux des enfants et des animaux. • Les champs magnétiques peuvent endommager votre téléphone et les cartes mémoire. N'utilisez pas d'étui ni d'accessoires dotés de fermetures aimantées et évitez toute exposition prolongée de votre téléphone à des champs magnétiques.10 Évitez les interférences avec d'autres appareils électroniques Les signaux de radiofréquence émis par votre téléphone peuvent perturber le fonctionnement des systèmes électroniques mal installés ou insuffisamment protégés, notamment les stimulateurs cardiaques, les prothèses auditives, les équipements médicaux, électroniques domestiques et automobiles. Contactez les fabricants de ces appareils électroniques pour résoudre les éventuels problèmes d'interférences. Utilisez votre téléphone normalement Évitez tout contact avec l'antenne interne de votre téléphone. Toute réparation doit être réalisée par un technicien agréé Un technicien non agréé pourrait endommager votre téléphone ce qui entraînerait, de ce fait, l'annulation de la garantie. Préservez la durée de vie des batteries et du chargeur • Ne laissez pas la batterie en charge pendant plus d'une semaine, car une surcharge risque de raccourcir sa durée de vie. Consignes d'utilisation importantes11 • Lorsqu'elle n'est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une batterie pleine se décharge progressivement. • Lorsque le chargeur n'est pas utilisé, ne le laissez pas branché à une prise de courant. • Utilisez la batterie pour votre téléphone uniquement. Manipulez les cartes SIM et les cartes mémoire avec précaution • Ne retirez pas une carte lorsque le téléphone est en cours d'enregistrement ou de lecture, car vous risqueriez de perdre des données et/ou d'endommager la carte ou le téléphone. • Protégez les cartes contre les chocs violents, les décharges électrostatiques et les nuisances électriques émanant d'autres appareils. • Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d'effacement et d'écriture réduit la durée de vie de la carte mémoire. • Ne touchez pas la puce avec vos doigts ou avec des objets métalliques. Si la carte est sale, nettoyez-la avec un chiffon doux. Garantir l'accès aux services d'urgence Dans certains lieux et dans certaines circonstances, il peut être impossible de joindre les numéros d'urgence avec votre téléphone. Avant de vous rendre dans des régions non couvertes ou isolées, prévoyez un autre moyen pour contacter les services d'urgence. Informations sur la certification DAS Votre téléphone a été conçu pour ne pas dépasser les limites d'exposition aux radiofréquences (RF) recommandées par le Conseil de l'Union européenne. 12 Ces normes empêchent la vente d'appareils mobiles qui dépassent le niveau d'exposition maximal (également connu sous le nom de DAS ou Débit d'absorption spécifique) de 2.0 watts par kilogramme de tissu humain. Au cours des essais, la valeur DAS maximale enregistrée pour ce modèle était de 0.661 watt par kilogramme. Au cours d'une utilisation normale, la valeur DAS réelle sera généralement beaucoup plus faible, car le téléphone n'émet que l'énergie RF nécessaire à la transmission du signal vers la station de base la plus proche. Le téléphone minimise ainsi votre exposition globale à l'énergie RF en émettant automatiquement à des niveaux plus faibles dès que cela est possible. Cependant, par mesure de précaution, quelques dispositions simples peuvent contribuer à diminuer le niveau d'exposition aux radiofréquences. Ainsi, afin de réduire au maximum la puissance d'émission de votre téléphone, veillez à l'utiliser dans des conditions de réception optimales, l'indicateur de puissance du signal affiché à l'écran comportant alors un nombre suffisant de barres. En général, plus vous êtes proche d'un relais, moins la puissance utilisée par le téléphone est élevée. Par ailleurs, il est également recommandé d'utiliser autant que possible le kit piéton. Cependant, on veillera dans ce cas à éloigner le téléphone du ventre des femmes enceintes et du bas ventre des enfants et des adolescents. La Déclaration de conformité figurant au dos de ce mode d'emploi atteste de la conformité de votre téléphone avec la directive européenne R&TTE sur les équipements terminaux de télécommunications et les équipements radio. Pour plus d'informations sur le DAS et les normes européennes correspondantes, consultez le site Web de Samsung mobile.13 Recyclage (Déchets d'équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable dans le cadre de l'Union européenne et des autres pays européens utilisant des systèmes de collecte sélective) Ce symbole sur le produit ou sur sa documentation indique qu'il ne doit pas être éliminé en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. En raison des risques que l'élimination non contrôlée des déchets représente pour l'environnement et la santé de l'homme, veuillez séparer ce produit des autres types de déchets et le recycler de façon responsable. Vous favoriserez ainsi la réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles. Les particuliers sont invités à contacter leur distributeur ou à se renseigner auprès de leur mairie pour savoir où et comment ils peuvent se débarrasser de ce produit afin qu'il soit recyclé dans le respect de l'environnement. Les entreprises sont invitées à contacter leur fournisseur et à se référer aux conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit ne doit pas être éliminé avec les autres déchets commerciaux. 14 Elimination des batteries de ce produit (Applicable aux pays de l'Union européenne et aux autres pays européens dans lesquels des systèmes de collecte sélective sont mis en place) Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l'emballage indique que les batteries de ce produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. L'indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si les batteries ne sont pas correctement éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l'environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d'encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et à les recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des batteries.15 Guide de prise en main rapide Contenu du coffret Sortez le téléphone de son coffret et vérifiez que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : • Smartphone • Kit piéton • Batterie • Guide de prise en main rapide • Chargeur • Câble de connexion PC • CD-ROM1 • Les éléments fournis avec votre téléphone peuvent varier en fonction des logiciels et accessoires disponibles dans votre région ou proposés par votre opérateur. Vous pouvez acquérir d'autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. • Utilisez exclusivement des logiciels autorisés par Samsung. L'utilisation de logiciels illégaux ou piratés peut entraîner des dommages ou des dysfonctionnements qui ne sont pas couverts par la garantie du fabricant. 1. Le CD-ROM contient le logiciel Microsoft ActiveSync, des modules complémentaires et d'autres applications.16 Présentation du téléphone Présentation des touches et fonctions de la face avant de votre téléphone : Présentation des touches et fonctions de la face arrière de votre téléphone : Écouteur Écran Touche terminer/ verrouiller Touche écran droite Touche Retour/ Supprimer Touches de navigation (Haut/ Bas/Gauche/Droite) Touche de confirmation Microphone Touche marche/ arrêt Objectif photo avant Touche de volume Emplacement pour carte mémoire Touche d'appel Touche Accueil/ Gestionnaire des tâches Clavier AZERTY Touche écran gauche Objectif photo arrière Cache de la batterie Connecteur à fonctions multiples Miroir Antenne intégrée17 Touches Touche Fonction Allumer ou éteindre l'appareil (maintenir la touche enfoncée) ; ouvrir le menu rapide Exécuter les actions indiquées au bas de l'écran Parcourir les listes ou les menus et déplacer le curseur vers le haut, le bas, la gauche ou la droite Confirmer votre sélection ou exécuter l'application sélectionnée Ouvrir l'écran de numérotation ; appeler un correspondant ou répondre à un appel Mettre fin à un appel ; revenir à l'écran d'accueil ; verrouiller l'appareil (maintenir la touche enfoncée) Basculer vers l'écran d'accueil à partir d'un programme ; ouvrir le Gestionnaire des tâches (maintenir la touche enfoncée) Revenir au menu ou à l'écran précédent ; supprimer des caractères ~ Saisir des chiffres, des caractères et des symboles Supprimer des caractères Touche Fonction18 Dans un champ de texte, permet de saisir des caractères de la moitié supérieure des touches Confirmer la sélection ; permet d'effectuer un retour à la ligne en mode de saisie de texte Changer la casse en mode de saisie de texte Lancer le navigateur WAP Ouvrir l'écran des symboles en mode saisie de texte (maintenir la touche enfoncée) ; ouvrir la liste des modes de saisie de texte en mode saisie de texte Touche Fonction Utiliser l'alphabet Unicode spécial pour les langues autres que l'anglais Activer ou désactiver le mode Vibreur à partir de l'écran d'accueil (maintenir la touche enfoncée) ; insérer un espace en mode de saisie de texte Ouvrir la messagerie Activer l'appareil photo (maintenir la touche enfoncée) ; ouvrir le Gestionnaire de contenu Régler le volume du téléphone ; couper la sonnerie d'un appel entrant Touche Fonction19 Icônes Signification des icônes qui apparaissent à l'écran. Icône Signification Puissance du signal Appel vocal en cours Appel de données en cours Appel en attente Réseau GPRS disponible Réseau GPRS connecté Réseau EDGE disponible Réseau EDGE connecté Itinérance en GPRS Réseau UMTS disponible Niveau de charge de la batterie Sonnerie réglée sur vibreur Ligne téléphonique 1 ou 2 (service réseau) Itinérance (hors de la zone de service normale) Bluetooth activé Casque Bluetooth connecté Erreur de synchronisation Nouveau SMS ou MMS Nouveau message instantané Nouveau message vocal Appel manqué Transfert d'appels actif Icône Signification20 Installation et préparation de votre téléphone Cette section décrit comment préparer votre téléphone mobile en vue de sa première utilisation. Installer la carte SIM et la batterie Lorsque vous vous abonnez à un service de téléphonie mobile, une carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) vous est remise. Elle permet de vous identifier et contient tous les détails de votre abonnement (code PIN, services disponibles en option, etc.). Pour bénéficier des services UMTS ou HSDPA, vous devez disposer d'une carte USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module). Pour installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie : 1. Retirez le cache de la batterie. Si l'appareil est allumé, maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée pour l'éteindre.21 2. Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM. 3. Installez la batterie. 4. Remettez le cache de la batterie en place. • Installez la carte SIM ou USIM en orientant la puce vers le bas. • Retirez la batterie avant d'insérer ou de retirer la carte SIM ou USIM.22 Mettre la batterie en charge Vous devez charger la batterie avant d'utiliser le téléphone pour la première fois. 1. Ouvrez le cache du connecteur à fonctions multiples, sur le côté de l'appareil. 2. Branchez la fiche du chargeur sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples. 3. Branchez le chargeur sur une prise secteur. 4. Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée (l'icône ne bouge plus), débranchez le chargeur de la prise secteur. 5. Débranchez le chargeur de l'appareil. 6. Refermez le cache du connecteur à fonctions multiples. Triangle orienté vers le haut Informations sur l'indicateur de faible charge Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, le téléphone émet une tonalité et affiche un message d'avertissement. L'icône de batterie est alors vide et clignote. Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est vraiment insuffisant, le téléphone s'éteint automatiquement. Rechargez la batterie pour remettre le téléphone en marche.23 Insérer une carte mémoire (en option) Pour stocker des fichiers multimédia supplémentaires, vous pouvez utiliser une carte mémoire. Le téléphone est compatible avec les cartes microSDTM d'une capacité allant jusqu'à 8 Go (en fonction de la marque et du modèle de carte mémoire). 1. Ouvrez le compartiment à carte mémoire, sur le côté de l'appareil. 2. Introduisez une carte mémoire, étiquette orientée vers le haut. 3. Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son emplacement jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille. Pour retirer la carte mémoire, enfoncez-la légèrement jusqu'à ce qu'elle se déverrouille, puis retirez-la du téléphone. Mise en marche/arrêt du téléphone Pour allumer le téléphone : 1. Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée pour allumer l'appareil. 2. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour définir votre région, votre ville, l'heure et la date. L'appareil se connecte automatiquement au réseau de téléphonie mobile. Pour éteindre le téléphone, répétez l'étape 1 ci-dessus.24 Verrouiller ou déverrouiller les touches Vous pouvez verrouiller les touches pour empêcher toute utilisation accidentelle du téléphone. Sur l'écran d'accueil, maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée. Pour déverrouiller le clavier, appuyez sur → [ ]. Désactiver les fonctions sans fil Vous pouvez désactiver les fonctions sans fil de l'appareil lorsque leur utilisation est interdite, par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux, pour continuer à utiliser les fonctions de votre appareil qui ne nécessitent pas de connexion radio (GSM + Bluetooth). Pour désactiver les fonctions sans fil : 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur [ ] → Gestionnaire sans fil. 2. Sélectionnez Téléphone et appuyez sur la touche de confirmation. Le symbole s'affiche sur l'écran d'accueil. 3. Appuyez sur . Pour activer les fonctions sans fil, répétez les étapes 2 à 3 ci-dessus. Le symbole s'affiche sur l'écran d'accueil. Utilisation des applications Ouvrir des applications ou des dossiers 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur . 2. Sélectionnez une application et appuyez sur la touche de confirmation. Reportez-vous au mode d'emploi pour en savoir plus sur les fonctions d'affichage et de gestion de documents de l'appareil.25 Changer d'application Votre appareil est multitâche et permet l'exécution simultanée de plusieurs applications. Pour passer d'une application active à une autre : 1. Appuyez sur [ ] → . 2. Sélectionnez une application et appuyez sur la touche de confirmation. Fermer une application Pour quitter l'application en cours, appuyez sur [ ]. Pour fermer une application ouverte en arrièreplan : 1. Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée pour ouvrir le Gestionnaire des tâches. 2. Sélectionnez une application et appuyez sur . Fonctions d'appel de base Découvrez comment appeler un numéro et répondre à un appel et comment utiliser les fonctions d'appel de base. Passer un appel 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, saisissez un numéro de téléphone avec son indicatif. 2. Appuyez sur [ ] pour composer ce numéro. Pour passer un appel visio, appuyez sur → Appel visio pour composer le numéro. 3. Pour mettre fin à l'appel, appuyez sur [ ]. Répondre à un appel 1. Lorsque le téléphone reçoit un appel, appuyez sur [ ]. 2. Pour mettre fin à l'appel, appuyez sur [ ].26 Réglage du volume Pour régler le volume en cours d'appel, utilisez la touche de volume haut ou bas. Afficher les appels manqués et rappeler les numéros correspondants Votre téléphone affiche à l'écran les appels que vous avez manqués. Pour composer le numéro d'un appel manqué : 1. Appuyez sur la touche de confirmation. 2. Sélectionnez l'appel manqué de votre choix. 3. Appuyez sur [ ] pour composer son numéro. Appeler un numéro récemment composé 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur [ ] pour ouvrir la liste des numéros récents. 2. Sélectionnez le numéro souhaité et appuyez sur [ ] pour le composer. Composer un numéro international 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, maintenez la touche [0] enfoncée pour insérer le caractère +. 2. Saisissez le numéro de téléphone complet (indicatif du pays, indicatif régional et numéro de téléphone), puis appuyez sur la touche [ ] pour le composer.27 Appeler un correspondant à partir du Répertoire Vous pouvez appeler directement des numéros à partir du Répertoire à l'aide des contacts enregistrés. X p. 28 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur → Répertoire. 2. Sélectionnez le numéro souhaité et appuyez sur [ ] pour le composer. Envoi et consultation des SMS Découvrez comment envoyer ou consulter des SMS. Envoyer un SMS 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur → Messagerie → SMS/MMS. 2. Appuyez sur → Nouveau. 3. Entrez un numéro de téléphone ou appuyez sur la touche de confirmation pour sélectionner un contact. 4. Naviguez vers le bas et rédigez le texte du message. 5. Pour envoyer le message, appuyez sur . Saisir un texte Votre appareil est muni d'un clavier AZERTY pour une saisie de texte facile et rapide. Saisissez votre texte comme vous le feriez avec un clavier d'ordinateur. Lors de la saisie, vous pouvez utiliser les touches suivantes : • : supprimer des caractères • : commencer une nouvelle ligne • Fn : utiliser les caractères de la partie supérieure de la touche28 • shift : changer la casse • sym : ouvrir la liste des symboles (maintenir la touche enfoncée) • âë : utiliser l'alphabet Unicode spécial pour les langues autres que l'anglais • espace : insérer un espace Lire un SMS 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur → Messagerie → SMS/MMS. 2. Sélectionnez un SMS. Ajout et recherche de contacts Fonctions de base du Répertoire. Ajouter un nouveau contact 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, entrez un numéro de téléphone et appuyez sur . 2. Appuyez sur la touche de confirmation → un type de contact. 3. Complétez les coordonnées du contact. 4. Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur ou sur pour enregistrer le contact. Rechercher un contact 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur → Répertoire. 2. Saisissez la première lettre du nom recherché. 3. Sélectionnez le nom du contact dans la liste de recherche. Une fois le contact localisé, vous pouvez : • l'appeler en appuyant sur [ ] • modifier ses coordonnées en appuyant sur → Modifier29 Fonctions de base de l'appareil photo Cette section décrit les fonctions de base pour photographier, filmer et visionner les clichés et vidéos. Prendre des photos 1. Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée pour activer l'appareil photo. 2. Orientez l'objectif vers le sujet et procédez à la mise au point (voir "Utiliser le clavier en mode Appareil photo"). 3. Pour prendre une photo, appuyez sur la touche de confirmation. 4. Appuyez sur pour enregistrer la photo. Utiliser le clavier en mode Appareil photo Touche Fonction Navigation (Gauche/Droite) Régler la luminosité Navigation (Haut) Changer le mode objectif Navigation (Bas) Régler le retardateur avant la prise du cliché 1 Basculer en mode Caméscope 2 Changer le mode de prise de vue 3 Modifier la taille de l'image 4 Modifier la balance des blancs 5 Changer d'effet30 Visualiser des photos 1. Dans l'objectif de l'appareil photo, appuyez sur . 2. Sélectionnez une photo et appuyez sur la touche de confirmation. Filmer des vidéos 1. Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée pour activer l'appareil photo. 2. Appuyez sur [1] pour passer en mode Caméscope. 3. Orientez l'objectif vers le sujet et procédez à la mise au point (voir "Utiliser le clavier en mode Caméscope"). 4. Appuyez sur la touche de confirmation pour commencer à enregistrer. 5. Appuyez sur < > pour arrêter l'enregistrement. 6. Appuyez sur pour enregistrer la vidéo. Utiliser le clavier en mode Caméscope 6 Activer ou désactiver le mode Nuit 7 Modifier les paramètres Volume Zoom avant ou arrière Touche Fonction Touche Fonction Navigation (Gauche/Droite) Régler la luminosité Navigation (Haut) Changer le mode objectif Navigation (Bas) Régler le retardateur avant l'enregistrement de la vidéo31 Visionner des vidéos 1. Dans le viseur du caméscope, appuyez sur . 2. Sélectionnez une vidéo et appuyez sur la touche de confirmation. Lecteur audio Votre téléphone vous permet d'écouter de la musique à l'aide du lecteur audio. Ajouter des fichiers audio dans l'appareil Commencez par ajouter des fichiers sur votre appareil ou sur une carte mémoire : • Téléchargez sur le WAP. • Téléchargez depuis un ordinateur à l'aide du logiciel Samsung PC Studio (en option). • Recevez des fichiers via Bluetooth. • Copiez des fichiers sur une carte mémoire. • Synchronisez le téléphone avec Windows Media Player 11. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi. 1 Basculer en mode Appareil photo 2 Modifier le mode d'enregistrement 3 Modifier la taille du cadre 4 Modifier la balance des blancs 5 Changer d'effet 7 Modifier les paramètres Volume Zoom avant ou arrière Touche Fonction32 Lire un fichier audio 1. Ajoutez des fichiers audio dans l'appareil. 2. Dans l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur → Windows Media. 3. Appuyez sur → Mettre à jour bibliothèque. 4. Une fois les bibliothèques actualisées, appuyez sur . 5. Sélectionnez Ma musique. 6. Sélectionnez une catégorie → un fichier audio. 7. Les touches suivantes permettent de contrôler la lecture : 8. Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur → Arrêter. Touche Fonction Confirmer Mettre en pause ou reprendre après une pause Volume/ Navigation (Haut/Bas) Régler le volume Navigation (Gauche) Redémarrer la lecture. Revenir au fichier précédent (maintenir enfoncée pendant 3 secondes). Reculer dans le fichier (maintenir la touche enfoncée) Navigation (Droite) Passer au fichier suivant. Avancer dans le fichier (maintenir la touche enfoncée) 0 Basculer en mode plein écran (fichier vidéo uniquement) espace Activer et désactiver le son Touche Fonction33 Créer une liste de lecture 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur → Windows Media. 2. Appuyez sur → Bibliothèque → Ma musique. 3. Sélectionnez une catégorie → un fichier audio. 4. Appuyez sur → Mettre en file d'attente. 5. Pour ajouter d'autres fichiers, répétez les étapes 2 et 3. 6. Appuyez sur → Lecteur. 7. Pour enregistrer la liste de lecture, appuyez sur → Enregistrer la sélection. 8. Saisissez le nom de la liste de lecture et appuyez sur . Personnalisation de l'appareil Tirez le meilleur de votre appareil en l'adaptant selon vos préférences. Modifier la sonnerie Vous pouvez modifier la sonnerie en la sélectionnant à partir d'un profil. Activer un profil 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Profils. 2. Sélectionnez un profil et appuyez sur . Pour changer rapidement de profil, appuyez sur [ ] et choisissez un autre profil.34 Personnaliser un profil 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Profils. 2. Sélectionnez un profil, puis appuyez sur → Modifier. 3. Modifiez les paramètres selon vos préférences. 4. Lorsque vous avez terminé de personnaliser le profil, appuyez sur . Choisir un thème pour l'arrière-plan ou un fond d'écran. 1. Dans l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Affichage → Écran d'accueil. 2. Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour changer le thème dans l'option Affich. écran d'accueil. 3. Sélectionnez Image d'arrière-plan. 4. Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour sélectionner une image d'arrière-plan. 5. Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur .Déclaration de conformité (R&TTE) Nous, Samsung Electronics déclarons sous notre seule responsabilité que le produit Téléphone mobile GSM : C6625 en relation avec cette déclaration est en conformité avec les normes suivantes et/ou d'autres documents normatifs. Sécurité EN 60950-1 : 2001+A11:2004 EMC EN 301 489-01 V1.6.1 (09-2005) EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005) EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1 (08-2002) EN 301 489-24 V1.3.1 (11-2005) SAR EN 50360 : 2001 EN 62209-1 : 2006 Radio EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003) EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006) EN 301 908-1 V2.2.1 (03-2003) EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 (05-2007) EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 (05-2007) Ce téléphone a été testé et s'est avéré conforme aux normes relatives à l'émission de fréquences radio. En outre, nous déclarons que cet appareil répond à la directive 1999/5/EC. La procédure de déclaration de conformité, définie dans l'article 10, puis reprise à l'alinéa [IV] de la directive 1999/5/EC a été conduite sous contrôle de l'organisme suivant : BABT, Balfour House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK* Numéro d'identification : 0168 Documentation technique détenue par : Samsung Electronics QA Lab. disponible sur simple demande. (Représentant pour l'union européenne) Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab. Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK* 2009.01.14 Yong-Sang Park / Directeur Général (lieu et date de parution) (nom et signature du responsable dûment habilité) * Cette adresse n'est pas celle du Centre de service de Samsung. Pour obtenir celle-ci, consultez la carte de la garantie ou contactez le revendeur de votre téléphone. imagine as possibilidades Obrigado por adquirir um produto da Samsung. Registe o seu produto e participe das nossas promoções no site: www.samsung.com/register Frigorifico manual do utilizador Português Aparelho Não Encastrável2_ características características do seu novo frigorífico PRINCIPAIS CARACTERÍSTICAS DO SEU NOVO FRIGORÍFICO O seu Frigorífico Samsung está equipado com várias opções inovadoras de armazenamento e eficiência energética. • Sistema de Refrigeração Twin O Frigorífico e o Congelador têm evaporadores separados. Devido a este sistema de refrigeração independente, o Congelador e o Frigorífico refrigeram com mais eficiência. Adicionalmente, este sistema de fluxo de ar separado evita que o odor dos alimentos de um compartimento se espalhe para os outros compartimentos. • Espaço Maior e Mais Amplo A área vasta da prateleira fornece espaço suficiente para itens grandes. A gaveta larga do congelador também oferece espaço suficiente para 2~3 perus. • Fecho Automático Seguro A opção de Fecho Automático Seguro fechará automaticamente uma porta que esteja ligeiramente aberta. • Ecrã Digital e Controlo da Temperatura • Alarme da Porta Um sinal sonoro alerta-o se alguma porta estiver entreaberta. Para futura referência, escreva o número do modelo e o número de série. Encontrará o seu número de modelo e o número de série do lado esquerdo do frigorífico. N.º do modelo N.º de série Notificação CE Este produto foi fabricado de acordo com as Directivas de Baixa Voltagem (2006/95/EC), a Directiva de Compatibilidade electromagnética (2004/108/EC) e a Directiva de Eco-Design (2009/125/EC) implementadas pelo Regulamento (EC) Nr 643/2009 da União Europeia.informações de segurança _3 informações de segurança INFORMAÇÕES DE SEGURANÇA SÍMBOLO DE AVISO/CUIDADOS DE UTILIZAÇÃO AVISO Indica que existe perigo de morte ou graves lesões. CUIDADO Indica que existe risco de lesões ou danos materiais. OUTROS SÍMBOLOS UTILIZADOS Representa algo que NÃO deve fazer. Representa algo que NÃO deve desmontar. Representa algo em que NÃO deve tocar. Representa algo que deve cumprir. Indica que deve desligar a ficha de alimentação da tomada. Representa que deve existir uma ligação à terra para evitar choques eléctricos. Recomendamos que este símbolo seja alvo de acção por parte de um técnico de assistência técnica. • Antes de utilizar o aparelho, leia atentamente este manual e guarde-o para referência futura. AVISO • Uma vez que as instruções de funcionamento que se seguem abrangem vários modelos, as características do seu frigorífico podem ser ligeiramente diferentes das características descritas neste manual. AVISO Os sinais de aviso apresentados destinam-se a evitar ferimentos pessoais e a terceiros. Siga-os explicitamente. Após ler esta secção, guarde o manual num local seguro para referência futura. • Este frigorífico deve ser instalado e posicionado de modo correcto e em conformidade com o manual antes de ser usado. • Use este aparelho apenas para o efeito a que se destina, conforme descrito neste Manual de instruções. • Recomendamos vivamente que qualquer operação de assistência técnica seja realizada por um técnico qualificado. • O R600a ou R134a podem ser utilizados como agentes refrigerantes. Consulte a etiqueta do compressor na parte traseira do aparelho e a etiqueta de características no interior do frigorífico para ver qual o agente refrigerante utilizado para o frigorífico. • Caso seja utilizado o agente refrigerante R600a, há que ter em mente que se trata de um gás natural com elevada compatibilidade ambiental, mas que é, no entanto, também inflamável. Quando transportar e instalar o aparelho, deve tomar cuidado para assegurar que nenhuma das peças do circuito de refrigeração é danificada. • A fuga de agente refrigerante dos tubos pode provocar um incêndio ou lesões nos olhos. Se for detectada uma fuga, evite todas as fontes de chamas ou fontes potenciais de ignição e areje a divisão onde o aparelho se encontra durante vários minutos.informações de segurança 4_ informações de segurança SINAIS DE AVISO MUITO IMPORTANTES • De modo a evitar a criação de uma mistura de gás e ar inflamável no caso de ocorrer uma fuga no circuito de refrigeração, a dimensão da divisão na qual se pode colocar o aparelho deve depender da quantidade de agente refrigerante utilizado. AVISO • Nunca ligue um aparelho que apresente sinais de estar danificado. No caso de dúvida, consulte o seu agente autorizado. • A divisão deve ter 1 m3 de tamanho por cada 8g de agente refrigerante R600a no interior do aparelho. • A quantidade de agente refrigerante no seu frigorífico específico é indicada na placa de identificação no interior do aparelho. • Elimine o material da embalagem deste produto de um modo amigo do ambiente. • Retire a ficha de alimentação eléctrica da tomada antes de substituir a luz interior no frigorífico. - Caso contrário, existe um risco de choques eléctricos. • Não coloque este frigorífico exposto à luz directa do sol ou ao calor de fogões, aquecedores ou outros aparelhos que gerem calor. • Deixe um espaço suficiente para instalar o frigorífico numa superfície plana. - Se o seu frigorífico não estiver nivelado, o sistema de refrigeração interno pode não funcionar correctamente. • Não ligue vários aparelhos na mesma tomada. O frigorífico deve estar sempre ligado na sua própria tomada eléctrica individual cuja tensão deve corresponder à informação indicada na placa de tensão. - Isto permite um melhor desempenho e evita também a sobrecarga dos circuitos eléctricos domésticos, o que poderia provocar um incêndio a partir de fios eléctricos sobreaquecidos. • Nunca desligue a ficha do seu frigorífico puxando pelo cabo de alimentação. Segure sempre firmemente na ficha e puxe-a directamente para fora da tomada. - Cabos danificados podem provocar curto-circuitos, incêndios e/ou choques eléctricos. • Certifique-se de que a ficha de alimentação não é entalada nem danificada pela parte traseira do frigorífico. • Não dobre o cabo de alimentação excessivamente nem coloque objectos pesados em cima deste. - Tal situação pode constituir um perigo de incêndio. • Se o cabo de alimentação for danificado ou se descarnar, leve-o para ser reparado ou substituído imediatamente junto do fabricante ou do seu agente autorizado de assistência técnica. • Não utilize um cabo com fissuras ou danos provocados por abrasão ao longo do seu comprimento ou de qualquer uma das extremidades. • Se o cabo de alimentação estiver danificado, substitua-o imediatamente junto do fabricante ou do seu agente autorizado de assistência técnica. • Quando deslocar o frigorífico, tenha cuidado para não danificar nem passar com ele por cima do cabo de alimentação. • Não introduza a ficha de alimentação eléctrica com as mãos molhadas. • Desligue o frigorífico da tomada eléctrica antes de o limpar ou de efectuar reparações. • Não use um pano húmido ou molhado quando estiver a limpar a ficha. • Retire todas e quaisquer matérias estranhas ou poeiras dos pinos da ficha de alimentação eléctrica. - Caso contrário, existe perigo de incêndio. • Se desligar o frigorífico da tomada de alimentação eléctrica, deve aguardar pelo menos dez minutos antes de voltar a ligar. • Se a tomada de parede estiver solta, não introduza a ficha de alimentação eléctrica. - Existe um risco de incêndio ou de choque eléctrico. • O aparelho deve ser colocado de modo a que a ficha eléctrica fique acessível depois da instalação • Não instale o frigorífico num local húmido ou num local onde possa entrar em contacto com água. AVISO - Um isolamento incorrecto das peças eléctricas pode provocar um choque eléctrico ou um incêndio.informações de segurança _5 informações de segurança SINAIS DE CUIDADO • O frigorífico deve ser ligado à terra. - Tem de ligar o frigorífico à terra para evitar qualquer fuga de corrente ou choques eléctricos causados por fuga de corrente do frigorífico. • Não tente desmontar ou reparar o frigorífico por si próprio. - Se o fizer, corre o risco de provocar um incêndio, avarias e/ou ferimentos pessoais. • Se sentir o odor de produtos farmacêuticos ou fumo proveniente do frigorífico, desligue imediatamente a ficha de alimentação da tomada e contacte o seu centro de assistência técnica da Samsung Electronics. • Mantenha o orifício de ventilação na estrutura do aparelho ou na estrutura de montagem livre de qualquer obstrução. • Não utilize dispositivos mecânicos ou qualquer outro meio para acelerar o processo de descongelamento, para além dos recomendados pelo fabricante. • Não danifique o circuito de refrigeração. • Não utilize nem coloque aparelhos eléctricos no interior do frigorífico/congelador, a menos que sejam de um tipo recomendado pelo fabricante. • Antes de substituir a luz interior, desligue o aparelho da tomada eléctrica. • Se tiver dificuldade ao tentar substituir a lâmpada, contacte o centro de assistência da Samsung. • Este aparelho não é indicado para ser utilizado por pessoas (incluindo crianças) com capacidades físicas, sensoriais ou mentais reduzidas, ou falta de experiência e conhecimento, excepto com supervisão e instruções relativas à utilização do aparelho por uma pessoa responsável pela sua segurança. • As crianças devem ser vigiadas para assegurar que não brincam com o aparelho. • Não deixe as crianças pendurarem-se na porta. Caso contrário, poderão ocorrer ferimentos graves. • Não toque nas paredes interiores do congelador ou nos produtos guardados no congelador com as mãos molhadas. - Isto pode causar queimaduras provocadas pelo gelo. • Se não for utilizar o frigorifico durante um longo período de tempo, desligue a ficha de alimentação eléctrica da tomada. - A deterioração do isolamento do cabo de alimentação pode provocar um incêndio. • Não coloque artigos em cima do aparelho. - Quando abrir ou fechar a porta, os artigos podem cair e provocar ferimentos pessoais e/ou danos materiais. • Nunca utilize tubos de gás, linhas telefónicas ou outros potenciais elementos pára-raios como ligação de terra. - A utilização incorrecta da ficha de ligação de terra pode resultar em choque eléctrico. • As garrafas devem ser armazenadas bem juntas de modo a que não caiam. • Não coloque bebidas carbonatadas ou com gás no compartimento do congelador. • Não encha o frigorífico com alimentos em excesso. - Quando abrir a porta, um artigo pode cair e provocar ferimentos pessoais ou danos materiais. • Não coloque garrafas ou outro tipo de recipientes de vidro no congelador. - Quando o conteúdo destes recipientes congelar, o vidro pode rachar e provocar ferimentos pessoais. • Não pulverize gás inflamável junto ao frigorífico. - Existe um risco de explosão ou incêndio. • Não pulverize água directamente no interior ou no exterior do frigorífico. - Existe um risco de incêndio ou de choque eléctrico. • Este produto destina-se a ser utilizado apenas para armazenar alimentos num ambiente doméstico. • Os períodos de armazenamento recomendados pelo fabricante e os prazos de validade de produtos congelados devem ser cumpridos. Consulte as instruções aplicáveis. CUIDADOinformações de segurança 6_ informações de segurança • Não guarde substâncias voláteis ou inflamáveis no frigorífico. - O armazenamento de benzina, diluente, álcool, éter, gás LP ou qualquer outra substância deste tipo pode provocar uma explosão. • Não volte a congelar alimentos congelados que tenham descongelado por completo. • Não guarde produtos farmacêuticos, materiais científicos ou quaisquer outros produtos sensíveis em termos de temperatura no frigorífico. - Os produtos que necessitam de um controlo de temperatura rígido não devem ser guardados no frigorífico. • Não coloque qualquer recipiente cheio de água em cima do frigorífico. - Se a água se entornar, existe um risco de incêndio ou choque eléctrico. SINAIS DE CUIDADO PARA A LIMPEZA • Não introduza as mãos na área inferior do aparelho. - Quaisquer arestas aguçadas existentes poderão provocar ferimentos pessoais. • Não use um pano húmido ou molhado quando estiver a limpar a ficha, a remover quaisquer materiais estranhos ou poeiras dos pinos da ficha de alimentação eléctrica. - Caso contrário, existe um perigo de incêndio. SINAIS DE AVISO PARA ELIMINAÇÃO DO APARELHO • Quando eliminar este ou outros frigoríficos, retire as portas/vedantes das portas e o fecho da porta de modo a que crianças pequenas e animais não possam ficar presos no interior. • Deixe as prateleiras no lugar de modo a que as crianças não possam subir facilmente para o interior. • O R600a ou R134a são utilizados como agentes refrigerantes. Consulte a etiqueta do compressor na parte traseira do aparelho e a etiqueta de características no interior do frigorífico para ver qual o agente refrigerante utilizado para o seu frigorífico. Se este produto tiver um gás inflamável (agente refrigerante R600a), contacte a respectiva autoridade local para obter informação sobre a eliminação segura deste produto. • O ciclopentano é utilizado como gás de sopro de isolamento. Os gases existentes no material de isolamento requerem procedimentos de eliminação especiais. Contacte as suas respectivas autoridades locais para obter informação relativamente à eliminação ambientalmente segura deste produto. Assegure-se de que nenhum dos tubos na parte traseira dos aparelhos está danificado antes de eliminar o produto. Os tubos deverão ser partidos num espaço aberto. Em caso de ocorrência de uma falha eléctrica, contacte o departamento local da Companhia Eléctrica e pergunte quanto tempo esta vai durar. A maior parte das falhas eléctricas que sejam corrigidas no espaço de uma ou duas horas não afectarão as temperaturas do seu frigorífico. Contudo, deve minimizar o número de vezes que abre a porta enquanto a alimentação está desligada. Na eventualidade da falha eléctrica durar mais de 24 horas, retire todos os alimentos congelados. Nos casos de portas e tampas com fechaduras e chaves, deve manter as chaves das portas e tampas fora do alcance das crianças e longe do aparelho de refrigeração, para evitar que as crianças possam ficar fechadas no seu interior. CUIDADOinformações de segurança informações de segurança _7 SUGESTÕES ADICIONAIS PARA USO ADEQUADO • Deixe o aparelho repousar durante 2 horas após a instalação. • Para obter o melhor desempenho do produto, - Não coloque alimentos demasiado perto dos orifícios de ventilação na parte traseira do aparelho uma vez que pode obstruir a livre circulação de ar no compartimento do frigorífico. - Embrulhe os alimentos de forma adequada ou coloque-os em recipientes estanques antes de os colocar no congelador do frigorífico. - Não coloque qualquer alimento introduzido recentemente para congelamento perto de alimentos já congelados. • Não é necessário desligar o frigorífico da fonte de alimentação eléctrica se for ausentar-se por menos de três semanas. Deve, no entanto, remover todos os alimentos no caso de se ausentar por três ou mais semanas. Desligue e limpe, lave e seque o frigorífico. • O aparelho pode não funcionar de forma consistente (possibilidade de descongelamento do conteúdo ou aumento da temperatura no compartimento de alimentos congelados) quando presente durante um longo período de tempo abaixo da extremidade fria do intervalo de temperaturas para as quais o aparelho foi concebido. • Não armazene alimentos que se estraguem facilmente a baixas temperaturas, como bananas ou melões. • Coloque a cuvete de gelo na posição original apresentada pelo fabricante por forma a obter um congelamento ideal de gelo. • O seu aparelho é isento de criação de gelo, o que significa que não é necessário descongelar o seu aparelho manualmente, uma vez que esta acção será realizada automaticamente. • O aumento de temperatura durante o descongelamento pode estar em conformidade com o requisito ISO. No entanto, se pretende evitar um aumento indevido da temperatura dos alimentos durante o descongelamento do aparelho, embrulhe os alimentos congelados em várias camadas de papel, como por exemplo papel de jornal. • Qualquer aumento de temperatura dos alimentos congelados durante o descongelamento pode reduzir o seu tempo de armazenamento. • Contém gases de efeito de estufa fluorinados abrangidos pelo Protocolo de Quioto. • Espuma contendo gases de efeito de estufa fluorinados. Sugestões de poupança de electricidade • Instale o aparelho numa divisão fresca, seca e com uma ventilação adequada. Certifique-se de que o aparelho não está exposto à luz directa do sol e nunca o coloque perto de uma fonte de calor directa (por exemplo, um aquecedor). • Nunca bloqueie quaisquer orifícios de ventilação ou grelhas existentes no aparelho. • Deixe a comida quente arrefecer antes de a colocar no aparelho. • Coloque comida congelada no frigorífico para descongelar. Pode assim utilizar as baixas temperatura dos produtos para arrefecer a comida no frigorífico. • Não deixe a porta do aparelho aberta durante muito tempo quando estiver a colocar comida no interior ou a retirar comida. Quando menor o tempo durante o qual a porta estiver aberta, menor o gelo que se irá formar no congelador. • Limpe regularmente a parte posterior do frigorífico. O pó aumenta o consumo de energia. • Não defina a temperatura para um nível mais frio do que o necessário. • Certifique-se de que a saída de ar do frigorífico é suficiente na base e na parte posterior do mesmo. Não tape as aberturas de ventilação de ar. • Quando instalar, liberte espaço à direita, esquerda, atrás e em cima do frigorífico Isto vai ajudar a reduzir o consumo de energia e também as contas de electricidade.8_ índice índice CONFIGURAR O SEU FRIGORÍFICO 09 09 Preparar a instalação do frigorífico 10 Instalação da linha de água 13 Configurar o frigorífico para uso 13 Remover as portas do frigorífico 17 Nivelar o frigorífico UTILIZAR O SEU FRIGORÍFICO SAMSUNG 18 18 Partes e funções 19 Utilizar o painel de controlo 20 Controlar a temperatura 22 Fazer Gelo 23 Guardar alimentos no frigorífico 23 Guardar alimentos na gaveta do congelador 24 Remover e recolocar os acessórios do frigorífico 25 Remover os acessórios do congelador 26 Utilizar o dispensador de água 27 Limpar o frigorífico 28 Substituir a luz interior (opção) RESOLUÇÃO DE PROBLEMAS 29 29 Resolução de problemasconfigurar _9_ configurar o seu frigorífico 01 CONFIGURAR Parabéns pela sua compra deste Frigorífico Samsung. Esperamos que desfrute das funcionalidades de ponta e da eficiência que este novo aparelho oferece. O mais importante! Certifique-se de que pode mover facilmente o seu Frigorífico até à localização final, medindo as portas (tanto a largura como a altura), os limiares, os tectos, as escadas, etc. • Deixe algum espaço livre dos lados direito, esquerdo, traseiro e superior ao instalar. Este espaço livre irá permitir-lhe economizar no consumo de electricidade e manter as suas facturas de energia eléctrica mais baixas. • Se instalar o Frigorífico num local com menos de 10ºC, pode não funcionar da forma ideal. Quando deslocar o frigorífico Para evitar danos no chão, certifique-se de que as bases de nivelamento frontais estão na posição vertical (acima do chão). Consulte a secção ‘Nivelar o frigorífico’ do manual (na página 17) Chave de parafusos (-) Alavanca de Comando PAVIMENTO Para a instalação correcta, este frigorífico tem de estar colocado numa superfície nivelada de material rígido, com a mesma altura do resto do pavimento. Esta superfície deve ser forte o suficiente para suportar um frigorífico totalmente carregado ou aproximadamente 106 kg. Para proteger o acabamento do pavimento, corte um pedaço grande de cartão e coloque por baixo do frigorífico onde está a trabalhar. Ao mover o frigorífico, certifique-se de que o puxa totalmente para fora e volte a posicioná-lo, empurrando-o para dentro. CUIDADO PREPARAR A INSTALAÇÃO DO FRIGORÍFICO Seleccionar a melhor localização para o Frigorífico • Um local com fácil acesso ao fornecimento de água. • Um local sem exposição directa à luz do sol. • Um local com piso nivelado (ou quase nivelado). • Um local com espaço suficiente para que as portas do Frigorifico abram facilmente. • Permite espaço suficiente para a direita, esquerda, a parte de trás e o topo da unidade para circulação de ar. Se o Frigorífico não tiver espaço suficiente, o sistema de refrigeração interna pode não funcionar correctamente. • Certifique-se de que o aparelho pode ser movimentado livremente para manutenção & reparação. 150mm 100mm 100mm 1368.5mm 817mm 1249.0mm 1504.0mm10_ configurar configurar o seu frigorífico INSTALAÇÃO DO TUBO DE ÁGUA (MODELO COM MÁQUINA DE GELO AUTOMÁTICA) Antes de instalar a linha de água • A instalação da linha de água não é garantida pelo fabricante do frigorífico. Antes de instalar a linha de água, leia os passos completos de instalação e siga cuidadosamente estas instruções para minimizar o risco de danos dispendiosos causados pela água. • A existência de tubos rompidos (tubagem com fissuras) na canalização da casa pode causar danos em partes do frigorífico e causar fugas de água ou inundações. Contacte um canalizador qualificado para corrigir o problema, antes de instalar o cano de fornecimento de água para o frigorífico. • Para evitar queimaduras ou danos no produto, não suspenda o tubo de água por cima do tubo de água quente. • Não instale o cano de água em áreas onde as temperaturas desçam abaixo do ponto de congelação. • Ao utilizar qualquer dispositivo eléctrico (como um berbequim eléctrico) durante a instalação, certifique-se de que o dispositivo está isolado ou ligado de forma a evitar choques eléctricos. • Todas as instalações devem estar de acordo com os requisitos locais para as canalizações. • O kit de tubagem de água e o filtro de água não estão cobertos pela Garantia da Samsung. O fabricante (ou vendedor, instalador) dos mesmos é responsável por quaisquer defeitos e todas as perdas causadas pelo filtro de água e pelo kit de tubagem da água. • O filtro deve ser substituído de acordo com as instruções do fabricante (ou do vendedor). • Para encomendar filtros de água adicionais, por favor contacte o fabricante (ou vendedor) do filtro. Ligar à tubagem de fornecimento de água • Desliguealinhaprincipaldefornecimentodeáguaedesactive a máquina de fazer gelo. • Localize a linha de água potável fria mais próxima. • Siga as instruções do kit de instalação do filtro de água. • Depois de ligar o cano de fornecimento de água à entrada do Suporte do Cartucho e de instalar o Cartucho do Filtro (insira o cano de plástico completamente). • Ligue o fornecimento de água e deite 4 ou mais galões para um balde, para limpar o filtro de água. • O filtro de água tem de estar instalado fora do frigorífico. Não é fornecido com o seu novo frigorífico. O kit do cartucho do filtro (8) e do suporte (9) pode ser adquirido junto do retalhista a quem adquiriu este frigorífico. • Não use um tubo de cobre. • Corte o tubo, certificando-se de que as extremidades ficam planas e limpas. Utilizar o filtro de água (não fornecido) Incorrecto Correcto 90 graus 1. Cano da Água Fria 2. Braçadeira do Tubo 3. Tubo de plástico 4. Porca de Compressão 5. Manga de Compressão 6. Porca de Empanque 7. Válvula de Passagem 8. Cartucho do Filtro 9. Suporte do Cartucho Verifique os acessórios indicados a seguir. Fixador da tubagem da água e parafusos Conector de tubo Tubo de águaconfigurar _11 01 CONFIGURAR Ligue o tubo de água ao frigorífico • Ligue o tubo de plástico na parte de trás do seu frigorífico à saída do suporte do cartucho (insira completamente o tubo de plástico na saída do suporte do cartucho). • Insira o clipe de plástico na entrada e na saída do suporte do cartucho. • Abra a água e verifique se existe alguma fuga. • Pode adquirir o cartucho do filtro no retalhista onde adquiriu este frigorífico. Certifique-se de que compra o cartucho de filtro SAMSUNG (Cartucho de substituição Nº: DA29-00015A) para garantir o melhor desempenho. • O tubo de água deve ser ligado apenas a uma saída de água potável • É fornecido um kit com união de compressão e porca com o aparelho, o qual se encontra na gaveta do frigorífico. • Ao voltar a encostar o Frigorífico, certifique-se de que não o passa por cima do cabo eléctrico ou do tubo de água (Tubo de fornecimento para a máquina de gelo) Suporte do Cartucho clipe Cartucho do Filtro Tubo de plástico (fornecidas) Para utilizar sem o filtro de água 1. Tubagem da Água Fria 2. Braçadeira do Tubo 3. Tubo de plástico 4. Porca de Compressão 5. Manga de Compressão 6. Porca de Empanque 7. Válvula de Passagem Ligar a linha de fornecimento de água • Desligue a linha principal de fornecimento de água e desactive a máquina de fazer gelo. • Localize a linha de água potável fria mais próxima. 1. Em primeiro lugar, feche a linha principal de fornecimento de agua. 2. Localize a linha de água potável fresca mais próxima. 3. Siga as instruções de instalação do tubo de água do kit de instalação. A linha de água deve ser ligada ao tubo de água fria. Se for ligada ao tubo de água quente, este poderá provocar uma avaria do purificador. CUIDADO Fechar o tubo de água principal Fechar o tubo de água principal SEM FOLGA 4. Depois de ligar o fornecimento de água ao filtro de água, volte a ligar o fornecimento de água principal e deite cerca de 3L para limpar e embeber o filtro de água.configurar o seu frigorífico 12_ configurar Ligar a linha de água ao frigorífico 1. Remova a tampa da linha de água na unidade e introduza a porca de compressão na linha de água na unidade depois de a desmontar da linha de agua fornecida. 2. Ligue ambos os tubos de água da unidade e o tubo de água ao kit. 3. Aperte a porca de compressão no acoplamento de compressão. Não devem existir folgas entre (A, B e C) 4. Abra a água e verifique se existe alguma fuga. Desaperte a Remover a tampa Linha de agua da unidade Sem folga Linha de agua da unidade Ligue a linha de água apenas a uma fonte de água potável. Se necessitar de reparar ou desmontar a linha de água, corte 6,5 mm do tubo de plástico para se certificar de que usa uma ligação de boa qualidade sem fugas. • A garantia Samsung não cobre a INSTALAÇÃO DA LINHA DE ÁGUA. • Tal será feito ao encargo do cliente, excepto o preço a retalho, que inclui o custo de instalação. • Se necessário, contacte um canalizador ou instalador autorizado para proceder a instalação. • Casoseverifiquemfugasdeáguadevidoaumainstalaçãoincorrecta, contacte o instalador. Antes de proceder à utilização, devem verificar-se estes locais relativamente a presença de fugas. CUIDADOconfigurar _13 01 CONFIGURAR Agora que tem o seu novo Frigorífico instalado no lugar, está pronto a configurar e a desfrutar das funcionalidades e funções do aparelho. Ao concluir os passos seguintes, o seu Frigorífico deverá ficar totalmente operacional. 1. Coloque o Frigorífico num local adequado com uma distância suficiente entre a parede e o Frigorífico. Consulte as instruções de instalação contidas neste manual. (P8. Seleccionar a melhor localização para o Frigorífico) 2. Quando o Frigorífico estiver ligado, certifique-se de que a luz interior aparece quando abrir as portas. 3. Regule o controlo da temperatura para a temperatura mais fria e aguarde uma hora. O Congelador ficará ligeiramente gelado e o motor funcionará lentamente. 4. Depois de ligar o Frigorífico, demorará algumas horas a atingir a temperatura adequada. Pode guardar alimentos e bebidas no Frigorífico, quando a temperatura estiver suficientemente fria. Chave de Parafusos Phillips (+) Chave de Parafusos de Cabeça Plana (-) Chave de Caixa (10mm) (para parafusos) Chave Hexagonal (3/16 pol.) (para dobradiças médias) Chave hexagonal (5/32 pol.) (para eixo de dobradiça média) Ferramentas Necessárias (Não fornecidas) REMOVER AS PORTAS DO FRIGORÍFICO Algumas instalações requerem a remoção das portas para transportar o Frigorífico para a sua localização final. Não retire a porta se não for necessário. Antes de retirar a porta, certifique-se de que lê os seguintes itens. • Cuidado para não deixar cair a porta, e arranhá-la ou danificá-la enquanto a remove. • Cuidado para não se lesionar enquanto retira a porta. • Depois de voltar a apertar a porta: É possível ocorrer condensação se existir fuga de ar. É possível que a porta esteja desnivelada. É possível que a conta da electricidade aumente. Desligue a corrente do Frigorífico antes de remover a porta. AVISO CONFIGURAR O FRIGORÍFICO PARA USOconfigurar o seu frigorífico 14_ configurar Como inverter a porta (RL62S/RL62U/RL62Z/RL62T) Desligue o frigorífico da tomada ou desligue a corrente. O número em cada imagem indica a localização relevante do frigorífico. Consulte a Imagem de Referência para cada localização. Retire 1 parafuso e desmonte a cobertura da dobradiça superior do lado direito. Desmonte os 2 conectores. Desmonte o fio de terra, retirando 1 parafuso, e desmonte a dobradiça superior direita, retirando os 3 parafusos. Proceda com precaução para evitar danificar os fios. Cuidado para não se inclinar sobre o frigorífico ao desapertar o parafuso. Retire a porta do frigorífico, levantando-a para cima. Cuidado para não deixar cair ou arranhar a porta do frigorífico. (A cobertura da dobradiça média pode sair com a porta do frigorífico.) Desmontar a cobertura da dobradiça média. (A cobertura da dobradiça média pode sair com a porta do frigorífico, ao remover a porta.) Imagem de Referência 1 2 3 6 5 4 7 8 9 10 14 13 12 11 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 Peças para reverter a porta. Pode encontrar essas peças no compartimento da porta, no interior do frigorífico.01 CONFIGURAR configurar _15 3 Cobertura Tampa Cobertura Retire 2 pernos de cada dobradiça, e retire as dobradiças da parte inferior direita e esquerda. Separe o eixo da dobradiça inferior, utilizando uma chave de 5/32 e desmontando a perna da dobradiça inferior, rodando-a no sentido dos ponteiros do relógio, e depois monte a dobradiça inferior, rodando-a. Separe a cobertura do lado da perna frontal esquerda da Tampa e insira-a do lado da perna frontal direita da Tampa. Volte a apertar a antiga dobradiça direita do lado esquerdo, e a antiga dobradiça esquerda do lado direito, utilizando 2 pernos. Separe o batente, retirando 1 parafuso do lado inferior direito do congelador, e monte o batente do lado esquerdo, revertendo-o. Volte a colocar a tampa da cobertura da dobradiça inferior. Retire 1 parafuso (use uma chave de parafusos) e 2 pernos (use uma chave allen de 3/16), e retire a dobradiça a meio do lado direito. Retire a porta do congelador, levantando a para cima. (A cobertura da dobradiça inferior pode sair com a porta do congelador.) Cuidado para não deixar cair ou arranhar a porta do congelador. Separe a cobertura da perna frontal, retirando 2 parafusos. 3 4 11 4 3 4 4 3 10 2 4 Coberturaconfigurar o seu frigorífico 16_ configurar Monte os 2 conectores. (Se não ficar ligado, aparece uma mensagem de erro no visor) ① 8 13 14 6 6 6 6 7 1 Cubra a cobertura da dobradiça média. Retire 1 cobertura e 3 parafusos do lado esquerdo do frigorífico, onde irá apertar a dobradiça média esquerda. (Consultar a figura da esquerda.) E volte a colocar na posição da antiga dobradiça média do lado direito, como na figura da direita. Para retirar os 2 parafusos de plástico, agarre-os com pinças (alicate, pinça, tenaz), enquanto os roda com a chave de parafusos (+). 5 2 2 5 1 2 3 Volte a colocar a porta do congelador na dobradiça do lado inferior esquerdo. Volte a colocar a dobradiça do lado médio esquerdo. Pode encontrá-la na caixa de ferramentas de instalação fornecida com o seu novo frigorífico Samsung. Volte a apertar, utilizando 1 parafuso e 2 porcas. (Deve utilizar a chave de parafusos (+) para os parafusos, e a chave para as porcas.) Monte a dobradiça superior esquerda do lado esquerdo, utilizando 3 parafusos, e volte a apertar o fio de terra, utilizando 1 parafuso. Pode encontrar a dobradiça na caixa de ferramentas de instalação fornecida com o seu novo frigorífico Samsung. (Cuidado para não se inclinar sobre a porta do frigorífico e para não danificar o fio.) Retire o batente (①), removendo os 3 parafusos do lado direito. (Consulte a figura.) E volte a colocá-lo do lado direito. Retire os 3 parafusos do lado esquerdo. (Consulte a figura.) A seguir, substitua o batente (①) separado do lado direito. Volte a apertar, utilizando os 3 parafusos removidos do lado esquerdo, no lado esquerdo. Depois de retirar a cobertura do lado superior esquerdo da porta do frigorífico, volte a apertar a porta do frigorífico do lado direito. Separe a cobertura do lado superior esquerdo do frigorífico, removendo 1 parafuso, e volte a apertar do lado superior direito. (Cuidado para não danificar o revestimento do fio.) Volte a colocar a cobertura da dobradiça superior esquerda, utilizando 1 parafuso. Pode encontrá-la na caixa de ferramentas de instalação, fornecida com o seu novo frigorífico Samsung. Verifique o alinhamento da porta, a abertura e o funcionamento da lâmpada interior, ao abrir as portas do frigorífico e do congelador.NIVELAR O FRIGORÍFICO Depois de voltar a colocar as portas no Frigorífico, certifique-se de que o Frigorífico está nivelado, para efectuar os ajustes finais. Se o Frigorífico não estiver nivelado, as portas não fecharão de modo perfeitamente uniforme. Além disso, pode causar fugas no frigorífico, fazendo aumentar a conta da electricidade. Por exemplo, se o lado esquerdo estiver mais abaixo do que o direito, insira uma chave de parafusos de pontas planas num entalhe da alavanca de controlo esquerda, e rode no sentido dos ponteiros do relógio ou no sentido contrário para nivelar a porta. Rode no sentido dos ponteiros do relógio para levantar o frigorífico, e no sentido contrário para o baixar. Se o lado esquerdo estiver acima, use a alavanca direita. Quando o lado esquerdo está mais baixo. Quando o lado esquerdo está mais alto. Chave de parafusos (-) Chave de parafusos (-) Alavanca de Comando Alavanca de Comando Ambas as alavancas de controlo devem tocar no chão para evitar possíveis lesões pessoais ou AVISO danos materiais devido à inclinação. 01 CONFIGURAR configurar _17utilizar o seu frigorífico Samsung Use esta página para se familiarizar com as peças e funcionalidades do Frigorífico. PEÇAS E FUNCIONALIDADES Luz do Frigorífico Prateleira Multiusos da Porta Frigorífico Prateleiras do Frigorífico Tabuleiro Móvel (Localização ajustável) Gavetas para Fruta e Legumes Máquina de Gelo Gaveta de Puxar Para Fora Prateleira para Garrafas Prateleira para Garrafas Luz do Congelador Prateleira Multiusos da Porta 18_ utilizar Reservatório de Água (Opção)02 UTILIZAR utilizar _19 ( 1 ) Botão Power Freeze Prima este botão para congelar rapidamente os alimentos. (O Power Freeze dura 2 horas e meia.) ( 2 ) Botão Freezer (congelador) Botão de regulação da temperatura do congelador. Prima este botão para definir a temperatura do Congelador entre -14ºC e -25ºC. (Ao ligar inicialmente, a predefinição é -19ºC.) ( 3 ) Botão Desactivar Gelo (Opção) Quando o Botão Desactivar Gelo é premido, não é produzido gelo. Use esta função apenas quando for necessário. ( 3 ) Botão Desactivar Alarme (Opção) Quando o Botão Desactivar Alarme for premido, o alarme não soa, caso a porta esteja aberta. Use este botão apenas quando for necessário. ( 4 ) Botão Power Cool Prima este botão para arrefecer rapidamente os alimentos no frigorífico. (O Power Cool desliga-se quando são atingidos -4ºC ou após 2 horas e meia.) ( 5 ) Botão Fridge (frigorífico) Botão de regulação da temperatura do frigorífico. Prima este botão para definir a temperatura do Frigorífico em intervalos de 1ºC entre 7ºC e 1ºC. (Ao ligar inicialmente, a predefinição é de 3ºC.) ( 6 ) Premir o Botão de Bloqueio durante 3 seg Ao premir este botão durante 3 seg., a função de visualização fica bloqueada ou desbloqueada. (Bloquear ou desbloquear tecla) UTILIZAR O PAINEL DE CONTROLO Painel de selecção / controlo da Temperatura e Funções 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Para modelo com máquina de gelo automática 2. Para modelo com máquina de gelo normalutilizar o seu frigorífico Samsung CONTROLAR A TEMPERATURA Configurar a temperatura do congelador - A temperatura do Congelador mudará, dependendo do número de aberturas de porta, da quantidade de alimentos, da temperatura ambiente, etc. - A temperatura de cada prateleira do congelador pode ser diferente. - O visor da temperatura pisca quando a temperatura do congelador aumentar, devido à abertura frequente da porta, à introdução de alimentos quentes, etc. (Para de piscar quando o frigorífico atingir a temperatura normal. Se, por algum motivo, não parar depois de um longo período de tempo, contacte um centro de assistência da Samsung.) Ao seleccionar a temperatura, a temperatura definida é visualizada inicialmente durante 5 segundos, a seguir, é indicada a temperatura actual. (Pode existir uma ligeira diferença entre a temperatura definida e a temperatura actual visualizada, mas será automaticamente corrigida para a temperatura definida.) 20_ utilizar Se desejar controlar a temperatura do congelador, proceda como indicado acima. Prima o botão Freezer (Consulte a imagem) - A temperatura pode ser definida em intervalos de 1ºC, entre -25ºC e -14ºC. - Sempre que o Botão Freezer for premido, a definição da temperatura muda da forma seguinte; (-19ºC → -20ºC → -21ºC → -22ºC → -23ºC → -24ºC → -25ºC → -14ºC → -15ºC → -16ºC → -17ºC → -18ºC → -19ºC) Configurar a temperatura do frigorífico Se desejar controlar a temperatura do frigorífico, proceda como indicado acima. Prima o botão Fridge (Consulte a imagem) - A temperatura pode ser definida em intervalos de 1ºC, entre 1ºC e 7ºC. - Sempre que o Botão Fridge for premido, a definição da temperatura muda da forma seguinte; (3ºC → 2ºC → 1ºC → 7ºC → 6ºC → 5ºC → 4ºC → 3ºC)Ao seleccionar a temperatura do frigorífico, a temperatura definida é visualizada inicialmente durante 5 segundos; a seguir, é indicada a temperatura actual. (Pode existir uma ligeira diferença entre a temperatura definida e a temperatura actual visualizada, mas será automaticamente corrigida para a temperatura definida.) - A temperatura do Frigorífico mudará, dependendo do número de aberturas de porta, da quantidade de alimentos, da temperatura ambiente, etc. - A temperatura de cada prateleira ou caixa do frigorífico pode ser diferente. - O visor da temperatura pisca quando a temperatura do frigorífico aumentar, devido à abertura frequente da porta, à introdução de alimentos quentes, etc. (Para de piscar quando o frigorífico atingir a temperatura normal. Se, por algum motivo, não parar depois de um longo período de tempo, contacte um centro de assistência da Samsung.) A função Power Cool opera durante 2 horas e meia, independentemente da temperatura ambiente. utilizar _21 02 UTILIZAR Como fazer gelo mais rápido (Controlar a Potência de Congelamento) Acelera o tempo necessário para congelar produtos no congelador. Pode ser útil se necessitar de congelar rapidamente itens que vertem com facilidade ou se a temperatura do congelador aumentar dramaticamente (Por exemplo, se a porta for deixada aberta). Esta função tem de ser activada antes de colocar alimentos grandes no compartimento do congelador, pelo menos 24 horas antes. Se desejar acelerar a refrigeração no Frigorífico (Power Cool) Prima o botão Power Cool. (Consulte a figura.) - A luz Power Cool acende-se no visor (ver a marca da seta) e esta função começa a funcionar, independentemente da temperatura definida do frigorífico. Prima novamente o Botão Power Cool para cancelar esta função. - A luz desliga-se e o frigorífico volta a funcionar com a temperatura definida. Modo de Refrigeração Desactivada (código “OF & OF” no visor) Esta função destina-se a frigoríficos de loja com visor. Não se destina a um uso particular. No Modo deRefrigeraçãoDesactivada, o frigorífico funciona, mas não produz arfresco.Para cancelar este modo, pressione os botões “Power Freeze” e “Freezer” simultaneamente durante 3 segundos ate ouvir um som tipo “Dingdong”. CUIDADO Modo de Refrigeração Desactivadautilizar o seu frigorífico Samsung 22_ utilizar A máquina de gelo produzirá 8 cubos por ciclo - aproximadamente 100~130 cubos num período de 24 horas, dependendo da temperatura do compartimento do congelador, da temperatura ambiente, do número de aberturas de porta e de outras condições de utilização. Deite fora os primeiros cubos de gelo para deixar limpar o cano de água. Certifique-se de que nada interfere com o varrimento do braço do alimentador. Quando o cesto enche até ao nível do braço do alimentador, a máquina de gelo pára de produzir gelo. Depois de a máquina de gelo ser novamente ligada, existe algum atraso antes da mesma retomar a operação. É normal se alguns cubos saírem juntos. Se o gelo não for utilizado com frequência, os cubos de gelo antigos tornamse enevoados, com um sabor bafiento e encolhem. Se não pretender fazer gelo, prima o botão Ice Off. Modelo com Máquina de Gelo Automática Retire o gelo, utilizando a pá Modelo com Tabuleiro de Gelo 1. Puxe para fora o tabuleiro de gelo. 2. Deixe água por cima do tabuleiro de gelo. 3. Coloque o tabuleiro de gelo no cesto de gelo. Feche a porta do congelador. Botão de Teste 1 2 3 FAZER GELO Modelo Twist Icemaker 1. Puxe para fora os recipientes para cubos de gelo. 2. Encha-os de água até à marca (seta) do nível de água. 3. Volte a colocar os recipientes para cubos de gelo na sua posição original e feche a porta do congelador. 4. Quando a água estiver congelada, rode para despejar os cubos de gelo para o respectivo compartimento. 1 2 3 4GUARDAR ALIMENTOS NO FRIGORÍFICO O Frigorífico Samsung foi concebido para lhe fornecer o máximo espaço, sem poupar nas funções e funcionalidades. Existem alguns compartimentos personalizados que criámos para manter os seus alimentos frescos por mais tempo. Para evitar que os odores se propaguem pelo compartimento de gelo, os alimentos armazenados devem ser bem embrulhados, de forma a entrar ar o menos possível. Tabuleiro Móvel Pode ser utilizado para guardar pequenos alimentos lácteos, como manteiga ou margarina, iogurte ou cubos de queijo fundido. manteiga/queijo Prateleira para Garrafas Concebidos para suportar elementos grandes e volumosos, tais como garrafas de leite ou outras garrafas e recipientes grandes. Prateleiras do Frigorífico Concebidas para resistirem ao choque, as prateleiras podem ser utilizadas para todos os tipos de alimentos e bebidas. As marcas circulares na superfície do vidro são um fenómeno normal e normalmente podem ser limpas com um pano húmido. Gavetas para Fruta e Legumes Utilizada para preservar a frescura dos seus vegetais e frutos armazenados. Esta gaveta foi especificamente concebida para controlar o nível de humidade dentro do compartimento. Mantenha os legumes e a fruta separados, se possível Não coloque alimentos grandes por baixo da lâmpada do Frigorífico. Está localizado um sensor de ar perto da lâmpada; se o sensor ficar bloqueado, o seu Frigorífico pode arrefecer demasiado. Coloque os Legumes e a Fruta nas Gavetas de Legumes e Fruta, para evitar que congelem. Se os alimentos no interior do Frigorífico congelarem, aumente a temperatura. GUARDAR ALIMENTOS NA GAVETA DO CONGELADOR Gaveta de Puxar Para Fora Ideias para guardar carne e alimentos secos. Os alimentos armazenados devem ser colocados num recipiente ou embrulhados, utilizando película de plástico ou outros materiais adequados. Cesto da Gaveta do Congelador Pode ser utilizado para guardar carne e alimentos secos. Os alimentos armazenados devem ser colocados num recipiente ou embrulhados, utilizando película de plástico ou outros materiais adequados. As garrafas devem ser guardadas juntas, para não tombarem e caírem quando a porta do Frigorífico abrir. Se estiver a planear afastar-se durante muito tempo, esvazie o Frigorífico e desligue-o. Limpe a humidade em excesso do interior do aparelho e deixe as portas abertas. Isto ajuda a evitar o desenvolvimento de odores e bolor. utilizar _23 02 UTILIZARutilizar o seu frigorífico Samsung REMOVER E ALTERAR A DISPOSIÇÃO DOS ACESSÓRIOS DO FRIGORÍFICO Método de remoção de pó – Retire a protecção e lave com água. Não ajuste um cesto cheio de alimentos. 1. Compartimentos das portas Para remover: levante simplesmente o cesto e puxe-o para fora. Para voltar a colocar: deslize-o para a localização pretendida e empurre para baixo até parar. Podem ocorrer danos se os cestos da porta não ficarem firmemente inseridos. Não deixe crianças a brincarem com os cestos. Os cantos afiados dos cestos podem causar lesões. CUIDADO 2. Prateleiras do frigorífico Para remover: ao puxar a prateleira para fora, se esta não deslizar facilmente, levante-a ligeiramente e puxe-a para fora outra vez. Para voltar a colocar: ao empurrar a prateleira, se esta não deslizar facilmente, levante-a ligeiramente e puxe-a para dentro outra vez. As prateleiras de vidro são pesadas. CUIDADO Use um cuidado especial ao removê-las. As gavetas precisam de ser retiradas antes da prateleira de vidro de cima poder ser levantada. 3. Gavetas para Fruta e Legumes Para remover: puxe a gaveta para fora até ao máximo. Incline para cima a parte da frente da gaveta e puxe para fora. Para voltar a colocar: insira a gaveta nas calhas e volte a empurrar para o lugar. 1 2 24_ utilizarREMOVER OS ACESSÓRIOS DO CONGELADOR 1. Gaveta de Puxar Para Fora Para remover: puxe a gaveta para fora até ao máximo.Incline para cima a parte de trás da gaveta e levante-a para fora. (Consulte as figuras 1 e 2) Abra completamente a porta do congelador e retire a gaveta. Para voltar a colocar: coloque a gaveta sobre as calhas, inclinando-a para cima. Baixe a gaveta até ficar horizontal e deslize-a para dentro. (Consulte a figura 3) 2. Cesto da Gaveta do Congelador Para remover: puxe a gaveta completamente para fora. Incline para cima a parte de trás do cesto e levante-o para o retirar. Para voltar a colocar: coloque o cesto sobre as calhas. Ao voltar a colocar, coloque o suporte da gaveta no orifício da calha. utilizar _25 02 UTILIZAR 3 1 2 2 1 Para obter a melhor eficiência energética deste produto, deixe todas as prateleiras, gavetas e cestos na sua posição original, conforme está apresentado na página (18). Se o dispensador de água não estiver a ser utilizado, recomenda-se o seguinte 1. Aperte bem o dispositivo de fornecimento de água ao orifício de fixação. • A porta não fecha automaticamente se o dispositivo de fornecimento de água estiver puxado para fora durante muito tempo, devido a uma fuga de ar frio. 2. Coloque uma garrafa de água sobresselente para o reservatório de água. • Podem ser utilizadas duas garrafas de 1,5 litro. 3. Defina o dispositivo de bloqueio para “LOCK” • Ao premir o botão “PUSH” com o dispositivo de fornecimento de água apenas fixado no orifício de fixação, e o dispositivo de bloqueio definido para “OPEN”, o dispositivo de fornecimento de água pode ser removido do orifício de fixação e ocorrem fugas. utilizar o seu frigorífico Samsung Ao permitir o acesso a crianças, defina o dispositivo de bloqueio para “LOCK”. Encher o reservatório de água 1. Abra o reservatório de água, removendo a tampa redonda e enchendo com água potável. (Não use água quente.) • Encha o reservatório até ao nível completo (logo abaixo de 4,2 litros). 2. Volte a colocar a tampa redonda, carregando para baixo até clicar no lugar. 3. Coloque um copo no suporte para copos e carregue na alavanca “PRESS”. 1 2 3 Descrição Alavanca de pressão Dispositivo de bloqueio Tampa do reservatório de água Reservatório de água Dispositivo de fornecimento de água 26_ utilizar Pode obter facilmente água fresca através do dispensador de água, sem abrir a porta do frigorífico. Além disso, pode poupar electricidade, reduzindo o número de vezes em que a porta é aberta, em mais de 30%. UTILIZAR O DISPENSADOR DE ÁGUA (OPÇÃO)02 UTILIZAR utilizar _27 Limpar o interior Limpe as paredes interiores e os acessórios com um detergente suave e seque com um pano macio. Pode remover as gavetas e prateleiras para uma limpeza mais completa. Certifique-se de que seca as gavetas e as prateleiras antes de voltar a colocá-las no lugar. Cuidar do seu Frigorífico Samsung prolonga a duração do seu aparelho, e conserva-o sem odores e germes. Painel de visualização Limpar o exterior Limpe o painel de visualização com um pano húmido, limpo e macio. Não pulverize água directamente sobre a superfície do Frigorífico. As superfícies das portas, pegas e armários deverão ser limpas com um detergente suave e secas a seguir com um pano macio. Para que o seu aparelho tenha sempre uma boa aparência, devera polir o exterior uma ou duas vezes por ano. Não use gasolina, diluente, detergente para automóveis ou cloro para a limpeza. Estes podem danificar a superfície do aparelho e causar incêndios. CUIDADO Limpar os vedantes de borracha das portas Se os vedantes de borracha das portas estiverem sujos, as portas podem não fechar correctamente e o Frigorífico pode não funcionar com eficiência. Mantenha os vedantes das portas livres de areia e sujidade, limpando-os com um detergente suave e um pano húmido. Seque com um pano macio limpo. Limpar atrás do Frigorífico Para manter os cabos e as partes expostas livres de pó e de acumulação de sujidade, aspire atrás do aparelho uma ou duas vezes por ano. Não remova a cobertura posterior. Pode causar um choque eléctrico. CUIDADO LIMPAR O FRIGORÍFICOSUBSTITUIR A LUZ INTERIOR (OPÇÃO) Substituir a Luz Interior do Frigorífico 1. Desligue o cabo eléctrico da tomada. 2. Puxe a protecção para baixo, empurrando para trás para remover. 3. A lâmpada pode estar quente, por isso tenha cuidado ao tocar na lâmpada. 4. Rode a lâmpada no sentido contrário aos ponteiros do relógio. 5. Volte a montar pelo sentido inverso da desmontagem. escudo Antes de mudar alguma das luzes interiores, desligue o Frigorífico da fonte de alimentação. Se não tiver a certeza sobre como mudar as luzes depois de ler estas instruções, contacte o centro de assistência Samsung para obter ajuda. CUIDADO Substituir a Luz Interior da Gaveta do Congelador 1. Desligue o cabo eléctrico da tomada. 2. Puxe a gaveta para fora até ao máximo. 3. Puxe a protecção para baixo, empurrando para trás para remover. 4. A lâmpada pode estar quente. Cuidado ao tocar na lâmpada. 5. Rode a lâmpada no sentido contrário aos ponteiros do relógio. 6. Volte a montar pelo sentido inverso da desmontagem. Não introduza os dedos no interior da cobertura. CUIDADO A lâmpada pode estar quente. utilizar o seu frigorífico Samsung 28_ utilizar Para a lâmpada do LED, contacte o técnico de assistência técnica para a substituir.resolução de problemas _29 03 RESOLUÇÃO DE PROBLEMAS PROBLEMA SOLUÇÃO O Frigorífico não funciona ou não refrigera o suficiente. • Verifique se a ficha de alimentação eléctrica esta ligada correctamente. • O controlo de temperatura no painel digital esta definido para a temperatura correcta? Experimente colocar o frigorífico numa temperatura mais baixa. • O Frigorífico está exposto à luz solar directa ou está localizado perto de uma fonte de calor? • A parte de trás do Frigorífico está tão próxima da parede que o ar não possa circular? (Consulte a página 10 para a melhor localização.) Os alimentos no interior do Frigorífico estão congelados. • O controlo da temperatura no visor está definido para a temperatura correcta? Experimente definir o frigorífico para uma temperatura mais quente. • A temperatura do quarto está demasiado baixa? • Guardou os alimentos demasiado perto da abertura de ventilação na parte de trás do Frigorífico? Afaste os alimentos da abertura de ventilação. Escuta ruídos ou sons invulgares. • Verifique se o Frigorífico está nivelado e estável. • A parte de trás do Frigorífico está tão próxima da parede que o ar não possa circular? • Caiu alguma coisa atrás ou por baixo do Frigorífico? • Um som de “tique” é escutado no interior do Frigorífico. Este som é normal e ocorre porque vários acessórios estão a contrair-se e a expandir-se, consoante a temperatura no interior do Frigorífico. Os cantos frontais e a secção articulada horizontal do aparelho ficam quentes, e ocorre a condensação. • É normal algum calor, porque estão instalados anticondensadores na secção articulada horizontal do Frigorífico para evitar a condensação. • A porta do Frigorífico está entreaberta? Pode ocorrer condensação se deixar a porta aberta durante um longo período de tempo. A Máquina de Gelo não produz gelo. (Opção) • Aguardou 12 horas após a instalação da linha de fornecimento de água antes de fabricar gelo? • O cano de água está ligado e a válvula de passagem está aberta? • Parou manualmente a função de fabrico de gelo? • A temperatura do Congelador está demasiado quente? Tente reduzir a temperatura do Congelador. Escuta água a borbulhar no Frigorífico. • Isto é normal. O borbulhar é a circulação do líquido refrigerante a circular pelo Frigorífico. O Frigorífico apresenta um mau odor. • Verifique se existem alimentos derramados. • Os alimentos com odores fortes (por exemplo, peixe) devem estar bem cobertos. • Limpe periodicamente o seu Congelador e deite fora qualquer alimento derramado ou suspeito. Há formação de gelo nas paredes do Congelador. • A abertura de ventilação está bloqueada? Retire quaisquer objectos que estejam a causar obstrução de modo a que o ar possa circular livremente. • Deixe espaço suficiente entre os alimentos armazenados para uma circulação de ar eficiente. • A gaveta do Congelador está correctamente fechada? resolução de problemasmemomemoNum esforço para promover a reciclagem, este manual do utilizador é impresso em papel reciclado. Portugal Eliminação Correcta Deste Produto (Resíduos de Equipamentos Eléctricos e Electrónicos) Esta marca apresentada no produto, nos acessórios ou na literatura – indica que o produto e os seus acessórios electrónicos (por exemplo, o carregador, o auricular, o cabo USB) não deverão ser eliminados juntamente com os resíduos domésticos no final do seu período de vida útil. Para impedir danos ao ambiente ou à saúde humana causados pela eliminação incontrolada de resíduos, deverá separar estes equipamentos de outros tipos de resíduos e reciclá-los de forma responsável, para promover uma reutilização sustentável dos recursos materiais. Os utilizadores domésticos deverão contactar o estabelecimento onde adquiriram este produto ou as entidades oficiais locais para obterem informações sobre onde e de que forma podem entregar estes equipamentos para permitir efectuar uma reciclagem segura em termos ambientais. Os utilizadores profissionais deverão contactar o seu fornecedor e consultar os termos e condições do contrato de compra. Este produto e os seus acessórios electrónicos não deverão ser misturados com outros resíduos comerciais para eliminação. Limites da temperatura ambiente Este frigorífico combinado foi concebido para funcionar em temperaturas ambiente especificadas pela classe indicada na placa de classificação. NOTA: As temperaturas internas podem ser afectadas por factores como, por exemplo, a localização do frigorífico combinado, a temperatura ambiente e a frequência de vezes com que abre a porta. Ajuste a temperatura conforme seja necessário para realizar a compensação devido a estes factores. Classe Símbolo Intervalo de temperatura ambiente (°C) Temperatura alargada SN +10 a +32 Temperado N +16 a +32 Subtropical ST +16 a +38 Tropical T +16 a +43 Contacte SAMSUNG GLOBAL Se tem algumas dúvidas ou comentários sobre os produtos Samsung, contacte por favor a nossa linha de apoio a clientes Samsung. SAMSUNG ELECTRÓNICA PORTUGUESA, Lagoas Park, Edifício 5B, Piso 0, 2740-298 Porto Salvo, Portugal 808 20 - SAMSUNG(7267864) www.samsung.com/pt ENG This user manual includes detailed usage instructions for your camera. Please read this manual thoroughly. USER MANUAL1 Copyright information • Camera specifications or contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of camera functions. • You are not allowed to reuse or distribute any part of this manual without prior permission. • We recommend using your camera within the country where you purchase it. • Use this camera responsibly and adhere to all laws and regulations concerning its use. PlanetFirst represents Samsung Electronics' commitment to sustainable development and social responsibility through eco-driven business and management activities. • Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. • Mac and Apple App Store are registered trademarks of the Apple Corporation. • Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google, Inc. • Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop and Lightroom are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. • microSD™, microSDHC™, and microSDXC™ are registered trademarks of the SD Association. • HDMI, the HDMI logo, and the term “High Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. • Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • Trademarks and trade names used in this manual are the property of their respective owners.2 Health and safety information Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight. Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than 1 m/3 ft) to people or animals. If you use the flash too close to your subject’s eyes, this can cause temporary or permanent eyesight damage. Keep your camera away from small children and pets. Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach of small children and animals. Small parts may cause choking or serious injury if swallowed. Moving parts and accessories may present physical dangers as well. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or high temperatures for an extended period of time. Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme temperatures can cause permanent damage to your camera’s internal components. Avoid covering the camera or charger with blankets or clothes. The camera may overheat, which may distort the camera or cause a fire. Do not handle the power supply cord or go near the charger during a thunderstorm. This may result in electric shock. Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid dangerous situations and ensure peak performance of your camera. Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Do not disassemble or attempt to repair your camera. This may result in electric shock or damage to the camera. Do not use your camera near flammable or explosive gases and liquids. This may cause a fire or explosion. Do not insert flammable materials into the camera or store these materials near the camera. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not handle your camera with wet hands. This may result in electric shock.3 Health and safety information If liquid or foreign objects enter your camera, immediately disconnect all power sources, such as the battery or charger, and then contact a Samsung service center. Comply with any regulations that restrict the use of a camera in a certain area. • Avoid interference with other electronic devices. • Turn off the camera when in an aircraft. Your camera can cause interference with aircraft equipment. Follow all airline regulations and turn off your camera when directed by airline personnel. • Turn off the camera near medical equipment. Your camera can interfere with medical equipment in hospitals or health care facilities. Follow all regulations, posted warnings, and directions from medical personnel. Avoid interference with pacemakers. Maintain the distance between this camera and all pacemakers to avoid potential interference, as recommended by the manufacturer and research groups. If you have any reason to suspect that your camera is interfering with a pacemaker or other medical device, turn off the camera immediately and contact the manufacturer of the pacemaker or medical device for guidance. Caution—situations that could cause damage to your camera or other equipment Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period of time. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. Do not damage or heat the battery. Inauthentic, damaged, or heated batteries may cause a fire or personal injury. Use only Samsung-approved batteries, chargers, cables and accessories. • Using unauthorized batteries, chargers, cables or accessories can cause batteries to explode, damage your camera, or cause injury. • Samsung is not responsible for damage or injuries caused by unapproved batteries, chargers, cables or accessories. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Misusing the battery may cause a fire or electric shock.4 Health and safety information Do not touch the flash while it fires. The flash is very hot when fired and may burn your skin. When you use the AC charger, turn off the camera before you disconnect the power to the AC charger. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Disconnect the charger from the wall socket when not in use. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Do not use a damaged power supply cord, plug, or loose outlet when you charge batteries. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not allow the AC charger to come in contact with the +/- terminals on the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not drop or subject the camera to strong impacts. Doing so may damage the screen or external or internal components. Exercise caution when you connect cables and install batteries and memory cards. If you force the connectors, improperly connect cables, or improperly install batteries and memory cards, you can damage ports, connectors, and accessories. Keep cards with magnetic strips away from the camera case. Information stored on the card may be damaged or erased. Never use a damaged battery, or memory card. This may result in electric shock or camera malfunction or cause a fire. Do not place the camera in or near magnetic fields. Doing so may cause the camera to malfunction. Do not use the camera if the screen is damaged. If the glass or acrylic parts are broken, visit a Samsung service center to have the camera repaired.5 Health and safety information Check that the camera is operating properly before use. The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any loss of files or damage that may result from camera malfunction or improper use. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight. This may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. If the camera overheats, remove the battery and allow it to cool down. • Prolonged usage of the camera may overheat the battery and raise the internal temperature of the camera. If the camera stops operating, remove the battery and allow it to cool down. • High internal temperatures may result in noise in your photos. This is normal and does not affect your camera’s overall performance. Avoid interference with other electronic devices. Your camera emits radio frequency (RF) signals that may interfere with unshielded or improperly shielded electronic equipment, such as pacemakers, hearing aids, medical devices, and other electronic devices in homes or vehicles. Consult the manufacturers of your electronic devices to solve any interference problems you experience. To prevent unwanted interference, use only Samsung-approved devices or accessories. Use your camera in the normal position. Avoid contact with your camera’s internal antenna. Data transference and your responsibilities • Data transferred via WLAN could be leaked, so avoid transferring sensitive data in public areas or on open networks. • The camera manufacturer is not liable for any data transfers that infringe on copyrights, trademarks, intellectual property laws, or public decency ordinances.6 Indications used in this manual Mode indications Mode Indication Smart Auto t Program P Aperture Priority A Shutter Priority S Manual M Lens Priority i Smart s Wi-Fi B Icons used in this manual Icon Function Additional information Safety warnings and precautions [ ] Camera buttons. For example, [Shutter] represents the shutter button. ( ) Page number of related information → The order of options or menus you must select to perform a step; for example: Select 1→Quality (represents select 1, and then Quality). * Annotation7 Contents Chapter 1 My Camera Getting started ............................................................................................ 29 Unpacking.................................................................................................................... 29 Camera layout .............................................................................................. 30 Using the DIRECT LINK button ................................................................................ 32 Inserting the battery and memory card ................................................. 33 Removing the battery and memory card ........................................................... 33 Using the memory card adapter ............................................................................. 33 Charging the battery and turning on your camera .............................. 34 Charging the battery................................................................................................ 34 Turning on your camera ......................................................................................... 34 Performing the initial setup ...................................................................... 35 Selecting functions (options) ................................................................... 36 Selecting with buttons ............................................................................................ 36 Selecting by touch .................................................................................................... 36 Using m .............................................................................................................. 37 E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode ............................................................. 37 Using the Smart panel ............................................................................................. 38 E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode ......................................................... 38 Tips Concepts in Photography Shooting postures....................................................................................... 13 Holding the camera ..................................................................................................... 13 Standing photography ............................................................................................... 13 Crouching photography ............................................................................................ 14 Using the display .......................................................................................................... 14 Low-angle shot .............................................................................................................. 15 High-angle shot ............................................................................................................. 15 Aperture ........................................................................................................ 16 Aperture value and the depth of field .................................................................. 17 Shutter speed ............................................................................................... 18 ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 19 How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity control exposure ......................................................................................... 20 Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective ................ 21 Depth of field ............................................................................................... 22 What controls out-of-focus effects? ....................................................................... 22 Optical preview ............................................................................................................. 24 Composition ................................................................................................. 24 Rule of Thirds .................................................................................................................. 24 Photos with two subjects .......................................................................................... 25 Flash ............................................................................................................... 26 Flash guide number ..................................................................................................... 26 Bounce Photography .................................................................................................. 278 Contents Display icons ................................................................................................ 40 In Shooting mode ..................................................................................................... 40 Capturing photos ........................................................................................................ 40 Recording videos ......................................................................................................... 41 About the level gauge ............................................................................................... 41 In Playback mode ...................................................................................................... 42 Viewing photos ............................................................................................................ 42 Playing videos ............................................................................................................... 42 Changing the information displayed ................................................................. 43 Lenses ............................................................................................................ 44 Lens layout ................................................................................................................... 44 Locking or unlocking the lens ................................................................................. 45 Lens markings ............................................................................................................ 47 Accessories ................................................................................................... 48 External flash layout ................................................................................................. 48 Connecting the external flash ................................................................................. 49 GPS module layout (optional) .............................................................................. 51 Attaching the GPS module .................................................................................... 51 Shooting modes .......................................................................................... 53 t Smart Auto mode ..................................................................................... 53 P Program mode ....................................................................................................... 55 Program Shift ................................................................................................................ 56 Minimum shutter speed ............................................................................................ 56 A Aperture Priority mode ..................................................................................... 57 S Shutter Priority mode.......................................................................................... 58 M Manual mode ....................................................................................................... 59 Framing mode .............................................................................................................. 59 Using the Bulb function ............................................................................................ 60 i Lens Priority mode ............................................................................................. 60 Using E ............................................................................................................. 60 Using i-Function in P/A/S/M modes ................................................................ 61 Using Z .............................................................................................................. 63 s Smart mode ........................................................................................................ 64 Using the Best Face mode ........................................................................................ 65 Capturing panoramic photos .................................................................................. 66 Recording a video ..................................................................................................... 68 3D mode ....................................................................................................................... 69 Available functions by shooting mode ............................................................. 719 Contents Chapter 2 Shooting Functions Size and Resolution .................................................................................... 73 Photo size ..................................................................................................................... 73 Quality ........................................................................................................................... 74 ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 75 White Balance .............................................................................................. 76 Customizing preset White Balance options ....................................................... 77 Picture Wizard (photo styles) .................................................................... 79 AF mode ........................................................................................................ 80 Single AF ....................................................................................................................... 81 Continuous AF ............................................................................................................ 81 Manual focus ............................................................................................................... 82 AF area ........................................................................................................... 83 Selection AF ................................................................................................................ 83 Multi AF ......................................................................................................................... 84 Face detection AF ...................................................................................................... 84 Self-Portrait AF ........................................................................................................... 85 Touch AF ........................................................................................................ 86 Touch AF ....................................................................................................................... 86 AF Point ......................................................................................................................... 86 Tracking AF .................................................................................................................. 86 One touch shot .......................................................................................................... 87 Focus assist ................................................................................................... 88 MF Assist ....................................................................................................................... 88 Focus Peaking ............................................................................................................. 88 Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ............................................................. 89 Drive (shooting method) ........................................................................... 90 Single ............................................................................................................................. 90 Continuous .................................................................................................................. 90 Burst ............................................................................................................................... 91 Timer .............................................................................................................................. 91 Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) ............................................................. 92 White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) ............................................................ 92 Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) ........................................................ 93 Bracketing setting ..................................................................................................... 93 Flash ............................................................................................................... 94 Reducing the red-eye effect .................................................................................. 95 Adjusting the flash intensity ................................................................................. 95 Metering ........................................................................................................ 97 Multi ............................................................................................................................... 97 Spot ................................................................................................................................ 98 Center-weighted ....................................................................................................... 98 Measuring the exposure value of the focus area ........................................... 99 Dynamic Range ......................................................................................... 100 Smart Filter ................................................................................................. 101 Exposure compensation .......................................................................... 102 Exposure lock ............................................................................................. 103 Video functions ......................................................................................... 104 Movie size.................................................................................................................. 104 Movie quality ........................................................................................................... 104 Multi Motion ............................................................................................................ 105 Fader ........................................................................................................................... 105 Voice ............................................................................................................................ 106 Wind cut .................................................................................................................... 106 Mic Level .................................................................................................................... 10610 Contents Chapter 3 Playback/Editing Searching and managing files ................................................................ 108 Viewing photos ....................................................................................................... 108 Viewing image thumbnails ................................................................................. 108 Viewing files by category .................................................................................... 109 Viewing files as a folder ........................................................................................ 109 Protecting files ........................................................................................................ 110 Lock/Unlock all files .................................................................................................. 110 Deleting files ............................................................................................................ 111 Deleting a single file ................................................................................................. 111 Deleting multiple files .............................................................................................. 111 Deleting all files .......................................................................................................... 112 Viewing photos .......................................................................................... 113 Enlarging a photo .................................................................................................. 113 Viewing a slide show ............................................................................................. 113 Auto rotating ........................................................................................................... 114 Creating a print order (DPOF) ............................................................................ 114 Playing videos ............................................................................................ 115 Trimming a video during playback .................................................................. 115 Capturing an image during playback ............................................................. 116 Editing photos ........................................................................................... 117 Cropping a photo ................................................................................................... 117 Rotating a photo .................................................................................................... 118 Resizing photos....................................................................................................... 118 Adjusting your photos .......................................................................................... 119 Retouching faces .................................................................................................... 120 Reducing red-eye ................................................................................................... 120 Applying Smart Filter effects .............................................................................. 121 Chapter 4 Wireless network Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings ............... 123 Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................... 123 Setting network options ......................................................................................... 124 Manually setting the IP address ........................................................................... 124 Using the login browser....................................................................................... 125 Network connection tips ..................................................................................... 126 Entering text ............................................................................................................ 127 Saving files to a smart phone automatically ....................................... 128 Sending photos or videos to a smart phone ....................................... 129 Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release .............................. 131 Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos ..................................... 133 Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC.................................. 133 Sending photos or videos to a PC .................................................................... 133 Sending photos or videos via email ...................................................... 135 Changing email settings ...................................................................................... 135 Storing your information ........................................................................................ 135 Setting an email password ..................................................................................... 136 Changing the email password .............................................................................. 137 Sending photos or videos via email ................................................................ 137 Using photo or video sharing websites ................................................ 139 Accessing a website .............................................................................................. 139 Uploading photos or videos............................................................................... 140 Using AllShare Play to send files ............................................................ 141 Uploading photos to online storage ............................................................... 141 Viewing photos or videos on devices that support AllShare Play ........ 142 Sending photos using Wi-Fi Direct ........................................................ 14411 Contents Chapter 6 Connecting to external devices Viewing files on an HDTV or 3D TV ........................................................ 158 Viewing files on an HDTV .................................................................................... 158 Viewing files on a 3D TV ....................................................................................... 159 Transferring files to your computer ....................................................... 160 Transferring files to your Windows OS computer ....................................... 160 Connecting the camera as a removable disk ................................................... 160 Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) .................................................. 161 Transferring files to your Mac OS ...................................................................... 161 Using programs on a PC........................................................................... 163 Installing programs from the provided CD ................................................... 163 Available programs when using i-Launcher .................................................... 163 Using i-Launcher .................................................................................................... 163 Requirements for Windows OS ............................................................................. 163 Requirements for Mac OS ....................................................................................... 164 Opening i-Launcher .................................................................................................. 164 Using Multimedia Viewer ........................................................................................ 165 Downloading the firmware .................................................................................... 166 Downloading the PC Auto Backup program ................................................... 166 Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ........................................................ 167 Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ............................................................... 167 Chapter 5 Camera settings menu User settings ............................................................................................... 146 ISO Customizing ..................................................................................................... 146 ISO Step ......................................................................................................................... 146 Auto ISO Range .......................................................................................................... 146 Noise Reduction ..................................................................................................... 146 Bracket Set ................................................................................................................ 147 DMF (Direct Manual Focus) ................................................................................ 147 Color space ............................................................................................................... 148 Distortion Correct .................................................................................................. 149 Touch Operation ..................................................................................................... 149 iFn Customizing ...................................................................................................... 149 User Display .............................................................................................................. 149 Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 150 Grid Line .................................................................................................................... 151 AF Lamp ..................................................................................................................... 151 Setting ......................................................................................................... 15212 Contents Before contacting a service center ........................................................ 181 Camera specifications .............................................................................. 184 Glossary ....................................................................................................... 189 Optional accessories ................................................................................. 195 Index ............................................................................................................ 197 FCC notice ................................................................................................... 200 Chapter 7 Appendix Error messages .......................................................................................... 169 Maintaining the camera........................................................................... 170 Cleaning the camera ............................................................................................. 170 Camera lens and display ......................................................................................... 170 Image sensor ............................................................................................................... 170 Camera body ............................................................................................................... 170 Using or storing the camera ............................................................................... 171 Inappropriate places to use or store the camera ........................................... 171 Using on beaches or shores ................................................................................... 171 Storing for extended period of time ................................................................... 171 Using the camera with caution in humid environments ............................ 172 Other cautions ............................................................................................................ 172 About memory card .............................................................................................. 173 Supported memory card ........................................................................................ 173 Memory card capacity ............................................................................................. 174 Cautions when using memory cards .................................................................. 176 About the battery .................................................................................................. 177 Battery specifications ............................................................................................... 177 Battery life .................................................................................................................... 178 Low battery message ............................................................................................... 178 Notes about using the battery .............................................................................. 178 Cautions about using the battery ........................................................................ 179 Notes about charging the battery ....................................................................... 179 Notes about charging with a computer connected...................................... 180 Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care ............................ 18013 Concepts in Photography Standing photography Compose your shot; stand up straight with your feet shoulder-length apart, and keep your elbows pointed down. Shooting postures A correct posture for stabilizing the camera is necessary for taking a good photo. Even if you hold a camera correctly, the wrong posture can cause the camera to shake. Stand up straight and remain still to maintain a steady base for your camera. When shooting with a slow shutter speed, hold your breath to minimize body movement. Holding the camera Hold the camera with your right hand and place you right index finger on the shutter button. Place your left hand under the lens for support.14 Concepts in Photography Crouching photography Compose your shot, crouch with one knee touching the ground, and keep a straight posture. Using the display To take photos at high or low angles, tilt the display up or down. You can tilt the display up to 90° upwards ( ) or 45° downwards ( ). • Keep the display closed ( ) when the camera is not in use. • Tilt the display only within the angle allowed. Failing to do so may damage your camera.15 Concepts in Photography Low-angle shot A low-angle shot is a shot from a camera positioned below your eyeline, looking up the subject. High-angle shot A high-angle shot is a shot from a camera positioned above your eyeline, looking down on the subject.16 Concepts in Photography Aperture The aperture, a hole that controls the amount of light that enters the camera, is one of the three factors that determine the exposure. The aperture housing contains thin, metal plates that open and close to let light through the aperture and into the camera. The size of the aperture is closely related to the brightness of a photo: the larger the aperture, the brighter the photo; the smaller the aperture, the darker the photo. Aperture sizes Minimum aperture Medium aperture Maximum aperture Darker photo (aperture opened slightly) Brighter photo (aperture opened wide) The size of the aperture is represented by a value known as an “F-number.” The f-number represents the focal length divided by the diameter of the lens. For example, if a lens with a 50 mm focal length has an f-number of F2, the diameter of the aperture is 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm=F2) The smaller the f-number, the greater the size of the aperture. The opening in the aperture is described as the Exposure Value (EV). Increasing the Exposure Value (+1 EV) means the amount of light doubles. Decreasing the Exposure Value (-1 EV) means the amount of light halves. You can also use the exposure compensation feature to fine-tune the amount of light by subdividing exposure values into 1/2, 1/3 EV, and so on. +1 EV F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8 -1 EV Exposure Value Steps17 Concepts in Photography Aperture value and the depth of field You can blur or sharpen the background of a photo by controlling the aperture. It is closely related to the depth of field (DOF), which can be expressed as small or large. A photo with a large DOF A photo with a small DOF The aperture housing contains several blades. These blades move together and control the amount of light passing through the center of the aperture. The number of blades also affects the shape of light when shooting night scenes. If an aperture has an even number of blades, light divides into an equal number of sections. If the number of blades is odd, the number of sections is double the number of blades. For example, an aperture with 8 blades divides light into 8 sections and an aperture with 7 blades into 14 sections. 7 blades 8 blades18 Concepts in Photography Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. Usually, the shutter speed is manually adjustable. The measurement of the shutter speed is known as the “Exposure Value” (EV), which is marked in intervals of 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1000 s, 1/2000 s, and so on. Exposure +1 EV -1 EV 1s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s Shutter Speed Therefore, the faster the shutter speed, the less light will be let in. Likewise, the slower the shutter speed, the more light will be let in. As the photos below illustrate, a slow shutter speed allows more time to let light in, so the photo becomes brighter. On the other hand, a fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in motion. 0.8 s 0.004 s19 Concepts in Photography ISO sensitivity The exposure of an image is determined by the sensitivity of the camera. This sensitivity is based on international film standards, known as ISO standards. On digital cameras, this sensitivity rating is used to represent the sensitivity of the digital mechanism that captures the image. ISO sensitivity doubles as the number doubles. For example, an ISO 200 setting is capable of capturing images at twice the speed of an ISO 100 setting. However, higher ISO settings can result in “noise”—small specks, spots, and other phenomena in a photo that give the shot a noisy or dirty appearance. As a general rule, it is best to use a low ISO setting to prevent noise in your photos, unless you are shooting in darkened environments or at night. Changes in the quality and brightness according to ISO sensitivity Because a low ISO sensitivity means the camera will be less sensitive to light, you need more light to have an optimal exposure. When using a low ISO sensitivity, open the aperture more or reduce the shutter speed to allow more light to enter the camera. For example, on a sunny day when light is abundant, a low ISO sensitivity does not require a slow shutter speed. However, in a dark place or at night, a low ISO sensitivity will result in a blurry photo. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the ISO sensitivity by a moderate amount. A photo captured with a tripod and high ISO sensitivity A blurred photo with a low ISO sensitivity20 Concepts in Photography How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity control exposure The aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity are closely interconnected in photography. The aperture setting controls the opening that regulates the light that enters the camera, while the shutter speed determines the length of time that light is allowed to enter. ISO sensitivity determines the speed at which the film reacts to light. Together, these three aspects are described as the triangle of exposure. A change in shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO sensitivity can be offset by adjustments to the others to maintain the amount of light. The results, however, change according to the settings. For example, shutter speed is useful in expressing movement, aperture can control the depth of field, and ISO sensitivity can control the graininess of a photo. Settings Results Aperture value Wide aperture = more light Narrow aperture = less light Wide = small depth of field Narrow = large depth of field Settings Results Shutter speed Fast speed = less light Slow speed = more light Fast = still Slow = blurry ISO sensitivity High sensitivity = more sensitive to light Low sensitivity = less sensitive to light High = more grainy Low = less grainy21 Concepts in Photography Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective Focal length, which is measured in millimeters, is the distance between the middle of the lens to its focal point. It affects the angle and perspective of captured images. A short focal length translates into a wide angle, which allows you to capture a wide shot. A long focal length translates into a narrow angle, which allows you to capture telephoto shots. Short focal length wide shot wide angle wide-angle lens Long focal length telephoto shot narrow angle telephoto lens Look at these photos below and compare the changes. 18 mm angle 55 mm angle 200 mm angle Normally, a lens with a wide angle is suitable for shooting landscapes and a lens with a narrow angle is recommended for shooting sports events or portraits.22 Concepts in Photography Depth of field Portraits or still-life photos mostly acclaimed by people are the ones on which the background is out of focus so the subject looks pronounced. Depending on the focused areas, a photo can be blurred or sharpened. This is called ‘a low DOF’ or ‘a high DOF’. The depth of field is the focused area around the subject. Therefore, a small DOF signifies that the focused area is narrow and a large DOF means the focused area is wide. A photo with a small DOF, which stresses the subject and makes the rest of it blurred, can be obtained by using a telescope lens or selecting a low aperture value. Conversely, a photo with a large DOF which shows all the elements on the photo sharply focused can be achieved by using a wide angle lens or selecting a high aperture value. Small Depth of Field Large Depth of Field What controls out-of-focus effects? DOF depends on aperture value The wider the aperture is (namely the lower the aperture value), the lower the DOF becomes. Under the condition where the other values including shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are equal, a low aperture value leads to a photo with a low DOF. 55 mm F5.7 55 mm F2223 Concepts in Photography DOF depends on focal length The longer the focal length is, the lower the DOF gets. A telescope lens with a longer focal length than a telescope lens with a short focal length is better to capture a photo of a low DOF. A photo captured with a 18 mm telescope lens A photo captured with a 100 mm telescope lens DOF depends on the distance between the subject and the camera The shorter the distance between the subject and the camera is, the lower the DOF gets. Therefore, taking a photo close to a subject can result in a photo of low DOF. A photo captured with a 100 mm telescope lens A photo captured close to the subject 24 Concepts in Photography Optical preview You can press the Custom button to view the optical preview before capturing a photo. The camera adjusts the aperture to the predefined settings and shows the results on the screen. Set the Custom button to Optical preview. (p. 150) Composition It is fun to capture a photo of the beauty of world with a camera. No matter how the world is beautiful, however, a poor composition cannot capture the beauty of it. When it comes to composition, it is very important to prioritize subjects. Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. Rule of Thirds To use the rule of thirds, divide the image into a 3x3 pattern of equal rectangles. To compose photos that best emphasize the subject, make sure the subject is located at one of the corners of the center rectangle.25 Concepts in Photography Using the rule of thirds will create photos with stable and compelling compositions. Below are a few examples. Photos with two subjects If your subject is in one corner of the photo, it creates an unbalanced composition. You can stabilize the photo by capturing a second subject in the opposite corner to balance the weight of the photo. Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 1 Subject 2 Unstable Stable When taking landscape photos, centering the horizon will create an unbalanced effect. Give more weight to the photo by moving the horizon up or down. Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 1 Subject 2 Unstable Stable26 Concepts in Photography Flash guide number The model number of a flash refers to the flash’s power, and the maximum amount of light created is represented by a value known as a “guide number.” The bigger the guide number, the more light is emitted from the flash. The guide number is achieved by multiplying the distance from the flash to the subject and the aperture value when the ISO sensitivity is set to 100. Guide number = Flash to Subject Distance X Aperture value Aperture value = Guide number / Flash to Subject Distance Flash to Subject Distance = Guide number / Aperture value Therefore, if you know the guide number of a flash, you can estimate an optimum flash to subject distance when setting the flash manually. For example, if a flash has a guide number of GN 20 and is 4 meters away from the subject, the optimal aperture value is F5.0. Flash Light is one of the most important components in photography. It’s not easy, however, to have an enough amount of light anytime and anywhere. Making use of a flash allows you to optimize light settings and create a variety of effects. Flash, also known as strobe or speed light, helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. It is also useful in light-abundant situations. For example, flash can be used in compensating the exposure of a subject’s shadow or capturing clearly both the subject and the background in backlit conditions. Before correction After correction27 Concepts in Photography Bounce Photography Bounce photography refers to the method of bouncing light off of the ceiling or walls so that the light spreads evenly over the subject. Normally, photos captured with flash may appear unnatural and cast shadows. Subjects in photos captured with bounce photography cast no shadows and look smooth due to evenly spread light.Chapter 1 My Camera Learn about your camera’s layout, display icons, lens, optional accessories, and basic functions.My Camera 29 Getting started Unpacking Check your product box for the following items. Camera (including the body cap and hot-shoe cover) AC adapter/USB cable Rechargeable battery External flash Software CD-ROM (User manual included) Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM Quick Start Guide Strap • The illustrations may differ from your actual items. • You can purchase optional accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for any problems caused by using unauthorized accessories. For information about accessories, refer to page 195.My Camera 30 Camera layout No. Name 1 Mode dial • t: Smart Auto mode (p. 53) • P: Program mode (p. 55) • A: Aperture Priority mode (p. 57) • S: Shutter Priority mode (p. 58) • M: Manual mode (p. 59) • i: Lens Priority mode (p. 60) • s: Smart mode (p. 64) • B: Wi-Fi (p. 122) 2 Jog dial • In the Menu screen: Move to a desired menu item. • In the Smart panel: Adjust a selected option. • In Shooting mode: Adjust shutter speed or aperture value in some shooting modes or change the size of a focus area. • In Playback mode: View thumbnails, enlarge or reduce a photo, or open or close a folder of continuous or burst shots in Playback mode. 3 DIRECT LINK button: Start a preset Wi-Fi function. (p. 32) No. Name 4 Microphone 5 Hot-shoe cover 6 Hot-shoe 7 Eyelet for camera strap 8 Image sensor 9 Internal antenna/NFC tag * Avoid contact with the internal antenna while using the wireless network. 10 Speaker 11 Lens release button 12 Lens mount 13 Lens mount index 14 AF-assist light/Timer lamp 15 Power switch 16 Shutter button 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 4 8 7 16 15My Camera > Camera layout 31 No. Name 1 Video recording button Start recording a video. 2 EV adjust button (p. 102) Press and hold the button, and then scroll the jog dial to adjust the exposure value. In M mode, the aperture value will be adjusted. 3 Fn button Access the Smart panel and fine-tune some settings. 4 o button • In the Menu screen: Save the selected options. • In Shooting mode: Allow you to select a focus area manually in some shooting modes. 5 Navigation button • In Shooting mode -D: View camera settings and change options. - I: Select an ISO value. - C: Select a drive option. - F: Select an AF mode. • In other situations Move up, down, left, right, respectively. No. Name 6 Delete/Custom button • In Shooting mode: Perform the assigned function. (p. 150) • In Playback mode: Delete files. 7 Playback button Enter Playback mode. 8 Status lamp Indicate the status of the camera. • Blinking: When saving a photo, shooting a video, sending data to a computer, connecting to WLAN, or sending a photo. • Steady: When there is no data transfer, when data transfer to a computer is complete, or charging the battery. 9 MENU button Access options or menus. 5 6 1 2 3 4 7 8 9My Camera > Camera layout 32 No. Name 1 USB and shutter release port Connect the camera to a computer or shutter release. Use a shutter release cable with a tripod to minimize camera movement. 2 HDMI port 3 Battery chamber/Memory card cover Insert a memory card and battery. 4 Display • To take photos at high or low angles, tilt the display up or down. (p. 14) • Touch the screen to select a menu or an option. (p. 36) 5 Tripod mount Using the DIRECT LINK button You can turn on the Wi-Fi feature conveniently by pressing [DIRECT LINK]. Press [DIRECT LINK] again to return to the previous mode. Setting the DIRECT LINK button You can select a Wi-Fi function to launch when you press [DIRECT LINK]. (p. 150) To set a DIRECT LINK option, In Shooting mode, press [m] →5→Key Mapping→ DIRECT LINK → an option. 4 5 1 2 3My Camera 33 Inserting the battery and memory card Learn how to insert the battery and an optional memory card into the camera. Memory card Insert a memory card with the goldcolored contacts facing down. Rechargeable battery Insert the battery with the Samsung logo facing up. Removing the battery and memory card Rechargeable battery Battery lock Slide the lock up to release the battery. Memory card Push the card gently until it disengages from the camera, and then pull it out of the slot. Using the memory card adapter To use micro memory cards with this product, a PC, or a memory card reader, insert the card into an adapter. While the status lamp of the camera is blinking, do not remove the memory card or battery. Doing so may damage the data stored on the memory card or your camera.My Camera 34 Charging the battery and turning on your camera Charging the battery Before you use the camera for the first time, you must charge the battery. Plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera, and then plug the other end of the USB cable into the AC adapter. Status lamp • Red light on: Charging • Red light off: Fully charged • Red light blinking: Error • Use only the AC adapter and USB cable supplied with your camera. If you use another AC adapter, the camera battery may not charge or work properly. • You can charge the battery with the USB cable only when the camera is turned off. Turning on your camera Set the Power switch to ON. • To turn your camera off, set the Power switch to OFF. • The initial setup screen appears when you turn on the camera for the first time. (p. 35)My Camera 35 Performing the initial setup When you turn on your camera for the first time, the initial setup screen appears. The language is preset for the country or region where the camera is sold. You can change the language as desired. You can also select an item by touching it on the screen. 1 Press [I] to select Time Zone, and then press [F] or [o]. 2 Press [D/I] to select a time zone, and then press [o]. Back Set Time Zone [GMT +00:00] London [GMT -01:00] Cape Verde [GMT -02:00] Mid-Atlantic [GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo [GMT -03:30] Newfoundland 3 Press [I] to select Date & Time, and then press [F] or [o]. Back Set Date & Time Year Month Day Hr Min DST • The screen may differ depending on the language selected. 4 Press [C/F] to select an item (Year/Month/Day/Hr/Min/ DST). 5 Press [D/I] to set the option, and then press [o]. 6 Press [I] to select Date Type, and then press [F] or [o]. 7 Press [D/I] to select a date type, and then press [o]. 8 Press [I] to select Time Type, and then press [F] or [o]. 9 Press [D/I] to select a time type, and then press [o]. 10 Press [m] to finish the initial setup.My Camera 36 Selecting functions (options) Selecting with buttons Scroll the jog dial or press [D/I/C/F] to move, and then press [o] to select an option. Selecting by touch Do not use sharp objects, such as pens or pencils, to touch the screen. You can damage the screen. Touching: Touch an icon to select a menu or an option. AllShare Play MobileLink Remote Viewfinder Auto Backup Email SNS & Cloud Dragging: Touch and hold an area on the screen, and then drag your finger. AutoShare Photo Size Quality ISO White Balance Back SelectMy Camera > Selecting functions (options) 37 Flicking: Gently flick your finger across the screen. • The touch screen may not recognize your inputs if you touch multiple items at the same time. • When you touch or drag the screen, discolorations may occur. This is not a malfunction, but a characteristic of the touch screen. Touch or drag lightly to minimize the discolorations. • The touch screen may not work properly if you use the camera in extremely humid environments. • The touch screen may not work properly if you apply screen protection film or other accessories to the screen. • Depending on the viewing angle, the screen may appear dim. Adjust the brightness or viewing angle to improve the resolution. Using Press [m m] or touch on the screen, and then change shooting options or settings. E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode 1 Rotate the mode dial to P. 2 Press [m] or touch . 3 Press [C] → [D/I] to move to 1, and then press [o]. • You can also touch 1 on the screen. 4 Scroll the jog dial or press [D/I] to move to Photo Size, and then press [o]. • You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option. Back Select AutoShare Photo Size Quality ISO White BalanceMy Camera > Selecting functions (options) 38 5 Scroll the jog dial or press [D/I] to move to an option, and then press [o]. • You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option. • Press [m] or touch Back to go back to the previous menu. Back Set AutoShare Photo Size Quality ISO White Balance 5472x3648 (3:2) 3888x2592 (3:2) 2976x1984 (3:2) 1728x1152 (3:2) 5472x3080 (16:9) 6 Press [m] or touch Back to switch to Shooting mode. Using the Smart panel Press [f] or touch on the screen to access some functions such as Exposure, ISO, and White Balance. E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode 1 Rotate the mode dial to P. 2 Press [f] or touch .My Camera > Selecting functions (options) 39 3 Press [D/I/C/F] to move to EV, and then press [o]. • You can directly select an option by scrolling the jog dial without having to press [o]. • You can also select an option by touching it. EV : 0.0 Adjust You can adjust some options by dragging them. Back 4 Scroll the jog dial or press [C/F] to adjust the exposure value, and then press [o]. • You can also drag the dial on the screen, and then select Set to adjust the option. EV : 0.0 Back SetMy Camera 40 Display icons Capturing photos 1 2 3 London 1. Shooting information Icon Description Shooting mode Current date Current time GPS activated* London Location information* Memory card not inserted** Auto exposure lock (p. 103) Available number of photos • : Fully charged • : Partially charged • (Red): Empty (recharge the battery) Icon Description Auto focus frame Spot metering area Camera shake Manual focus scale Level gauge (p. 41) Histogram (p. 150) Focus Shutter speed Aperture value Exposure adjustment value ISO sensitivity (p. 75) * These icons appear when you attach an optional GPS module. ** Photos that were captured without inserting a memory card cannot be transferred to a memory card or a computer. 2. Shooting options Icon Description Photo size Drive mode Flash (p. 94) Flash intensity adjustment Metering (p. 97) Icon Description AF mode (p. 80) Focus area Face detection White Balance (p. 76) White Balance micro adjustment Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 89) ZZ on ratio RAW file Dynamic Range (p. 100) 3. Shooting options (Touch) Icon Description Change Smart mode*** AutoShare Touch AF options Shooting options Smart panel *** This icon appears only when you select Smart mode. The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. In Shooting modeMy Camera > Display icons 41 2. Shooting options Icon Description Video size AF mode (p. 80) Metering (p. 97) White Balance (p. 76) Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 89) White Balance micro adjustment Fader (p. 105) Multi Motion (p. 105) Voice recording off (p. 106) The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. About the level gauge The level gauge helps you align the camera with the horizontal and vertical lines on the display. If the level gauge is not level, calibrate the level gauge using the Horizontal Calibration function. (p. 152) Vertical Horizontal ▲ Level ▲ Unlevel You cannot use the level gauge when you shoot in portrait orientation. Recording videos 1 2 1. Shooting information Icon Description Shooting mode Current recording time/Available recording time • : Fully charged • : Partially charged • (Red): Empty (recharge the battery) Shutter speed Aperture value Exposure value ISO sensitivity (p. 75)My Camera > Display icons 42 In Playback mode Viewing photos London Information Mode F No Shutter ISO Metering Flash Focal Length White Balance EV Photo Size Date Icon Description Continuously captured file Current file/The total number of files Folder number - File number File with location information London Location information RAW file Protected file Print information added to file (p. 114) 3D file m Playback/Editing menu (Touch) Editing photos (Touch) Trimming a video (Touch) Viewing image thumbnails (Touch) 1 2 3 London No. Description 1 Captured photo 2 RGB histogram (p. 150) 3 Shooting mode, Metering, Flash, White Balance, Aperture value, Shutter speed, ISO, Focal length, Exposure value, Photo size, Date, Location information Playing videos Stop Capture Icon Description Playback speed Multi Motion Current playback time Video length / View previous file/Scan backward. (Each time you touch the scan backward icon, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) / Pause or resume playback. / View next file/Scan forward. (Each time you touch the scan forward icon, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Adjust the volume or mute the sound.My Camera > Display icons 43 Changing the information displayed Press [D] repeatedly to change the display type. Mode Display type Shooting • Basic shooting information (Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture value, Exposure value, ISO sensitivity, etc.) • Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons (MENU, Fn, AutoShare, Touch AF) + Level gauge • Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons + Current shooting options information (Photo size, Drive mode, Flash, Metering, AF mode, etc.) • Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons + Current shooting options information + Histogram + Date and time Playback • Basic information • Display all information about the current file. • Display all information about the current file including RGB histogram.My Camera 44 Lenses You can purchase optional lenses made exclusively for your NX series camera. Learn about the functions of each lens and select one that suits your needs and preferences. Lens layout SAMSUNG 18-55 mm F3.5-5.6 OIS III lens (example) 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 No. Description 1 Lens mount index 2 Zoom ring 3 Focus ring (p. 88) 4 Lens hood mount index 5 Lens 6 i-Function button (p. 60) 7 AF/MF switch (p. 80) 8 Lens contacts When not using the lens, attach the lens cap and lens mount cover to protect the lens from dust and scratches.My Camera > Lenses 45 SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II lens (example) 7 1 2 3 5 6 4 No. Description 1 Lens mount index 2 Zoom lock switch 3 Lens 4 Focus ring (p. 88) 5 i-Function button (p. 60) 6 Zoom ring 7 Lens contacts Locking or unlocking the lens To lock the lens, pull and hold the zoom lock switch away from the camera body and rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration.My Camera > Lenses 46 To unlock the lens, rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustation until you hear the click. You cannot capture a photo when the lens is locked. SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 lens (example) 5 2 1 4 3 No. Description 1 i-Function button (p. 60) 2 Lens mount index 3 Focus ring (p. 88) 4 Lens 5 Lens contactsMy Camera > Lenses 47 Lens markings Find out what the numbers on the lens signify. SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS lens (example) 1 2 345 No. Description 1 Aperture value A range of supported aperture values. For example, 1:3.5–6.3 means the maximum aperture value range from 3.5 to 6.3. 2 Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters). This figure is expressed in a range: minimum focal length to maximum focal length of the lens. Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. 3 ED ED stands for Extra-low Dispersion. Extra-low dispersion glass is effective in minimizing chromatic aberration (a distortion that occurs when a lens fails to focus all colors to the same convergence point). 4 OIS (p. 89) Optical Image Stabilization. Lenses with this feature can detect camera shake and effectively cancel out the movement inside the camera. 5 Ø The lens diameter. When you attach a filter to the lens, make sure that the diameters of the lens and the filter are the same.My Camera 48 Accessories You can use accessories including external flash and GPS module that can help you capture better and more convenient photos. For more information about optional accessories, refer to the manual for each accessory. • The illustrations may differ from the actual items. • You can purchase Samsung-approved accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using another manufacturer's accessories. External flash layout SEF8A (example) 1 2 3 No. Description 1 Bulb 2 Hot-shoe fastening dial 3 Hot-shoe connectionMy Camera > Accessories 49 Connecting the external flash 1 Remove the hot-shoe cover from the camera. 2 Mount the flash by sliding it into the hot-shoe. 3 Lock the flash into place by turning the hot-shoe fastening dial clockwise. 4 Lift up the flash for use.My Camera > Accessories 50 • You can capture a photo with a flash that is not fully charged, but it is recommended to use a fully charged flash. • Refer to the optional accessories page for available external flashes. (p. 195) • The available options may differ depending on the shooting mode. • There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. • SEF8A may not be compatible with other NX series cameras. • For more details about optional flashes, refer to the user manual for the flash. Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage your camera. SEF220A (example) (optional) 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 No. Description 1 Display icons 2 READY lamp/Test button 3 MODE button 4 Flash release button 5 POWER button 6 Battery cover 7 Bulb 8 TELE/WIDE mode switch 9 Hot-shoe connectionMy Camera > Accessories 51 GPS module layout (optional) 1 2 3 4 5 No. Description 1 Status lamp 2 POWER button 3 Hot-shoe fastening dial 4 Hot-shoe connection 5 Battery cover Attaching the GPS module 1 Remove the hot-shoe cover from the camera. 2 Mount the GPS module by sliding it into the hot-shoe.My Camera > Accessories 52 3 Lock the GPS module into place by turning the hot-shoe fastening dial towards LOCK. 4 Press the power button of the GPS module.My Camera 53 Shooting modes Two simple shooting modes—Smart Auto and Smart mode—help you capture photos with numerous automatic settings. Additional modes allow for greater customization of settings. Icon Description t Smart Auto mode (p. 53) P Program mode (p. 55) A Aperture Priority mode (p. 57) S Shutter Priority mode (p. 58) M Manual mode (p. 59) i Lens Priority mode (p. 60) s Smart mode (p. 64) B Wi-Fi features (p. 122) t Smart Auto mode In Smart Auto mode, the camera recognizes surrounding conditions and automatically adjusts factors that contribute to exposure, including shutter speed, aperture value, metering, White Balance, and exposure compensation. As the camera controls most of the functions, some shooting functions are limited. This mode is useful for capturing quick snapshots with the least amount of adjustment.My Camera > Shooting modes 54 1 Rotate the mode dial to t. 2 Align your subject in the frame. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus. • The camera selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon appears at the screen. Recognizable scenes Icon Description Landscapes Scenes with bright white backgrounds Landscapes at night Icon Description Portraits at night Landscapes with backlighting Portraits with backlighting Portraits Close-up photos of objects Close-up photos of text Sunsets Indoors, dark Partially lit Close-up with spot lighting Portraits with spot lighting Blue skies Forested areas typically consist of green-colored subjects Close-up photos of colorful subjects Camera is stabilized on a tripod and the subject is not moving for a certain period of time. (when shooting in the dark) Actively moving subjects Fireworks (when using a tripod) 4 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.My Camera > Shooting modes 55 • The camera may detect different scenes, even the same subjects, depending on external factors such as camera shake, lighting, and distance to the subject. • If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the default settings for the Smart Auto mode. • Even if it detects a face, the camera may not select a portrait mode depending on the subject's position or lighting. • Even if you use a tripod, the camera may not detect the tripod mode ( ) if the subject is moving. • The camera consumes more battery power, because it changes settings often to select appropriate scenes. P Program mode The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture value so that an optimal exposure value can be achieved. This mode is useful when you want to capture shots of constant exposure while being able to adjust other settings. 1 Rotate the mode dial to P. 2 Set the desired options. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo.My Camera > Shooting modes 56 Program Shift Program Shift function lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value while the camera maintains the same exposure. When you scroll the jog dial to the left, the shutter speed decreases and the aperture value increases. When you scroll the jog dial to the right, the shutter speed increases and the aperture value decreases. Minimum shutter speed Set the shutter speed not to be slower than the selected speed. However, if an optimal exposure value cannot be achieved because the ISO sensitivity reached the maximum ISO value that is set by Auto ISO Range, shutter speed may be slower than the selected minimum shutter speed. To set the minimum shutter speed, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Minimum Shutter Speed→ an option. • This feature is available only when the ISO sensitivity is set to Auto. • This feature is available only in Program or Aperture priority mode.My Camera > Shooting modes 57 A Aperture Priority mode In Aperture Priority mode, the camera automatically calculates shutter speed according to the aperture value you choose. You can adjust the depth of field (DOF) by changing the aperture value. This mode is useful for taking portraits, flowers, or landscape shots. Large Depth of Field Small Depth of Field 1 Rotate the mode dial to A. 2 Scroll the jog dial to adjust the aperture value. • You can also adjust the aperture value by pressing [f], moving to the aperture value, and then scrolling the jog dial or dragging the screen. 3 Set the desired options. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • In low-light settings, you may need to increase the ISO sensitivity to prevent blurred photos. • To set the minimum shutter speed, in Shooting mode, press [m] →1 →Minimum Shutter Speed→ an option.My Camera > Shooting modes 58 S Shutter Priority mode In Shutter Priority mode, the camera automatically adjusts the aperture value according to the shutter speed you choose. This mode is useful for capturing photos of fast-moving subjects or for creating tracer effects in a photo. For example, set the shutter speed to over 1/500 s to freeze the subject. To make the subject appear blurred set the shutter speed to below 1/30 s. Slow shutter speed Fast shutter speed 1 Rotate the mode dial to S. 2 Scroll the jog dial to adjust the shutter speed. • You can also adjust the shutter speed by pressing [f], moving to the shutter speed, and then scrolling the jog dial or dragging the screen. 3 Set the desired options. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. In order to compensate for the reduced amount of light allowed by fast shutter speeds, open the aperture and let in more light. If your photos are still too dark, increase the ISO value.My Camera > Shooting modes 59 M Manual mode Manual mode lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value manually. In this mode, you can fully control the exposure of your photos. This mode is useful in controlled shooting environments, such as a studio, or when it is necessary to fine-tune camera settings. The Manual mode is also recommended for shooting night scenes or fireworks. 1 Rotate the mode dial to M. 2 Scroll the jog dial to adjust the shutter speed. 3 Press and hold [W], and then rotate the mode dial to adjust the aperture value. • You can also adjust the shutter speed or the aperture value by pressing [f], moving to the shutter speed or the aperture value, and then scrolling the jog dial or dragging the screen. 4 Set the desired options. 5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. Framing mode When you adjust the aperture value or shutter speed, the exposure changes according to the settings, so the display may darken. With this function on, the brightness of the display is constant regardless of the settings, so you can better frame your shot. To use Framing Mode, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Framing Mode → an option.My Camera > Shooting modes 60 Using the Bulb function Use the Bulb function to shoot night scenes or the night sky. While you are pressing [Shutter], the shutter is left open so you can create moving light effects. To use a bulb, Completely scroll the jog dial to the left to Bulb→ Press and hold [Shutter] for the desired time. • If you set a high ISO value or open the shutter for a long time, image noise may increase. • Drive options, flash, and One touch shot cannot be used with the Bulb function. • The Bulb function is available only in Manual mode. • Use a tripod and shutter release to prevent your camera from shaking. • The longer you open the shutter, the longer it takes to save a photo. Do not turn the camera off while the camera saves a photo. • If you use this function for a long time, use a fully charged battery. i Lens Priority mode You can adjust the depth of field to blur or sharpen the background. Using E 1 Rotate the mode dial to i. 2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select E. • You can also press [i-Function], and then press [C/F] or drag the screen to select E.My Camera > Shooting modes 61 3 Adjust the focus ring to select a value. • You can also scroll the jog dial to adjust the value. • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the value. Defocus E Sharpen 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • As you sharpen photos, the aperture value Increases and the shutter speed reduces. In dark places, photos may be blurry. • This function is not available when you set 3D Auto Mode in 3D mode. Using i-Function in P/A/S/M modes When you use the i-Function button on an i-Function lens, you can manually select and adjust shutter speed, aperture value, exposure value, ISO sensitivity, and White Balance on the lens. 1 Rotate the mode dial to P, A, S, or M. 2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select a setting. • You can also press [i-Function], and then press [C/F] or drag the screen to select a setting.My Camera > Shooting modes 62 3 Adjust the focus ring to select an option. • You can also scroll the jog dial or drag the screen to select an option. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. Available options Shooting mode PASM 3D Aperture -O-OShutter Speed - - OO - EV OOO - O ISO OOOO - White Balance OOOOO Z OOOO - • To select items to appear when you press [i-Function] on the lens in Shooting mode, press [m] →5→iFn Customizing→ an item. • This function is not available when you set 3D Auto Mode in 3D mode.My Camera > Shooting modes 63 Using ZThe Z allows you to zoom in on a subject with less degradation of photo quality than the Digital zoom. However, the photo resolution may change compared to when you zoom in by rotating the zoom ring. 1 Rotate the mode dial to P, A, S, M, or i. 2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select Z. • You can also press [i-Function], and then press [C/F] or drag the screen to select Z. 3 Adjust the focus ring to select a zoom ratio. • You can also scroll the jog dial or drag the screen to select an option. • Photo resolution varies according to the zoom ratio if you use the Z. 3:2 16:9 1:1 x1.2 4560X3040 (13.9M) 4560X2568 (11.7M) 3040X3040 (9.2M) x1.4 3888X2592 (10.1M) 3888X2184 (8.5M) 2592X2592 (6.7M) x1.7 3264X2176 (7.1M) 3264X1840 (6.0M) 2176X2176 (4.7M) x2 2736X1824 (5.0M) 2736X1536 (4.2M) 1824X1824 (3.3M) These figures are based on the maximum resolution at each image ratio. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • Z is not available when you capture burst shots. • Z is not available when you capture photos in the RAW file format. • Z is deactivated when you record videos by pressing the video recording button. • This function is not available when you set 3D Auto Mode in 3D mode.My Camera > Shooting modes 64 s Smart mode In Smart mode, you can capture photos with options that are preset for a specific scene. 1 Rotate the mode dial to s. 2 Select a scene. • To select a shooting mode when the mode dial is set to s, press [f] or touch , and then select a desired mode. Smart : Beauty Face Set Option Description Beauty Face Capture a portrait with options to hide facial imperfections. Best Face Capture multiple photos and replace faces to create the best possible image. Landscape Capture still-life scenes and landscapes. Option Description Macro Capture small or close-up subjects. Action Freeze Capture subjects moving at high speed. Rich Tones Capture a photo with vibrant colors. Panorama Capture a wide panoramic scene in a single photo. Waterfall Capture scenes with waterfalls. Silhouette Capture subjects as dark shapes against a light background. Sunset Capture scenes at sunset, with natural-looking reds and yellows. Night Capture multiple photos in low light conditions without a flash. The camera combines them to create a single image that is brighter and has less blurring. Fireworks Capture scenes with fireworks. Light Trace Capture scenes with the light trailing in low-light conditions. Creative Shot Capture photos with effects applied automatically. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture.My Camera > Shooting modes 65 Using the Best Face mode In Best Face mode, you can capture multiple photos and replace faces to create the best possible image. Use this mode to select the best image for each individual when capturing group photos. 1 Rotate the mode dial to s, and then select Best Face. 2 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 3 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • The camera captures 5 photos consecutively. • The first photo is set as the background image. • The camera automatically detects faces after shooting. 4 Touch a face to replace. 5 Touch the best image from the 5 faces that were captured. • Repeat steps 4 and 5 to replace the rest faces of the photo. • The icon will appear on the image that the camera recommends. 6 Touch to save the photo. • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • The resolution is set to 5.9M or smaller.My Camera > Shooting modes 66 Capturing panoramic photos Capture a 2D or 3D panoramic photo. Captured 3D panoramic photos can be viewed only on a 3D TV or 3D monitor. 1 Rotate the mode dial to s, and then select Panorama. 2 Press [m] →1→Panorama→Live Panorama or 3D. 3 Press [m] to return to Shooting mode. 4 Press and hold [Shutter] to start shooting. 5 With [Shutter] pressed, slowly move the camera in the direction you selected. • In 3D Panorama mode, you can capture a scene only in horizontal directions. • An arrow toward the direction of motion is displayed, and the entire shooting image is displayed in the preview box. • When the scenes are aligned, the camera captures the next photo automatically. 6 When you are finished, release [Shutter]. • The camera will automatically save the shots into one photo. • If you release [Shutter] while shooting, the panoramic shooting stops and photos that have been captured are saved.My Camera > Shooting modes 67 • The resolution varies depending on the panoramic photo you captured. • In Panorama mode, some shooting options are not available. • The camera may stop shooting due to the shooting composition or the subject's movement. • In Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the entire last scene if you stop moving the camera to improve the photo quality. To capture the entire scene, move your camera slightly beyond the point where you want the scene to end. • In 3D Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the very beginning or end of a scene due to the nature of the 3D effect. To capture the entire scene, move slightly beyond the beginning and end points you want to capture. • Photos captured with the 3D function are saved in JPEG (2D) and MPO (3D) formats. On your camera's display, you can view only JPEG files. • To view 3D files, connect your camera to a 3D TV or 3D monitor with an optional HDMI cable. While viewing, wear proper 3D glasses. • Capturing photos in 3D Panorama mode may result in a less pronounced 3D effect than those captured with a 3D lens. To increase the 3D effect, attach the optional 3D lens and use 3D mode. (p. 69) • For best results when capturing panoramic photos, avoid the following: - moving the camera too quickly or too slowly - moving the camera too little to capture the next image - moving the camera at irregular speeds - shaking the camera - shooting in dark places - capturing moving subjects nearby - shooting conditions where the brightness or color of light is changing • Photos taken are automatically saved, and shooting is stopped under the following conditions: - if you change the shooting direction while shooting - if you move the camera too rapidly - if you don't move the cameraMy Camera > Shooting modes 68 Recording a video In Shooting mode, you can record Full HD videos (1920X1080) by pressing (Video recording). The camera lets you record a video up to 29 minutes and 59 seconds in length at 60, 30, 24, or 15 fps, and saves the files in MP4 (H.264) format. 60 fps is available only with 1920X1080 and 1280X720 and 24 fps is available only with 1920X810. 15 fps is available only with some Smart Filter options. The sound is recorded via the camera's microphone. You can set the exposure by adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed for the mode you selected. When you use a lens that does not have an AF/MF switch while recording a video, press [F] to deactivate or activate the AF function. When you use the lens that has an AF/MF switch, the AF function works according to the switch’s setting. Select Fader to fade in or out a scene. You can also select Voice, Wind Cut, or other options to set recording options. (p. 106) 1 Rotate the mode dial to t, P, A, S, M, i, or s. • This feature may not work in some modes. 2 Set the desired options. 3 Press (Video recording) to start recording. 4 Press (Video recording) again to stop. • H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) is the latest video coding format established in 2003 collaboratively by ISO-IEC and ITU-T. Since this format uses a high compression rate, more data can be saved in less memory space. • If you have the image stabilizer option on when shooting a movie, the camera may record the image stabilizer sound. • The zoom sound or other lens sounds may be recorded if you adjust the lens while recording a video. • When using an optional video lens, the autofocus noise is not recorded. • If you remove the camera lens while recording a movie, the recording will be interrupted. Do not change the lens while recording. • If you attach an external microphone while recording a movie, sound will not be recorded through the external microphone. (The previous settings are maintained.) If you remove the external microphone while recording a movie, sound will not be recorded. Turn off the camera before attaching or removing the external microphone. My Camera > Shooting modes 69 • If you change the shooting angle of the camera suddenly while shooting a movie, the camera may not be able to record images accurately. Use a tripod to minimize camera shake. • The camera supports only the Multi AF function when recording a video. You cannot use any other focus area setting functions, such as Face Detection AF. • When the size of a movie file exceeds 4 GB, the camera automatically stops recording even if the maximum recording time (29 minutes and 59 seconds) has not been reached. • If you use a slow writing memory card, the recording of your movie can be interrupted because the card cannot process data at the rate the video is being shot. If this occurs, replace the card with a faster memory card or reduce the video size (for example, from 1280X720 to 640X480). • When formatting a memory card, always format using the camera. If you format on another camera or a PC, you can lose files on the card or cause a change in the capacity of the card. • When you press the video recording button, Z turns off. • While recording a video in the same ISO sensitivity, the screen may be darker than taking a photo. Adjust the ISO sensitivity. • When you record a video in P, A, or S mode, ISO is automatically set to Auto. 3D mode You can capture 3D photos or videos with an optional 3D lens. SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 [T6] 2D/3D lens (example) Set the 2D/3D switch on the lens to 3D, and then capture a photo or video 1.5-5 m away from the subject.My Camera > Shooting modes 70 • 3D mode is always on, regardless of the mode dial of the camera, except B. • To use auto 3D options that enable the camera to set shooting options automatically depending on shooting conditions in 3D mode, press [m] →1→3D Auto Mode→On. • To change the 3D recording option, press [m] →6→ 3D REC Mode→ a desired option. * Default Icon Description Side by Side*: Displays two images next to each other. Frame Packing: Displays the images for the left and right eye alternately in frames. • Available shooting options differ compared to other shooting modes. • You can select either 4.1M (2688X1512) or 2.1M (1920X1080) photo size. • The video resolution is set to 1920X1080. • Videos recorded in 3D may be dark or playback may be jittery. • Shooting in low temperatures may result in color distortion in images and may consume more battery power. • You may not be able to shoot properly in conditions below 8.5 LV/900 lux. For best results, capture photos in places with sufficient light. • When you photograph objects that contain polarizing material, such as a display, sunglasses, or a polarizing filter, or use the polarizing material with your lens, the images may appear dark or the 3D effect may not be applied properly. • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • If you rotate or tilt the camera vertically while shooting, the 3D effect may not be applied properly. Capture images with the camera in the normal position. • If you shoot in fluorescent lighting or capture images displayed by projectors or TVs, the images may appear black due to the flicker effect. • In 3D mode, the Enlarge x8 option of MF Assist may not be available. • The camera's display shows 3D videos only in 2D. • Photos captured with the 3D function are saved in JPEG (2D) and MPO (3D) formats. On your camera's display, you can view only JPEG files. • To view 3D files, connect your camera to a 3D TV or 3D monitor with an optional HDMI cable. While viewing, wear proper 3D glasses. • You cannot use the flash in 3D mode.My Camera > Shooting modes 71 Available functions by shooting mode For details about shooting functions, see Chapter 2. Press a shortcut for each function. Function Available in Shortcut Photo Size (p. 73) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t/3D* - Quality (p. 74) P/A/S/M/i/s* - ISO (p. 75) P/A/S/M f/I White Balance (p. 76) P/A/S/M f Picture Wizard (p. 79) P/A/S/M f Smart Filter (p. 101) P/A/S/M f AF Mode (p. 80) P/A/S/M/i*/s*/3D* f AF Area (p. 83) P/A/S/M/i*/s* f/F Touch AF (p. 86) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t/3D* - MF Assist (p. 88) P/A/S/M/i/s/t/3D* - Focus Peaking (p. 88) P/A/S/M/i/s/t - Link AE to AF Point (p. 99) P/A/S/M - Function Available in Shortcut Framing Mode (p. 59) P/A/S/M - OIS (Anti-Shake) (p. 89) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t* - Drive (Continuous/ Burst/Timer/ Bracketing) (p. 90) P/A/S/M/i*/s*/t*/3D* f/C Metering (p. 97) P/A/S/M f Dynamic Range (p. 100) P/A/S/M - Flash (p. 94) P*/A*/S*/M*/i*/s*/t* f Exposure compensation (p. 102) P/A/S f/W Exposure lock (p. 103) P/A/S - * Some functions are limited in these modes.Chapter 2 Shooting Functions Learn about the functions you can set in Shooting mode. You can enjoy more customized photos and videos by using the shooting functions.Shooting Functions 73 Shooting Functions Photo size As you increase the resolution, your photo or video will include more pixels, so it can be printed on larger paper or displayed on a larger screen. When you use a high resolution, the file size will also increase. Select a low resolution for photos that will be displayed in a digital picture frame or uploaded to the web. To set the size, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Photo Size→ an option. Icon Size Recommended for 5472x3648 (3:2) Printing on A1 paper. 3888x2592 (3:2) Printing on A2 paper. 2976x1984 (3:2) Printing on A3 paper. 1728x1152 (3:2) Printing on A5 paper. 5472x3080 (16:9) Printing on A1 paper or viewing on an HDTV. 3712x2088 (16:9) Printing on A3 paper or viewing on an HDTV. 2944x1656 (16:9) Printing on A4 paper or viewing on an HDTV. 1920x1080 (16:9) Printing on A5 paper or viewing on an HDTV. 3648x3648 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A1 paper. 2640x2640 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A3 paper. 2000x2000 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A4 paper. 1024x1024 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A5 paper. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Size and Resolution74 Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution Quality The camera saves photos in either the JPEG or RAW format. Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to the JPEG format and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to the JPEG format and are stored in the memory without any changes. RAW files have the file extension “SRW”. To adjust and calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of the RAW files, or to convert them into JPEG or TIFF format, use the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom program found on the supplied DVD-ROM. Ensure you have enough space on the memory card to save photos in the RAW format. To set the quality, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Quality→ an option. Icon Format Description JPEG Super Fine: • Compressed for the best quality. • Recommended for printing in large size. JPEG Fine: • Compressed for better quality. • Recommended for printing in normal size. Icon Format Description JPEG Normal: • Compressed for normal quality. • Recommended for printing in small size or uploading to the web. RAW RAW: • Save a photo without data loss. • Recommended for editing after shooting. RAW+JPEG RAW + S.Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (S.Fine quality) and RAW format. RAW+JPEG RAW + Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Fine quality) and RAW format. RAW+JPEG RAW + Normal: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Normal quality) and RAW format. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Shooting Functions 75 Shooting Functions The ISO sensitivity value represents the sensitivity of camera to light. The larger the ISO value, the more sensitive the camera is to light. Consequently, by selecting a higher ISO sensitivity value, you can capture photos in dim or dark places at faster shutter speeds. However, this may increase electronic noise and result in a grainy photo. To set ISO sensitivity, In Shooting mode, press [I] → an option. Examples ISO 100 ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 3200 • You can also set the option by pressing [m] →1→ISO→ an option in Shooting mode. • Increase the ISO value in places where flash use is prohibited. You can capture a clear photo by setting a high ISO value without having to secure more light. • Use the Noise Reduction function in order to reduce the visual noise that can appear on photos of a high ISO value. (p. 146) • Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. ISO sensitivityShooting Functions 76 Shooting Functions White Balance represents the light source that influences on the color of a photo. The color of a photo depends on the type and quality of the light source. If you want the color of your photo to be realistic, select an appropriate lighting condition to calibrate the White Balance, such as Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Tungsten, or adjust color temperature manually. You can also adjust color for the preset light sources so that the colors of the photo match the actual scene under mixed lighting conditions. To set the White Balance, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→White Balance→ an option. Icon Description Auto WB: Use automatic settings depending on the lighting conditions. Daylight: Select when taking outdoor photos on a sunny day. This option results in photos closest to the natural colors of the scene. Cloudy: Select when taking outdoor photos on a cloudy day or in shadows. Photos captured on cloudy days tend to be more bluish than on sunny days. This option offsets that effect. Icon Description Fluorescent White: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp. Especially for white fluorescent light with a color temperature of about 4,200K. Fluorescent NW: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp. Especially for white fluorescent light of very white hues with a temperature of about 5,000K. Fluorescent Daylight: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp. Especially for white fluorescent light of slightly bluish hue with a temperature of about 6,500K. Tungsten: Select when taking indoor photos under incandescent bulbs or halogen lamps. Incandescent tungsten bulbs tend to have a reddish hue. This option offsets that effect. Flash WB: Select when using a flash. Custom Set: Use your pre-defined settings. You can manually set the White Balance by pressing [D], and then shooting a white sheet of paper. Fill the spot metering circle with the paper and set the White Balance. White Balance77 Shooting Functions > White Balance Icon Description Color Temperature: Manually adjust the color temperature of the light source. Color temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin that indicates the specific type of light source. As the color temperature increases, the color distribution becomes cooler. Alternatively, as the color temperature decreases, the color distribution becomes warmer. Press [D], and then adjust the color temperature. Clear sky Fluorescent H Fluorescent L Cloudy Halogen lamp Daylight Tungsten Candle light Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Customizing preset White Balance options You can also customize preset White Balance options. To customize preset options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→White Balance → an option → [D] → scroll the jog dial, or press [D/I/C/F]. White Balance : Daylight Back Set Reset You can also touch an area on the screen.78 Shooting Functions > White Balance Examples Auto WB Daylight Fluorescent Daylight TungstenShooting Functions 79 Shooting Functions Picture Wizard lets you apply different photo styles to your photo to create various looks and emotional moods. You can also create and save your own photo styles by adjusting color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast for each style. There is no rule for which style is suitable in which conditions. Experiment with different styles and find your own settings. To set a photo style, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Picture Wizard → an option. Examples Standard Vivid Portrait Landscape Forest Retro Cool Calm Classic • You can also adjust the value of the preset style settings. Select a Picture Wizard option, press [D], and then adjust color, saturation, sharpness, or contrast. • To customize your own picture wizard, select , , or , and then adjust the color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast. • Picture Wizard options cannot be set with Smart Filter options at the same time. Picture Wizard (photo styles)Shooting Functions 80 Shooting Functions AF mode Learn how to adjust the camera’s focus according to the subjects. You can select a focusing mode appropriate to the subject among Single Auto Focus, Continuous Auto Focus, and Manual Focus. The AF function is activated when you press [Shutter] halfway. In the MF mode, you have to rotate the focus ring on the lens to focus manually. In most cases, you can have a focus by selecting Single AF. Fast moving subjects or subjects of a color similar to the background are difficult to focus. Select an appropriate focusing mode for such instances. If your lens has an AF/MF switch, you must set the switch according to the selected mode. Set the switch to AF when you select Single AF or Continuous AF. Set the switch to MF when you select Manual Focus. When your lens has no AF/MF switch, press [F] to select a desired AF mode. To set the auto focus mode, In Shooting mode, press [F] → an option. • You can also set the option by pressing [m] →1→AF Mode→ an option in Shooting mode. • The available options may differ depending on the lens in use.81 Shooting Functions > AF mode Single AF Single AF is appropriate for shooting a still subject. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the focus fixes in the focus area. The area turns green when the focus is achieved. Continuous AF While you are pressing [Shutter] halfway, the camera continues to automatic focusing. Once the focus area is fixed on the subject, the subject is always in focus even when moving. This mode is recommended for shooting a person on a bicycle, a running dog, or a car racing scene.82 Shooting Functions > AF mode Manual focus You can manually focus on a subject by rotating the focus ring on the lens. The MF Assist function lets you easily achieve a focus. While you are rotating the focus ring, the focus area is magnified. When you use the Focus Peaking function, the color you selected appears on the focused subject. This mode is recommended for shooting an object similar in color to the background, a night scene, or fireworks. If you use this function, you cannot set Touch AF, AF Area, and Link AE to AF Point options.Shooting Functions 83 Shooting Functions The AF area function changes the positions of the focus area. Generally, cameras focus on the nearest subject. When there are a lot of subjects, however, unwanted subjects can be in focus. In order to prevent unwanted subjects from being in focus, change the focus area so that a desired subject is in focus. You can get a clearer and sharper photo by selecting an appropriate focus area. To set the auto focus area, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→AF Area→ an option. • Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. • When the AF/MF switch is set to MF, you cannot change the AF area from the shooting menu. • When you use the Face Detection AF option, the camera focuses on the area with the white frame automatically. • Depending on the Picture Wizard options, Face Detection may not be effective. • When you set manual focus, Face Detection may not be available. • Face Detection may not be effective when: - the subject is far from the camera - it is too bright or too dark - the subject is not facing the camera - the subject is wearing sunglasses or a mask - the subject’s facial expression changes drastically - the subject is backlit or the lighting conditions are unstable Selection AF You can set the focus on an area you want. Apply an out-of-focus effect to make the subject more distinguishable. The focus on the photo below was repositioned and resized so that it fits the subject’s face. To resize or move the focus area, in Shooting mode, press [o]. Use the navigation button to move the focus area. Scroll the jog dial to resize the focus area. AF area84 Shooting Functions > AF area Multi AF The camera displays a green rectangle in places where focus is set correctly. The photo is divided into two or more areas, and the camera obtains focus points of each area. It is recommended for scenery photos. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera displays the focus areas as shown in the photo below. Face detection AF The camera focuses on human faces preferentially. Faces of up to 10 people can be detected. This setting is recommended for shooting a group of people. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera focuses on faces as shown in the photo below. In cases of shooting a group of people, the camera displays the focus on the nearest person’s face in white and the rest of the people’s faces in gray.85 Shooting Functions > AF area Self-Portrait AF It can be difficult to check whether your face is in focus when you are taking a self-portrait. When this function is on, the beep from the camera gets faster when your face is located at the center of the composition.Shooting Functions 86 Shooting Functions Tracking AF Tracking AF allows you to track and automatically focus on your subject, even when the subject is moving or when you change the shooting composition. White frame: Your camera is tracking the subject. Green frame: Your subject is in focus when you half-press [Shutter]. Red frame: Your camera failed to focus. Select or focus on a focal area that you touch on the screen. Additionally, focus on the subject and capture a photo by touching on the screen. To set Touch AF, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Touch AF→ an option. Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. Touch AF Touch AF allows you to select and focus on the focus area that you touch on the screen. AF Point The focal area will correspond to the area you touch on the screen and the focus will not be achieved. Touch AF87 Shooting Functions > Touch AF One touch shot You can capture a photo with the touch of your finger. As you touch on a subject, the camera focuses on the subject automatically and captures a photo. • If you do not select a focus area, the Auto Focus function does not work. • Tracking a subject may fail when: - the subject is too small - the subject moves excessively - the subject is backlit or you are shooting in a dark place - colors or patterns on the subject and the background are the same - the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds - the camera shakes excessively • When tracking fails, the feature will be reset. • If the camera fails to track the subject, the focus area will be reset. • If the camera fails to focus, the focus frame will change to red and the focus will be reset.Shooting Functions 88 Shooting Functions In the manual focus mode, you have to rotate the focus ring on the lens to focus. When you use the MF Assist function or the Focus Peaking function, you can achieve a clearer focus. This function is only available on a lens that supports manual focus. MF Assist In the manual focus mode, you can enlarge the scene and easily adjust the focus while rotating the focus ring. To set the manual focus assist, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→MF Assist→ an option. * Default Option Description Off Do not use the MF Assist function. Enlarge x5* The focus area is magnified by 5 times when you rotate the focus ring. * Default Option Description Enlarge x8 The focus area is magnified by 8 times when you rotate the focus ring. Focus Peaking In the manul focus mode, the color you selected appears on the focused subject to help you focus while rotating the focus ring. To set Focus Peaking options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Focus Peaking→ an option. * Default Option Description Level Set a sensitivity for detecting the focused subject. (Off, High, Normal*, Low) Color Set a color to appear on the focused subject. (White*, Red, Green) Focus assistShooting Functions 89 Shooting Functions Use the Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) function to minimize camera shake. OIS may not be available with some lenses. Camera shake tends to occur in dark places or when shooting indoors. In such cases, the camera uses slower shutter speeds in order to increase the amount of light taken in, which can result in a blurry photo. You can prevent this situation by using the OIS function. If your lens has an OIS switch, you have set the switch to ON to use the OIS function. To set OIS options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→OIS (Anti-Shake) → an option. * Default Icon Description Off: The OIS function is off. (This option may not be available with some lenses.) Mode 1*: The OIS function is applied only when you press [Shutter] in full or half. Mode 2: The OIS function is on. Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) Without OIS correction With OIS correction • OIS may not function properly when: - you move your camera to follow a moving subject - there is too much camera shake - the shutter speed is slow (for example, when you select Night in s mode) - the battery is low - you capture a close-up shot • If you use the OIS function with a tripod, your images may be blurred by the vibration of the OIS sensor. Deactivate the OIS function when you use a tripod. • If the camera is hit or dropped, the display will be blurry. If this occurs, turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. • Use the OIS function only when needed because the function consumes more battery power. • To set an OIS option on the menu, set the OIS switch on your lens to ON. • This option may not be available with some lenses. • Off may not be available with some lenses.Shooting Functions 90 Shooting Functions You can set the shooting method such as Continuous, Burst, Timer and so on. Select Single to capture one photo at a time. Select Continuous or Burst to shoot fast moving subjects. Select AE Bracket, WB Bracket, or P Wiz Bracket to adjust exposure, White Balance, or apply Picture Wizard effects. You can also select Timer to capture a photo of yourself. To set the shooting method, In Shooting mode, press [C] → an option. • You can also set the option by pressing [m] →1→Drive→ an option in Shooting mode. • Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Single Capture one photo whenever you press [Shutter]. Recommended for general conditions. Continuous Continuously capture photos while you are pressing [Shutter]. You can capture up to 5 photos (Continuous Normal) or 8.6 photos (Continuous High) per second. If you select Continuous High, the noise reduction function is not available. Drive (shooting method)91 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Burst Consecutively capture up to 10 shots per second (3 seconds), 15 shots per second (2 seconds), or 30 shots per second (1 second) when you press [Shutter] once. It is recommended for shooting the rapid motion of fast moving subjects such as racing cars. • To set the number of shots, in Shooting mode, press [C] → Burst, and then press [D]. • The photo size is set to 5M. • It may take longer to save a photo. • You cannot use the flash with this option. • Shutter speed must be faster than 1/30 second. • Photos captured with this option may be slightly enlarged when saving. • You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200. • This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. Timer Capture a photo with a delay of 2 to 30 seconds. The delay is adjustable in increments of 1 second. To set the delay, in Shooting mode, press [C] →Timer, and then press [D].92 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the original, one a step darker, and one a step lighter. Use a tripod to prevent blurry photos as the camera captures three photos continuously. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Set menu. Exposure -2 Original Exposure +2 White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the original and two more with different White Balance settings. The original photo is captured when you press [Shutter]. The other two are automatically adjusted according to the White Balance you have set. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Set menu. WB-2 Original WB+2 This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW.93 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures three consecutive photos, each with a different Picture Wizard setting. The camera captures a photo and applies the three Picture Wizard options you have set to the image captured. You can select three different settings in Bracket Set menu. Vivid Standard Retro This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. Bracketing setting You can set up the options for AE Bracket, WB Bracket, and P Wiz Bracket. (p. 147) To set a bracketing option, In Shooting mode, press [m] →5→Bracket Set→ an option.Shooting Functions 94 Shooting Functions In order to capture a realistic photo of a subject, the amount of light should be constant. When the light source varies, you can use a flash and supply a constant amount of light. Select appropriate settings according to a light source and a subject. To set flash options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Flash→ an option. Icon Description Off: Do not use the flash. Smart Flash: The camera automatically adjusts the brightness of the flash according to the amount of light in the surrounding environment. Auto: The flash automatically fires in dark places. Auto Red-eye: The flash automatically fires and reduces red-eyes. Fill in: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo. (Brightness is automatically adjusted.) Fill-in Red: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo and reduces red-eyes. Icon Description 1st Curtain: The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens. The camera captures a photo of a subject earlier in an action sequence clearly. Ball moving direction 2nd Curtain: The flash fires just before the shutter closes. The camera captures a photo of a subject later in an action sequence clearly. Ball moving direction • The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. • There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. • If you select Off, the flash does not fire even when an external flash is attached. Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage your camera. Flash95 Shooting Functions > Flash Reducing the red-eye effect If the flash fires when you capture a photo of a person in the dark, a red glow may appear in the eyes. To reduce the red-eye effect, select Auto Red-eye or Fill-in Red. Without red-eye reduction With red-eye reduction If the subject is too far from the camera or moves when the first flash fires, redeyes may not be reduced. Adjusting the flash intensity When the flash is on, adjust the flash intensity +/-2 levels. To set the flash intensity, In Shooting mode, press [f] →Flash→ an option → [D] → scroll the jog dial or press [C/F] to adjust the flash intensity. Back Set Flash : 0.096 Shooting Functions > Flash • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the intensity. • Adjusting the flash intensity may not be effective when: - the subject is too close to the camera - you set a high ISO sensitivity - the exposure value is too big or too small • In some shooting modes, you cannot use this function. • If you attach an intensity-adjustable external flash to the camera, the intensity settings of the flash will be applied. • If the subject is too close when you use the flash, some light may be blocked, resulting in a dark photo. Ensure that the subject is within the recommended range, which varies by lens. • When a lens hood is attached, the light from the flash can be blocked by the hood. Remove the hood to use the flash.Shooting Functions 97 Shooting Functions The metering mode refers to the way in which a camera measures the quantity of light. The camera measures the amount of light in a scene, and in many of its modes, uses the measurement to adjust various settings. For example, if a subject looks darker than its actual color, the camera captures an overexposed photo of it. If a subject looks lighter than its actual color, the camera captures an underexposed photo of it. The brightness and overall mood of the photo can also be affected by how the camera measures the amount of light. Select an appropriate setting for a shooting condition. To set a metering option, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Metering→ an option. Multi The Multi mode calculates the amount of light in multiple areas. When light is sufficient or insufficient, the camera adjusts the exposure by averaging the overall brightness of the scene. This mode is suitable for general photos. Metering98 Shooting Functions > Metering Spot The Spot mode calculates the amount of light in the center. When you capture a photo in conditions where there is a strong backlight behind a subject, the camera adjusts the exposure so as to shoot a subject correctly. For example, when you select the Multi mode in a strong backlight condition, the camera calculates that the overall amount of light is abundant, which results in a darker photo. The Spot mode can prevent this situation as it calculates the amount of light in a designated area. The subject is in bright color while the background is dark. The Spot mode is recommended for a situation like this where a huge difference in the exposure exists between a subject and a background. Center-weighted The Center-weighted mode calculates a broader area than the Spot mode does. It sums up the amount of light in the center portion of the shot (60–80 %) and that of the rest of the shot (20–40 %). It is recommended for situations where there is a slight difference in brightness between a subject and a background or an area of the subject is large compared to the overall composition of the photo.99 Shooting Functions > Metering Measuring the exposure value of the focus area When this function is turned on, the camera automatically sets an optimal exposure by calculating the brightness of the focus area. This function is only available when you select Spot metering or Multi metering, and Selection AF. To set this function, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Link AE to AF Point→ an option.Shooting Functions 100 Shooting Functions This function automatically corrects the loss of bright detail that can occur due to shading differences in the photo. To set Smart Range options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Dynamic Range→ an option. Without Dynamic Range effect With Dynamic Range effect Icon Description Off: Do not use Dynamic Range. Smart Range+: Correct the loss of bright detail. You cannot set ISO 100. HDR: Capture 2 photos with different exposures, and then combine them to create a single image automatically. • You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200. • Dynamic Range options cannot be set at the same time as Picture Wizard options. Dynamic RangeShooting Functions 101 Shooting Functions Smart Filter lets you apply special effects to your photos. You can select various filter options to create special effects that are difficult to be achieved with normal lenses. To set Smart Filter options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Smart Filter→ an option. Option Description Off No effect Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Colored Pencil Apply a colored pencil painting effect. Watercolor Apply a watercolor painting effect. Wash drawing Apply a washed-out effect. Oil Sketch Apply an oil sketching effect. Ink Sketch Apply an ink sketching effect. Acryl Apply an acryl painting effect. Option Description Negative Apply a negative film effect. Red Desaturate all colors but red. Green Desaturate all colors but green. Blue Desaturate all colors but blue. Yellow Desaturate all colors but yellow. Smart filter options cannot be set with Picture Wizard options at the same time. Smart FilterShooting Functions 102 Shooting Functions The camera automatically sets the exposure by measuring the levels of light from the photo’s composition and the position of a subject. If the exposure set by the camera is higher or lower than you expected, you can adjust the exposure value manually. The exposure value is adjustable in ±3 increments. The camera displays the exposure warning in red for each step beyond ±3 range. To adjust the exposure value, while holding down [W], scroll the jog dial. You can also adjust the exposure value by pressing [f], and then selecting EV. You can check the exposure value by the position of the exposure level indicator. Exposure level indicator Increased exposure (brighter) Decreased exposure (darker) Exposure warning Standard exposure index -2 Original +2 Exposure compensationShooting Functions 103 Shooting Functions When you cannot achieve an appropriate exposure because of a strong color contrast, lock the exposure, and then capture a photo. To lock the exposure value, adjust the photo’s exposure, and then press the custom button. After locking the exposure, aim the lens where you desire, and then press [Shutter]. • Set a function of the custom button to AEL to lock the current exposure value. (p. 150) • This feature is not available in Manual mode. Exposure lockShooting Functions 104 Shooting Functions The functions available for video are explained below. Movie size Set the movie size. To set movie size options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→Movie Size→ an option. Icon Size Recommended for 1920X1080 (60 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. (Playable only on full HDTVs capable of playback at 60 fps.) 1920X1080 (30 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. 1920X1080 (15 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. (Available only with some Smart Filter options.) 1920X810 (24 fps) (Approx. 2.35:1) View on an HDTV. 1280X720 (60 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV. 1280X720 (30 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV. 640X480 (30 fps) (4:3) View on a TV. 320X240 (30 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless network (30 seconds maximum). Movie quality Set the Movie quality. To set movie quality options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→Movie Quality→ an option. Icon Extension Description MP4 (H.264) Normal: Record videos in normal quality. MP4 (H.264) HQ: Record videos in high quality. Video functions105 Shooting Functions > Video functions Multi Motion Set the playing speed of a video. To set playing speed options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Multi Motion→ an option. Icon Description x0.25: Record a video and play it at 1/4 normal speed. (Available only with 640x480 or 320x240) x0.5: Record a video and play it at 1/2 normal speed. (Available only with 1280x720 (30 fps), 640x480, or 320x240) x1: Record a video and play it at normal speed. x5: Record a video and play it at 5X normal speed. x10: Record a video and play it at 10X normal speed. x20: Record a video and play it at 20X normal speed. • If you select an option other than x1, sound will not be recorded. • The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Fader You can fade in or fade out a scene using the fader function on the camera without having to do it on a PC. Set the fade in option to gradually fade in at the start of the scene. Set the fade out option to gradually fade out the scene. Use the function appropriately and add dramatic effects on your videos. To set fader options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Fader→ an option. Icon Description Off: Fader function not used. In: Scene gradually fades in. Out: Scene gradually fades out. In-out: The fader function is applied at the start and end of the scene. When you use the fader function, it may take longer to save a file.106 Shooting Functions > Video functions Mic Level Set the mic level for the shooting conditions. To set the mic level, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→Mic Level→ an option. Voice Sometimes, a muted video is more appealing than the one with sound. Turn the voice off to record a muted video. To set voice options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→Voice→ an option. Wind cut When you record videos in noisy environments, unintended sounds can be recorded in videos. In particular, severe wind noise recorded in videos distracts you from enjoying your videos. Use the Wind Cut function to remove some surrounding noise in addition to wind noise. To reduce wind sound, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→Wind Cut→ an option.Chapter 3 Playback/Editing Learn about how to play back and edit photos and videos. Refer to chapter 6 for editing files on a PC.108 Playback/Editing Learn how to view photo and video thumbnails and how to protect or delete files. If you perform no operations for a while, information and icons on the screen disappear. When you operate the camera again, they will reappear. Viewing photos 1 Press [y]. • The most recent file you captured will be displayed. 2 Press [C/F] to scroll through files. • You can also drag the image left or right to move to another file. You may not be able to edit or play back files that were captured with other cameras, due to unsupported sizes or codecs. Use a computer or another device to edit or play back these files. Viewing image thumbnails In order to search for photos and videos you want, convert to the thumbnail view. The thumbnail view displays multiple images at a time so that you can easily look through items you wish to find. You can also classify and display files by category, such as date or file type. Scroll the jog dial to the left to select the thumbnail view mode. (Scroll the jog dial to the right to return to the previous mode.) Searching and managing files109 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Viewing files by category 1 In the thumbnail view, press [m] →z→Filter→ a category. • You can also touch FILTER to select a category. * Default Option Description All* View files normally. Date View files by the date they were saved. Type View files by the file type. Location View files by the place they were saved. (Only the photos captured with an optional GPS module have the location information.) 2 Select a list to open it. 3 Select a file to view it. 4 Touch to return to the previous view. Viewing files as a folder Continuous and burst shots appear as a folder. Selecting a folder will play back all photos automatically. Deleting a folder will delete all photos in the folder. 1 In Playback mode, press [C/F] or drag the image left or right to move to a desired folder. • The camera will automatically play back photos in the folder. 2 Scroll the jog dial to the right to open the folder. • You can also touch the folder on the screen to open the folder. 3 Press [C/F] or drag the image left or right to move to another file. 4 Scroll the jog dial to the left to return to Playback mode.110 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Protecting files Protect your files from accidental deletion. 1 In Playback mode, press [m] →z→Protect→Select. 2 Press [C/F] to select a file, and then press [o]. 3 Press [f]. You cannot delete or rotate a protected file. Lock/Unlock all files Lock or unlock all files. 1 In Playback mode, press [m] →z→Protect→All. 2 Select an option. Option Description Lock Lock all files. Unlock Unlock all files. Cancel Return to the previous menu.111 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Deleting files Delete files in Playback mode and secure more space on your memory card. Protected files are not deleted. Deleting a single file You can select a single file and delete it. 1 In Playback mode, select a file, and then press [n]. 2 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. Deleting multiple files You can select multiple files and delete them. 1 In Playback mode, press [m] →z→Delete→Select. • Alternatively, in thumbnails view, press [n], and then select files to delete. 2 Select files you want to delete by pressing [C/F], and then press [o]. • Press [o] again to cancel your selection. 3 Press [n]. 4 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.112 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Deleting all files You can delete all files on the memory card at once. 1 In Playback mode, press [m]. 2 Select z→Delete→All. 3 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.113 Playback/Editing Enlarging a photo You can enlarge photos when viewing them in Playback mode. You can also use the Trim function to extract the portion of the image displayed on the screen and save it as a new file. Magnified area Magnification (the maximum magnification may differ by resolution) Full Image Crop Scroll the jog dial to the right to enlarge a photo. (Scroll the jog dial to the left to reduce a photo.) To Do this Move magnified area Press [D/I/C/F]. Crop the enlarged image Press [f]. (saved as a new file) Return to the original image Press [o]. You can also pinch your fingers together or spread them apart on the screen to reduce or enlarge a photo. You can also double-tap an area to enlarge it quickly. Viewing a slide show You can view photos in a slide show, apply various effects to the slide show, and play background music. 1 In Playback mode, press [m]. 2 Select z→Slide Show Options. 3 Select a slide show effect option. • Skip to step 4 to start a slide show with no effects. * Default Option Description Play Mode Set whether or not to repeat the slide show. (One Play*, Repeat) Interval Set the interval between photos. (1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec) Music Set background audio. Effect • Set a scene change effect between photos. • Select Off to cancel effects. Viewing photos114 Playback/Editing > Viewing photos 4 Press [m]. 5 Select Start Slide Show. 6 View the slide show. • Press [o] to pause. • Press [o] again to resume. • Press [m] to stop the slide show and return to Playback mode. • Press [D/I] to adjust the volume level. Auto rotating With Auto Rotate on, the camera automatically rotates photos you have captured vertically so they fit the screen horizontally. To set auto rotate options, In Playback mode, press [m] →z→Auto Rotate→ an option. Creating a print order (DPOF) DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) lets you set the number of copies to be printed. The camera saves the DPOF information in the MISC folder of your memory card. If you have set DPOF information for your images, you can take the memory card to a digital printing shop for printing. You cannot set the print order of RAW format files. Photos with dimensions that are wider than the paper may be cut off on the left and right edges. Ensure that your photo dimensions are compatible with the paper you select. 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [m]. 2 Select z→DPOF. 3 Press [D/I] to set the number of copies. • To select another photo, press [C/F]. 4 Press [o] to save.115 Playback/Editing In Playback mode, you can play a video, capture an image from a video, or crop a video to save as another file. Stop Capture Video viewing controls Icon/Button Description / /[C] View previous file/Scan backward. (Each time you touch the icon or press the button while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) / /[o] Pause or resume playback. / /[F] View next file/Scan forward. (Each time you touch the icon or press the button while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) /[D/I] Adjust the volume or mute the sound. Trimming a video during playback 1 In Playback mode, scroll to a video, and then touch . 2 Press [o] or touch to start playing the video. 3 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the trimming to begin. 4 Press [f] or touch Start Point. 5 Press [o] or touch to resume playing the video. 6 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the trimming to end. Playing videos116 Playback/Editing > Playing videos 7 Press [f] or touch End Point. 8 Press [f] or touch Trim to trim a video. • You can adjust the scene to be cropped by dragging the handles that appear on the progress bar. 9 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. • You cannot trim a video recorded in 3D mode. • The original video should be at least 10 seconds long. • The camera will save the edited video as a new file and leave the original video intact. Capturing an image during playback 1 While viewing a video, press [o] or touch at the point where you want to capture an image. 2 Press [f] or touch Capture. • You cannot capture an image from a video recorded in 3D mode. • The resolution of the captured image will be the same as the original video. • The captured image is saved as a new file.117 Playback/Editing Perform photo editing tasks, such as resizing, rotating, or reducing red-eye effects. Edited photos are saved as new files under different file names. Photos captured in some modes cannot be edited with the Image Edit function. To edit images, In Playback mode, scroll to a photo, and then touch → an option. • You can also edit images in Playback mode by selecting a photo, and then pressing [f] or [m] →Edit Image. • Some images may not be edited with the Image Edit function. In this case, use a supplied image editing software. • The camera will save edited photos as new files. • When you edit photos, the camera will automatically convert them to a lower resolution. Photos that you rotate or resize manually are not automatically converted to a lower resolution. • You cannot edit photos while viewing files as a folder. Open the folder and select a photo to edit each photo. Cropping a photo 1 Touch → . 2 Drag the corners of the box to adjust the size of the area. 3 Drag the box to move the location of the area. 4 Touch OK. 5 Touch to save. Editing photos118 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Rotating a photo 1 Touch → . 2 Touch an option. Rotate : Right 90° 3 Touch OK. 4 Touch to save. • You can also rotate a photo in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting z→Rotate→ a desired option. • The camera will overwrite the original file. Resizing photos Change the size of a photo and save it as a new file. 1 Touch → . 2 Touch an option. Resize : 10.1M 3:2 3 Touch OK. 4 Touch to save. Available resize options differ depending on the original size of the photo.119 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Adjusting your photos You can correct captured photos by adjusting the brightness, contrast, or saturation. 1 Touch . 2 Touch an adjusting option. Icon Description Original (Reset to the original image) Auto adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation RGB adjustment Color Temperature Exposure Hue 3 Press [C/F] to adjust the option. • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option. • If you selected , skip to step 4. 4 Touch OK. 5 Touch to save.120 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Retouching faces 1 Touch → . 2 Press [C/F] to adjust the option. • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option. • As the number increases, the skin tone becomes brighter and smoother. 3 Touch OK. • To cancel correction, touch . 4 Touch to save. Reducing red-eye 1 Touch → . 2 Touch OK. • To cancel correction, touch . 3 Touch to save.121 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Applying Smart Filter effects Apply special effects to your photos. 1 Touch , and then touch an option. Smart Filter : Vignetting Option Description Original No effect Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Colored Pencil Apply a colored pencil painting effect. Watercolor Apply a watercolor painting effect. Wash drawing Apply a washed-out effect. Option Description Oil Sketch Apply an oil sketching effect. Ink Sketch Apply an ink sketching effect. Acryl Apply an acryl painting effect. Negative Apply a negative film effect. Red Desaturate all colors but red. Green Desaturate all colors but green. Blue Desaturate all colors but blue. Yellow Desaturate all colors but yellow. 2 Touch OK. 3 Touch to save.Chapter 4 Wireless network Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use functions.123 Wireless network Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Learn to connect via an access point (AP) when you are in a range of a WLAN. You can also configure network settings. Connecting to a WLAN 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select , , ,or . 3 Press [m], and then select Wi-Fi Setting. • In some modes, follow the on-screen instructions until the Wi-Fi Setting screen appears. • The camera automatically searches for available AP devices. 4 Select an AP. Back Refresh Samsung1 Samsung2 Samsung3 Samsung4 • Select Refresh to refresh connectable APs. • Select Add wireless network to add an AP manually. Your AP name must be in English to add the AP manually. Icon/Option Description Ad hoc AP Secured AP WPS AP Signal strength Press [F] or touch to open network setting options. • When you select a secured AP, a pop-up window appears. Enter the required passwords to connect to the WLAN. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) • When a login page appears, refer to "Using the login browser". (p. 125) • When you select an unsecured AP, the camera will connect to the WLAN. • If you select a WPS profile supported AP, select →WPS PIN connection, and then enter a PIN on the AP device. You can also connect to a WPS profile supported AP by selecting →WPS button connection on the camera, and then pushing the WPS button on the AP device. • The same AP may be listed twice, with different frequencies, because your camera supports the dual band function.124 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Setting network options 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [F] or touch . 2 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description Network Password Enter the network password. IP Setting Set the IP address automatically or manually. Manually setting the IP address 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [F] or touch . 2 Select IP Setting→Manual. 3 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description IP Enter the static IP address. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask. Gateway Enter the gateway. DNS Server Enter the DNS address.125 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Using the login browser You can enter your login information via the login browser when connecting to some APs, sharing sites, or cloud servers. Icon Description Close the login browser. Move to the previous page. Move to the next page. Stop loading the page. Reload the page. • You may not be able to select some items depending on the page you connected to. This does not indicate a malfunction. • The login browser may not close automatically after you log into some pages. If this occurs, close the login browser by touching , and then proceed with the desired operation. • It may take longer to load the login page due to the page size or network speed. If this occurs, wait until the login information input window appears.126 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Network connection tips • You must insert a memory card to use the Wi-Fi features. • The quality of the network connection will be determined by the AP. • The further the distance between your camera and the AP, the longer it will take to connect to the network. • If a nearby device is using the same radio frequency signal as your camera, it may interrupt your connection. • If your AP name is not in English, the camera may not be able to locate the device or the name may appear incorrectly. • For network settings or a password, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • If a WLAN requires authentication from the service provider, you may not be able to connect to it. To connect the WLAN, contact your network service provider. • Depending on the encryption type, the number of digits in the password may differ. • A WLAN connection may not be possible in all surroundings. • The camera may display a WLAN enabled printer on the AP List. You cannot connect to a network via a printer. • You cannot connect your camera to a network and a TV simultaneously. • Connecting to a network may incur additional charges. Costs will vary based on the conditions of your contract. • If you cannot connect to a WLAN, try another AP from the available AP list. • A login page may appear when you select free WLANs provided by some network service providers. Enter your ID and password to connect to the WLAN. For information about registering or the service, contact the network service providers. • Be cautious when you enter personal information for an AP connection. Do not enter any payment or credit card information on your camera. The manufacturer is not liable for any problem caused by entering such information. • Available network connections may differ by country. • The WLAN feature of your camera must comply with radio transmission laws in your region. To ensure compliance, use the WLAN feature only in the country where you purchased the camera. • The process for adjusting network settings may differ, depending on network conditions. • Do not access a network that you are not authorized to use. • Before you connect to a network, ensure your battery is fully charged. • You cannot upload or send files captured in some modes. • Files that you transfer to another device may not be supported by the device. In this case, use a computer to play back the files.127 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Entering text Learn how to enter text. The icons in the table let you move the cursor, change the case, etc. Touch a key to enter it. Icon Description Move the cursor. Stop entering text and return to the previous page. Change case. Switch between Symbol/Number mode and the normal mode. Change the input language. Enter a space. Save the displayed text. Delete the last letter. • You can use only the English alphabets in some modes, regardless of the display language. • You can enter up to 64 characters. • The screen may differ depending on the input mode. • Touch and hold a key to enter the character at the upper right corner of the key.128 Wireless network Saving files to a smart phone automatically The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the AutoShare feature via a WLAN. When you capture a photo with your camera, the photo is saved to the smart phone automatically. • The AutoShare feature is supported by Galaxy series smart phones or Galaxy Tab models with the Android 2.3 OS or higher or iOS devices with the iOS 6.0 or higher. Before using this feature, check the device’s firmware and update it if needed. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • To install and launch Samsung SMART CAMERA App on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the NFC feature and place the smart phone near an NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. This feature is supported by smart phones running Android OS 2.3 or higher. This feature is not available for iOS devices. • You must insert a memory card to use this feature. • If you set this function, the setting is maintained even when you change the Shooting mode. • This feature may not be supported in some modes or may not be available with some shooting options. 1 On the camera, in Shooting mode, press [m]. 2 On the camera, select 1→AutoShare→On. • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6. 4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. 5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. • An icon that shows the connection status ( ) will appear on the camera’s screen. 6 On the camera, capture a photo. • The captured photo is saved to the camera, and then transferred to the smart phone. • If you recorded a video, it is saved only to the camera.129 Wireless network The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the MobileLink feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to your smart phone. • The MobileLink feature is supported by Galaxy series smart phones or Galaxy Tab models with the Android 2.3 OS or higher or iOS devices with the iOS 6.0 or higher. Before using this feature, check the device’s firmware and update it if needed. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • To install and launch Samsung SMART CAMERA App on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the NFC feature and place the smart phone near an NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. This feature is supported by smart phones running Android OS 2.3 or higher. This feature is not available for iOS devices. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • If you select files from the smart phone, you can view up to 1,000 recent files and send up to 150 files at a time. If you select files from the camera, you can view files that were selected from the camera. The maximum number of files that can be sent varies depending on the storage space of the smart phone. • When you send Full HD videos using MobileLink feature, you may not be able to play back files on some devices. • When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi connection. • You cannot send RAW files. 1 On the camera, rotate the mode dial to B. 2 On the camera, select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 3 On the camera, select a sending option. • If you select Select Files from Smartphone, you can use your smart phone to view and share files stored on the camera. • If you select Select Files from Camera, you can select files to send from the camera. 4 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 7. Sending photos or videos to a smart phone130 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to a smart phone 5 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. 6 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 7 On the smart phone or camera, select files to transfer from the camera. 8 On the smart phone, touch the copy button or on the camera, select Send. • The camera will send the files.131 Wireless network The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Remote Viewfinder feature via a WLAN. Use the smart phone as a remote shutter release with the Remote Viewfinder feature. The captured photo will display on the smart phone. • The Remote Viewfinder feature is supported by Galaxy series smart phones or Galaxy Tab models with the Android 2.3 OS or higher or iOS devices with the iOS 6.0 or higher. Before using this feature, check the device’s firmware and update it if needed. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • To install and launch Samsung SMART CAMERA App on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the NFC feature and place the smart phone near an NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. This feature is supported by smart phones running Android OS 2.3 or higher. This feature is not available for iOS devices. • This function is not available in 3D mode. 1 On the camera, rotate the mode dial to B. 2 On the camera, select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6. 4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release132 Wireless network > Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release 5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 6 On the smart phone, set the following shooting options. Icon Description Flash option Timer option Photo size Saving location • While using this feature, some buttons are not available on your camera. • The zoom button and the shutter button on your smart phone will not function when using this feature. • Remote Viewfinder mode supports the and photo sizes only. 7 On the smart phone, touch and hold to focus. • The focus is automatically set to Multi AF. 8 Release to capture the photo. • Photos saved to the smart phone will be resized to 1616X1080 when shooting in and to 1920X1080 when shooting in resolution. • When you use this feature, the ideal distance between the camera and the smart phone may vary, depending on your surroundings. • The smart phone must be within 7 m of the camera to use this feature. • It will take some time to capture the photo after you release on the smart phone. • The Remote Viewfinder function will deactivate when: - there is an incoming call on the smart phone - either the camera or the smart phone turns off - the memory is full - device loses its connection to the WLAN - the Wi-Fi connection is poor or unstable - you perform no operations for approximately 5 minutes while connected133 Wireless network Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC 1 Install i-Launcher on the PC. (p. 163) 2 Connect the camera to the PC with the USB cable. 3 When the Auto Backup program icon appears, click it. • The Auto Backup program is installed on the PC and the information about the PC will be stored to the camera. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. • You can also save the information about the PC to the camera by connecting the PC and the camera via Wi-Fi. 4 Remove the USB cable. Before installing the program, ensure that the PC is connected to a network. If no internet connection is available, you must install the program from the provided CD. Sending photos or videos to a PC 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • If the the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. • You must configure the backup PC information to use the Auto Backup feature. For more details, refer to "Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC". (p. 133) If the Auto Backup program is installed on your PC, save the PC information via USB cable or Wi-Fi connection. • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123)134 Wireless network > Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos 3 Select a backup PC. • If you have performed a backup before, move to step 4. 4 Select OK. • To cancel sending, select Cancel. • You cannot select individual files to backup. This function backs up only new files on the camera. • The backup's progress will be shown on the PC monitor. • When the transfer is completed, the camera will turn off automatically in approximately 30 seconds. Select Cancel to return to the previous screen and prevent the camera from turning off automatically. • To turn off your PC automatically after the transfer is complete, select Shut down PC after backup. • To change the backup PC, select . • When you connect the camera to the WLAN, select the AP that is connected to the PC. • The camera will search for available access points even if you are connecting to the same access point again. • If you turn off the camera or remove the battery while sending files, the file transfer will be interrupted. • While you are using this feature, the shutter control is disabled on your camera. • You can connect only one camera to the PC at a time for sending files. • The backup may be canceled due to network conditions. • Photos or videos can be sent to a PC one time only. Files cannot be sent again even if you reconnect your camera to another PC. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You must turn off Windows Firewall and any other firewalls before using this feature. • You can send up to 1,000 recent files. • On the PC software, the server name must be entered in the Latin alphabet and can contain no more than 48 characters. • When multiple file types are created at once, only the image files (JPG) will be sent to the PC with this feature.135 Wireless network 5 Select the Name box, enter your name, and then touch . Sender Setting Name Save Email Reset 6 Select the Email box, enter your email address, and then touch . 7 Select Save to save your changes. • To delete your information, select Reset. You can change settings in the email menu and send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. Changing email settings In the email menu, you can change settings for storing your information. You can also set or change the email password. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) Storing your information 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Sender Setting. Sending photos or videos via email136 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email Setting an email password 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Setting Password→On. • To deactivate the password, select Off. 5 When the pop-up appears, select OK. 6 Enter a 4-digit password. 7 Enter the password again. 8 When the pop-up appears, select OK. If you lost your password, you can reset it by selecting RESET on the password setting screen. When you reset the information, the previously saved user’s setting information, email address, and recently sent email list will be deleted.137 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email Changing the email password 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Change Password. 5 Enter your current 4-digit password. 6 Enter a new 4-digit password. 7 Enter the new password again. 8 When the pop-up appears, select OK. Sending photos or videos via email You can send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 3 Select the Sender box, enter your email address, and then touch . • If you have previously saved your information, it will be inserted automatically. (p. 135) • To use an address from the list of previous senders, select → an address.138 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email 4 Select the Receiver box, enter an email address, and then touch . • To use an address from the list of previous recipients, select → an address. • Select to add additional recipients. You can input up to 30 recipients. • Select to delete an address from the list. 5 Select Next. 6 Select files to send. • You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 7 MB or less. 7 Select Next. 8 Select the comment box, enter your comments, and then touch . 9 Select Send. • The camera will send the email. • Even if a photo appears to have transferred successfully, errors with the recipient’s email account may cause the photo to be rejected or recognized as spam. • You may not be able to send an email if no network connection is available or if your email account settings are incorrect. • You cannot send an email if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum photo resolution you can send is 2M and the longest video you can upload is a video recorded using . If the selected photo resolution is higher than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. • If you cannot send an email because of firewall or user authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You can also send an email in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi)→Email.139 Wireless network Upload your photos or videos to file sharing websites. Available websites will be displayed on your camera. To upload files to some websites, you must visit the website and register before connecting your camera. Accessing a website 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . 3 Select a website. • If the pop-up message that prompts you to create an account appears, select OK. • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 4 Enter your ID and password to log in. • For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) • If you connected to SkyDrive, refer to "Using the login browser". (p. 125) • To select an ID from the list, select → an ID. • If you have previously logged in to the website, you may be logged in automatically. You must have an existing account on the file sharing website to use this feature. Using photo or video sharing websites140 Wireless network > Using photo or video sharing websites Uploading photos or videos 1 Access the website with your camera. 2 Select files to upload. • You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 10 MB or less. (On some websites, the total size or number of files may vary.) 3 Select Upload. • On some websites, you can enter your comments by selecting the comment box. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) • You can set an upload folder for Facebook by pressing [m], and then selecting Upload Folder (Facebook) on the website's list screen. • You cannot upload files if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum photo resolution you can upload is 2M, and the longest video you can upload is a video recorded using . If the selected photo resolution is higher than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. (On some websites, the maximum photo resolution may vary.) • The method of uploading photos or videos may differ depending on the selected website. • If you cannot access a website because of firewall or user authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • Uploaded photos or videos may be automatically titled with the date they were captured. • The speed of your internet connection may affect how quickly photos upload or web pages open. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You can also upload photos or videos to file sharing websites in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi)→ a desired website. • You cannot upload videos to some websites. • When you upload photos to SkyDrive, they will be resized to 2M while maintaining their aspect ratios.141 Wireless network Using AllShare Play to send files You can upload files from your camera to AllShare Play online storage or view files on an AllShare Play device connected to the same AP. Uploading photos to online storage 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select → Web storage. • If the guide message appears, select OK. • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) • To change the size for uploaded photos, press [m], and then select Upload Image Size. • If you have registered more than one web storage, you can select from the list by pressing [m], and then selecting Change Web storage. 3 Enter your ID and password, and then select Login→OK. • For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) • To select an ID from the list, select → an ID. • If you have previously logged in to the website, you may be logged in automatically. To use this feature, you must create an AllShare Play account and an account with an affiliated online storage service using your PC. After finishing creating accounts, add your online storage account to AllShare Play. 4 Select files you want to upload, and then select Upload. • If you have registered more than one web storage, select a web storage first. • You cannot upload video files to AllShare Play online storage. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You can upload up to 20 files. • You can also upload photos in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi)→AllShare Play.142 Wireless network > Using AllShare Play to send files Viewing photos or videos on devices that support AllShare Play 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select → Nearby devices. • If the guide message appears, select Yes. • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) • You can set to allow only selected devices or all devices to connect by pressing [m], and then selecting DLNA Access Control on the screen. • A sharing file list is created. Wait until other devices can find your camera. 3 Connect the AllShare Play device to a network, and then turn on the AllShare Play feature. • Refer to your device's user manual for more information. 4 On the camera, allow the AllShare Play device to connect to your camera. 5 On the AllShare Play device, select a camera to connect. 6 On the AllShare Play device, browse the shared photos or videos. • For information about searching for the camera and browsing the photos or videos on the AllShare Play device, refer to the device's user manual. • Videos may not play smoothly depending on the type of AllShare Play device or the network condition. For smooth playback, use a 5 Ghz dual-band AP device. AP S A camera is connected to a TV that supports AllShare Play via WLAN.143 Wireless network > Using AllShare Play to send files • You can share up to 1,000 recent files. • On an AllShare Play device, you can view only photos or videos captured with your camera. • The range of the wireless connection between your camera and an AllShare Play device may vary depending on the specifications of the AP. • If the camera is connected to 2 AllShare Play devices, playback may be slower. • Photos or videos will be shared in their original sizes. • You can use this feature only with devices that support AllShare Play. • Shared photos or videos will not be stored on the AllShare Play device, but they can be stored in the camera to meet the device's specifications. • Transferring photos or videos to the AllShare Play device may take some time depending on the network connection, the number of files to be shared, or the sizes of the files. • If you power off the camera abnormally while viewing photos or videos on an AllShare Play device (for example, by removing the battery), the device considers the camera to still be connected. • The order of photos or videos on the camera may be different than on the AllShare Play device. • Depending on the number of photos or videos you want to share, it may take some time to load your photos or videos and complete the initial set-up process. • While viewing photos or videos on the AllShare Play device, continuously using the device's remote or performing additional operations on the device may prevent this feature from working properly. • If you reorder or sort files on the camera while viewing them on an AllShare Play device, you must repeat the initial set-up process to update the list of files on the device. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • We recommend you use a network cable to connect your AllShare Play device to your AP. This will minimize any video ‘Stuttering’ you may experience when streaming content. • To view files on an AllShare Play device using the Nearby devices feature, enable multicast mode on your AP. • 1920X1080 (60 fps) videos can be played only on full HDTVs capable of playback at 60 fps. • You can view 3D files only on 3D-compatible TVs or monitors.144 Wireless network Sending photos using Wi-Fi Direct When the camera connects via a WLAN to a device that supports the Wi-Fi Direct function, you can send photos to the device. This feature may not be supported on some devices. 1 On the device, turn on the Wi-Fi Direct option. 2 On the camera, in Playback mode, scroll to a photo. 3 Press [m], and then select Share(Wi-Fi)→Wi-Fi Direct. • When in the single image view, you can send only one photo at a time. • When in thumbnails view, you can select multiple photos. Select Upload when you are finished selecting photos. 4 Select the device from the camera’s list of Wi-Fi Direct devices. • Ensure that the device's Wi-Fi Direct option is turned on. • You can also select your camera from the device's list of Wi-Fi Direct devices. 5 On the device, allow the camera to connect to the device. • The photo will be sent to the device. • You can send up to 20 files at a time. • When there are no photos in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • If you cannot connect to a Wi-Fi Direct device, update the device with the latest firmware. This feature may not be supported on some devices.Chapter 5 Camera settings menu Learn about the user settings and general settings menu. You can adjust the settings to better suit your needs and preferences.146 Camera settings menu You can set the user environment with these settings. To set user options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →5→ an option. Available items and the order of them may differ depending on shooting conditions. ISO Customizing ISO Step You can set the size for the ISO sensitivity by either 1/3 or 1 step. Auto ISO Range You can set the maximum ISO value under which each EV step is chosen when you set the ISO to Auto. * Default Option Value 1/3 Step ISO 125, ISO 160, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200* 1 Step ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200* Noise Reduction Use the Noise Reduction to reduce the visual noise in photos. * Default Option Description High ISO NR This function reduces noise that may occur when you set a high ISO sensitivity. (Off, High, Normal*, Low) Long Term NR This function reduces noise when you set the camera for a long exposure. (Off, On*) User settings147 Camera settings menu > User settings Bracket Set You can set up the options for AE Bracket, WB Bracket, and P Wiz Bracket. Option Description AE Bracket Set Set the exposure interval. (-/+0.3 EV*, -/+0.7 EV, -/+1 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2 EV, -/+2.3 EV, -/+2.7 EV, -/+3 EV) WB Bracket Set Adjust the White Balance interval range of the 3 bracketed photos. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1, MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1) For example, AB-/+3 adjusts the Amber value plus or minus three steps. MG-/+3 adjusts the Magenta value the same amount. P Wiz Bracket Set Select 3 Picture Wizard settings the camera uses to capture the 3 bracketed photos. DMF (Direct Manual Focus) You can adjust the focus manually by rotating the focus ring after achieving the focus by half-pressing [Shutter]. This feature may not be available with some lenses.148 Camera settings menu > User settings Color space The color space option allows you to select methods for representing colors. Digital imaging devices such as digital cameras, monitors, and printers have their own methods for representing colors, which are called color spaces. Option Description sRGB sRGB (Standard RGB) is an international specification to define the color space created by IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). It is widely used for creating colors on PC monitors and is also the standard color space for Exif. sRGB is recommended for regular images and images you intend to publish on the Internet. Adobe RGB Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. Note that individual programs are generally compatible with a limited number of color spaces. Adobe RGB sRGB When the color space is set to Adobe RGB, photos will be saved as “_SAMXXXX.JPG”.149 Camera settings menu > User settings Distortion Correct You can correct lens distortion that might occur from lenses. This feature may not be available with some lenses. Touch Operation Set to enable touch operation in Shooting mode. Option Description On Use touch operations in Shooting mode. Off Do not use touch operations in Shooting mode. (You can use touch operations in other situations.) iFn Customizing You can select options that can be adjusted when you press [i-Function] on an i-Function lens. Option Description Aperture Set to adjust the aperture value. Shutter Speed Set to adjust the shutter speed. EV Set to adjust the exposure value. ISO Set to adjust ISO sensitivity. White Balance Set to adjust the White Balance. Z Set to adjust the zoom ratio. User Display You can add or remove shooting information from the display. 1 2 3 London No. Description 1 Date & Time Set to display the date and time. 2 Icons Set to display icons on the right in Shooting mode.150 Camera settings menu > User settings No. Description 3 Histogram Set the histogram on the display on or off. About histogram A histogram is a graph that shows the brightness distribution of a photo. A histogram inclined to the left indicates a dark photo. A histogram inclined to the right indicates a bright photo. The height of the graph is related to color information. The graph gets higher if a specific color is more common. Insufficient exposure Balanced exposure Excessive exposure Key Mapping You can change the function assigned to the Custom button or DIRECT LINK button. * Default Button Function Custom Set a function of the Custom button. • Optical Preview*: Execute the Depth of Field Preview function for the current aperture value. (p. 24) • One Touch WB (White Balance): Execute the Custom White Balance function. • One Touch RAW +: Save a file in the RAW+JPEG format. To save a file in JPEG format, press the button again. • Reset: Reset some settings. • AEL: Execute the auto exposure lock function. • AEL Hold: Keep executing the auto exposure lock function after shooting. DIRECT LINK Set a function of the DIRECT LINK button. (AutoShare*, MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Auto Backup, Email, SNS & Cloud, AllShare Play)151 Camera settings menu > User settings Grid Line Select a guide to help you compose a scene. (Off*, 3 X 3, 2 X 2, Cross, Diagonal) AF Lamp When shooting in dark places, turn the AF lamp on in order to have a better auto focus. The Auto Focus functions more accurately in dark places when the AF lamp is on.152 Camera settings menu Learn to configure your camera's settings. To set Setting options, In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] →q→ an option. * Default Item Description Sound • System Volume: Set the sound volume or turn all sound off entirely. (Off, Low, Medium*, High) Even if the system volume is turned off, the camera emits the sound while playing a video or a slide show. • AF Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you half-press the shutter button on or off. (Off, On*) • Button Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you press the buttons or touch the screen on or off. (Off, On*) Quick View Set the Quick View time length – the amount of time the camera displays a photo immediately after you capture it. (Off, 1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, Hold) * Default Item Description Display Adjust Adjust the display brightness, auto brightness setting, display color, or level gauge. • Display Brightness: You can adjust the display brightness manually. • Auto Brightness: Turn auto brightness on or off. (Off, On*) • Display Color: You can adjust the display color manually. • Horizontal Calibration: Calibrate the level gauge. If the level gauge is not level, position the camera on the level surface, and then follow the on-screen instructions. • You cannot access the Horizontal Calibration option in Playback mode. • You cannot calibrate the level gauge in portrait orientation. Auto Display Off Set the display off time. The display turns off if you do not use the camera for the time you set. (Off, 30 sec*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min) Setting153 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Power Save Set power shut off time. The camera shuts off if you do not use it for the time you set. (30 sec, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min) • The camera retains the power-off time setting even if you replace the battery. • Power Save may not work if the camera is connected to a computer or a TV or playing a slide show or a movie. Help Guide Display • Mode Help Guide: Set to display help text about the selected mode when changing shooting modes. (Off, On*) • Function Help Guide: Set to display help text about menus and functions. (Off, On*) Press [n] to hide the help text. Language Set a language the camera shows on the display. Date & Time Set date, time, date format, time zone and whether to imprint the date on photos. (Time Zone, Date & Time, Date Type, Time Type, Imprint) • The date appears on the lower right side of the photo. • When you print a photo, some printers may not print the date appropriately. * Default Item Description Video Out Set the video signal output appropriate for your country when connecting the camera to an external video device such as a monitor or HDTV. • NTSC: USA, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc • PAL (Supports only PAL B, D, G, H, or I): Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, England, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, Norway, etc Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) When you connect the camera to an HDTV that supports Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can control the play function of the camera with the TV remote control. • Off: You cannot control the play function of camera with the TV remote control. • On*: You can control the play function of camera with the TV remote control. HDMI Output When you connect the camera to an HDTV with an HDMI cable, you can change the resolution of the image. • NTSC: Auto*, 1080p, 720p, 480p, 576p (activates only when PAL is selected) If the connected HDTV does not support the resolution you select, the camera sets the resolution one level lower.154 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description 3D HDMI Output Select an option for playing files on a 3D TV. • Side by Side*: Displays two images next to each other. • Frame Packing: Displays the images for the left and right eye alternately in frames. File Name Set the method of creating file names. • Standard*: SAM_XXXX.JPG (sRGB)/ _SAMXXXX.JPG (Adobe RGB) • Date: - sRGB files - MMDDXXXX.JPG. For example, for a photo captured on Jan. 01, the file name would be 0101XXXX.jpg. - Adobe RGB files - _MDDXXXX.JPG for the months Jan through Sept. For the months Oct through Dec, the month number is replaced by the letters A (Oct.), B (Nov.) and C (Dec.). For example, for a photo captured on Feb. 03, the file name would be _203XXXX.jpg. For a photo captured on Oct. 05, the file name would be _A05XXXX.jpg. * Default Item Description File Number Set the method of numbering files and folders. • Reset: After using the reset function, the next file name is started at 0001. • Series*: New file numbers continue the existing number sequence, even if you have installed a new memory card, formatted the card, or deleted all photos. • The first folder name is 100PHOTO, if you have selected the sRGB color space and Standard file naming, the first file name is SAM_0001. • File name numbers are increased by 1 from SAM_0001 to SAM_9999. • Folder numbers are increased by 1 from 100PHOTO to 999PHOTO. • The maximum number of files that can be saved in one folder is 9,999. • File numbers are assigned according to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) specifications. • If you change a file name (for example, on a computer), the camera will not be able to play the file. Folder Type Set the type of folder. • Standard*: XXXPHOTO • Date: XXX_MMDD155 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Format Format the memory card. Formatting deletes all existing files including protected files. (Yes, No) Errors can occur if you use a memory card formatted by another brand of camera, a memory card reader, or a computer. Please format memory cards in the camera before using them to capture photos. Device Information View the firmware version of the body and the lens, Mac address, and network certification number, or update the firmware. • Firmware Update: Update the firmware of the camera body or lens. (Body Firmware, Lens Firmware) • You can download firmware upgrades from www.samsung.com. • You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged battery. Recharge the battery fully before running a firmware upgrade. • If you update the firmware, user settings and values will be reset. (Date, time, language, and video out will not change.) • Do not turn the camera off while the update is in progress. * Default Item Description Dual-band Mobile AP Set a frequency for using the camera as an AP for the AutoShare, MobileLink, or Remote Viewfinder feature. (5 GHz, 2.4 GHz*) If you use the camera in a country other than the one where it was purchased, the 5 GHz Wi-Fi feature may not function properly, due to differences in radio frequencies. In this case, use the 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi feature instead. GPS • Geotagging: Set to capture photos with location information using the Global Positioning System (GPS). Location information is added to the Exif data associated with the photo. (Off, On*) • GPS Valid Time Settings: Set the time to use the last location information when the camera fails to receive GPS signals. If the camera fails to receive GPS signals after the specified time, the location information will not be recorded onto the photos. (15 sec*, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 10 min, 30 min) • Location Display: Set to display the location information on the screen in Shooting mode. The location information will appear in Korean only when you are in Korea and the display language is set to Korean. When another language is set, the location information will appear in English. (Off, On*) • GPS Reset: Set to search for GPS satellites closest to your current position. (Yes, No) To use the GPS function, you must purchase an optional GPS device.156 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Sensor Cleaning • Sensor Cleaning: Remove dust from the sensor. • Start-Up Action: When on, the camera performs sensor cleaning each time you turn it on. (Off*, On) As this product uses interchangeable lenses, the sensor can get dust on it when you change lenses. This can lead to dust particles appearing in the photos you capture. It is recommended not to change lenses when you are in a particularly dusty area. Also, make sure to attach the lens cap to the lens when not using it. Reset Reset the setup menu and shooting options to the factory defaults. (Date, time, language, and video output settings do not change.) (Yes, No) Open Source Licenses View open source licenses.Chapter 6 Connecting to external devices Make full use of the camera by connecting it to external devices such as a computer, HDTV or 3D TV.158 Connecting to external devices Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to an HDTV (3D TV) using an optional HDMI cable. Viewing files on an HDTV 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] →q→ HDMI Output→ an option. (p. 153) 2 Turn off your camera and HDTV. 3 Connect your camera to your HDTV with the optional HDMI cable. 4 Turn on your HDTV, and then select the HDMI video source. 5 Turn on the camera. • The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you connect it to an HDTV. 6 View photos or play videos using the camera buttons. • When using the HDMI cable, you can connect the camera to an HDTV using the Anynet+(CEC) method. • The Anynet+(CEC) functions allow you to control connected devices using the TV remote control. • If the HDTV supports Anynet+(CEC), the TV turns on automatically when used in conjunction with the camera. This feature may not be available on some HDTVs. • When connected to an HDTV by an HDMI cable, the camera cannot capture a photo or video. • When connected to an HDTV, some of the camera’s playback functions may not be available. • The length of time after which the camera and an HDTV are connected may vary depending on the memory card that you are using. As the main feature of a memory card is to increase the transfer speed, it is not necessarily true to say that a memory card with a faster transfer speed is also fast in using the HDMI function. • 1920X1080 (60 fps) videos can be played only on full HDTVs capable of playback at 60 fps. Viewing files on an HDTV or 3D TV159 Connecting to external devices > Viewing files on an HDTV or 3D TV Viewing files on a 3D TV You can view photos or videos captured in 3D mode or with the 3D Panorama option in Smart mode on a 3D TV. 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] →q→ HDMI Output→ an option. (p. 153) 2 Select 3D HDMI Output→ an option. (p. 154) 3 Turn off your camera and 3D TV. 4 Connect your camera to your 3D TV with the optional HDMI cable. 5 Turn on your 3D TV, and then select the HDMI video source. 6 Turn on your camera. • The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you connect it to a 3D TV. 7 Move to a 3D file, and then press [I] to switch to 3D mode. • Press [I] again to switch to 2D Mode. 8 Turn on your TV's 3D function. • Refer to your TV's user manual for more details. 9 View 3D photos or play 3D videos using the camera buttons. • You cannot view an MPO file in 3D effect on TVs that do not support the file format. • Use proper 3D glasses when you view an MPO file or a 3D video file on a 3D TV. • Capturing photos in 3D Panorama mode may result in a less pronounced 3D effect than those captured in 3D mode with a 3D lens. Do not view the 3D photos or videos captured by your camera on a 3D TV or 3D monitor for an extended period of time. It may cause unpleasant symptoms, such as eyestrain, fatigue, nausea, and more.160 Connecting to external devices Transfer files on a memory card to your computer by connecting the camera to the PC. Transferring files to your Windows OS computer Connecting the camera as a removable disk You can connect the camera to your computer as a removable disk. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable. • You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. • If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 3 Turn on the camera. • The computer recognizes the camera automatically. 4 On your computer, select My Computer→Removable Disk →DCIM→100PHOTO or 101_0101. 5 Select the files you want, and then drag or save them to your computer. If the Folder Type is set to Date, the folder name appears as “XXX_MMDD”. For example, if you capture a photo on January 1, the folder name will be "101_0101". Transferring files to your computer161 Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) With Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8, the methods for disconnecting the camera are similar. 1 Ensure that no data is being transferred between the camera and the computer. • If the status lamp on your camera is blinking, it means the data transfer is in progress. Please wait until the status lamp stops blinking. 2 Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of your computer screen. 3 Click the pop-up message. 4 Click the message box indicating safely removed. 5 Remove the USB cable. Transferring files to your Mac OS Mac OS 10.5 or later is supported. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect your camera to a Macintosh computer with the USB cable. • You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. • If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly.162 Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer 3 Turn on the camera. • The computer recognizes the camera automatically and displays a removable disk icon. 4 Open the removable disk. 5 Transfer photos or videos to the Mac OS computer.163 Connecting to external devices You can view and edit files using the provided programs. You can also send the files to a PC wirelessly. Installing programs from the provided CD 1 Insert the installation CD into your PC. 2 Select a language. 3 Select a program to install. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions. 5 Click Exit to complete the installation. Available programs when using i-Launcher Item Description Multimedia Viewer You can view files with Multimedia Viewer. Firmware Upgrade You can download the firmware of your camera. PC Auto Backup You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. Using i-Launcher i-Launcher allows you to play back files with Multimedia Viewer and provides a link to download the PC Auto Backup program. Requirements for Windows OS Item Requirements CPU Intel® i5 3.3 GHz or higher/ AMD Phenom™ II x4 3.2 GHz or higher RAM Minimum 512 MB RAM (1 GB or more recommended) OS* Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8 Hard disk capacity 250 MB or more (1 GB and above recommended) Others • CD-ROM drive • 1024X768 pixels, 16-bit color display compatible monitor (1280X1024 pixels, 32-bit color display recommended) • USB 2.0 port • nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT or higher/ ATI X1600 series or higher • Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or higher * A 32-bit version of i-Launcher will be installed—even on 64-bit editions of Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8. Using programs on a PC164 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC • The requirements are recommendation only. i-Launcher may not work properly even when the computer meets the requirements, depending on the condition of your computer. • If your computer does not meet the requirements, videos may not play correctly. The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that results from using unqualified computers such as a computer you assembled yourself. Requirements for Mac OS Item Requirements OS Mac OS 10.5 or higher (except PowerPC) RAM Minimum 256 MB RAM (512 MB or more recommended) Hard disk capacity Minimum 110 MB Others USB 2.0 port, CD-ROM drive Opening i-Launcher On your computer, select Start→All Programs→Samsung→ i-Launcher→Samsung i-Launcher. Or, click Applications→Samsung →i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer.165 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Using Multimedia Viewer Multimedia Viewer allows you to play back files. From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click Multimedia Viewer. • Multimedia Viewer supports the following formats: - Videos: MP4 (Video: H.264, Audio: AAC), WMV (WMV 7/8/9), AVI (MJPEG) - Photos: JPG, GIF, BMP, PNG, TIFF, MPO • Files that have been recorded with other manufacturers’ devices may not play back smoothly. Viewing photos 1 2 3 1011 456789 No. Description 1 File name 2 Enlarged area 3 Histogram 4 Open the selected file. 5 Histogram button 6 Rotate to the left/Rotate to the right. 7 Move to the previous file/Move to the next file. 8 Fit the photo to the screen. 9 View the photo in the original size. 10 Zoom in/Zoom out 11 Switches between 2D and 3D mode.166 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Viewing videos 1 2 8 4567 3 No. Description 1 File name 2 Adjust the volume. 3 Open the selected file. 4 Move to the next file. 5 Stop No. Description 6 Pause 7 Move to the previous file. 8 Progress bar Downloading the firmware From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click Firmware Upgrade. Downloading the PC Auto Backup program From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click PC Auto Backup. For information about installing the PC Auto Backup program, refer to page 133.167 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 1 Insert Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM into your PC. 2 Select a language. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to JPEG formats and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to JPEG formats and are stored in the memory without any changes. With Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, you can calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of photos. You can also edit JPEG or TIFF files as well as RAW files. For more information, refer to the program guide.Chapter 7 Appendix Get information about error messages, camera maintenance, trouble shooting tips, specifications, and optional accessories. 169 Appendix When the following error messages appear, try these remedies. Error messages Suggested remedies Lens is locked The lens is locked. Rotate the lens counter-clockwise until you hear a click. (p. 45) Card Error • Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again. • Remove your memory card and insert it again. • Format your memory card. Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery. No Image File Capture photos or insert a memory card that contains photos. File Error Delete the damaged file or contact a service center. Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new memory card. Card Locked You can lock SD, SDHC, SDXC, or UHS-1 card to prevent files from being deleted. Unlock the card when shooting. (p. 173) Error messages Suggested remedies Folder and file number are max values. Replace the card File names do not match the DCF standard. Transfer the files on the memory card to your computer and format the card. (p. 155) Error 00 Turn off your camera and remount the lens. If the message still appears, contact a service center. Error 01/02 Turn off your camera, remove the battery, and insert again. If the message still appears, contact a service center. Error messages170 Appendix Cleaning the camera Camera lens and display Use a brush to remove dust and wipe the lens gently with a soft cloth. If any dust remains, apply lens cleaning liquid to a piece of cleaning paper and wipe gently. Image sensor Depending on different shooting conditions, dust may appear in photos because the image sensor is exposed to the external environment. This problem is normal, and the exposure to dust occurs in everyday use of the camera. You can remove dust from the sensor by operating the sensor cleaning function. (p. 156) If dust remains after cleaning the sensor, contact a service center. Do not insert the blower into the mounting opening of the lens. Camera body Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the device. These solutions can damage the camera or cause it to malfunction. Maintaining the camera171 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Using on beaches or shores • Protect your camera from sand and dirt when you use it on beaches or in other similar areas. • Your camera is not waterproof. Do not handle the battery, adapter, or memory card with wet hands. Operating the camera with wet hands may cause damage to your camera. Storing for extended period of time • When you store the camera for an extended period, place it in a sealed container with an absorbent material, such as silica gel. • Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use. • The present date and time can be initialized when the camera is turned on after the camera and battery have been separated for a prolonged period. Using or storing the camera Inappropriate places to use or store the camera • Avoid exposing the camera to very cold or very hot temperatures. • Avoid using your camera in areas with extremely high humidity, or where the humidity changes drastically. • Avoid exposing the camera to direct sunlight and storing it in hot, poorly-ventilated areas, such as in a car during summer time. • Protect your camera and the display from impact, rough handling, and excessive vibration to avoid serious damage. • Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty, humid, or poorlyventilated areas to prevent damage to moving parts and internal components. • Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles, or flammable chemicals. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the camera or its accessories. • Do not store the camera where there are mothballs.172 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Using the camera with caution in humid environments When you transfer the camera from a cold environment to a warm one, condensation can form on the lens or internal components of the camera. In this situation, turn off the camera and wait for at least 1 hour. If condensation forms on the memory card, remove the memory card from the camera and wait until all moisture has evaporated before reinserting it. Other cautions • Do not swing your camera by the strap. This may cause injury to yourself or others or damage to your camera. • Do not paint your camera, as paint can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. • Turn off the camera when not using it. • Your camera consists of delicate parts. Avoid impacts to the camera. • Protect the display from external force by keeping it in the case when not in use. Protect the camera from scratches by keeping it away from sand, sharp implements, or loose change. • Do not use the camera if the screen is cracked or broken. Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the camera to a Samsung service center to have it repaired. • Never place cameras, batteries, chargers, or accessories near, on, or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. These devices may be deformed and can overheat and cause a fire or explosion. • Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. • Protect your lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean your lens with a soft, clean, debris-free lens cloth. • The camera may turn off if impacted from the outside. This is to protect the memory card. Turn on the camera to use it again. • While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. • When you use the camera in low temperatures, it may take some time to turn on, the color of the display may be changed temporarily, or afterimages may appear. These conditions are not malfunctions and they will correct themselves when the camera is returned to milder temperatures. • Paint or metal on the outside of the camera may cause allergies, itchy skin, eczema, or swelling for people with sensitive skin. If you experience any of these symptoms, stop using the camera immediately and consult a doctor. • Do not insert foreign objects into any of your camera’s compartments, slots, or access points. Damage due to improper use may not be covered by your warranty. • Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the camera or attempt to service the camera yourself. Any damage that results from unqualified service is not covered by your warranty.173 Appendix > Maintaining the camera About memory card Supported memory card This product supports SD (Secure Digital), SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity), SDXC (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity), UHS-1 (Ultra High Speed-1), microSD, microSDHC, microSDXC, or microUHS-1 memory cards. Terminal Write-protect switch Label (front) You can prevent files from being deleted by using the write-protect switch on an SD, SDHC, SDXC, or UHS-1 card. Slide the switch down to lock or slide it up to unlock. Unlock the card when capturing photos and videos. Memory card adapter Memory card To use micro memory cards with this product, a PC, or a memory card reader, insert the card into an adapter.174 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Memory card capacity The memory capacity may differ depending on shooting scenes or shooting conditions. These capacities are based on a 2 GB SD card. Size Quality Super Fine Fine Normal RAW RAW + S.Fine RAW + Fine RAW + Normal Photo 20.0M (5472X3648) 151 179 218 69 47 49 52 10.1M (3888X2592) 276 321 384 - 62 64 66 5.9M (2976X1984) 423 484 565 - 71 72 74 2.0M (1728X1152) 845 923 1,016 - 82 83 84 Burst 479 545 631 - - - - 16.9M (5472X3080) 177 208 252 - 51 53 56 7.8M (3712X2088) 343 396 467 - 66 68 70 4.9M (2944X1656) 487 553 640 - 74 75 76 2.1M (1920X1080) 827 905 999 - 82 83 84 13.3M (3648X3648) 218 255 307 - 56 58 61 7.0M (2640X2640) 373 429 504 - 68 70 72 4.0M (2000X2000) 559 630 721 - 76 77 78 1.1M (1024X1024) 1,111 1,180 1,258 - 86 86 87175 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Size Quality HQ Normal Video 1920X1080 (60 fps) Approx. 10' 10" Approx. 12' 43" 1920X1080 (30 fps) Approx. 17' 41" Approx. 22' 09" * 1920X1080 (15 fps) Approx. 23' 38" Approx. 29' 24" 1920X810 (24 fps) Approx. 21' 35" Approx. 27' 02" 1280X720 (60 fps) Approx. 16' 51" Approx. 21' 06" 1280X720 (30 fps) Approx. 29' 11" Approx. 36' 35" 640X480 (30 fps) Approx. 120' 47" Approx. 153' 30" For Sharing (30 fps) Approx. 218' 48" Approx. 278' 24" * is available only with some Smart Filter options. • The figures above are measured without using the zoom function. • Available recording time may vary if you use the zoom. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. • The maximum recording time is 29 minutes and 59 seconds per file. • The maximum playback time of For Sharing videos is 30 seconds per file.176 Appendix > Maintaining the camera • Prevent memory cards from making contact with liquids, dirt, or foreign substances. If dirty, wipe the memory card clean with a soft cloth before you insert the memory card in your camera. • Do not allow liquids, dirt, or foreign substances to come in contact with memory cards or the memory card slot. Doing so may cause memory cards or the camera to malfunction. • When you carry a memory card, use a case to protect the card from electrostatic discharges. • Transfer important data to other media, such as a hard disk, CD, or DVD. • When you use the camera for an extended period, the memory card may become warm. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. • Use a memory card that meets the standard requirements. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Cautions when using memory cards • Avoid memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can cause memory cards to malfunction. • Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in the wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card. • Do not use memory cards that have been formatted by other cameras or by a computer. Reformat the memory card with your camera. • Turn off the camera when you insert or remove the memory card. • Do not remove the memory card or turn off your camera while the lamp is blinking, as this may damage your data. • When the lifespan of a memory card has expired, you cannot store any more photos on the card. Use a new memory card. • Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards to heavy impact or pressure. • Avoid using or storing memory cards near strong magnetic fields. • Avoid using or keeping memory cards in areas with high temperature, high humidity, or corrosive substances.177 Appendix > Maintaining the camera • Do not rest the device on flammable surfaces, such as bedding, carpets, or electric blankets for a prolonged period. • When the device is switched on, do not leave it in any confined space for a prolonged period. • Do not allow battery terminals to come in contact with metallic objects, such as necklaces, coins, keys, or watches. • Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. • Do not disassemble the battery or puncture the battery with any sharp object. • Avoid exposing the battery to high pressure or crushing forces. • Avoid exposing the battery to major impacts, such as dropping it from high places. • Do not expose the battery to temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F) or above. • Do not allow the battery to come in contact with moisture or liquids. • Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. Disposal guidelines • Dispose of the battery with care. • Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. • Disposal regulations may differ by country or region. Dispose of the battery in accordance with all local and federal regulations. Guidelines for charging the battery Charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. The battery can ignite or explode if not charged properly. About the battery Use only Samsung-approved batteries. Battery specifications Item Description Model BP1130 Type Lithium-ion battery Cell capacity 1,130 mAh Voltage 7.6 V Charging time* (When the battery is completely discharged) Approx. 215 min * Charging the battery by connecting it to a computer may take longer. Personal injury or death can occur if the battery is handled carelessly or improperly. For your safety, follow these instructions for proper battery handling: • The battery can ignite or explode if not handled properly. If you notice any deformities, cracks, or other abnormalities in the battery, immediately discontinue use of the battery and contact your manufacturer. • Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommend battery chargers and charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. • Do not place the battery near heating devices or expose to excessively warm environments, such as the inside of an enclosed car in the summertime. • Do not place the battery in a microwave oven. • Avoid storing or using the battery in hot, humid places, such as spas or shower enclosures.178 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Battery life Shooting mode Average time / Number of photos Photos Approx. 165 min/Approx. 330 photos Videos Approx. 110 min (Record videos at 1920X1080 resolution and 60 fps.) • The figures above are based on the CIPA test standards. Your results may differ depending on your actual usage. • Available shooting time differs depending on background, shooting interval, and use conditions. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. Low battery message When the battery has fully discharged, the battery icon will turn red and the "Low Battery" message will appear. Notes about using the battery • Avoid exposing batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the charging capacity of your batteries. • When you use the camera for an extended period, the area around the battery chamber may become warm. This does not affect the normal use of the camera. • Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. • In temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F, battery capacity and battery life may decrease. • Battery capacity may decrease in low temperatures, but will return to normal in milder temperatures. • Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Storing the camera for extended periods with the battery installed causes the battery to discharge. You may not be able to recharge a fully discharged battery. • When you do not use the camera for an extended period (3 months or more), check the battery and recharge it regularly. If you let the battery discharge continually, its capacity and life may decrease, which can lead to a malfunction, fire, or explosion.179 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Cautions about using the battery Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards from damage. Prevent batteries from making contact with metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage and may cause a fire or electric shock. Notes about charging the battery • If the status lamp is off, make sure that the battery is inserted correctly. • If the camera is on while charging, the battery may not fully charge. Turn off the camera before charging the battery. • Do not use your camera when you are charging the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. • Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. • Let the battery charge for at least 10 minutes before turning on the camera. • If you connect the camera to an external power source when the battery is depleted, using high energy-consuming functions will cause the camera to turn off. To use the camera normally, recharge the battery. • If you reconnect the power cable when the battery is fully charged, the status lamp turns on for approximately 30 minutes. • Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Charge the battery until the red status lamp turns off. • If the status lamp blinks in red, reconnect the cable, or remove the battery and insert it again. • If you charge the battery when the cable is overheated or the temperature is too high, the status lamp may blink in red. Charging will start when the battery cools down. • Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After charging is finished, disconnect the cable from your camera. • Do not bend or place heavy objects on the AC cable. Doing so may damage the cable.180 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Notes about charging with a computer connected • Use only the provided USB cable. • The battery may not charge when: - you use a USB hub - other USB devices are connected to your computer - you connect the cable to the port on the front side of your computer - the USB port of your computer does not support the power output standard (5 V, 500 mA) Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care • Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local regulations when you dispose of used batteries. • Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when they are overheated.181 Appendix Before contacting a service center If you are having trouble with your device, try these troubleshooting solutions before contacting a service professional. When you leave your camera at a service center, be sure to also leave the other components that may have contributed to the malfunction, such as the memory card and battery. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot turn on the camera • Ensure that the battery is inserted. • Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. • Charge the battery. The power turns off suddenly • Charge the battery. • Your camera may be in Power save mode or the display turns off automatically. (p. 153) • The camera may be turned off automatically to prevent the memory card from being damaged due to excessive heat. Turn on your camera again. The camera is losing battery power quickly • The battery may lose power more quickly in low temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F). Keep the battery warm by putting it into your pocket. • Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Recharge if needed. • Batteries are consumable parts that must be replaced over time. Get a new battery if the battery life is diminishing quickly. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot capture photos • There is no space on the memory card. Delete unnecessary files or insert a new card. • Format the memory card. • The memory card is defective. Get a new memory card. • The memory card is locked. Unlock the card. (p. 173) • Ensure that the camera is switched on. • Charge the battery. • Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. The camera freezes Remove the battery and insert it again. The camera heats up While using the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. The flash fires unexpectedly The flash may fire due to static electricity. The camera is not malfunctioning. The flash does not work • The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 94) • You cannot use the flash in some modes. The date and time are incorrect Set the date and time under the q menu. (p. 153) The display or buttons do not work Remove the battery and insert it again.182 Appendix > Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies The memory card has an error • Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again. • Remove your memory card, and then insert it again. • Format your memory card. See "Cautions when using memory cards" for more details. (p. 176) Your computer does not recognize an SDXC or UHS-1 memory card SDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. To use SDXC memory cards or UHS-1 memory cards that are formatted with the exFAT file system on a Windows XP computer, download and update the exFAT file system driver from the Microsoft website. Your TV or computer cannot display photos and videos that are stored on an SDXC or UHS-1 memory card SDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. To use SDXC memory cards or UHS-1 memory cards that are formatted with the exFAT file system, ensure that the external device is compatible with the exFAT file system before connecting the camera to the device. Cannot display files If you change the name of a file, your camera may not play the file (the name of the file should meet the DCF standard). If you encounter this situation, display files on your computer. The photo is blurry • Ensure that the focus option you set is suitable for the kind of shot you are capturing. • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • Ensure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the lens. (p. 170) Situation Suggested remedies The colors in the photo do not match the actual scene An incorrect White Balance can create unrealistic color. Select the proper White Balance option to suit the light source. (p. 76) The photo is too bright or too dark. Your photo is overexposed or underexposed. • Adjust the aperture value or the shutter speed. • Adjust the ISO sensitivity. (p. 75) • Turn off or on the flash. (p. 94) • Adjust the exposure value. (p. 102) Photos are distorted This camera can have minute distortion when using a wide-angle lens that enables shooting with a wide angle of view. This is normal, and does not cause malfunction. Playback screen does not appear on the connected external device • Ensure that HDMI cable is properly connected to the external monitor. • Ensure that the memory card is properly recorded. Your computer does not recognize your camera • Ensure that the USB cable is connected correctly. • Ensure that your camera is switched on. • Ensure that you are using a supported operating system. Your computer disconnects the camera while transferring files The file transfer may be interrupted by static electricity. Disconnect the USB cable and connect it again. 183 Appendix > Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies Your computer cannot play videos Videos may not play on some video player programs. To play video files captured with your camera, use the Multimedia Viewer program that you can install with the i-Launcher program on your computer. i-Launcher is not functioning properly • End i-Launcher and restart the program. • Depending on your computer's specifications and environment, the program may not launch automatically. In this case, click Start→All Programs→Samsung→ i-Launcher→Samsung i-Launcher on your Windows computer. (For Windows 8, open Start screen, and then select All apps→ Samsung i-Launcher.) Or, click Applications →Samsung→i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer. Cannot set the DPOF for RAW files You cannot set the DPOF for RAW files. Auto Focus does not work • Subject is not in focus. When the subject is outside the AF area, shoot by moving the subject inside the AF area and half-pressing [Shutter]. • Subject is too close. Step back from the subject and shoot. • The focus mode is set to MF. Switch the mode to AF. Situation Suggested remedies AEL feature does not work AEL feature does not work in t, M, i, and s modes. Select another mode to use this feature. Lens does not work • Ensure that the lens is properly mounted. • Remove the lens from the camera and re-mount it. External flash or GPS does not work Ensure that the external device is properly mounted and turned on. The date & time settings screen appears when you power on the camera • Set the date and time again. • This screen appears when the camera’s internal power source is completely discharged. Insert a fully charged battery and wait at least 72 hours in power off status for the internal power source to be recharged.184 Appendix Camera specifications Image Sensor Type CMOS Sensor size 23.5 X 15.7 mm Effective pixels Approx. 20.3 mega-pixels Total pixels Approx. 21.6 mega-pixels Color filter RGB primary color filter Lens Mount Type Samsung NX Mount Available lens Samsung lenses Image Stabilization Type Lens shift (depends on lens) Mode Off/Mode 1/Mode 2 Distortion Correct Off/On (depends on lens) i-Function E, Z (X1.2, 1.4, 1.7, 2.0) Dust Reduction Type Super sonic drive Display Type AMOLED with Touch Panel (C-type Touch Control Enabled) Size 3.31" (Approx. 84.0 mm) Resolution WVGA (800X480) 768 k dots (PenTile) Field of view Approx. 100 % Angle Tiltable (Up 90°, Down 45°) User display Grid Line, Icons, Histogram, Distance Scale, Level gauge Focusing Type Phase Detection & Contrast AF Focusing point • Total AF point: 105 points (Phase Detection AF), 247 points (Contrast AF) • Selection: 1 point (Free selection) • Multi: Normal 21 (3 X 7) points (Cross point 1), Close up 35 points • Face detection: Max. 10 faces Mode Single AF, Continuous AF, Manual Focus, Touch AF & Shutter AF Assist Lamp Green LED185 Appendix > Camera specifications Shutter Type Electronically controlled vertical-run focal plane shutter Speed • Auto: 1/6,000–30 sec. • Manual: 1/6,000–30 sec. (1/3 EV Step) • Bulb (time limit: 4 min) Exposure Metering system TTL 221 (17 X 13) Block segment Metering: Multi, Center-weighted, Spot Metering range: EV 0–18 (ISO100 · 30 mm, F2) Compensation ±3 EV (1/3 EV Step) AE lock CUSTOM key ISO equivalent • 1 Step: Auto, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200, ISO 6400, ISO 12800, ISO 25600 • 1/3 Step: Auto, ISO 100, ISO 125, ISO 160, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200, ISO 4000, ISO 5000, ISO 6400, ISO 8000, ISO 10000, ISO 12800, ISO 16000, ISO 20000, ISO 25600 Drive Mode Mode Single, Continuous, Burst (5M only), Timer, Bracket (Auto Exposure, White Balance, Picture Wizard) Continuous shooting • JPEG: High (8.6 fps), Normal (5 fps) • RAW: High (8.6 fps), Normal (5 fps) Burst shooting • 10, 15, or 30 frames per second • Up to 30 shots per shutter-press Bracket shooting Auto exposure bracketing (±3 EV), White Balance bracketing, Picture Wizard bracketing Self-timer 2–30 sec. (1 second interval) Shutter release SR2NX02 (via Micro USB port) (optional) Flash Type External Flash (Bundle with SEF8A) Mode Smart Flash, Auto, Auto Red-eye, Fill in, Fill-in Red, 1st Curtain, 2nd Curtain, Off Guide number 8 (based on ISO 100) (SEF8A) Angle of view 28 mm (35 mm film equivalent) Sync speed Less than 1/180 sec.186 Appendix > Camera specifications Flash EV -2–+2 EV (0.5 EV Step) External flash Optional Samsung external flashes: SEF42A, SEF220A Sync terminal Hot-shoe White Balance Mode Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent White, Fluorescent NW, Fluorescent Daylight, Tungsten, Flash WB, Custom Set, Color Temperature (Manual) Micro adjustment Amber/Blue/Green/Magenta 7 steps respectively Dynamic Range Off/Smart Range+/HDR Picture Wizard Mode Standard, Vivid, Portrait, Landscape, Forest, Retro, Cool, Calm, Classic, Custom1, Custom2, Custom3 Parameter Color, Saturation, Sharpness, Contrast Shooting Mode Smart Auto, Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, Manual, Lens Priority, Smart Smart mode Beauty Face, Best Face, Landscape, Macro, Action Freeze, Rich Tones, Panorama, Waterfall, Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks, Light Trace, Creative Shot Smart Filter Vignetting, Miniature, Colored Pencil, Watercolor, Wash drawing, Oil Sketch, Ink Sketch, Acryl, Negative, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow Size • JPEG (3:2): 20.0M (5472X3648), 10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824) (Burst mode only), 2.0M (1728X1152) • JPEG (16:9): 16.9M (5472X3080), 7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) • JPEG (1:1): 13.3M (3648X3648), 7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) • RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648) * 3D mode with 3D lens is available only with JPEG (16:9) 4.1M (2688X1512) or 2.1M (1920X1080). Quality Super Fine, Fine, Normal RAW standard SRW (ver.2.0.0) Color space sRGB, Adobe RGB187 Appendix > Camera specifications Video Type MP4 (H.264) Format Movie: H.264, Sound: AAC Movie AE mode Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, Manual Movie clip Audio on/off (Shooting time: Max. 29' 59'') Smart Filter Vignetting, Miniature, Colored Pencil, Watercolor, Wash drawing, Oil Sketch, Ink Sketch, Acryl, Negative, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow Size 1920X1080, 1920X810, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240 (For Sharing) Frame rate 60 fps, 30 fps, 24 fps (available only with 1920X810), 15 fps (available only with some Smart Filter options) Multi Motion x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 only), x0.5 (1280X720 (30 fps), 640X480, 320X240 only), x1, x5, x10, x20 Quality HQ, Normal Sound Stereo Edit Still image capture, Time trimming Playback Type Single image, Thumbnails (15/28), Slide show, Movie Edit Smart Filter, Red-eye Fix, Backlight, Resize, Rotate, Face Retouch, Brightness, Contrast Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Colored Pencil, Watercolor, Wash drawing, Oil Sketch, Ink Sketch, Acryl, Negative, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow Smart filter size • JPEG (3:2): 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824), 2.0M (1728X1152) • JPEG (16:9): 6.2M (3328X1872), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) • JPEG (1:1): 6.0M (2448X2448), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) Storage Media External memory (optional)*: SD card (2 GB guaranteed), SDHC card (up to 32 GB guaranteed), SDXC card (up to 64 GB guaranteed), UHS-1 card * Class 6 and above recommended File format RAW (SRW (ver.2.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.21), MPO (3D), DCF, DPOF 1.1 GPS Type Geo-tagging with an optional GPS Module (WGS 84) Feature Location name (English and Korean only)188 Appendix > Camera specifications Wireless network Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n support Dual Band Function MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Auto Backup, Email, SNS & Cloud, AllShare Play, AutoShare, Wi-Fi Direct NFC Yes Interface Digital output USB 2.0 (micro USB jack) Video output • NTSC, PAL (selectable) • HDMI External release Yes (micro USB) External microphone Yes DC power input DC 5.0V, 1A via micro USB Power Source Type Rechargeable battery: BP1130 (1,130 mAh) * The power source may differ depending on your region. Dimensions (W X H X D) 122 X 63.7 X 40.7 mm (without protrusions) Weight 284 g (without battery and memory card) Operating Temperature 0–40 °C Operating Humidity 5–85 % Software i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom * Specifications may change without notice to improve performance. * Other brands and products names are trademarks of respective owners.189 Appendix Glossary AP (Access Point) An access point is a device that allows wireless devices to connect to a wired network. Ad-Hoc network An ad-hoc network is a temporary connection for sharing files or an internet connection and between computers and devices. AdobeRGB Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket) This feature automatically captures several images at different exposures to help you capture a properly-exposed image. AEL/AFL (Auto Exposure Lock/Auto Focus Lock) These features help you lock the exposure or focus on which you want to focus or calculate the exposure. AF (Auto Focus) A system that automatically focuses the camera lens on the subject. Your camera uses the contrast to focus automatically. AMOLED (Active-matrix organic light-emitting diode) / LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) AMOLED is a visual display that is very thin and light, as it does not need backlighting. LCD is a visual display commonly used in consumer electronics. This display needs a separate backlight, such as CCFL or LED, to reproduce colors. Aperture The aperture controls the amount of light that reaches the camera’s sensor.190 Appendix > Glossary Composition Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) A specification to define a file format and file system for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA). Depth of field The distance between the nearest and farthest points that can be acceptably focused in a photograph. Depth of field varies with lens aperture, focal length, and distance from the camera to the subject. Selecting a smaller aperture, for example, will increase the depth of field and blur the background of a composition. DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) A format for writing printing information, such as selected images and number of prints, on a memory card. DPOF-compatible printers, sometimes available at photo shops, can read the information from the card for convenient printing. Camera shake (Blur) If the camera is moved while the shutter is open, the entire image may appear blurred. This occurs more often when the shutter speed is slow. Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, or using a faster shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod or the OIS function to stabilize the camera. Cloud Computing Cloud computing is a technology that allows you to store data on remote servers and to use them from a device with internet access. Color space The range of colors that the camera can see. Color temperature Color Temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin (K) that indicates the hue of a specific type of light source. As the color temperature increases, the color of the light source has a more bluish quality. As the color temperature decreases, the color of the light source has a more reddish quality. At 5,500 degrees Kelvin, the color of the light source is similar to the sun at midday.191 Appendix > Glossary Flash A speed light that helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point(in millimeters). Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. Histogram A graphical representation of the brightness of an image. The horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels. High points at the left (too dark) and right (too bright) on the histogram indicate a photo that is improperly exposed. H.264/MPEG-4 A high-compression video format established by international standard organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T. This codec is capable of providing good video quality at low bit rates developed by the Joint Video Team (JVT). EV (Exposure Value) All the combinations of the camera’s shutter speed and lens aperture that result in the same exposure. EV Compensation This feature allows you to quickly adjust the exposure value measured by the camera, in limited increments, to improve the exposure of your photos. Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) A specification to define an image file format for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA). Exposure The amount of light allowed to reach the camera’s sensor. Exposure is controlled by a combination of the shutter speed, the aperture value, and ISO sensitivity.192 Appendix > Glossary Metering The metering refers to the way in which the camera measures the quantity of light to set the exposure. MF (Manual Focus) A system that manually focuses the camera lens on the subject. You can use the focus ring to focus on a subject. MJPEG (Motion JPEG) A video format which is compressed as a JPEG image. MPO (Multi Picture Object) An image file format that contains multiple images in a file. An MPO file provides a 3D effect on MPO-compatible displays, such as 3D TVs or 3D monitors. Image sensor The physical part of a digital camera that contains a photosite for each pixel in the image. Each photosite records the brightness of the light that strikes it during an exposure. Common sensor types are CCD (Chargecoupled Device) and CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor). IP (Internet protocol) address An IP address is a unique number that is assigned to every device that is connected to the internet. ISO sensitivity The sensitivity of the camera to light, based on the equivalent film speed used in a film camera. At higher ISO sensitivity settings, the camera uses a higher shutter speed, which can reduce blur caused by camera shake and low light. However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise. JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) A lossy method of compression for digital images. JPEG images are compressed to reduce their overall file size with minimal deterioration of the image resolution. 193 Appendix > Glossary PAL (Phase Alternate Line) A video color encoding standard used in numerous countries throughout Africa, Asia, Europe, and the Middle East. Quality An expression of the rate of compression used in a digital image. Higher quality images have a lower rate of compression, which usually results in a larger file size. RAW (CCD raw data) The original, unprocessed data, collected directly from the camera’s image sensor. White Balance, contrast, saturation, sharpness, and other data can be manipulated with editing software before the image is compressed into a standard file format. Resolution The number of pixels present in a digital image. High resolution images contain more pixels and typically show more detail than low resolution images. Noise Misinterpreted pixels in a digital image that may appear as misplaced or random, bright pixels. Noise usually occurs when photos are shot with a high sensitivity or when a sensitivity is automatically set in a dark place. NFC (Near Field Communication) NFC is a set of standards for radio communication at very close proximity. You can use NFC-enabled devices to activate features or exchange data with other devices. NTSC (National Television System Committee) A video color encoding standard used most commonly in Japan, North America, the Philippines, South America, South Korea, and Taiwan. Optical zoom This is a general zoom which can enlarge images with a lens and does not deteriorate quality of images.194 Appendix > Glossary Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. A fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in motion. sRGB (Standard RGB) International standard of color space established by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for PC monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif. Vignetting A reduction of an image’s brightness or saturation at the periphery (outer edges) compared to the center of the image. Vignetting can draw interest to subjects positioned in the center of an image. White Balance (Color balance) An adjustment of the intensities of colors (typically the primary colors red, green, and blue), in an image. The goal of adjusting the White Balance, or color balance, is to correctly render the colors in an image. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi is a technology that allows electronic devices to exchange data wirelessly over a network. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) WPS is a technology that secures wireless home networks.195 Appendix Optional accessories Lens SAMSUNG 18-55 mm F3.5-5.6 OIS III SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 SAMSUNG 20 mm F2.8 SAMSUNG 30 mm F2 SAMSUNG 50-200 mm F4-5.6 ED OIS III SAMSUNG 60 mm F2.8 Macro ED OIS SSA SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS Lens SAMSUNG 85 mm F1.4 ED SSA SAMSUNG 12-24 mm F4-5.6 ED SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 [T6] 2D/3D External flash SEF42A SEF220A GPS GPS10196 Appendix > Optional accessories Shutter release (micro USB type) Microphone SR2NX02 EM10 Rechargeable battery Battery charger BP1130 BC3NX01 Camera bag Camera case Memory card Filter USB cable HDMI cable Strap • These illustrations may differ from your actual items. Refer to the user manuals of these optional accessories for details. • Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using another manufacturer’s accessories.197 Appendix A Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 167 AllShare Play 141 Aperture 16, 20 Auto Backup 133 Auto focus 80 B Battery Caution 177 Charging 34 Insert 33 Best Face mode 65 Bracketing 92 C Camera Connecting as removable disk 160 Connecting to PC 160 Disconnecting (Windows) 161 Layout 30 Camera specifications 184 Charging 34 Color space 148 D Date & Time 153 Depth of Field (DOF) 17, 22 Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) 114 DIRECT LINK 32 Display brightness 152 Display type 43 Drive 90 E Enlarging 113 Exposure Value (EV) 16, 102 F Fader 105 Files Deleting 111 Photo type 74 Protecting 110 Video type 104 Flash Bounce photography 27 Flash options 94 Guide number 26 Intensity 95 F-number 16 Focal length 21 Focus assist 88 Focus Peaking 88 I Icons Playback mode 42 Shooting mode 40 i-Function 61 i-Launcher 163 Image adjustment Adjusting photos 119 Red-eye 120 Retouching faces 120 ISO sensitivity 75 i-Zoom 63 L Lenses Layout 44 Locking 45 Markings 47 Unlocking 46 M Maintenance 170 Memory card Caution 173 Insert 33 Metering 97 MobileLink 129 Index198 Appendix > Index O One touch shot 87 Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) 89 Optional accessories Attach the GPS module 51 Connect the flash 49 Flash layout 48 GPS module layout 51 P Panorama mode 66 Photos Editing 117 Enlarging 113 Shooting options 73 Viewing on 3D TV 159 Viewing on camera 108 Viewing on HDTV 158 Picture Wizard 79 Posture 13 Power save mode 153 R Red-eye effect Playback mode 120 Shooting mode 95 Remote Viewfinder 131 Resolution Playback mode 118 Shooting mode (Movie) 104 Shooting mode (Photo) 73 Retouching faces 120 Rotating 118 Rule of thirds 24 S Service center 181 Settings 152 Shooting modes Aperture Priority 57 Lens Priority 60 Manual 59 Program 55 Recording 68 Shutter Priority 58 Smart 64 Smart Auto 53 Shutter speed 18, 20 Slide show 113 Smart filter Playback mode 121 Shooting mode 101 Smart panel 38 T Thumbnails 108 Timer 91 Touch AF 86 Touch screen 36 Tracking AF 86 Transferring files Mac 161 Windows 160 TV 158 U Unpacking 29 V Video Out 153 Videos Capturing 116 Options 104 Recording 68 Viewing 115 W White balance 76 Wireless network 123 3 3D mode 69199 Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278 - 0799 Appendix200 Appendix FCC notice Caution: Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorientate or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the distance between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Declaration of Conformity Trade Name : Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Model No. : Samsung NX300 Responsible Party : Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Address : 85 Challenger Road, Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660 Telephone No. : 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. RF exposure statements: This device is for handheld operation only. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. FCC ID:A3LNX300201 TA-2012/1802 APPROVED Model : NX300 Year of Manufacture : 2013 CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution: Any changes or modifications to the equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void user’s authority to operate the equipment. IC: 649E-NX300 This equipment may be operated in all EU countries. In France, this equipment may only be used indoors. Complies with IDA Standards DA100790 No.: ESD-1306913C TRC/SS/2013/17Please refer to the warranty that came with your product or visit our website www.samsung.com for after-sales service or inquiries. ENG This user manual includes detailed usage instructions for your camera. Please read this manual thoroughly. USER MANUAL1 Copyright information • Camera specifications or contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of camera functions. • You are not allowed to reuse or distribute any part of this manual without prior permission. • We recommend using your camera within the country where you purchase it. • Use this camera responsibly and adhere to all laws and regulations concerning its use. PlanetFirst represents Samsung Electronics' commitment to sustainable development and social responsibility through eco-driven business and management activities. • Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. • Mac and Apple App Store are registered trademarks of the Apple Corporation. • Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google, Inc. • Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop and Lightroom are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. • microSD™, microSDHC™, and microSDXC™ are registered trademarks of the SD Association. • HDMI, the HDMI logo, and the term “High Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. • Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • Trademarks and trade names used in this manual are the property of their respective owners.2 Health and safety information Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight. Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than 1 m/3 ft) to people or animals. If you use the flash too close to your subject’s eyes, this can cause temporary or permanent eyesight damage. Keep your camera away from small children and pets. Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach of small children and animals. Small parts may cause choking or serious injury if swallowed. Moving parts and accessories may present physical dangers as well. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or high temperatures for an extended period of time. Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme temperatures can cause permanent damage to your camera’s internal components. Avoid covering the camera or charger with blankets or clothes. The camera may overheat, which may distort the camera or cause a fire. Do not handle the power supply cord or go near the charger during a thunderstorm. This may result in electric shock. Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid dangerous situations and ensure peak performance of your camera. Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Do not disassemble or attempt to repair your camera. This may result in electric shock or damage to the camera. Do not use your camera near flammable or explosive gases and liquids. This may cause a fire or explosion. Do not insert flammable materials into the camera or store these materials near the camera. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not handle your camera with wet hands. This may result in electric shock.3 Health and safety information If liquid or foreign objects enter your camera, immediately disconnect all power sources, such as the battery or charger, and then contact a Samsung service center. Comply with any regulations that restrict the use of a camera in a certain area. • Avoid interference with other electronic devices. • Turn off the camera when in an aircraft. Your camera can cause interference with aircraft equipment. Follow all airline regulations and turn off your camera when directed by airline personnel. • Turn off the camera near medical equipment. Your camera can interfere with medical equipment in hospitals or health care facilities. Follow all regulations, posted warnings, and directions from medical personnel. Avoid interference with pacemakers. Maintain the distance between this camera and all pacemakers to avoid potential interference, as recommended by the manufacturer and research groups. If you have any reason to suspect that your camera is interfering with a pacemaker or other medical device, turn off the camera immediately and contact the manufacturer of the pacemaker or medical device for guidance. Caution—situations that could cause damage to your camera or other equipment Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period of time. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. Do not damage or heat the battery. Inauthentic, damaged, or heated batteries may cause a fire or personal injury. Use only Samsung-approved batteries, chargers, cables and accessories. • Using unauthorized batteries, chargers, cables or accessories can cause batteries to explode, damage your camera, or cause injury. • Samsung is not responsible for damage or injuries caused by unapproved batteries, chargers, cables or accessories. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Misusing the battery may cause a fire or electric shock.4 Health and safety information Do not touch the flash while it fires. The flash is very hot when fired and may burn your skin. When you use the AC charger, turn off the camera before you disconnect the power to the AC charger. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Disconnect the charger from the wall socket when not in use. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Do not use a damaged power supply cord, plug, or loose outlet when you charge batteries. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not allow the AC charger to come in contact with the +/- terminals on the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not drop or subject the camera to strong impacts. Doing so may damage the screen or external or internal components. Exercise caution when you connect cables and install batteries and memory cards. If you force the connectors, improperly connect cables, or improperly install batteries and memory cards, you can damage ports, connectors, and accessories. Keep cards with magnetic strips away from the camera case. Information stored on the card may be damaged or erased. Never use a damaged battery, or memory card. This may result in electric shock or camera malfunction or cause a fire. Do not place the camera in or near magnetic fields. Doing so may cause the camera to malfunction. Do not use the camera if the screen is damaged. If the glass or acrylic parts are broken, visit a Samsung service center to have the camera repaired.5 Health and safety information Check that the camera is operating properly before use. The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any loss of files or damage that may result from camera malfunction or improper use. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight. This may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. If the camera overheats, remove the battery and allow it to cool down. • Prolonged usage of the camera may overheat the battery and raise the internal temperature of the camera. If the camera stops operating, remove the battery and allow it to cool down. • High internal temperatures may result in noise in your photos. This is normal and does not affect your camera’s overall performance. Avoid interference with other electronic devices. Your camera emits radio frequency (RF) signals that may interfere with unshielded or improperly shielded electronic equipment, such as pacemakers, hearing aids, medical devices, and other electronic devices in homes or vehicles. Consult the manufacturers of your electronic devices to solve any interference problems you experience. To prevent unwanted interference, use only Samsung-approved devices or accessories. Use your camera in the normal position. Avoid contact with your camera’s internal antenna. Data transference and your responsibilities • Data transferred via WLAN could be leaked, so avoid transferring sensitive data in public areas or on open networks. • The camera manufacturer is not liable for any data transfers that infringe on copyrights, trademarks, intellectual property laws, or public decency ordinances.6 Indications used in this manual Mode indications Mode Indication Smart Auto t Program P Aperture Priority A Shutter Priority S Manual M Lens Priority i Smart s Wi-Fi B Icons used in this manual Icon Function Additional information Safety warnings and precautions [ ] Camera buttons. For example, [Shutter] represents the shutter button. ( ) Page number of related information → The order of options or menus you must select to perform a step; for example: Select 1→Quality (represents select 1, and then Quality). * Annotation7 Contents Chapter 1 My Camera Getting started ............................................................................................ 29 Unpacking.................................................................................................................... 29 Camera layout .............................................................................................. 30 Using the DIRECT LINK button ................................................................................ 32 Inserting the battery and memory card ................................................. 33 Removing the battery and memory card ........................................................... 33 Using the memory card adapter ............................................................................. 33 Charging the battery and turning on your camera .............................. 34 Charging the battery................................................................................................ 34 Turning on your camera ......................................................................................... 34 Performing the initial setup ...................................................................... 35 Selecting functions (options) ................................................................... 36 Selecting with buttons ............................................................................................ 36 Selecting by touch .................................................................................................... 36 Using m .............................................................................................................. 37 E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode ............................................................. 37 Using the Smart panel ............................................................................................. 38 E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode ......................................................... 38 Tips Concepts in Photography Shooting postures....................................................................................... 13 Holding the camera ..................................................................................................... 13 Standing photography ............................................................................................... 13 Crouching photography ............................................................................................ 14 Using the display .......................................................................................................... 14 Low-angle shot .............................................................................................................. 15 High-angle shot ............................................................................................................. 15 Aperture ........................................................................................................ 16 Aperture value and the depth of field .................................................................. 17 Shutter speed ............................................................................................... 18 ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 19 How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity control exposure ......................................................................................... 20 Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective ................ 21 Depth of field ............................................................................................... 22 What controls out-of-focus effects? ....................................................................... 22 Optical preview ............................................................................................................. 24 Composition ................................................................................................. 24 Rule of Thirds .................................................................................................................. 24 Photos with two subjects .......................................................................................... 25 Flash ............................................................................................................... 26 Flash guide number ..................................................................................................... 26 Bounce Photography .................................................................................................. 278 Contents Display icons ................................................................................................ 40 In Shooting mode ..................................................................................................... 40 Capturing photos ........................................................................................................ 40 Recording videos ......................................................................................................... 41 About the level gauge ............................................................................................... 41 In Playback mode ...................................................................................................... 42 Viewing photos ............................................................................................................ 42 Playing videos ............................................................................................................... 42 Changing the information displayed ................................................................. 43 Lenses ............................................................................................................ 44 Lens layout ................................................................................................................... 44 Locking or unlocking the lens ................................................................................. 45 Lens markings ............................................................................................................ 47 Accessories ................................................................................................... 48 External flash layout ................................................................................................. 48 Connecting the external flash ................................................................................. 49 GPS module layout (optional) .............................................................................. 51 Attaching the GPS module .................................................................................... 51 Shooting modes .......................................................................................... 53 t Smart Auto mode ..................................................................................... 53 P Program mode ....................................................................................................... 55 Program Shift ................................................................................................................ 56 Minimum shutter speed ............................................................................................ 56 A Aperture Priority mode ..................................................................................... 57 S Shutter Priority mode.......................................................................................... 58 M Manual mode ....................................................................................................... 59 Framing mode .............................................................................................................. 59 Using the Bulb function ............................................................................................ 60 i Lens Priority mode ............................................................................................. 60 Using E ............................................................................................................. 60 Using i-Function in P/A/S/M modes ................................................................ 61 Using Z .............................................................................................................. 63 s Smart mode ........................................................................................................ 64 Using the Best Face mode ........................................................................................ 65 Capturing panoramic photos .................................................................................. 66 Recording a video ..................................................................................................... 68 3D mode ....................................................................................................................... 69 Available functions by shooting mode ............................................................. 719 Contents Chapter 2 Shooting Functions Size and Resolution .................................................................................... 73 Photo size ..................................................................................................................... 73 Quality ........................................................................................................................... 74 ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 75 White Balance .............................................................................................. 76 Customizing preset White Balance options ....................................................... 77 Picture Wizard (photo styles) .................................................................... 79 AF mode ........................................................................................................ 80 Single AF ....................................................................................................................... 81 Continuous AF ............................................................................................................ 81 Manual focus ............................................................................................................... 82 AF area ........................................................................................................... 83 Selection AF ................................................................................................................ 83 Multi AF ......................................................................................................................... 84 Face detection AF ...................................................................................................... 84 Self-Portrait AF ........................................................................................................... 85 Touch AF ........................................................................................................ 86 Touch AF ....................................................................................................................... 86 AF Point ......................................................................................................................... 86 Tracking AF .................................................................................................................. 86 One touch shot .......................................................................................................... 87 Focus assist ................................................................................................... 88 MF Assist ....................................................................................................................... 88 Focus Peaking ............................................................................................................. 88 Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ............................................................. 89 Drive (shooting method) ........................................................................... 90 Single ............................................................................................................................. 90 Continuous .................................................................................................................. 90 Burst ............................................................................................................................... 91 Timer .............................................................................................................................. 91 Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) ............................................................. 92 White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) ............................................................ 92 Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) ........................................................ 93 Bracketing setting ..................................................................................................... 93 Flash ............................................................................................................... 94 Reducing the red-eye effect .................................................................................. 95 Adjusting the flash intensity ................................................................................. 95 Metering ........................................................................................................ 97 Multi ............................................................................................................................... 97 Spot ................................................................................................................................ 98 Center-weighted ....................................................................................................... 98 Measuring the exposure value of the focus area ........................................... 99 Dynamic Range ......................................................................................... 100 Smart Filter ................................................................................................. 101 Exposure compensation .......................................................................... 102 Exposure lock ............................................................................................. 103 Video functions ......................................................................................... 104 Movie size.................................................................................................................. 104 Movie quality ........................................................................................................... 104 Multi Motion ............................................................................................................ 105 Fader ........................................................................................................................... 105 Voice ............................................................................................................................ 106 Wind cut .................................................................................................................... 106 Mic Level .................................................................................................................... 10610 Contents Chapter 3 Playback/Editing Searching and managing files ................................................................ 108 Viewing photos ....................................................................................................... 108 Viewing image thumbnails ................................................................................. 108 Viewing files by category .................................................................................... 109 Viewing files as a folder ........................................................................................ 109 Protecting files ........................................................................................................ 110 Lock/Unlock all files .................................................................................................. 110 Deleting files ............................................................................................................ 111 Deleting a single file ................................................................................................. 111 Deleting multiple files .............................................................................................. 111 Deleting all files .......................................................................................................... 112 Viewing photos .......................................................................................... 113 Enlarging a photo .................................................................................................. 113 Viewing a slide show ............................................................................................. 113 Auto rotating ........................................................................................................... 114 Creating a print order (DPOF) ............................................................................ 114 Playing videos ............................................................................................ 115 Trimming a video during playback .................................................................. 115 Capturing an image during playback ............................................................. 116 Editing photos ........................................................................................... 117 Cropping a photo ................................................................................................... 117 Rotating a photo .................................................................................................... 118 Resizing photos....................................................................................................... 118 Adjusting your photos .......................................................................................... 119 Retouching faces .................................................................................................... 120 Reducing red-eye ................................................................................................... 120 Applying Smart Filter effects .............................................................................. 121 Chapter 4 Wireless network Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings ............... 123 Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................... 123 Setting network options ......................................................................................... 124 Manually setting the IP address ........................................................................... 124 Using the login browser....................................................................................... 125 Network connection tips ..................................................................................... 126 Entering text ............................................................................................................ 127 Saving files to a smart phone automatically ....................................... 128 Sending photos or videos to a smart phone ....................................... 129 Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release .............................. 131 Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos ..................................... 133 Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC.................................. 133 Sending photos or videos to a PC .................................................................... 133 Sending photos or videos via email ...................................................... 135 Changing email settings ...................................................................................... 135 Storing your information ........................................................................................ 135 Setting an email password ..................................................................................... 136 Changing the email password .............................................................................. 137 Sending photos or videos via email ................................................................ 137 Using photo or video sharing websites ................................................ 139 Accessing a website .............................................................................................. 139 Uploading photos or videos............................................................................... 140 Using AllShare Play to send files ............................................................ 141 Uploading photos to online storage ............................................................... 141 Viewing photos or videos on devices that support AllShare Play ........ 142 Sending photos using Wi-Fi Direct ........................................................ 14411 Contents Chapter 6 Connecting to external devices Viewing files on an HDTV or 3D TV ........................................................ 158 Viewing files on an HDTV .................................................................................... 158 Viewing files on a 3D TV ....................................................................................... 159 Transferring files to your computer ....................................................... 160 Transferring files to your Windows OS computer ....................................... 160 Connecting the camera as a removable disk ................................................... 160 Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) .................................................. 161 Transferring files to your Mac OS ...................................................................... 161 Using programs on a PC........................................................................... 163 Installing programs from the provided CD ................................................... 163 Available programs when using i-Launcher .................................................... 163 Using i-Launcher .................................................................................................... 163 Requirements for Windows OS ............................................................................. 163 Requirements for Mac OS ....................................................................................... 164 Opening i-Launcher .................................................................................................. 164 Using Multimedia Viewer ........................................................................................ 165 Downloading the firmware .................................................................................... 166 Downloading the PC Auto Backup program ................................................... 166 Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ........................................................ 167 Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ............................................................... 167 Chapter 5 Camera settings menu User settings ............................................................................................... 146 ISO Customizing ..................................................................................................... 146 ISO Step ......................................................................................................................... 146 Auto ISO Range .......................................................................................................... 146 Noise Reduction ..................................................................................................... 146 Bracket Set ................................................................................................................ 147 DMF (Direct Manual Focus) ................................................................................ 147 Color space ............................................................................................................... 148 Distortion Correct .................................................................................................. 149 Touch Operation ..................................................................................................... 149 iFn Customizing ...................................................................................................... 149 User Display .............................................................................................................. 149 Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 150 Grid Line .................................................................................................................... 151 AF Lamp ..................................................................................................................... 151 Setting ......................................................................................................... 15212 Contents Before contacting a service center ........................................................ 181 Camera specifications .............................................................................. 184 Glossary ....................................................................................................... 189 Optional accessories ................................................................................. 195 Index ............................................................................................................ 197 FCC notice ................................................................................................... 200 Chapter 7 Appendix Error messages .......................................................................................... 169 Maintaining the camera........................................................................... 170 Cleaning the camera ............................................................................................. 170 Camera lens and display ......................................................................................... 170 Image sensor ............................................................................................................... 170 Camera body ............................................................................................................... 170 Using or storing the camera ............................................................................... 171 Inappropriate places to use or store the camera ........................................... 171 Using on beaches or shores ................................................................................... 171 Storing for extended period of time ................................................................... 171 Using the camera with caution in humid environments ............................ 172 Other cautions ............................................................................................................ 172 About memory card .............................................................................................. 173 Supported memory card ........................................................................................ 173 Memory card capacity ............................................................................................. 174 Cautions when using memory cards .................................................................. 176 About the battery .................................................................................................. 177 Battery specifications ............................................................................................... 177 Battery life .................................................................................................................... 178 Low battery message ............................................................................................... 178 Notes about using the battery .............................................................................. 178 Cautions about using the battery ........................................................................ 179 Notes about charging the battery ....................................................................... 179 Notes about charging with a computer connected...................................... 180 Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care ............................ 18013 Concepts in Photography Standing photography Compose your shot; stand up straight with your feet shoulder-length apart, and keep your elbows pointed down. Shooting postures A correct posture for stabilizing the camera is necessary for taking a good photo. Even if you hold a camera correctly, the wrong posture can cause the camera to shake. Stand up straight and remain still to maintain a steady base for your camera. When shooting with a slow shutter speed, hold your breath to minimize body movement. Holding the camera Hold the camera with your right hand and place you right index finger on the shutter button. Place your left hand under the lens for support.14 Concepts in Photography Crouching photography Compose your shot, crouch with one knee touching the ground, and keep a straight posture. Using the display To take photos at high or low angles, tilt the display up or down. You can tilt the display up to 90° upwards ( ) or 45° downwards ( ). • Keep the display closed ( ) when the camera is not in use. • Tilt the display only within the angle allowed. Failing to do so may damage your camera.15 Concepts in Photography Low-angle shot A low-angle shot is a shot from a camera positioned below your eyeline, looking up the subject. High-angle shot A high-angle shot is a shot from a camera positioned above your eyeline, looking down on the subject.16 Concepts in Photography Aperture The aperture, a hole that controls the amount of light that enters the camera, is one of the three factors that determine the exposure. The aperture housing contains thin, metal plates that open and close to let light through the aperture and into the camera. The size of the aperture is closely related to the brightness of a photo: the larger the aperture, the brighter the photo; the smaller the aperture, the darker the photo. Aperture sizes Minimum aperture Medium aperture Maximum aperture Darker photo (aperture opened slightly) Brighter photo (aperture opened wide) The size of the aperture is represented by a value known as an “F-number.” The f-number represents the focal length divided by the diameter of the lens. For example, if a lens with a 50 mm focal length has an f-number of F2, the diameter of the aperture is 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm=F2) The smaller the f-number, the greater the size of the aperture. The opening in the aperture is described as the Exposure Value (EV). Increasing the Exposure Value (+1 EV) means the amount of light doubles. Decreasing the Exposure Value (-1 EV) means the amount of light halves. You can also use the exposure compensation feature to fine-tune the amount of light by subdividing exposure values into 1/2, 1/3 EV, and so on. +1 EV F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8 -1 EV Exposure Value Steps17 Concepts in Photography Aperture value and the depth of field You can blur or sharpen the background of a photo by controlling the aperture. It is closely related to the depth of field (DOF), which can be expressed as small or large. A photo with a large DOF A photo with a small DOF The aperture housing contains several blades. These blades move together and control the amount of light passing through the center of the aperture. The number of blades also affects the shape of light when shooting night scenes. If an aperture has an even number of blades, light divides into an equal number of sections. If the number of blades is odd, the number of sections is double the number of blades. For example, an aperture with 8 blades divides light into 8 sections and an aperture with 7 blades into 14 sections. 7 blades 8 blades18 Concepts in Photography Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. Usually, the shutter speed is manually adjustable. The measurement of the shutter speed is known as the “Exposure Value” (EV), which is marked in intervals of 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1000 s, 1/2000 s, and so on. Exposure +1 EV -1 EV 1s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s Shutter Speed Therefore, the faster the shutter speed, the less light will be let in. Likewise, the slower the shutter speed, the more light will be let in. As the photos below illustrate, a slow shutter speed allows more time to let light in, so the photo becomes brighter. On the other hand, a fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in motion. 0.8 s 0.004 s19 Concepts in Photography ISO sensitivity The exposure of an image is determined by the sensitivity of the camera. This sensitivity is based on international film standards, known as ISO standards. On digital cameras, this sensitivity rating is used to represent the sensitivity of the digital mechanism that captures the image. ISO sensitivity doubles as the number doubles. For example, an ISO 200 setting is capable of capturing images at twice the speed of an ISO 100 setting. However, higher ISO settings can result in “noise”—small specks, spots, and other phenomena in a photo that give the shot a noisy or dirty appearance. As a general rule, it is best to use a low ISO setting to prevent noise in your photos, unless you are shooting in darkened environments or at night. Changes in the quality and brightness according to ISO sensitivity Because a low ISO sensitivity means the camera will be less sensitive to light, you need more light to have an optimal exposure. When using a low ISO sensitivity, open the aperture more or reduce the shutter speed to allow more light to enter the camera. For example, on a sunny day when light is abundant, a low ISO sensitivity does not require a slow shutter speed. However, in a dark place or at night, a low ISO sensitivity will result in a blurry photo. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the ISO sensitivity by a moderate amount. A photo captured with a tripod and high ISO sensitivity A blurred photo with a low ISO sensitivity20 Concepts in Photography How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity control exposure The aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity are closely interconnected in photography. The aperture setting controls the opening that regulates the light that enters the camera, while the shutter speed determines the length of time that light is allowed to enter. ISO sensitivity determines the speed at which the film reacts to light. Together, these three aspects are described as the triangle of exposure. A change in shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO sensitivity can be offset by adjustments to the others to maintain the amount of light. The results, however, change according to the settings. For example, shutter speed is useful in expressing movement, aperture can control the depth of field, and ISO sensitivity can control the graininess of a photo. Settings Results Aperture value Wide aperture = more light Narrow aperture = less light Wide = small depth of field Narrow = large depth of field Settings Results Shutter speed Fast speed = less light Slow speed = more light Fast = still Slow = blurry ISO sensitivity High sensitivity = more sensitive to light Low sensitivity = less sensitive to light High = more grainy Low = less grainy21 Concepts in Photography Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective Focal length, which is measured in millimeters, is the distance between the middle of the lens to its focal point. It affects the angle and perspective of captured images. A short focal length translates into a wide angle, which allows you to capture a wide shot. A long focal length translates into a narrow angle, which allows you to capture telephoto shots. Short focal length wide shot wide angle wide-angle lens Long focal length telephoto shot narrow angle telephoto lens Look at these photos below and compare the changes. 18 mm angle 55 mm angle 200 mm angle Normally, a lens with a wide angle is suitable for shooting landscapes and a lens with a narrow angle is recommended for shooting sports events or portraits.22 Concepts in Photography Depth of field Portraits or still-life photos mostly acclaimed by people are the ones on which the background is out of focus so the subject looks pronounced. Depending on the focused areas, a photo can be blurred or sharpened. This is called ‘a low DOF’ or ‘a high DOF’. The depth of field is the focused area around the subject. Therefore, a small DOF signifies that the focused area is narrow and a large DOF means the focused area is wide. A photo with a small DOF, which stresses the subject and makes the rest of it blurred, can be obtained by using a telescope lens or selecting a low aperture value. Conversely, a photo with a large DOF which shows all the elements on the photo sharply focused can be achieved by using a wide angle lens or selecting a high aperture value. Small Depth of Field Large Depth of Field What controls out-of-focus effects? DOF depends on aperture value The wider the aperture is (namely the lower the aperture value), the lower the DOF becomes. Under the condition where the other values including shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are equal, a low aperture value leads to a photo with a low DOF. 55 mm F5.7 55 mm F2223 Concepts in Photography DOF depends on focal length The longer the focal length is, the lower the DOF gets. A telescope lens with a longer focal length than a telescope lens with a short focal length is better to capture a photo of a low DOF. A photo captured with a 18 mm telescope lens A photo captured with a 100 mm telescope lens DOF depends on the distance between the subject and the camera The shorter the distance between the subject and the camera is, the lower the DOF gets. Therefore, taking a photo close to a subject can result in a photo of low DOF. A photo captured with a 100 mm telescope lens A photo captured close to the subject 24 Concepts in Photography Optical preview You can press the Custom button to view the optical preview before capturing a photo. The camera adjusts the aperture to the predefined settings and shows the results on the screen. Set the Custom button to Optical preview. (p. 150) Composition It is fun to capture a photo of the beauty of world with a camera. No matter how the world is beautiful, however, a poor composition cannot capture the beauty of it. When it comes to composition, it is very important to prioritize subjects. Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. Rule of Thirds To use the rule of thirds, divide the image into a 3x3 pattern of equal rectangles. To compose photos that best emphasize the subject, make sure the subject is located at one of the corners of the center rectangle.25 Concepts in Photography Using the rule of thirds will create photos with stable and compelling compositions. Below are a few examples. Photos with two subjects If your subject is in one corner of the photo, it creates an unbalanced composition. You can stabilize the photo by capturing a second subject in the opposite corner to balance the weight of the photo. Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 1 Subject 2 Unstable Stable When taking landscape photos, centering the horizon will create an unbalanced effect. Give more weight to the photo by moving the horizon up or down. Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 1 Subject 2 Unstable Stable26 Concepts in Photography Flash guide number The model number of a flash refers to the flash’s power, and the maximum amount of light created is represented by a value known as a “guide number.” The bigger the guide number, the more light is emitted from the flash. The guide number is achieved by multiplying the distance from the flash to the subject and the aperture value when the ISO sensitivity is set to 100. Guide number = Flash to Subject Distance X Aperture value Aperture value = Guide number / Flash to Subject Distance Flash to Subject Distance = Guide number / Aperture value Therefore, if you know the guide number of a flash, you can estimate an optimum flash to subject distance when setting the flash manually. For example, if a flash has a guide number of GN 20 and is 4 meters away from the subject, the optimal aperture value is F5.0. Flash Light is one of the most important components in photography. It’s not easy, however, to have an enough amount of light anytime and anywhere. Making use of a flash allows you to optimize light settings and create a variety of effects. Flash, also known as strobe or speed light, helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. It is also useful in light-abundant situations. For example, flash can be used in compensating the exposure of a subject’s shadow or capturing clearly both the subject and the background in backlit conditions. Before correction After correction27 Concepts in Photography Bounce Photography Bounce photography refers to the method of bouncing light off of the ceiling or walls so that the light spreads evenly over the subject. Normally, photos captured with flash may appear unnatural and cast shadows. Subjects in photos captured with bounce photography cast no shadows and look smooth due to evenly spread light.Chapter 1 My Camera Learn about your camera’s layout, display icons, lens, optional accessories, and basic functions.My Camera 29 Getting started Unpacking Check your product box for the following items. Camera (including the body cap and hot-shoe cover) AC adapter/USB cable Rechargeable battery External flash Software CD-ROM (User manual included) Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM Quick Start Guide Strap • The illustrations may differ from your actual items. • You can purchase optional accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for any problems caused by using unauthorized accessories. For information about accessories, refer to page 195.My Camera 30 Camera layout No. Name 1 Mode dial • t: Smart Auto mode (p. 53) • P: Program mode (p. 55) • A: Aperture Priority mode (p. 57) • S: Shutter Priority mode (p. 58) • M: Manual mode (p. 59) • i: Lens Priority mode (p. 60) • s: Smart mode (p. 64) • B: Wi-Fi (p. 122) 2 Jog dial • In the Menu screen: Move to a desired menu item. • In the Smart panel: Adjust a selected option. • In Shooting mode: Adjust shutter speed or aperture value in some shooting modes or change the size of a focus area. • In Playback mode: View thumbnails, enlarge or reduce a photo, or open or close a folder of continuous or burst shots in Playback mode. 3 DIRECT LINK button: Start a preset Wi-Fi function. (p. 32) No. Name 4 Microphone 5 Hot-shoe cover 6 Hot-shoe 7 Eyelet for camera strap 8 Image sensor 9 Internal antenna/NFC tag * Avoid contact with the internal antenna while using the wireless network. 10 Speaker 11 Lens release button 12 Lens mount 13 Lens mount index 14 AF-assist light/Timer lamp 15 Power switch 16 Shutter button 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 4 8 7 16 15My Camera > Camera layout 31 No. Name 1 Video recording button Start recording a video. 2 EV adjust button (p. 102) Press and hold the button, and then scroll the jog dial to adjust the exposure value. In M mode, the aperture value will be adjusted. 3 Fn button Access the Smart panel and fine-tune some settings. 4 o button • In the Menu screen: Save the selected options. • In Shooting mode: Allow you to select a focus area manually in some shooting modes. 5 Navigation button • In Shooting mode -D: View camera settings and change options. - I: Select an ISO value. - C: Select a drive option. - F: Select an AF mode. • In other situations Move up, down, left, right, respectively. No. Name 6 Delete/Custom button • In Shooting mode: Perform the assigned function. (p. 150) • In Playback mode: Delete files. 7 Playback button Enter Playback mode. 8 Status lamp Indicate the status of the camera. • Blinking: When saving a photo, shooting a video, sending data to a computer, connecting to WLAN, or sending a photo. • Steady: When there is no data transfer, when data transfer to a computer is complete, or charging the battery. 9 MENU button Access options or menus. 5 6 1 2 3 4 7 8 9My Camera > Camera layout 32 No. Name 1 USB and shutter release port Connect the camera to a computer or shutter release. Use a shutter release cable with a tripod to minimize camera movement. 2 HDMI port 3 Battery chamber/Memory card cover Insert a memory card and battery. 4 Display • To take photos at high or low angles, tilt the display up or down. (p. 14) • Touch the screen to select a menu or an option. (p. 36) 5 Tripod mount Using the DIRECT LINK button You can turn on the Wi-Fi feature conveniently by pressing [DIRECT LINK]. Press [DIRECT LINK] again to return to the previous mode. Setting the DIRECT LINK button You can select a Wi-Fi function to launch when you press [DIRECT LINK]. (p. 150) To set a DIRECT LINK option, In Shooting mode, press [m] →5→Key Mapping→ DIRECT LINK → an option. 4 5 1 2 3My Camera 33 Inserting the battery and memory card Learn how to insert the battery and an optional memory card into the camera. Memory card Insert a memory card with the goldcolored contacts facing down. Rechargeable battery Insert the battery with the Samsung logo facing up. Removing the battery and memory card Rechargeable battery Battery lock Slide the lock up to release the battery. Memory card Push the card gently until it disengages from the camera, and then pull it out of the slot. Using the memory card adapter To use micro memory cards with this product, a PC, or a memory card reader, insert the card into an adapter. While the status lamp of the camera is blinking, do not remove the memory card or battery. Doing so may damage the data stored on the memory card or your camera.My Camera 34 Charging the battery and turning on your camera Charging the battery Before you use the camera for the first time, you must charge the battery. Plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera, and then plug the other end of the USB cable into the AC adapter. Status lamp • Red light on: Charging • Red light off: Fully charged • Red light blinking: Error • Use only the AC adapter and USB cable supplied with your camera. If you use another AC adapter, the camera battery may not charge or work properly. • You can charge the battery with the USB cable only when the camera is turned off. Turning on your camera Set the Power switch to ON. • To turn your camera off, set the Power switch to OFF. • The initial setup screen appears when you turn on the camera for the first time. (p. 35)My Camera 35 Performing the initial setup When you turn on your camera for the first time, the initial setup screen appears. The language is preset for the country or region where the camera is sold. You can change the language as desired. You can also select an item by touching it on the screen. 1 Press [I] to select Time Zone, and then press [F] or [o]. 2 Press [D/I] to select a time zone, and then press [o]. Back Set Time Zone [GMT +00:00] London [GMT -01:00] Cape Verde [GMT -02:00] Mid-Atlantic [GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo [GMT -03:30] Newfoundland 3 Press [I] to select Date & Time, and then press [F] or [o]. Back Set Date & Time Year Month Day Hr Min DST • The screen may differ depending on the language selected. 4 Press [C/F] to select an item (Year/Month/Day/Hr/Min/ DST). 5 Press [D/I] to set the option, and then press [o]. 6 Press [I] to select Date Type, and then press [F] or [o]. 7 Press [D/I] to select a date type, and then press [o]. 8 Press [I] to select Time Type, and then press [F] or [o]. 9 Press [D/I] to select a time type, and then press [o]. 10 Press [m] to finish the initial setup.My Camera 36 Selecting functions (options) Selecting with buttons Scroll the jog dial or press [D/I/C/F] to move, and then press [o] to select an option. Selecting by touch Do not use sharp objects, such as pens or pencils, to touch the screen. You can damage the screen. Touching: Touch an icon to select a menu or an option. AllShare Play MobileLink Remote Viewfinder Auto Backup Email SNS & Cloud Dragging: Touch and hold an area on the screen, and then drag your finger. AutoShare Photo Size Quality ISO White Balance Back SelectMy Camera > Selecting functions (options) 37 Flicking: Gently flick your finger across the screen. • The touch screen may not recognize your inputs if you touch multiple items at the same time. • When you touch or drag the screen, discolorations may occur. This is not a malfunction, but a characteristic of the touch screen. Touch or drag lightly to minimize the discolorations. • The touch screen may not work properly if you use the camera in extremely humid environments. • The touch screen may not work properly if you apply screen protection film or other accessories to the screen. • Depending on the viewing angle, the screen may appear dim. Adjust the brightness or viewing angle to improve the resolution. Using Press [m m] or touch on the screen, and then change shooting options or settings. E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode 1 Rotate the mode dial to P. 2 Press [m] or touch . 3 Press [C] → [D/I] to move to 1, and then press [o]. • You can also touch 1 on the screen. 4 Scroll the jog dial or press [D/I] to move to Photo Size, and then press [o]. • You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option. Back Select AutoShare Photo Size Quality ISO White BalanceMy Camera > Selecting functions (options) 38 5 Scroll the jog dial or press [D/I] to move to an option, and then press [o]. • You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option. • Press [m] or touch Back to go back to the previous menu. Back Set AutoShare Photo Size Quality ISO White Balance 5472x3648 (3:2) 3888x2592 (3:2) 2976x1984 (3:2) 1728x1152 (3:2) 5472x3080 (16:9) 6 Press [m] or touch Back to switch to Shooting mode. Using the Smart panel Press [f] or touch on the screen to access some functions such as Exposure, ISO, and White Balance. E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode 1 Rotate the mode dial to P. 2 Press [f] or touch .My Camera > Selecting functions (options) 39 3 Press [D/I/C/F] to move to EV, and then press [o]. • You can directly select an option by scrolling the jog dial without having to press [o]. • You can also select an option by touching it. EV : 0.0 Adjust You can adjust some options by dragging them. Back 4 Scroll the jog dial or press [C/F] to adjust the exposure value, and then press [o]. • You can also drag the dial on the screen, and then select Set to adjust the option. EV : 0.0 Back SetMy Camera 40 Display icons Capturing photos 1 2 3 London 1. Shooting information Icon Description Shooting mode Current date Current time GPS activated* London Location information* Memory card not inserted** Auto exposure lock (p. 103) Available number of photos • : Fully charged • : Partially charged • (Red): Empty (recharge the battery) Icon Description Auto focus frame Spot metering area Camera shake Manual focus scale Level gauge (p. 41) Histogram (p. 150) Focus Shutter speed Aperture value Exposure adjustment value ISO sensitivity (p. 75) * These icons appear when you attach an optional GPS module. ** Photos that were captured without inserting a memory card cannot be transferred to a memory card or a computer. 2. Shooting options Icon Description Photo size Drive mode Flash (p. 94) Flash intensity adjustment Metering (p. 97) Icon Description AF mode (p. 80) Focus area Face detection White Balance (p. 76) White Balance micro adjustment Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 89) ZZ on ratio RAW file Dynamic Range (p. 100) 3. Shooting options (Touch) Icon Description Change Smart mode*** AutoShare Touch AF options Shooting options Smart panel *** This icon appears only when you select Smart mode. The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. In Shooting modeMy Camera > Display icons 41 2. Shooting options Icon Description Video size AF mode (p. 80) Metering (p. 97) White Balance (p. 76) Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 89) White Balance micro adjustment Fader (p. 105) Multi Motion (p. 105) Voice recording off (p. 106) The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. About the level gauge The level gauge helps you align the camera with the horizontal and vertical lines on the display. If the level gauge is not level, calibrate the level gauge using the Horizontal Calibration function. (p. 152) Vertical Horizontal ▲ Level ▲ Unlevel You cannot use the level gauge when you shoot in portrait orientation. Recording videos 1 2 1. Shooting information Icon Description Shooting mode Current recording time/Available recording time • : Fully charged • : Partially charged • (Red): Empty (recharge the battery) Shutter speed Aperture value Exposure value ISO sensitivity (p. 75)My Camera > Display icons 42 In Playback mode Viewing photos London Information Mode F No Shutter ISO Metering Flash Focal Length White Balance EV Photo Size Date Icon Description Continuously captured file Current file/The total number of files Folder number - File number File with location information London Location information RAW file Protected file Print information added to file (p. 114) 3D file m Playback/Editing menu (Touch) Editing photos (Touch) Trimming a video (Touch) Viewing image thumbnails (Touch) 1 2 3 London No. Description 1 Captured photo 2 RGB histogram (p. 150) 3 Shooting mode, Metering, Flash, White Balance, Aperture value, Shutter speed, ISO, Focal length, Exposure value, Photo size, Date, Location information Playing videos Stop Capture Icon Description Playback speed Multi Motion Current playback time Video length / View previous file/Scan backward. (Each time you touch the scan backward icon, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) / Pause or resume playback. / View next file/Scan forward. (Each time you touch the scan forward icon, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Adjust the volume or mute the sound.My Camera > Display icons 43 Changing the information displayed Press [D] repeatedly to change the display type. Mode Display type Shooting • Basic shooting information (Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture value, Exposure value, ISO sensitivity, etc.) • Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons (MENU, Fn, AutoShare, Touch AF) + Level gauge • Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons + Current shooting options information (Photo size, Drive mode, Flash, Metering, AF mode, etc.) • Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons + Current shooting options information + Histogram + Date and time Playback • Basic information • Display all information about the current file. • Display all information about the current file including RGB histogram.My Camera 44 Lenses You can purchase optional lenses made exclusively for your NX series camera. Learn about the functions of each lens and select one that suits your needs and preferences. Lens layout SAMSUNG 18-55 mm F3.5-5.6 OIS III lens (example) 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 No. Description 1 Lens mount index 2 Zoom ring 3 Focus ring (p. 88) 4 Lens hood mount index 5 Lens 6 i-Function button (p. 60) 7 AF/MF switch (p. 80) 8 Lens contacts When not using the lens, attach the lens cap and lens mount cover to protect the lens from dust and scratches.My Camera > Lenses 45 SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II lens (example) 7 1 2 3 5 6 4 No. Description 1 Lens mount index 2 Zoom lock switch 3 Lens 4 Focus ring (p. 88) 5 i-Function button (p. 60) 6 Zoom ring 7 Lens contacts Locking or unlocking the lens To lock the lens, pull and hold the zoom lock switch away from the camera body and rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration.My Camera > Lenses 46 To unlock the lens, rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustation until you hear the click. You cannot capture a photo when the lens is locked. SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 lens (example) 5 2 1 4 3 No. Description 1 i-Function button (p. 60) 2 Lens mount index 3 Focus ring (p. 88) 4 Lens 5 Lens contactsMy Camera > Lenses 47 Lens markings Find out what the numbers on the lens signify. SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS lens (example) 1 2 345 No. Description 1 Aperture value A range of supported aperture values. For example, 1:3.5–6.3 means the maximum aperture value range from 3.5 to 6.3. 2 Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters). This figure is expressed in a range: minimum focal length to maximum focal length of the lens. Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. 3 ED ED stands for Extra-low Dispersion. Extra-low dispersion glass is effective in minimizing chromatic aberration (a distortion that occurs when a lens fails to focus all colors to the same convergence point). 4 OIS (p. 89) Optical Image Stabilization. Lenses with this feature can detect camera shake and effectively cancel out the movement inside the camera. 5 Ø The lens diameter. When you attach a filter to the lens, make sure that the diameters of the lens and the filter are the same.My Camera 48 Accessories You can use accessories including external flash and GPS module that can help you capture better and more convenient photos. For more information about optional accessories, refer to the manual for each accessory. • The illustrations may differ from the actual items. • You can purchase Samsung-approved accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using another manufacturer's accessories. External flash layout SEF8A (example) 1 2 3 No. Description 1 Bulb 2 Hot-shoe fastening dial 3 Hot-shoe connectionMy Camera > Accessories 49 Connecting the external flash 1 Remove the hot-shoe cover from the camera. 2 Mount the flash by sliding it into the hot-shoe. 3 Lock the flash into place by turning the hot-shoe fastening dial clockwise. 4 Lift up the flash for use.My Camera > Accessories 50 • You can capture a photo with a flash that is not fully charged, but it is recommended to use a fully charged flash. • Refer to the optional accessories page for available external flashes. (p. 195) • The available options may differ depending on the shooting mode. • There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. • SEF8A may not be compatible with other NX series cameras. • For more details about optional flashes, refer to the user manual for the flash. Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage your camera. SEF220A (example) (optional) 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 No. Description 1 Display icons 2 READY lamp/Test button 3 MODE button 4 Flash release button 5 POWER button 6 Battery cover 7 Bulb 8 TELE/WIDE mode switch 9 Hot-shoe connectionMy Camera > Accessories 51 GPS module layout (optional) 1 2 3 4 5 No. Description 1 Status lamp 2 POWER button 3 Hot-shoe fastening dial 4 Hot-shoe connection 5 Battery cover Attaching the GPS module 1 Remove the hot-shoe cover from the camera. 2 Mount the GPS module by sliding it into the hot-shoe.My Camera > Accessories 52 3 Lock the GPS module into place by turning the hot-shoe fastening dial towards LOCK. 4 Press the power button of the GPS module.My Camera 53 Shooting modes Two simple shooting modes—Smart Auto and Smart mode—help you capture photos with numerous automatic settings. Additional modes allow for greater customization of settings. Icon Description t Smart Auto mode (p. 53) P Program mode (p. 55) A Aperture Priority mode (p. 57) S Shutter Priority mode (p. 58) M Manual mode (p. 59) i Lens Priority mode (p. 60) s Smart mode (p. 64) B Wi-Fi features (p. 122) t Smart Auto mode In Smart Auto mode, the camera recognizes surrounding conditions and automatically adjusts factors that contribute to exposure, including shutter speed, aperture value, metering, White Balance, and exposure compensation. As the camera controls most of the functions, some shooting functions are limited. This mode is useful for capturing quick snapshots with the least amount of adjustment.My Camera > Shooting modes 54 1 Rotate the mode dial to t. 2 Align your subject in the frame. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus. • The camera selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon appears at the screen. Recognizable scenes Icon Description Landscapes Scenes with bright white backgrounds Landscapes at night Icon Description Portraits at night Landscapes with backlighting Portraits with backlighting Portraits Close-up photos of objects Close-up photos of text Sunsets Indoors, dark Partially lit Close-up with spot lighting Portraits with spot lighting Blue skies Forested areas typically consist of green-colored subjects Close-up photos of colorful subjects Camera is stabilized on a tripod and the subject is not moving for a certain period of time. (when shooting in the dark) Actively moving subjects Fireworks (when using a tripod) 4 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.My Camera > Shooting modes 55 • The camera may detect different scenes, even the same subjects, depending on external factors such as camera shake, lighting, and distance to the subject. • If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the default settings for the Smart Auto mode. • Even if it detects a face, the camera may not select a portrait mode depending on the subject's position or lighting. • Even if you use a tripod, the camera may not detect the tripod mode ( ) if the subject is moving. • The camera consumes more battery power, because it changes settings often to select appropriate scenes. P Program mode The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture value so that an optimal exposure value can be achieved. This mode is useful when you want to capture shots of constant exposure while being able to adjust other settings. 1 Rotate the mode dial to P. 2 Set the desired options. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo.My Camera > Shooting modes 56 Program Shift Program Shift function lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value while the camera maintains the same exposure. When you scroll the jog dial to the left, the shutter speed decreases and the aperture value increases. When you scroll the jog dial to the right, the shutter speed increases and the aperture value decreases. Minimum shutter speed Set the shutter speed not to be slower than the selected speed. However, if an optimal exposure value cannot be achieved because the ISO sensitivity reached the maximum ISO value that is set by Auto ISO Range, shutter speed may be slower than the selected minimum shutter speed. To set the minimum shutter speed, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Minimum Shutter Speed→ an option. • This feature is available only when the ISO sensitivity is set to Auto. • This feature is available only in Program or Aperture priority mode.My Camera > Shooting modes 57 A Aperture Priority mode In Aperture Priority mode, the camera automatically calculates shutter speed according to the aperture value you choose. You can adjust the depth of field (DOF) by changing the aperture value. This mode is useful for taking portraits, flowers, or landscape shots. Large Depth of Field Small Depth of Field 1 Rotate the mode dial to A. 2 Scroll the jog dial to adjust the aperture value. • You can also adjust the aperture value by pressing [f], moving to the aperture value, and then scrolling the jog dial or dragging the screen. 3 Set the desired options. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • In low-light settings, you may need to increase the ISO sensitivity to prevent blurred photos. • To set the minimum shutter speed, in Shooting mode, press [m] →1 →Minimum Shutter Speed→ an option.My Camera > Shooting modes 58 S Shutter Priority mode In Shutter Priority mode, the camera automatically adjusts the aperture value according to the shutter speed you choose. This mode is useful for capturing photos of fast-moving subjects or for creating tracer effects in a photo. For example, set the shutter speed to over 1/500 s to freeze the subject. To make the subject appear blurred set the shutter speed to below 1/30 s. Slow shutter speed Fast shutter speed 1 Rotate the mode dial to S. 2 Scroll the jog dial to adjust the shutter speed. • You can also adjust the shutter speed by pressing [f], moving to the shutter speed, and then scrolling the jog dial or dragging the screen. 3 Set the desired options. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. In order to compensate for the reduced amount of light allowed by fast shutter speeds, open the aperture and let in more light. If your photos are still too dark, increase the ISO value.My Camera > Shooting modes 59 M Manual mode Manual mode lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value manually. In this mode, you can fully control the exposure of your photos. This mode is useful in controlled shooting environments, such as a studio, or when it is necessary to fine-tune camera settings. The Manual mode is also recommended for shooting night scenes or fireworks. 1 Rotate the mode dial to M. 2 Scroll the jog dial to adjust the shutter speed. 3 Press and hold [W], and then rotate the mode dial to adjust the aperture value. • You can also adjust the shutter speed or the aperture value by pressing [f], moving to the shutter speed or the aperture value, and then scrolling the jog dial or dragging the screen. 4 Set the desired options. 5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. Framing mode When you adjust the aperture value or shutter speed, the exposure changes according to the settings, so the display may darken. With this function on, the brightness of the display is constant regardless of the settings, so you can better frame your shot. To use Framing Mode, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Framing Mode → an option.My Camera > Shooting modes 60 Using the Bulb function Use the Bulb function to shoot night scenes or the night sky. While you are pressing [Shutter], the shutter is left open so you can create moving light effects. To use a bulb, Completely scroll the jog dial to the left to Bulb→ Press and hold [Shutter] for the desired time. • If you set a high ISO value or open the shutter for a long time, image noise may increase. • Drive options, flash, and One touch shot cannot be used with the Bulb function. • The Bulb function is available only in Manual mode. • Use a tripod and shutter release to prevent your camera from shaking. • The longer you open the shutter, the longer it takes to save a photo. Do not turn the camera off while the camera saves a photo. • If you use this function for a long time, use a fully charged battery. i Lens Priority mode You can adjust the depth of field to blur or sharpen the background. Using E 1 Rotate the mode dial to i. 2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select E. • You can also press [i-Function], and then press [C/F] or drag the screen to select E.My Camera > Shooting modes 61 3 Adjust the focus ring to select a value. • You can also scroll the jog dial to adjust the value. • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the value. Defocus E Sharpen 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • As you sharpen photos, the aperture value Increases and the shutter speed reduces. In dark places, photos may be blurry. • This function is not available when you set 3D Auto Mode in 3D mode. Using i-Function in P/A/S/M modes When you use the i-Function button on an i-Function lens, you can manually select and adjust shutter speed, aperture value, exposure value, ISO sensitivity, and White Balance on the lens. 1 Rotate the mode dial to P, A, S, or M. 2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select a setting. • You can also press [i-Function], and then press [C/F] or drag the screen to select a setting.My Camera > Shooting modes 62 3 Adjust the focus ring to select an option. • You can also scroll the jog dial or drag the screen to select an option. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. Available options Shooting mode PASM 3D Aperture -O-OShutter Speed - - OO - EV OOO - O ISO OOOO - White Balance OOOOO Z OOOO - • To select items to appear when you press [i-Function] on the lens in Shooting mode, press [m] →5→iFn Customizing→ an item. • This function is not available when you set 3D Auto Mode in 3D mode.My Camera > Shooting modes 63 Using ZThe Z allows you to zoom in on a subject with less degradation of photo quality than the Digital zoom. However, the photo resolution may change compared to when you zoom in by rotating the zoom ring. 1 Rotate the mode dial to P, A, S, M, or i. 2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select Z. • You can also press [i-Function], and then press [C/F] or drag the screen to select Z. 3 Adjust the focus ring to select a zoom ratio. • You can also scroll the jog dial or drag the screen to select an option. • Photo resolution varies according to the zoom ratio if you use the Z. 3:2 16:9 1:1 x1.2 4560X3040 (13.9M) 4560X2568 (11.7M) 3040X3040 (9.2M) x1.4 3888X2592 (10.1M) 3888X2184 (8.5M) 2592X2592 (6.7M) x1.7 3264X2176 (7.1M) 3264X1840 (6.0M) 2176X2176 (4.7M) x2 2736X1824 (5.0M) 2736X1536 (4.2M) 1824X1824 (3.3M) These figures are based on the maximum resolution at each image ratio. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • Z is not available when you capture burst shots. • Z is not available when you capture photos in the RAW file format. • Z is deactivated when you record videos by pressing the video recording button. • This function is not available when you set 3D Auto Mode in 3D mode.My Camera > Shooting modes 64 s Smart mode In Smart mode, you can capture photos with options that are preset for a specific scene. 1 Rotate the mode dial to s. 2 Select a scene. • To select a shooting mode when the mode dial is set to s, press [f] or touch , and then select a desired mode. Smart : Beauty Face Set Option Description Beauty Face Capture a portrait with options to hide facial imperfections. Best Face Capture multiple photos and replace faces to create the best possible image. Landscape Capture still-life scenes and landscapes. Option Description Macro Capture small or close-up subjects. Action Freeze Capture subjects moving at high speed. Rich Tones Capture a photo with vibrant colors. Panorama Capture a wide panoramic scene in a single photo. Waterfall Capture scenes with waterfalls. Silhouette Capture subjects as dark shapes against a light background. Sunset Capture scenes at sunset, with natural-looking reds and yellows. Night Capture multiple photos in low light conditions without a flash. The camera combines them to create a single image that is brighter and has less blurring. Fireworks Capture scenes with fireworks. Light Trace Capture scenes with the light trailing in low-light conditions. Creative Shot Capture photos with effects applied automatically. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture.My Camera > Shooting modes 65 Using the Best Face mode In Best Face mode, you can capture multiple photos and replace faces to create the best possible image. Use this mode to select the best image for each individual when capturing group photos. 1 Rotate the mode dial to s, and then select Best Face. 2 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 3 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • The camera captures 5 photos consecutively. • The first photo is set as the background image. • The camera automatically detects faces after shooting. 4 Touch a face to replace. 5 Touch the best image from the 5 faces that were captured. • Repeat steps 4 and 5 to replace the rest faces of the photo. • The icon will appear on the image that the camera recommends. 6 Touch to save the photo. • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • The resolution is set to 5.9M or smaller.My Camera > Shooting modes 66 Capturing panoramic photos Capture a 2D or 3D panoramic photo. Captured 3D panoramic photos can be viewed only on a 3D TV or 3D monitor. 1 Rotate the mode dial to s, and then select Panorama. 2 Press [m] →1→Panorama→Live Panorama or 3D. 3 Press [m] to return to Shooting mode. 4 Press and hold [Shutter] to start shooting. 5 With [Shutter] pressed, slowly move the camera in the direction you selected. • In 3D Panorama mode, you can capture a scene only in horizontal directions. • An arrow toward the direction of motion is displayed, and the entire shooting image is displayed in the preview box. • When the scenes are aligned, the camera captures the next photo automatically. 6 When you are finished, release [Shutter]. • The camera will automatically save the shots into one photo. • If you release [Shutter] while shooting, the panoramic shooting stops and photos that have been captured are saved.My Camera > Shooting modes 67 • The resolution varies depending on the panoramic photo you captured. • In Panorama mode, some shooting options are not available. • The camera may stop shooting due to the shooting composition or the subject's movement. • In Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the entire last scene if you stop moving the camera to improve the photo quality. To capture the entire scene, move your camera slightly beyond the point where you want the scene to end. • In 3D Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the very beginning or end of a scene due to the nature of the 3D effect. To capture the entire scene, move slightly beyond the beginning and end points you want to capture. • Photos captured with the 3D function are saved in JPEG (2D) and MPO (3D) formats. On your camera's display, you can view only JPEG files. • To view 3D files, connect your camera to a 3D TV or 3D monitor with an optional HDMI cable. While viewing, wear proper 3D glasses. • Capturing photos in 3D Panorama mode may result in a less pronounced 3D effect than those captured with a 3D lens. To increase the 3D effect, attach the optional 3D lens and use 3D mode. (p. 69) • For best results when capturing panoramic photos, avoid the following: - moving the camera too quickly or too slowly - moving the camera too little to capture the next image - moving the camera at irregular speeds - shaking the camera - shooting in dark places - capturing moving subjects nearby - shooting conditions where the brightness or color of light is changing • Photos taken are automatically saved, and shooting is stopped under the following conditions: - if you change the shooting direction while shooting - if you move the camera too rapidly - if you don't move the cameraMy Camera > Shooting modes 68 Recording a video In Shooting mode, you can record Full HD videos (1920X1080) by pressing (Video recording). The camera lets you record a video up to 29 minutes and 59 seconds in length at 60, 30, 24, or 15 fps, and saves the files in MP4 (H.264) format. 60 fps is available only with 1920X1080 and 1280X720 and 24 fps is available only with 1920X810. 15 fps is available only with some Smart Filter options. The sound is recorded via the camera's microphone. You can set the exposure by adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed for the mode you selected. When you use a lens that does not have an AF/MF switch while recording a video, press [F] to deactivate or activate the AF function. When you use the lens that has an AF/MF switch, the AF function works according to the switch’s setting. Select Fader to fade in or out a scene. You can also select Voice, Wind Cut, or other options to set recording options. (p. 106) 1 Rotate the mode dial to t, P, A, S, M, i, or s. • This feature may not work in some modes. 2 Set the desired options. 3 Press (Video recording) to start recording. 4 Press (Video recording) again to stop. • H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) is the latest video coding format established in 2003 collaboratively by ISO-IEC and ITU-T. Since this format uses a high compression rate, more data can be saved in less memory space. • If you have the image stabilizer option on when shooting a movie, the camera may record the image stabilizer sound. • The zoom sound or other lens sounds may be recorded if you adjust the lens while recording a video. • When using an optional video lens, the autofocus noise is not recorded. • If you remove the camera lens while recording a movie, the recording will be interrupted. Do not change the lens while recording. • If you attach an external microphone while recording a movie, sound will not be recorded through the external microphone. (The previous settings are maintained.) If you remove the external microphone while recording a movie, sound will not be recorded. Turn off the camera before attaching or removing the external microphone. My Camera > Shooting modes 69 • If you change the shooting angle of the camera suddenly while shooting a movie, the camera may not be able to record images accurately. Use a tripod to minimize camera shake. • The camera supports only the Multi AF function when recording a video. You cannot use any other focus area setting functions, such as Face Detection AF. • When the size of a movie file exceeds 4 GB, the camera automatically stops recording even if the maximum recording time (29 minutes and 59 seconds) has not been reached. • If you use a slow writing memory card, the recording of your movie can be interrupted because the card cannot process data at the rate the video is being shot. If this occurs, replace the card with a faster memory card or reduce the video size (for example, from 1280X720 to 640X480). • When formatting a memory card, always format using the camera. If you format on another camera or a PC, you can lose files on the card or cause a change in the capacity of the card. • When you press the video recording button, Z turns off. • While recording a video in the same ISO sensitivity, the screen may be darker than taking a photo. Adjust the ISO sensitivity. • When you record a video in P, A, or S mode, ISO is automatically set to Auto. 3D mode You can capture 3D photos or videos with an optional 3D lens. SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 [T6] 2D/3D lens (example) Set the 2D/3D switch on the lens to 3D, and then capture a photo or video 1.5-5 m away from the subject.My Camera > Shooting modes 70 • 3D mode is always on, regardless of the mode dial of the camera, except B. • To use auto 3D options that enable the camera to set shooting options automatically depending on shooting conditions in 3D mode, press [m] →1→3D Auto Mode→On. • To change the 3D recording option, press [m] →6→ 3D REC Mode→ a desired option. * Default Icon Description Side by Side*: Displays two images next to each other. Frame Packing: Displays the images for the left and right eye alternately in frames. • Available shooting options differ compared to other shooting modes. • You can select either 4.1M (2688X1512) or 2.1M (1920X1080) photo size. • The video resolution is set to 1920X1080. • Videos recorded in 3D may be dark or playback may be jittery. • Shooting in low temperatures may result in color distortion in images and may consume more battery power. • You may not be able to shoot properly in conditions below 8.5 LV/900 lux. For best results, capture photos in places with sufficient light. • When you photograph objects that contain polarizing material, such as a display, sunglasses, or a polarizing filter, or use the polarizing material with your lens, the images may appear dark or the 3D effect may not be applied properly. • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • If you rotate or tilt the camera vertically while shooting, the 3D effect may not be applied properly. Capture images with the camera in the normal position. • If you shoot in fluorescent lighting or capture images displayed by projectors or TVs, the images may appear black due to the flicker effect. • In 3D mode, the Enlarge x8 option of MF Assist may not be available. • The camera's display shows 3D videos only in 2D. • Photos captured with the 3D function are saved in JPEG (2D) and MPO (3D) formats. On your camera's display, you can view only JPEG files. • To view 3D files, connect your camera to a 3D TV or 3D monitor with an optional HDMI cable. While viewing, wear proper 3D glasses. • You cannot use the flash in 3D mode.My Camera > Shooting modes 71 Available functions by shooting mode For details about shooting functions, see Chapter 2. Press a shortcut for each function. Function Available in Shortcut Photo Size (p. 73) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t/3D* - Quality (p. 74) P/A/S/M/i/s* - ISO (p. 75) P/A/S/M f/I White Balance (p. 76) P/A/S/M f Picture Wizard (p. 79) P/A/S/M f Smart Filter (p. 101) P/A/S/M f AF Mode (p. 80) P/A/S/M/i*/s*/3D* f AF Area (p. 83) P/A/S/M/i*/s* f/F Touch AF (p. 86) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t/3D* - MF Assist (p. 88) P/A/S/M/i/s/t/3D* - Focus Peaking (p. 88) P/A/S/M/i/s/t - Link AE to AF Point (p. 99) P/A/S/M - Function Available in Shortcut Framing Mode (p. 59) P/A/S/M - OIS (Anti-Shake) (p. 89) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t* - Drive (Continuous/ Burst/Timer/ Bracketing) (p. 90) P/A/S/M/i*/s*/t*/3D* f/C Metering (p. 97) P/A/S/M f Dynamic Range (p. 100) P/A/S/M - Flash (p. 94) P*/A*/S*/M*/i*/s*/t* f Exposure compensation (p. 102) P/A/S f/W Exposure lock (p. 103) P/A/S - * Some functions are limited in these modes.Chapter 2 Shooting Functions Learn about the functions you can set in Shooting mode. You can enjoy more customized photos and videos by using the shooting functions.Shooting Functions 73 Shooting Functions Photo size As you increase the resolution, your photo or video will include more pixels, so it can be printed on larger paper or displayed on a larger screen. When you use a high resolution, the file size will also increase. Select a low resolution for photos that will be displayed in a digital picture frame or uploaded to the web. To set the size, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Photo Size→ an option. Icon Size Recommended for 5472x3648 (3:2) Printing on A1 paper. 3888x2592 (3:2) Printing on A2 paper. 2976x1984 (3:2) Printing on A3 paper. 1728x1152 (3:2) Printing on A5 paper. 5472x3080 (16:9) Printing on A1 paper or viewing on an HDTV. 3712x2088 (16:9) Printing on A3 paper or viewing on an HDTV. 2944x1656 (16:9) Printing on A4 paper or viewing on an HDTV. 1920x1080 (16:9) Printing on A5 paper or viewing on an HDTV. 3648x3648 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A1 paper. 2640x2640 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A3 paper. 2000x2000 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A4 paper. 1024x1024 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A5 paper. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Size and Resolution74 Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution Quality The camera saves photos in either the JPEG or RAW format. Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to the JPEG format and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to the JPEG format and are stored in the memory without any changes. RAW files have the file extension “SRW”. To adjust and calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of the RAW files, or to convert them into JPEG or TIFF format, use the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom program found on the supplied DVD-ROM. Ensure you have enough space on the memory card to save photos in the RAW format. To set the quality, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Quality→ an option. Icon Format Description JPEG Super Fine: • Compressed for the best quality. • Recommended for printing in large size. JPEG Fine: • Compressed for better quality. • Recommended for printing in normal size. Icon Format Description JPEG Normal: • Compressed for normal quality. • Recommended for printing in small size or uploading to the web. RAW RAW: • Save a photo without data loss. • Recommended for editing after shooting. RAW+JPEG RAW + S.Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (S.Fine quality) and RAW format. RAW+JPEG RAW + Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Fine quality) and RAW format. RAW+JPEG RAW + Normal: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Normal quality) and RAW format. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Shooting Functions 75 Shooting Functions The ISO sensitivity value represents the sensitivity of camera to light. The larger the ISO value, the more sensitive the camera is to light. Consequently, by selecting a higher ISO sensitivity value, you can capture photos in dim or dark places at faster shutter speeds. However, this may increase electronic noise and result in a grainy photo. To set ISO sensitivity, In Shooting mode, press [I] → an option. Examples ISO 100 ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 3200 • You can also set the option by pressing [m] →1→ISO→ an option in Shooting mode. • Increase the ISO value in places where flash use is prohibited. You can capture a clear photo by setting a high ISO value without having to secure more light. • Use the Noise Reduction function in order to reduce the visual noise that can appear on photos of a high ISO value. (p. 146) • Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. ISO sensitivityShooting Functions 76 Shooting Functions White Balance represents the light source that influences on the color of a photo. The color of a photo depends on the type and quality of the light source. If you want the color of your photo to be realistic, select an appropriate lighting condition to calibrate the White Balance, such as Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Tungsten, or adjust color temperature manually. You can also adjust color for the preset light sources so that the colors of the photo match the actual scene under mixed lighting conditions. To set the White Balance, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→White Balance→ an option. Icon Description Auto WB: Use automatic settings depending on the lighting conditions. Daylight: Select when taking outdoor photos on a sunny day. This option results in photos closest to the natural colors of the scene. Cloudy: Select when taking outdoor photos on a cloudy day or in shadows. Photos captured on cloudy days tend to be more bluish than on sunny days. This option offsets that effect. Icon Description Fluorescent White: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp. Especially for white fluorescent light with a color temperature of about 4,200K. Fluorescent NW: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp. Especially for white fluorescent light of very white hues with a temperature of about 5,000K. Fluorescent Daylight: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp. Especially for white fluorescent light of slightly bluish hue with a temperature of about 6,500K. Tungsten: Select when taking indoor photos under incandescent bulbs or halogen lamps. Incandescent tungsten bulbs tend to have a reddish hue. This option offsets that effect. Flash WB: Select when using a flash. Custom Set: Use your pre-defined settings. You can manually set the White Balance by pressing [D], and then shooting a white sheet of paper. Fill the spot metering circle with the paper and set the White Balance. White Balance77 Shooting Functions > White Balance Icon Description Color Temperature: Manually adjust the color temperature of the light source. Color temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin that indicates the specific type of light source. As the color temperature increases, the color distribution becomes cooler. Alternatively, as the color temperature decreases, the color distribution becomes warmer. Press [D], and then adjust the color temperature. Clear sky Fluorescent H Fluorescent L Cloudy Halogen lamp Daylight Tungsten Candle light Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Customizing preset White Balance options You can also customize preset White Balance options. To customize preset options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→White Balance → an option → [D] → scroll the jog dial, or press [D/I/C/F]. White Balance : Daylight Back Set Reset You can also touch an area on the screen.78 Shooting Functions > White Balance Examples Auto WB Daylight Fluorescent Daylight TungstenShooting Functions 79 Shooting Functions Picture Wizard lets you apply different photo styles to your photo to create various looks and emotional moods. You can also create and save your own photo styles by adjusting color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast for each style. There is no rule for which style is suitable in which conditions. Experiment with different styles and find your own settings. To set a photo style, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Picture Wizard → an option. Examples Standard Vivid Portrait Landscape Forest Retro Cool Calm Classic • You can also adjust the value of the preset style settings. Select a Picture Wizard option, press [D], and then adjust color, saturation, sharpness, or contrast. • To customize your own picture wizard, select , , or , and then adjust the color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast. • Picture Wizard options cannot be set with Smart Filter options at the same time. Picture Wizard (photo styles)Shooting Functions 80 Shooting Functions AF mode Learn how to adjust the camera’s focus according to the subjects. You can select a focusing mode appropriate to the subject among Single Auto Focus, Continuous Auto Focus, and Manual Focus. The AF function is activated when you press [Shutter] halfway. In the MF mode, you have to rotate the focus ring on the lens to focus manually. In most cases, you can have a focus by selecting Single AF. Fast moving subjects or subjects of a color similar to the background are difficult to focus. Select an appropriate focusing mode for such instances. If your lens has an AF/MF switch, you must set the switch according to the selected mode. Set the switch to AF when you select Single AF or Continuous AF. Set the switch to MF when you select Manual Focus. When your lens has no AF/MF switch, press [F] to select a desired AF mode. To set the auto focus mode, In Shooting mode, press [F] → an option. • You can also set the option by pressing [m] →1→AF Mode→ an option in Shooting mode. • The available options may differ depending on the lens in use.81 Shooting Functions > AF mode Single AF Single AF is appropriate for shooting a still subject. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the focus fixes in the focus area. The area turns green when the focus is achieved. Continuous AF While you are pressing [Shutter] halfway, the camera continues to automatic focusing. Once the focus area is fixed on the subject, the subject is always in focus even when moving. This mode is recommended for shooting a person on a bicycle, a running dog, or a car racing scene.82 Shooting Functions > AF mode Manual focus You can manually focus on a subject by rotating the focus ring on the lens. The MF Assist function lets you easily achieve a focus. While you are rotating the focus ring, the focus area is magnified. When you use the Focus Peaking function, the color you selected appears on the focused subject. This mode is recommended for shooting an object similar in color to the background, a night scene, or fireworks. If you use this function, you cannot set Touch AF, AF Area, and Link AE to AF Point options.Shooting Functions 83 Shooting Functions The AF area function changes the positions of the focus area. Generally, cameras focus on the nearest subject. When there are a lot of subjects, however, unwanted subjects can be in focus. In order to prevent unwanted subjects from being in focus, change the focus area so that a desired subject is in focus. You can get a clearer and sharper photo by selecting an appropriate focus area. To set the auto focus area, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→AF Area→ an option. • Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. • When the AF/MF switch is set to MF, you cannot change the AF area from the shooting menu. • When you use the Face Detection AF option, the camera focuses on the area with the white frame automatically. • Depending on the Picture Wizard options, Face Detection may not be effective. • When you set manual focus, Face Detection may not be available. • Face Detection may not be effective when: - the subject is far from the camera - it is too bright or too dark - the subject is not facing the camera - the subject is wearing sunglasses or a mask - the subject’s facial expression changes drastically - the subject is backlit or the lighting conditions are unstable Selection AF You can set the focus on an area you want. Apply an out-of-focus effect to make the subject more distinguishable. The focus on the photo below was repositioned and resized so that it fits the subject’s face. To resize or move the focus area, in Shooting mode, press [o]. Use the navigation button to move the focus area. Scroll the jog dial to resize the focus area. AF area84 Shooting Functions > AF area Multi AF The camera displays a green rectangle in places where focus is set correctly. The photo is divided into two or more areas, and the camera obtains focus points of each area. It is recommended for scenery photos. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera displays the focus areas as shown in the photo below. Face detection AF The camera focuses on human faces preferentially. Faces of up to 10 people can be detected. This setting is recommended for shooting a group of people. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera focuses on faces as shown in the photo below. In cases of shooting a group of people, the camera displays the focus on the nearest person’s face in white and the rest of the people’s faces in gray.85 Shooting Functions > AF area Self-Portrait AF It can be difficult to check whether your face is in focus when you are taking a self-portrait. When this function is on, the beep from the camera gets faster when your face is located at the center of the composition.Shooting Functions 86 Shooting Functions Tracking AF Tracking AF allows you to track and automatically focus on your subject, even when the subject is moving or when you change the shooting composition. White frame: Your camera is tracking the subject. Green frame: Your subject is in focus when you half-press [Shutter]. Red frame: Your camera failed to focus. Select or focus on a focal area that you touch on the screen. Additionally, focus on the subject and capture a photo by touching on the screen. To set Touch AF, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Touch AF→ an option. Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. Touch AF Touch AF allows you to select and focus on the focus area that you touch on the screen. AF Point The focal area will correspond to the area you touch on the screen and the focus will not be achieved. Touch AF87 Shooting Functions > Touch AF One touch shot You can capture a photo with the touch of your finger. As you touch on a subject, the camera focuses on the subject automatically and captures a photo. • If you do not select a focus area, the Auto Focus function does not work. • Tracking a subject may fail when: - the subject is too small - the subject moves excessively - the subject is backlit or you are shooting in a dark place - colors or patterns on the subject and the background are the same - the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds - the camera shakes excessively • When tracking fails, the feature will be reset. • If the camera fails to track the subject, the focus area will be reset. • If the camera fails to focus, the focus frame will change to red and the focus will be reset.Shooting Functions 88 Shooting Functions In the manual focus mode, you have to rotate the focus ring on the lens to focus. When you use the MF Assist function or the Focus Peaking function, you can achieve a clearer focus. This function is only available on a lens that supports manual focus. MF Assist In the manual focus mode, you can enlarge the scene and easily adjust the focus while rotating the focus ring. To set the manual focus assist, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→MF Assist→ an option. * Default Option Description Off Do not use the MF Assist function. Enlarge x5* The focus area is magnified by 5 times when you rotate the focus ring. * Default Option Description Enlarge x8 The focus area is magnified by 8 times when you rotate the focus ring. Focus Peaking In the manul focus mode, the color you selected appears on the focused subject to help you focus while rotating the focus ring. To set Focus Peaking options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Focus Peaking→ an option. * Default Option Description Level Set a sensitivity for detecting the focused subject. (Off, High, Normal*, Low) Color Set a color to appear on the focused subject. (White*, Red, Green) Focus assistShooting Functions 89 Shooting Functions Use the Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) function to minimize camera shake. OIS may not be available with some lenses. Camera shake tends to occur in dark places or when shooting indoors. In such cases, the camera uses slower shutter speeds in order to increase the amount of light taken in, which can result in a blurry photo. You can prevent this situation by using the OIS function. If your lens has an OIS switch, you have set the switch to ON to use the OIS function. To set OIS options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→OIS (Anti-Shake) → an option. * Default Icon Description Off: The OIS function is off. (This option may not be available with some lenses.) Mode 1*: The OIS function is applied only when you press [Shutter] in full or half. Mode 2: The OIS function is on. Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) Without OIS correction With OIS correction • OIS may not function properly when: - you move your camera to follow a moving subject - there is too much camera shake - the shutter speed is slow (for example, when you select Night in s mode) - the battery is low - you capture a close-up shot • If you use the OIS function with a tripod, your images may be blurred by the vibration of the OIS sensor. Deactivate the OIS function when you use a tripod. • If the camera is hit or dropped, the display will be blurry. If this occurs, turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. • Use the OIS function only when needed because the function consumes more battery power. • To set an OIS option on the menu, set the OIS switch on your lens to ON. • This option may not be available with some lenses. • Off may not be available with some lenses.Shooting Functions 90 Shooting Functions You can set the shooting method such as Continuous, Burst, Timer and so on. Select Single to capture one photo at a time. Select Continuous or Burst to shoot fast moving subjects. Select AE Bracket, WB Bracket, or P Wiz Bracket to adjust exposure, White Balance, or apply Picture Wizard effects. You can also select Timer to capture a photo of yourself. To set the shooting method, In Shooting mode, press [C] → an option. • You can also set the option by pressing [m] →1→Drive→ an option in Shooting mode. • Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Single Capture one photo whenever you press [Shutter]. Recommended for general conditions. Continuous Continuously capture photos while you are pressing [Shutter]. You can capture up to 5 photos (Continuous Normal) or 8.6 photos (Continuous High) per second. If you select Continuous High, the noise reduction function is not available. Drive (shooting method)91 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Burst Consecutively capture up to 10 shots per second (3 seconds), 15 shots per second (2 seconds), or 30 shots per second (1 second) when you press [Shutter] once. It is recommended for shooting the rapid motion of fast moving subjects such as racing cars. • To set the number of shots, in Shooting mode, press [C] → Burst, and then press [D]. • The photo size is set to 5M. • It may take longer to save a photo. • You cannot use the flash with this option. • Shutter speed must be faster than 1/30 second. • Photos captured with this option may be slightly enlarged when saving. • You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200. • This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. Timer Capture a photo with a delay of 2 to 30 seconds. The delay is adjustable in increments of 1 second. To set the delay, in Shooting mode, press [C] →Timer, and then press [D].92 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the original, one a step darker, and one a step lighter. Use a tripod to prevent blurry photos as the camera captures three photos continuously. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Set menu. Exposure -2 Original Exposure +2 White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the original and two more with different White Balance settings. The original photo is captured when you press [Shutter]. The other two are automatically adjusted according to the White Balance you have set. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Set menu. WB-2 Original WB+2 This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW.93 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures three consecutive photos, each with a different Picture Wizard setting. The camera captures a photo and applies the three Picture Wizard options you have set to the image captured. You can select three different settings in Bracket Set menu. Vivid Standard Retro This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. Bracketing setting You can set up the options for AE Bracket, WB Bracket, and P Wiz Bracket. (p. 147) To set a bracketing option, In Shooting mode, press [m] →5→Bracket Set→ an option.Shooting Functions 94 Shooting Functions In order to capture a realistic photo of a subject, the amount of light should be constant. When the light source varies, you can use a flash and supply a constant amount of light. Select appropriate settings according to a light source and a subject. To set flash options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Flash→ an option. Icon Description Off: Do not use the flash. Smart Flash: The camera automatically adjusts the brightness of the flash according to the amount of light in the surrounding environment. Auto: The flash automatically fires in dark places. Auto Red-eye: The flash automatically fires and reduces red-eyes. Fill in: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo. (Brightness is automatically adjusted.) Fill-in Red: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo and reduces red-eyes. Icon Description 1st Curtain: The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens. The camera captures a photo of a subject earlier in an action sequence clearly. Ball moving direction 2nd Curtain: The flash fires just before the shutter closes. The camera captures a photo of a subject later in an action sequence clearly. Ball moving direction • The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. • There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. • If you select Off, the flash does not fire even when an external flash is attached. Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage your camera. Flash95 Shooting Functions > Flash Reducing the red-eye effect If the flash fires when you capture a photo of a person in the dark, a red glow may appear in the eyes. To reduce the red-eye effect, select Auto Red-eye or Fill-in Red. Without red-eye reduction With red-eye reduction If the subject is too far from the camera or moves when the first flash fires, redeyes may not be reduced. Adjusting the flash intensity When the flash is on, adjust the flash intensity +/-2 levels. To set the flash intensity, In Shooting mode, press [f] →Flash→ an option → [D] → scroll the jog dial or press [C/F] to adjust the flash intensity. Back Set Flash : 0.096 Shooting Functions > Flash • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the intensity. • Adjusting the flash intensity may not be effective when: - the subject is too close to the camera - you set a high ISO sensitivity - the exposure value is too big or too small • In some shooting modes, you cannot use this function. • If you attach an intensity-adjustable external flash to the camera, the intensity settings of the flash will be applied. • If the subject is too close when you use the flash, some light may be blocked, resulting in a dark photo. Ensure that the subject is within the recommended range, which varies by lens. • When a lens hood is attached, the light from the flash can be blocked by the hood. Remove the hood to use the flash.Shooting Functions 97 Shooting Functions The metering mode refers to the way in which a camera measures the quantity of light. The camera measures the amount of light in a scene, and in many of its modes, uses the measurement to adjust various settings. For example, if a subject looks darker than its actual color, the camera captures an overexposed photo of it. If a subject looks lighter than its actual color, the camera captures an underexposed photo of it. The brightness and overall mood of the photo can also be affected by how the camera measures the amount of light. Select an appropriate setting for a shooting condition. To set a metering option, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Metering→ an option. Multi The Multi mode calculates the amount of light in multiple areas. When light is sufficient or insufficient, the camera adjusts the exposure by averaging the overall brightness of the scene. This mode is suitable for general photos. Metering98 Shooting Functions > Metering Spot The Spot mode calculates the amount of light in the center. When you capture a photo in conditions where there is a strong backlight behind a subject, the camera adjusts the exposure so as to shoot a subject correctly. For example, when you select the Multi mode in a strong backlight condition, the camera calculates that the overall amount of light is abundant, which results in a darker photo. The Spot mode can prevent this situation as it calculates the amount of light in a designated area. The subject is in bright color while the background is dark. The Spot mode is recommended for a situation like this where a huge difference in the exposure exists between a subject and a background. Center-weighted The Center-weighted mode calculates a broader area than the Spot mode does. It sums up the amount of light in the center portion of the shot (60–80 %) and that of the rest of the shot (20–40 %). It is recommended for situations where there is a slight difference in brightness between a subject and a background or an area of the subject is large compared to the overall composition of the photo.99 Shooting Functions > Metering Measuring the exposure value of the focus area When this function is turned on, the camera automatically sets an optimal exposure by calculating the brightness of the focus area. This function is only available when you select Spot metering or Multi metering, and Selection AF. To set this function, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Link AE to AF Point→ an option.Shooting Functions 100 Shooting Functions This function automatically corrects the loss of bright detail that can occur due to shading differences in the photo. To set Smart Range options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Dynamic Range→ an option. Without Dynamic Range effect With Dynamic Range effect Icon Description Off: Do not use Dynamic Range. Smart Range+: Correct the loss of bright detail. You cannot set ISO 100. HDR: Capture 2 photos with different exposures, and then combine them to create a single image automatically. • You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200. • Dynamic Range options cannot be set at the same time as Picture Wizard options. Dynamic RangeShooting Functions 101 Shooting Functions Smart Filter lets you apply special effects to your photos. You can select various filter options to create special effects that are difficult to be achieved with normal lenses. To set Smart Filter options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→Smart Filter→ an option. Option Description Off No effect Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Colored Pencil Apply a colored pencil painting effect. Watercolor Apply a watercolor painting effect. Wash drawing Apply a washed-out effect. Oil Sketch Apply an oil sketching effect. Ink Sketch Apply an ink sketching effect. Acryl Apply an acryl painting effect. Option Description Negative Apply a negative film effect. Red Desaturate all colors but red. Green Desaturate all colors but green. Blue Desaturate all colors but blue. Yellow Desaturate all colors but yellow. Smart filter options cannot be set with Picture Wizard options at the same time. Smart FilterShooting Functions 102 Shooting Functions The camera automatically sets the exposure by measuring the levels of light from the photo’s composition and the position of a subject. If the exposure set by the camera is higher or lower than you expected, you can adjust the exposure value manually. The exposure value is adjustable in ±3 increments. The camera displays the exposure warning in red for each step beyond ±3 range. To adjust the exposure value, while holding down [W], scroll the jog dial. You can also adjust the exposure value by pressing [f], and then selecting EV. You can check the exposure value by the position of the exposure level indicator. Exposure level indicator Increased exposure (brighter) Decreased exposure (darker) Exposure warning Standard exposure index -2 Original +2 Exposure compensationShooting Functions 103 Shooting Functions When you cannot achieve an appropriate exposure because of a strong color contrast, lock the exposure, and then capture a photo. To lock the exposure value, adjust the photo’s exposure, and then press the custom button. After locking the exposure, aim the lens where you desire, and then press [Shutter]. • Set a function of the custom button to AEL to lock the current exposure value. (p. 150) • This feature is not available in Manual mode. Exposure lockShooting Functions 104 Shooting Functions The functions available for video are explained below. Movie size Set the movie size. To set movie size options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→Movie Size→ an option. Icon Size Recommended for 1920X1080 (60 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. (Playable only on full HDTVs capable of playback at 60 fps.) 1920X1080 (30 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. 1920X1080 (15 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. (Available only with some Smart Filter options.) 1920X810 (24 fps) (Approx. 2.35:1) View on an HDTV. 1280X720 (60 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV. 1280X720 (30 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV. 640X480 (30 fps) (4:3) View on a TV. 320X240 (30 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless network (30 seconds maximum). Movie quality Set the Movie quality. To set movie quality options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→Movie Quality→ an option. Icon Extension Description MP4 (H.264) Normal: Record videos in normal quality. MP4 (H.264) HQ: Record videos in high quality. Video functions105 Shooting Functions > Video functions Multi Motion Set the playing speed of a video. To set playing speed options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Multi Motion→ an option. Icon Description x0.25: Record a video and play it at 1/4 normal speed. (Available only with 640x480 or 320x240) x0.5: Record a video and play it at 1/2 normal speed. (Available only with 1280x720 (30 fps), 640x480, or 320x240) x1: Record a video and play it at normal speed. x5: Record a video and play it at 5X normal speed. x10: Record a video and play it at 10X normal speed. x20: Record a video and play it at 20X normal speed. • If you select an option other than x1, sound will not be recorded. • The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Fader You can fade in or fade out a scene using the fader function on the camera without having to do it on a PC. Set the fade in option to gradually fade in at the start of the scene. Set the fade out option to gradually fade out the scene. Use the function appropriately and add dramatic effects on your videos. To set fader options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Fader→ an option. Icon Description Off: Fader function not used. In: Scene gradually fades in. Out: Scene gradually fades out. In-out: The fader function is applied at the start and end of the scene. When you use the fader function, it may take longer to save a file.106 Shooting Functions > Video functions Mic Level Set the mic level for the shooting conditions. To set the mic level, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→Mic Level→ an option. Voice Sometimes, a muted video is more appealing than the one with sound. Turn the voice off to record a muted video. To set voice options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→Voice→ an option. Wind cut When you record videos in noisy environments, unintended sounds can be recorded in videos. In particular, severe wind noise recorded in videos distracts you from enjoying your videos. Use the Wind Cut function to remove some surrounding noise in addition to wind noise. To reduce wind sound, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→Wind Cut→ an option.Chapter 3 Playback/Editing Learn about how to play back and edit photos and videos. Refer to chapter 6 for editing files on a PC.108 Playback/Editing Learn how to view photo and video thumbnails and how to protect or delete files. If you perform no operations for a while, information and icons on the screen disappear. When you operate the camera again, they will reappear. Viewing photos 1 Press [y]. • The most recent file you captured will be displayed. 2 Press [C/F] to scroll through files. • You can also drag the image left or right to move to another file. You may not be able to edit or play back files that were captured with other cameras, due to unsupported sizes or codecs. Use a computer or another device to edit or play back these files. Viewing image thumbnails In order to search for photos and videos you want, convert to the thumbnail view. The thumbnail view displays multiple images at a time so that you can easily look through items you wish to find. You can also classify and display files by category, such as date or file type. Scroll the jog dial to the left to select the thumbnail view mode. (Scroll the jog dial to the right to return to the previous mode.) Searching and managing files109 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Viewing files by category 1 In the thumbnail view, press [m] →z→Filter→ a category. • You can also touch FILTER to select a category. * Default Option Description All* View files normally. Date View files by the date they were saved. Type View files by the file type. Location View files by the place they were saved. (Only the photos captured with an optional GPS module have the location information.) 2 Select a list to open it. 3 Select a file to view it. 4 Touch to return to the previous view. Viewing files as a folder Continuous and burst shots appear as a folder. Selecting a folder will play back all photos automatically. Deleting a folder will delete all photos in the folder. 1 In Playback mode, press [C/F] or drag the image left or right to move to a desired folder. • The camera will automatically play back photos in the folder. 2 Scroll the jog dial to the right to open the folder. • You can also touch the folder on the screen to open the folder. 3 Press [C/F] or drag the image left or right to move to another file. 4 Scroll the jog dial to the left to return to Playback mode.110 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Protecting files Protect your files from accidental deletion. 1 In Playback mode, press [m] →z→Protect→Select. 2 Press [C/F] to select a file, and then press [o]. 3 Press [f]. You cannot delete or rotate a protected file. Lock/Unlock all files Lock or unlock all files. 1 In Playback mode, press [m] →z→Protect→All. 2 Select an option. Option Description Lock Lock all files. Unlock Unlock all files. Cancel Return to the previous menu.111 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Deleting files Delete files in Playback mode and secure more space on your memory card. Protected files are not deleted. Deleting a single file You can select a single file and delete it. 1 In Playback mode, select a file, and then press [n]. 2 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. Deleting multiple files You can select multiple files and delete them. 1 In Playback mode, press [m] →z→Delete→Select. • Alternatively, in thumbnails view, press [n], and then select files to delete. 2 Select files you want to delete by pressing [C/F], and then press [o]. • Press [o] again to cancel your selection. 3 Press [n]. 4 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.112 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Deleting all files You can delete all files on the memory card at once. 1 In Playback mode, press [m]. 2 Select z→Delete→All. 3 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.113 Playback/Editing Enlarging a photo You can enlarge photos when viewing them in Playback mode. You can also use the Trim function to extract the portion of the image displayed on the screen and save it as a new file. Magnified area Magnification (the maximum magnification may differ by resolution) Full Image Crop Scroll the jog dial to the right to enlarge a photo. (Scroll the jog dial to the left to reduce a photo.) To Do this Move magnified area Press [D/I/C/F]. Crop the enlarged image Press [f]. (saved as a new file) Return to the original image Press [o]. You can also pinch your fingers together or spread them apart on the screen to reduce or enlarge a photo. You can also double-tap an area to enlarge it quickly. Viewing a slide show You can view photos in a slide show, apply various effects to the slide show, and play background music. 1 In Playback mode, press [m]. 2 Select z→Slide Show Options. 3 Select a slide show effect option. • Skip to step 4 to start a slide show with no effects. * Default Option Description Play Mode Set whether or not to repeat the slide show. (One Play*, Repeat) Interval Set the interval between photos. (1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec) Music Set background audio. Effect • Set a scene change effect between photos. • Select Off to cancel effects. Viewing photos114 Playback/Editing > Viewing photos 4 Press [m]. 5 Select Start Slide Show. 6 View the slide show. • Press [o] to pause. • Press [o] again to resume. • Press [m] to stop the slide show and return to Playback mode. • Press [D/I] to adjust the volume level. Auto rotating With Auto Rotate on, the camera automatically rotates photos you have captured vertically so they fit the screen horizontally. To set auto rotate options, In Playback mode, press [m] →z→Auto Rotate→ an option. Creating a print order (DPOF) DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) lets you set the number of copies to be printed. The camera saves the DPOF information in the MISC folder of your memory card. If you have set DPOF information for your images, you can take the memory card to a digital printing shop for printing. You cannot set the print order of RAW format files. Photos with dimensions that are wider than the paper may be cut off on the left and right edges. Ensure that your photo dimensions are compatible with the paper you select. 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [m]. 2 Select z→DPOF. 3 Press [D/I] to set the number of copies. • To select another photo, press [C/F]. 4 Press [o] to save.115 Playback/Editing In Playback mode, you can play a video, capture an image from a video, or crop a video to save as another file. Stop Capture Video viewing controls Icon/Button Description / /[C] View previous file/Scan backward. (Each time you touch the icon or press the button while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) / /[o] Pause or resume playback. / /[F] View next file/Scan forward. (Each time you touch the icon or press the button while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) /[D/I] Adjust the volume or mute the sound. Trimming a video during playback 1 In Playback mode, scroll to a video, and then touch . 2 Press [o] or touch to start playing the video. 3 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the trimming to begin. 4 Press [f] or touch Start Point. 5 Press [o] or touch to resume playing the video. 6 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the trimming to end. Playing videos116 Playback/Editing > Playing videos 7 Press [f] or touch End Point. 8 Press [f] or touch Trim to trim a video. • You can adjust the scene to be cropped by dragging the handles that appear on the progress bar. 9 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. • You cannot trim a video recorded in 3D mode. • The original video should be at least 10 seconds long. • The camera will save the edited video as a new file and leave the original video intact. Capturing an image during playback 1 While viewing a video, press [o] or touch at the point where you want to capture an image. 2 Press [f] or touch Capture. • You cannot capture an image from a video recorded in 3D mode. • The resolution of the captured image will be the same as the original video. • The captured image is saved as a new file.117 Playback/Editing Perform photo editing tasks, such as resizing, rotating, or reducing red-eye effects. Edited photos are saved as new files under different file names. Photos captured in some modes cannot be edited with the Image Edit function. To edit images, In Playback mode, scroll to a photo, and then touch → an option. • You can also edit images in Playback mode by selecting a photo, and then pressing [f] or [m] →Edit Image. • Some images may not be edited with the Image Edit function. In this case, use a supplied image editing software. • The camera will save edited photos as new files. • When you edit photos, the camera will automatically convert them to a lower resolution. Photos that you rotate or resize manually are not automatically converted to a lower resolution. • You cannot edit photos while viewing files as a folder. Open the folder and select a photo to edit each photo. Cropping a photo 1 Touch → . 2 Drag the corners of the box to adjust the size of the area. 3 Drag the box to move the location of the area. 4 Touch OK. 5 Touch to save. Editing photos118 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Rotating a photo 1 Touch → . 2 Touch an option. Rotate : Right 90° 3 Touch OK. 4 Touch to save. • You can also rotate a photo in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting z→Rotate→ a desired option. • The camera will overwrite the original file. Resizing photos Change the size of a photo and save it as a new file. 1 Touch → . 2 Touch an option. Resize : 10.1M 3:2 3 Touch OK. 4 Touch to save. Available resize options differ depending on the original size of the photo.119 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Adjusting your photos You can correct captured photos by adjusting the brightness, contrast, or saturation. 1 Touch . 2 Touch an adjusting option. Icon Description Original (Reset to the original image) Auto adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation RGB adjustment Color Temperature Exposure Hue 3 Press [C/F] to adjust the option. • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option. • If you selected , skip to step 4. 4 Touch OK. 5 Touch to save.120 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Retouching faces 1 Touch → . 2 Press [C/F] to adjust the option. • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option. • As the number increases, the skin tone becomes brighter and smoother. 3 Touch OK. • To cancel correction, touch . 4 Touch to save. Reducing red-eye 1 Touch → . 2 Touch OK. • To cancel correction, touch . 3 Touch to save.121 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Applying Smart Filter effects Apply special effects to your photos. 1 Touch , and then touch an option. Smart Filter : Vignetting Option Description Original No effect Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Colored Pencil Apply a colored pencil painting effect. Watercolor Apply a watercolor painting effect. Wash drawing Apply a washed-out effect. Option Description Oil Sketch Apply an oil sketching effect. Ink Sketch Apply an ink sketching effect. Acryl Apply an acryl painting effect. Negative Apply a negative film effect. Red Desaturate all colors but red. Green Desaturate all colors but green. Blue Desaturate all colors but blue. Yellow Desaturate all colors but yellow. 2 Touch OK. 3 Touch to save.Chapter 4 Wireless network Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use functions.123 Wireless network Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Learn to connect via an access point (AP) when you are in a range of a WLAN. You can also configure network settings. Connecting to a WLAN 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select , , ,or . 3 Press [m], and then select Wi-Fi Setting. • In some modes, follow the on-screen instructions until the Wi-Fi Setting screen appears. • The camera automatically searches for available AP devices. 4 Select an AP. Back Refresh Samsung1 Samsung2 Samsung3 Samsung4 • Select Refresh to refresh connectable APs. • Select Add wireless network to add an AP manually. Your AP name must be in English to add the AP manually. Icon/Option Description Ad hoc AP Secured AP WPS AP Signal strength Press [F] or touch to open network setting options. • When you select a secured AP, a pop-up window appears. Enter the required passwords to connect to the WLAN. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) • When a login page appears, refer to "Using the login browser". (p. 125) • When you select an unsecured AP, the camera will connect to the WLAN. • If you select a WPS profile supported AP, select →WPS PIN connection, and then enter a PIN on the AP device. You can also connect to a WPS profile supported AP by selecting →WPS button connection on the camera, and then pushing the WPS button on the AP device. • The same AP may be listed twice, with different frequencies, because your camera supports the dual band function.124 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Setting network options 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [F] or touch . 2 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description Network Password Enter the network password. IP Setting Set the IP address automatically or manually. Manually setting the IP address 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [F] or touch . 2 Select IP Setting→Manual. 3 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description IP Enter the static IP address. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask. Gateway Enter the gateway. DNS Server Enter the DNS address.125 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Using the login browser You can enter your login information via the login browser when connecting to some APs, sharing sites, or cloud servers. Icon Description Close the login browser. Move to the previous page. Move to the next page. Stop loading the page. Reload the page. • You may not be able to select some items depending on the page you connected to. This does not indicate a malfunction. • The login browser may not close automatically after you log into some pages. If this occurs, close the login browser by touching , and then proceed with the desired operation. • It may take longer to load the login page due to the page size or network speed. If this occurs, wait until the login information input window appears.126 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Network connection tips • You must insert a memory card to use the Wi-Fi features. • The quality of the network connection will be determined by the AP. • The further the distance between your camera and the AP, the longer it will take to connect to the network. • If a nearby device is using the same radio frequency signal as your camera, it may interrupt your connection. • If your AP name is not in English, the camera may not be able to locate the device or the name may appear incorrectly. • For network settings or a password, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • If a WLAN requires authentication from the service provider, you may not be able to connect to it. To connect the WLAN, contact your network service provider. • Depending on the encryption type, the number of digits in the password may differ. • A WLAN connection may not be possible in all surroundings. • The camera may display a WLAN enabled printer on the AP List. You cannot connect to a network via a printer. • You cannot connect your camera to a network and a TV simultaneously. • Connecting to a network may incur additional charges. Costs will vary based on the conditions of your contract. • If you cannot connect to a WLAN, try another AP from the available AP list. • A login page may appear when you select free WLANs provided by some network service providers. Enter your ID and password to connect to the WLAN. For information about registering or the service, contact the network service providers. • Be cautious when you enter personal information for an AP connection. Do not enter any payment or credit card information on your camera. The manufacturer is not liable for any problem caused by entering such information. • Available network connections may differ by country. • The WLAN feature of your camera must comply with radio transmission laws in your region. To ensure compliance, use the WLAN feature only in the country where you purchased the camera. • The process for adjusting network settings may differ, depending on network conditions. • Do not access a network that you are not authorized to use. • Before you connect to a network, ensure your battery is fully charged. • You cannot upload or send files captured in some modes. • Files that you transfer to another device may not be supported by the device. In this case, use a computer to play back the files.127 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Entering text Learn how to enter text. The icons in the table let you move the cursor, change the case, etc. Touch a key to enter it. Icon Description Move the cursor. Stop entering text and return to the previous page. Change case. Switch between Symbol/Number mode and the normal mode. Change the input language. Enter a space. Save the displayed text. Delete the last letter. • You can use only the English alphabets in some modes, regardless of the display language. • You can enter up to 64 characters. • The screen may differ depending on the input mode. • Touch and hold a key to enter the character at the upper right corner of the key.128 Wireless network Saving files to a smart phone automatically The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the AutoShare feature via a WLAN. When you capture a photo with your camera, the photo is saved to the smart phone automatically. • The AutoShare feature is supported by Galaxy series smart phones or Galaxy Tab models with the Android 2.3 OS or higher or iOS devices with the iOS 6.0 or higher. Before using this feature, check the device’s firmware and update it if needed. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • To install and launch Samsung SMART CAMERA App on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the NFC feature and place the smart phone near an NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. This feature is supported by smart phones running Android OS 2.3 or higher. This feature is not available for iOS devices. • You must insert a memory card to use this feature. • If you set this function, the setting is maintained even when you change the Shooting mode. • This feature may not be supported in some modes or may not be available with some shooting options. 1 On the camera, in Shooting mode, press [m]. 2 On the camera, select 1→AutoShare→On. • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6. 4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. 5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. • An icon that shows the connection status ( ) will appear on the camera’s screen. 6 On the camera, capture a photo. • The captured photo is saved to the camera, and then transferred to the smart phone. • If you recorded a video, it is saved only to the camera.129 Wireless network The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the MobileLink feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to your smart phone. • The MobileLink feature is supported by Galaxy series smart phones or Galaxy Tab models with the Android 2.3 OS or higher or iOS devices with the iOS 6.0 or higher. Before using this feature, check the device’s firmware and update it if needed. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • To install and launch Samsung SMART CAMERA App on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the NFC feature and place the smart phone near an NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. This feature is supported by smart phones running Android OS 2.3 or higher. This feature is not available for iOS devices. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • If you select files from the smart phone, you can view up to 1,000 recent files and send up to 150 files at a time. If you select files from the camera, you can view files that were selected from the camera. The maximum number of files that can be sent varies depending on the storage space of the smart phone. • When you send Full HD videos using MobileLink feature, you may not be able to play back files on some devices. • When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi connection. • You cannot send RAW files. 1 On the camera, rotate the mode dial to B. 2 On the camera, select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 3 On the camera, select a sending option. • If you select Select Files from Smartphone, you can use your smart phone to view and share files stored on the camera. • If you select Select Files from Camera, you can select files to send from the camera. 4 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 7. Sending photos or videos to a smart phone130 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to a smart phone 5 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. 6 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 7 On the smart phone or camera, select files to transfer from the camera. 8 On the smart phone, touch the copy button or on the camera, select Send. • The camera will send the files.131 Wireless network The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Remote Viewfinder feature via a WLAN. Use the smart phone as a remote shutter release with the Remote Viewfinder feature. The captured photo will display on the smart phone. • The Remote Viewfinder feature is supported by Galaxy series smart phones or Galaxy Tab models with the Android 2.3 OS or higher or iOS devices with the iOS 6.0 or higher. Before using this feature, check the device’s firmware and update it if needed. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • To install and launch Samsung SMART CAMERA App on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the NFC feature and place the smart phone near an NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. This feature is supported by smart phones running Android OS 2.3 or higher. This feature is not available for iOS devices. • This function is not available in 3D mode. 1 On the camera, rotate the mode dial to B. 2 On the camera, select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6. 4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release132 Wireless network > Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release 5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 6 On the smart phone, set the following shooting options. Icon Description Flash option Timer option Photo size Saving location • While using this feature, some buttons are not available on your camera. • The zoom button and the shutter button on your smart phone will not function when using this feature. • Remote Viewfinder mode supports the and photo sizes only. 7 On the smart phone, touch and hold to focus. • The focus is automatically set to Multi AF. 8 Release to capture the photo. • Photos saved to the smart phone will be resized to 1616X1080 when shooting in and to 1920X1080 when shooting in resolution. • When you use this feature, the ideal distance between the camera and the smart phone may vary, depending on your surroundings. • The smart phone must be within 7 m of the camera to use this feature. • It will take some time to capture the photo after you release on the smart phone. • The Remote Viewfinder function will deactivate when: - there is an incoming call on the smart phone - either the camera or the smart phone turns off - the memory is full - device loses its connection to the WLAN - the Wi-Fi connection is poor or unstable - you perform no operations for approximately 5 minutes while connected133 Wireless network Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC 1 Install i-Launcher on the PC. (p. 163) 2 Connect the camera to the PC with the USB cable. 3 When the Auto Backup program icon appears, click it. • The Auto Backup program is installed on the PC and the information about the PC will be stored to the camera. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. • You can also save the information about the PC to the camera by connecting the PC and the camera via Wi-Fi. 4 Remove the USB cable. Before installing the program, ensure that the PC is connected to a network. If no internet connection is available, you must install the program from the provided CD. Sending photos or videos to a PC 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • If the the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. • You must configure the backup PC information to use the Auto Backup feature. For more details, refer to "Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC". (p. 133) If the Auto Backup program is installed on your PC, save the PC information via USB cable or Wi-Fi connection. • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123)134 Wireless network > Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos 3 Select a backup PC. • If you have performed a backup before, move to step 4. 4 Select OK. • To cancel sending, select Cancel. • You cannot select individual files to backup. This function backs up only new files on the camera. • The backup's progress will be shown on the PC monitor. • When the transfer is completed, the camera will turn off automatically in approximately 30 seconds. Select Cancel to return to the previous screen and prevent the camera from turning off automatically. • To turn off your PC automatically after the transfer is complete, select Shut down PC after backup. • To change the backup PC, select . • When you connect the camera to the WLAN, select the AP that is connected to the PC. • The camera will search for available access points even if you are connecting to the same access point again. • If you turn off the camera or remove the battery while sending files, the file transfer will be interrupted. • While you are using this feature, the shutter control is disabled on your camera. • You can connect only one camera to the PC at a time for sending files. • The backup may be canceled due to network conditions. • Photos or videos can be sent to a PC one time only. Files cannot be sent again even if you reconnect your camera to another PC. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You must turn off Windows Firewall and any other firewalls before using this feature. • You can send up to 1,000 recent files. • On the PC software, the server name must be entered in the Latin alphabet and can contain no more than 48 characters. • When multiple file types are created at once, only the image files (JPG) will be sent to the PC with this feature.135 Wireless network 5 Select the Name box, enter your name, and then touch . Sender Setting Name Save Email Reset 6 Select the Email box, enter your email address, and then touch . 7 Select Save to save your changes. • To delete your information, select Reset. You can change settings in the email menu and send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. Changing email settings In the email menu, you can change settings for storing your information. You can also set or change the email password. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) Storing your information 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Sender Setting. Sending photos or videos via email136 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email Setting an email password 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Setting Password→On. • To deactivate the password, select Off. 5 When the pop-up appears, select OK. 6 Enter a 4-digit password. 7 Enter the password again. 8 When the pop-up appears, select OK. If you lost your password, you can reset it by selecting RESET on the password setting screen. When you reset the information, the previously saved user’s setting information, email address, and recently sent email list will be deleted.137 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email Changing the email password 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Change Password. 5 Enter your current 4-digit password. 6 Enter a new 4-digit password. 7 Enter the new password again. 8 When the pop-up appears, select OK. Sending photos or videos via email You can send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 3 Select the Sender box, enter your email address, and then touch . • If you have previously saved your information, it will be inserted automatically. (p. 135) • To use an address from the list of previous senders, select → an address.138 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email 4 Select the Receiver box, enter an email address, and then touch . • To use an address from the list of previous recipients, select → an address. • Select to add additional recipients. You can input up to 30 recipients. • Select to delete an address from the list. 5 Select Next. 6 Select files to send. • You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 7 MB or less. 7 Select Next. 8 Select the comment box, enter your comments, and then touch . 9 Select Send. • The camera will send the email. • Even if a photo appears to have transferred successfully, errors with the recipient’s email account may cause the photo to be rejected or recognized as spam. • You may not be able to send an email if no network connection is available or if your email account settings are incorrect. • You cannot send an email if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum photo resolution you can send is 2M and the longest video you can upload is a video recorded using . If the selected photo resolution is higher than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. • If you cannot send an email because of firewall or user authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You can also send an email in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi)→Email.139 Wireless network Upload your photos or videos to file sharing websites. Available websites will be displayed on your camera. To upload files to some websites, you must visit the website and register before connecting your camera. Accessing a website 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . 3 Select a website. • If the pop-up message that prompts you to create an account appears, select OK. • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 4 Enter your ID and password to log in. • For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) • If you connected to SkyDrive, refer to "Using the login browser". (p. 125) • To select an ID from the list, select → an ID. • If you have previously logged in to the website, you may be logged in automatically. You must have an existing account on the file sharing website to use this feature. Using photo or video sharing websites140 Wireless network > Using photo or video sharing websites Uploading photos or videos 1 Access the website with your camera. 2 Select files to upload. • You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 10 MB or less. (On some websites, the total size or number of files may vary.) 3 Select Upload. • On some websites, you can enter your comments by selecting the comment box. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) • You can set an upload folder for Facebook by pressing [m], and then selecting Upload Folder (Facebook) on the website's list screen. • You cannot upload files if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum photo resolution you can upload is 2M, and the longest video you can upload is a video recorded using . If the selected photo resolution is higher than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. (On some websites, the maximum photo resolution may vary.) • The method of uploading photos or videos may differ depending on the selected website. • If you cannot access a website because of firewall or user authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • Uploaded photos or videos may be automatically titled with the date they were captured. • The speed of your internet connection may affect how quickly photos upload or web pages open. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You can also upload photos or videos to file sharing websites in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi)→ a desired website. • You cannot upload videos to some websites. • When you upload photos to SkyDrive, they will be resized to 2M while maintaining their aspect ratios.141 Wireless network Using AllShare Play to send files You can upload files from your camera to AllShare Play online storage or view files on an AllShare Play device connected to the same AP. Uploading photos to online storage 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select → Web storage. • If the guide message appears, select OK. • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) • To change the size for uploaded photos, press [m], and then select Upload Image Size. • If you have registered more than one web storage, you can select from the list by pressing [m], and then selecting Change Web storage. 3 Enter your ID and password, and then select Login→OK. • For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) • To select an ID from the list, select → an ID. • If you have previously logged in to the website, you may be logged in automatically. To use this feature, you must create an AllShare Play account and an account with an affiliated online storage service using your PC. After finishing creating accounts, add your online storage account to AllShare Play. 4 Select files you want to upload, and then select Upload. • If you have registered more than one web storage, select a web storage first. • You cannot upload video files to AllShare Play online storage. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You can upload up to 20 files. • You can also upload photos in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi)→AllShare Play.142 Wireless network > Using AllShare Play to send files Viewing photos or videos on devices that support AllShare Play 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select → Nearby devices. • If the guide message appears, select Yes. • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) • You can set to allow only selected devices or all devices to connect by pressing [m], and then selecting DLNA Access Control on the screen. • A sharing file list is created. Wait until other devices can find your camera. 3 Connect the AllShare Play device to a network, and then turn on the AllShare Play feature. • Refer to your device's user manual for more information. 4 On the camera, allow the AllShare Play device to connect to your camera. 5 On the AllShare Play device, select a camera to connect. 6 On the AllShare Play device, browse the shared photos or videos. • For information about searching for the camera and browsing the photos or videos on the AllShare Play device, refer to the device's user manual. • Videos may not play smoothly depending on the type of AllShare Play device or the network condition. For smooth playback, use a 5 Ghz dual-band AP device. AP S A camera is connected to a TV that supports AllShare Play via WLAN.143 Wireless network > Using AllShare Play to send files • You can share up to 1,000 recent files. • On an AllShare Play device, you can view only photos or videos captured with your camera. • The range of the wireless connection between your camera and an AllShare Play device may vary depending on the specifications of the AP. • If the camera is connected to 2 AllShare Play devices, playback may be slower. • Photos or videos will be shared in their original sizes. • You can use this feature only with devices that support AllShare Play. • Shared photos or videos will not be stored on the AllShare Play device, but they can be stored in the camera to meet the device's specifications. • Transferring photos or videos to the AllShare Play device may take some time depending on the network connection, the number of files to be shared, or the sizes of the files. • If you power off the camera abnormally while viewing photos or videos on an AllShare Play device (for example, by removing the battery), the device considers the camera to still be connected. • The order of photos or videos on the camera may be different than on the AllShare Play device. • Depending on the number of photos or videos you want to share, it may take some time to load your photos or videos and complete the initial set-up process. • While viewing photos or videos on the AllShare Play device, continuously using the device's remote or performing additional operations on the device may prevent this feature from working properly. • If you reorder or sort files on the camera while viewing them on an AllShare Play device, you must repeat the initial set-up process to update the list of files on the device. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • We recommend you use a network cable to connect your AllShare Play device to your AP. This will minimize any video ‘Stuttering’ you may experience when streaming content. • To view files on an AllShare Play device using the Nearby devices feature, enable multicast mode on your AP. • 1920X1080 (60 fps) videos can be played only on full HDTVs capable of playback at 60 fps. • You can view 3D files only on 3D-compatible TVs or monitors.144 Wireless network Sending photos using Wi-Fi Direct When the camera connects via a WLAN to a device that supports the Wi-Fi Direct function, you can send photos to the device. This feature may not be supported on some devices. 1 On the device, turn on the Wi-Fi Direct option. 2 On the camera, in Playback mode, scroll to a photo. 3 Press [m], and then select Share(Wi-Fi)→Wi-Fi Direct. • When in the single image view, you can send only one photo at a time. • When in thumbnails view, you can select multiple photos. Select Upload when you are finished selecting photos. 4 Select the device from the camera’s list of Wi-Fi Direct devices. • Ensure that the device's Wi-Fi Direct option is turned on. • You can also select your camera from the device's list of Wi-Fi Direct devices. 5 On the device, allow the camera to connect to the device. • The photo will be sent to the device. • You can send up to 20 files at a time. • When there are no photos in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • If you cannot connect to a Wi-Fi Direct device, update the device with the latest firmware. This feature may not be supported on some devices.Chapter 5 Camera settings menu Learn about the user settings and general settings menu. You can adjust the settings to better suit your needs and preferences.146 Camera settings menu You can set the user environment with these settings. To set user options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →5→ an option. Available items and the order of them may differ depending on shooting conditions. ISO Customizing ISO Step You can set the size for the ISO sensitivity by either 1/3 or 1 step. Auto ISO Range You can set the maximum ISO value under which each EV step is chosen when you set the ISO to Auto. * Default Option Value 1/3 Step ISO 125, ISO 160, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200* 1 Step ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200* Noise Reduction Use the Noise Reduction to reduce the visual noise in photos. * Default Option Description High ISO NR This function reduces noise that may occur when you set a high ISO sensitivity. (Off, High, Normal*, Low) Long Term NR This function reduces noise when you set the camera for a long exposure. (Off, On*) User settings147 Camera settings menu > User settings Bracket Set You can set up the options for AE Bracket, WB Bracket, and P Wiz Bracket. Option Description AE Bracket Set Set the exposure interval. (-/+0.3 EV*, -/+0.7 EV, -/+1 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2 EV, -/+2.3 EV, -/+2.7 EV, -/+3 EV) WB Bracket Set Adjust the White Balance interval range of the 3 bracketed photos. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1, MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1) For example, AB-/+3 adjusts the Amber value plus or minus three steps. MG-/+3 adjusts the Magenta value the same amount. P Wiz Bracket Set Select 3 Picture Wizard settings the camera uses to capture the 3 bracketed photos. DMF (Direct Manual Focus) You can adjust the focus manually by rotating the focus ring after achieving the focus by half-pressing [Shutter]. This feature may not be available with some lenses.148 Camera settings menu > User settings Color space The color space option allows you to select methods for representing colors. Digital imaging devices such as digital cameras, monitors, and printers have their own methods for representing colors, which are called color spaces. Option Description sRGB sRGB (Standard RGB) is an international specification to define the color space created by IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). It is widely used for creating colors on PC monitors and is also the standard color space for Exif. sRGB is recommended for regular images and images you intend to publish on the Internet. Adobe RGB Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. Note that individual programs are generally compatible with a limited number of color spaces. Adobe RGB sRGB When the color space is set to Adobe RGB, photos will be saved as “_SAMXXXX.JPG”.149 Camera settings menu > User settings Distortion Correct You can correct lens distortion that might occur from lenses. This feature may not be available with some lenses. Touch Operation Set to enable touch operation in Shooting mode. Option Description On Use touch operations in Shooting mode. Off Do not use touch operations in Shooting mode. (You can use touch operations in other situations.) iFn Customizing You can select options that can be adjusted when you press [i-Function] on an i-Function lens. Option Description Aperture Set to adjust the aperture value. Shutter Speed Set to adjust the shutter speed. EV Set to adjust the exposure value. ISO Set to adjust ISO sensitivity. White Balance Set to adjust the White Balance. Z Set to adjust the zoom ratio. User Display You can add or remove shooting information from the display. 1 2 3 London No. Description 1 Date & Time Set to display the date and time. 2 Icons Set to display icons on the right in Shooting mode.150 Camera settings menu > User settings No. Description 3 Histogram Set the histogram on the display on or off. About histogram A histogram is a graph that shows the brightness distribution of a photo. A histogram inclined to the left indicates a dark photo. A histogram inclined to the right indicates a bright photo. The height of the graph is related to color information. The graph gets higher if a specific color is more common. Insufficient exposure Balanced exposure Excessive exposure Key Mapping You can change the function assigned to the Custom button or DIRECT LINK button. * Default Button Function Custom Set a function of the Custom button. • Optical Preview*: Execute the Depth of Field Preview function for the current aperture value. (p. 24) • One Touch WB (White Balance): Execute the Custom White Balance function. • One Touch RAW +: Save a file in the RAW+JPEG format. To save a file in JPEG format, press the button again. • Reset: Reset some settings. • AEL: Execute the auto exposure lock function. • AEL Hold: Keep executing the auto exposure lock function after shooting. DIRECT LINK Set a function of the DIRECT LINK button. (AutoShare*, MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Auto Backup, Email, SNS & Cloud, AllShare Play)151 Camera settings menu > User settings Grid Line Select a guide to help you compose a scene. (Off*, 3 X 3, 2 X 2, Cross, Diagonal) AF Lamp When shooting in dark places, turn the AF lamp on in order to have a better auto focus. The Auto Focus functions more accurately in dark places when the AF lamp is on.152 Camera settings menu Learn to configure your camera's settings. To set Setting options, In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] →q→ an option. * Default Item Description Sound • System Volume: Set the sound volume or turn all sound off entirely. (Off, Low, Medium*, High) Even if the system volume is turned off, the camera emits the sound while playing a video or a slide show. • AF Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you half-press the shutter button on or off. (Off, On*) • Button Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you press the buttons or touch the screen on or off. (Off, On*) Quick View Set the Quick View time length – the amount of time the camera displays a photo immediately after you capture it. (Off, 1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, Hold) * Default Item Description Display Adjust Adjust the display brightness, auto brightness setting, display color, or level gauge. • Display Brightness: You can adjust the display brightness manually. • Auto Brightness: Turn auto brightness on or off. (Off, On*) • Display Color: You can adjust the display color manually. • Horizontal Calibration: Calibrate the level gauge. If the level gauge is not level, position the camera on the level surface, and then follow the on-screen instructions. • You cannot access the Horizontal Calibration option in Playback mode. • You cannot calibrate the level gauge in portrait orientation. Auto Display Off Set the display off time. The display turns off if you do not use the camera for the time you set. (Off, 30 sec*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min) Setting153 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Power Save Set power shut off time. The camera shuts off if you do not use it for the time you set. (30 sec, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min) • The camera retains the power-off time setting even if you replace the battery. • Power Save may not work if the camera is connected to a computer or a TV or playing a slide show or a movie. Help Guide Display • Mode Help Guide: Set to display help text about the selected mode when changing shooting modes. (Off, On*) • Function Help Guide: Set to display help text about menus and functions. (Off, On*) Press [n] to hide the help text. Language Set a language the camera shows on the display. Date & Time Set date, time, date format, time zone and whether to imprint the date on photos. (Time Zone, Date & Time, Date Type, Time Type, Imprint) • The date appears on the lower right side of the photo. • When you print a photo, some printers may not print the date appropriately. * Default Item Description Video Out Set the video signal output appropriate for your country when connecting the camera to an external video device such as a monitor or HDTV. • NTSC: USA, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc • PAL (Supports only PAL B, D, G, H, or I): Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, England, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, Norway, etc Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) When you connect the camera to an HDTV that supports Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can control the play function of the camera with the TV remote control. • Off: You cannot control the play function of camera with the TV remote control. • On*: You can control the play function of camera with the TV remote control. HDMI Output When you connect the camera to an HDTV with an HDMI cable, you can change the resolution of the image. • NTSC: Auto*, 1080p, 720p, 480p, 576p (activates only when PAL is selected) If the connected HDTV does not support the resolution you select, the camera sets the resolution one level lower.154 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description 3D HDMI Output Select an option for playing files on a 3D TV. • Side by Side*: Displays two images next to each other. • Frame Packing: Displays the images for the left and right eye alternately in frames. File Name Set the method of creating file names. • Standard*: SAM_XXXX.JPG (sRGB)/ _SAMXXXX.JPG (Adobe RGB) • Date: - sRGB files - MMDDXXXX.JPG. For example, for a photo captured on Jan. 01, the file name would be 0101XXXX.jpg. - Adobe RGB files - _MDDXXXX.JPG for the months Jan through Sept. For the months Oct through Dec, the month number is replaced by the letters A (Oct.), B (Nov.) and C (Dec.). For example, for a photo captured on Feb. 03, the file name would be _203XXXX.jpg. For a photo captured on Oct. 05, the file name would be _A05XXXX.jpg. * Default Item Description File Number Set the method of numbering files and folders. • Reset: After using the reset function, the next file name is started at 0001. • Series*: New file numbers continue the existing number sequence, even if you have installed a new memory card, formatted the card, or deleted all photos. • The first folder name is 100PHOTO, if you have selected the sRGB color space and Standard file naming, the first file name is SAM_0001. • File name numbers are increased by 1 from SAM_0001 to SAM_9999. • Folder numbers are increased by 1 from 100PHOTO to 999PHOTO. • The maximum number of files that can be saved in one folder is 9,999. • File numbers are assigned according to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) specifications. • If you change a file name (for example, on a computer), the camera will not be able to play the file. Folder Type Set the type of folder. • Standard*: XXXPHOTO • Date: XXX_MMDD155 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Format Format the memory card. Formatting deletes all existing files including protected files. (Yes, No) Errors can occur if you use a memory card formatted by another brand of camera, a memory card reader, or a computer. Please format memory cards in the camera before using them to capture photos. Device Information View the firmware version of the body and the lens, Mac address, and network certification number, or update the firmware. • Firmware Update: Update the firmware of the camera body or lens. (Body Firmware, Lens Firmware) • You can download firmware upgrades from www.samsung.com. • You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged battery. Recharge the battery fully before running a firmware upgrade. • If you update the firmware, user settings and values will be reset. (Date, time, language, and video out will not change.) • Do not turn the camera off while the update is in progress. * Default Item Description Dual-band Mobile AP Set a frequency for using the camera as an AP for the AutoShare, MobileLink, or Remote Viewfinder feature. (5 GHz, 2.4 GHz*) If you use the camera in a country other than the one where it was purchased, the 5 GHz Wi-Fi feature may not function properly, due to differences in radio frequencies. In this case, use the 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi feature instead. GPS • Geotagging: Set to capture photos with location information using the Global Positioning System (GPS). Location information is added to the Exif data associated with the photo. (Off, On*) • GPS Valid Time Settings: Set the time to use the last location information when the camera fails to receive GPS signals. If the camera fails to receive GPS signals after the specified time, the location information will not be recorded onto the photos. (15 sec*, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 10 min, 30 min) • Location Display: Set to display the location information on the screen in Shooting mode. The location information will appear in Korean only when you are in Korea and the display language is set to Korean. When another language is set, the location information will appear in English. (Off, On*) • GPS Reset: Set to search for GPS satellites closest to your current position. (Yes, No) To use the GPS function, you must purchase an optional GPS device.156 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Sensor Cleaning • Sensor Cleaning: Remove dust from the sensor. • Start-Up Action: When on, the camera performs sensor cleaning each time you turn it on. (Off*, On) As this product uses interchangeable lenses, the sensor can get dust on it when you change lenses. This can lead to dust particles appearing in the photos you capture. It is recommended not to change lenses when you are in a particularly dusty area. Also, make sure to attach the lens cap to the lens when not using it. Reset Reset the setup menu and shooting options to the factory defaults. (Date, time, language, and video output settings do not change.) (Yes, No) Open Source Licenses View open source licenses.Chapter 6 Connecting to external devices Make full use of the camera by connecting it to external devices such as a computer, HDTV or 3D TV.158 Connecting to external devices Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to an HDTV (3D TV) using an optional HDMI cable. Viewing files on an HDTV 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] →q→ HDMI Output→ an option. (p. 153) 2 Turn off your camera and HDTV. 3 Connect your camera to your HDTV with the optional HDMI cable. 4 Turn on your HDTV, and then select the HDMI video source. 5 Turn on the camera. • The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you connect it to an HDTV. 6 View photos or play videos using the camera buttons. • When using the HDMI cable, you can connect the camera to an HDTV using the Anynet+(CEC) method. • The Anynet+(CEC) functions allow you to control connected devices using the TV remote control. • If the HDTV supports Anynet+(CEC), the TV turns on automatically when used in conjunction with the camera. This feature may not be available on some HDTVs. • When connected to an HDTV by an HDMI cable, the camera cannot capture a photo or video. • When connected to an HDTV, some of the camera’s playback functions may not be available. • The length of time after which the camera and an HDTV are connected may vary depending on the memory card that you are using. As the main feature of a memory card is to increase the transfer speed, it is not necessarily true to say that a memory card with a faster transfer speed is also fast in using the HDMI function. • 1920X1080 (60 fps) videos can be played only on full HDTVs capable of playback at 60 fps. Viewing files on an HDTV or 3D TV159 Connecting to external devices > Viewing files on an HDTV or 3D TV Viewing files on a 3D TV You can view photos or videos captured in 3D mode or with the 3D Panorama option in Smart mode on a 3D TV. 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] →q→ HDMI Output→ an option. (p. 153) 2 Select 3D HDMI Output→ an option. (p. 154) 3 Turn off your camera and 3D TV. 4 Connect your camera to your 3D TV with the optional HDMI cable. 5 Turn on your 3D TV, and then select the HDMI video source. 6 Turn on your camera. • The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you connect it to a 3D TV. 7 Move to a 3D file, and then press [I] to switch to 3D mode. • Press [I] again to switch to 2D Mode. 8 Turn on your TV's 3D function. • Refer to your TV's user manual for more details. 9 View 3D photos or play 3D videos using the camera buttons. • You cannot view an MPO file in 3D effect on TVs that do not support the file format. • Use proper 3D glasses when you view an MPO file or a 3D video file on a 3D TV. • Capturing photos in 3D Panorama mode may result in a less pronounced 3D effect than those captured in 3D mode with a 3D lens. Do not view the 3D photos or videos captured by your camera on a 3D TV or 3D monitor for an extended period of time. It may cause unpleasant symptoms, such as eyestrain, fatigue, nausea, and more.160 Connecting to external devices Transfer files on a memory card to your computer by connecting the camera to the PC. Transferring files to your Windows OS computer Connecting the camera as a removable disk You can connect the camera to your computer as a removable disk. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable. • You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. • If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 3 Turn on the camera. • The computer recognizes the camera automatically. 4 On your computer, select My Computer→Removable Disk →DCIM→100PHOTO or 101_0101. 5 Select the files you want, and then drag or save them to your computer. If the Folder Type is set to Date, the folder name appears as “XXX_MMDD”. For example, if you capture a photo on January 1, the folder name will be "101_0101". Transferring files to your computer161 Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) With Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8, the methods for disconnecting the camera are similar. 1 Ensure that no data is being transferred between the camera and the computer. • If the status lamp on your camera is blinking, it means the data transfer is in progress. Please wait until the status lamp stops blinking. 2 Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of your computer screen. 3 Click the pop-up message. 4 Click the message box indicating safely removed. 5 Remove the USB cable. Transferring files to your Mac OS Mac OS 10.5 or later is supported. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect your camera to a Macintosh computer with the USB cable. • You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. • If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly.162 Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer 3 Turn on the camera. • The computer recognizes the camera automatically and displays a removable disk icon. 4 Open the removable disk. 5 Transfer photos or videos to the Mac OS computer.163 Connecting to external devices You can view and edit files using the provided programs. You can also send the files to a PC wirelessly. Installing programs from the provided CD 1 Insert the installation CD into your PC. 2 Select a language. 3 Select a program to install. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions. 5 Click Exit to complete the installation. Available programs when using i-Launcher Item Description Multimedia Viewer You can view files with Multimedia Viewer. Firmware Upgrade You can download the firmware of your camera. PC Auto Backup You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. Using i-Launcher i-Launcher allows you to play back files with Multimedia Viewer and provides a link to download the PC Auto Backup program. Requirements for Windows OS Item Requirements CPU Intel® i5 3.3 GHz or higher/ AMD Phenom™ II x4 3.2 GHz or higher RAM Minimum 512 MB RAM (1 GB or more recommended) OS* Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8 Hard disk capacity 250 MB or more (1 GB and above recommended) Others • CD-ROM drive • 1024X768 pixels, 16-bit color display compatible monitor (1280X1024 pixels, 32-bit color display recommended) • USB 2.0 port • nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT or higher/ ATI X1600 series or higher • Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or higher * A 32-bit version of i-Launcher will be installed—even on 64-bit editions of Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8. Using programs on a PC164 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC • The requirements are recommendation only. i-Launcher may not work properly even when the computer meets the requirements, depending on the condition of your computer. • If your computer does not meet the requirements, videos may not play correctly. The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that results from using unqualified computers such as a computer you assembled yourself. Requirements for Mac OS Item Requirements OS Mac OS 10.5 or higher (except PowerPC) RAM Minimum 256 MB RAM (512 MB or more recommended) Hard disk capacity Minimum 110 MB Others USB 2.0 port, CD-ROM drive Opening i-Launcher On your computer, select Start→All Programs→Samsung→ i-Launcher→Samsung i-Launcher. Or, click Applications→Samsung →i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer.165 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Using Multimedia Viewer Multimedia Viewer allows you to play back files. From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click Multimedia Viewer. • Multimedia Viewer supports the following formats: - Videos: MP4 (Video: H.264, Audio: AAC), WMV (WMV 7/8/9), AVI (MJPEG) - Photos: JPG, GIF, BMP, PNG, TIFF, MPO • Files that have been recorded with other manufacturers’ devices may not play back smoothly. Viewing photos 1 2 3 1011 456789 No. Description 1 File name 2 Enlarged area 3 Histogram 4 Open the selected file. 5 Histogram button 6 Rotate to the left/Rotate to the right. 7 Move to the previous file/Move to the next file. 8 Fit the photo to the screen. 9 View the photo in the original size. 10 Zoom in/Zoom out 11 Switches between 2D and 3D mode.166 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Viewing videos 1 2 8 4567 3 No. Description 1 File name 2 Adjust the volume. 3 Open the selected file. 4 Move to the next file. 5 Stop No. Description 6 Pause 7 Move to the previous file. 8 Progress bar Downloading the firmware From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click Firmware Upgrade. Downloading the PC Auto Backup program From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click PC Auto Backup. For information about installing the PC Auto Backup program, refer to page 133.167 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 1 Insert Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM into your PC. 2 Select a language. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to JPEG formats and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to JPEG formats and are stored in the memory without any changes. With Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, you can calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of photos. You can also edit JPEG or TIFF files as well as RAW files. For more information, refer to the program guide.Chapter 7 Appendix Get information about error messages, camera maintenance, trouble shooting tips, specifications, and optional accessories. 169 Appendix When the following error messages appear, try these remedies. Error messages Suggested remedies Lens is locked The lens is locked. Rotate the lens counter-clockwise until you hear a click. (p. 45) Card Error • Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again. • Remove your memory card and insert it again. • Format your memory card. Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery. No Image File Capture photos or insert a memory card that contains photos. File Error Delete the damaged file or contact a service center. Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new memory card. Card Locked You can lock SD, SDHC, SDXC, or UHS-1 card to prevent files from being deleted. Unlock the card when shooting. (p. 173) Error messages Suggested remedies Folder and file number are max values. Replace the card File names do not match the DCF standard. Transfer the files on the memory card to your computer and format the card. (p. 155) Error 00 Turn off your camera and remount the lens. If the message still appears, contact a service center. Error 01/02 Turn off your camera, remove the battery, and insert again. If the message still appears, contact a service center. Error messages170 Appendix Cleaning the camera Camera lens and display Use a brush to remove dust and wipe the lens gently with a soft cloth. If any dust remains, apply lens cleaning liquid to a piece of cleaning paper and wipe gently. Image sensor Depending on different shooting conditions, dust may appear in photos because the image sensor is exposed to the external environment. This problem is normal, and the exposure to dust occurs in everyday use of the camera. You can remove dust from the sensor by operating the sensor cleaning function. (p. 156) If dust remains after cleaning the sensor, contact a service center. Do not insert the blower into the mounting opening of the lens. Camera body Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the device. These solutions can damage the camera or cause it to malfunction. Maintaining the camera171 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Using on beaches or shores • Protect your camera from sand and dirt when you use it on beaches or in other similar areas. • Your camera is not waterproof. Do not handle the battery, adapter, or memory card with wet hands. Operating the camera with wet hands may cause damage to your camera. Storing for extended period of time • When you store the camera for an extended period, place it in a sealed container with an absorbent material, such as silica gel. • Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use. • The present date and time can be initialized when the camera is turned on after the camera and battery have been separated for a prolonged period. Using or storing the camera Inappropriate places to use or store the camera • Avoid exposing the camera to very cold or very hot temperatures. • Avoid using your camera in areas with extremely high humidity, or where the humidity changes drastically. • Avoid exposing the camera to direct sunlight and storing it in hot, poorly-ventilated areas, such as in a car during summer time. • Protect your camera and the display from impact, rough handling, and excessive vibration to avoid serious damage. • Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty, humid, or poorlyventilated areas to prevent damage to moving parts and internal components. • Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles, or flammable chemicals. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the camera or its accessories. • Do not store the camera where there are mothballs.172 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Using the camera with caution in humid environments When you transfer the camera from a cold environment to a warm one, condensation can form on the lens or internal components of the camera. In this situation, turn off the camera and wait for at least 1 hour. If condensation forms on the memory card, remove the memory card from the camera and wait until all moisture has evaporated before reinserting it. Other cautions • Do not swing your camera by the strap. This may cause injury to yourself or others or damage to your camera. • Do not paint your camera, as paint can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. • Turn off the camera when not using it. • Your camera consists of delicate parts. Avoid impacts to the camera. • Protect the display from external force by keeping it in the case when not in use. Protect the camera from scratches by keeping it away from sand, sharp implements, or loose change. • Do not use the camera if the screen is cracked or broken. Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the camera to a Samsung service center to have it repaired. • Never place cameras, batteries, chargers, or accessories near, on, or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. These devices may be deformed and can overheat and cause a fire or explosion. • Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. • Protect your lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean your lens with a soft, clean, debris-free lens cloth. • The camera may turn off if impacted from the outside. This is to protect the memory card. Turn on the camera to use it again. • While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. • When you use the camera in low temperatures, it may take some time to turn on, the color of the display may be changed temporarily, or afterimages may appear. These conditions are not malfunctions and they will correct themselves when the camera is returned to milder temperatures. • Paint or metal on the outside of the camera may cause allergies, itchy skin, eczema, or swelling for people with sensitive skin. If you experience any of these symptoms, stop using the camera immediately and consult a doctor. • Do not insert foreign objects into any of your camera’s compartments, slots, or access points. Damage due to improper use may not be covered by your warranty. • Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the camera or attempt to service the camera yourself. Any damage that results from unqualified service is not covered by your warranty.173 Appendix > Maintaining the camera About memory card Supported memory card This product supports SD (Secure Digital), SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity), SDXC (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity), UHS-1 (Ultra High Speed-1), microSD, microSDHC, microSDXC, or microUHS-1 memory cards. Terminal Write-protect switch Label (front) You can prevent files from being deleted by using the write-protect switch on an SD, SDHC, SDXC, or UHS-1 card. Slide the switch down to lock or slide it up to unlock. Unlock the card when capturing photos and videos. Memory card adapter Memory card To use micro memory cards with this product, a PC, or a memory card reader, insert the card into an adapter.174 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Memory card capacity The memory capacity may differ depending on shooting scenes or shooting conditions. These capacities are based on a 2 GB SD card. Size Quality Super Fine Fine Normal RAW RAW + S.Fine RAW + Fine RAW + Normal Photo 20.0M (5472X3648) 151 179 218 69 47 49 52 10.1M (3888X2592) 276 321 384 - 62 64 66 5.9M (2976X1984) 423 484 565 - 71 72 74 2.0M (1728X1152) 845 923 1,016 - 82 83 84 Burst 479 545 631 - - - - 16.9M (5472X3080) 177 208 252 - 51 53 56 7.8M (3712X2088) 343 396 467 - 66 68 70 4.9M (2944X1656) 487 553 640 - 74 75 76 2.1M (1920X1080) 827 905 999 - 82 83 84 13.3M (3648X3648) 218 255 307 - 56 58 61 7.0M (2640X2640) 373 429 504 - 68 70 72 4.0M (2000X2000) 559 630 721 - 76 77 78 1.1M (1024X1024) 1,111 1,180 1,258 - 86 86 87175 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Size Quality HQ Normal Video 1920X1080 (60 fps) Approx. 10' 10" Approx. 12' 43" 1920X1080 (30 fps) Approx. 17' 41" Approx. 22' 09" * 1920X1080 (15 fps) Approx. 23' 38" Approx. 29' 24" 1920X810 (24 fps) Approx. 21' 35" Approx. 27' 02" 1280X720 (60 fps) Approx. 16' 51" Approx. 21' 06" 1280X720 (30 fps) Approx. 29' 11" Approx. 36' 35" 640X480 (30 fps) Approx. 120' 47" Approx. 153' 30" For Sharing (30 fps) Approx. 218' 48" Approx. 278' 24" * is available only with some Smart Filter options. • The figures above are measured without using the zoom function. • Available recording time may vary if you use the zoom. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. • The maximum recording time is 29 minutes and 59 seconds per file. • The maximum playback time of For Sharing videos is 30 seconds per file.176 Appendix > Maintaining the camera • Prevent memory cards from making contact with liquids, dirt, or foreign substances. If dirty, wipe the memory card clean with a soft cloth before you insert the memory card in your camera. • Do not allow liquids, dirt, or foreign substances to come in contact with memory cards or the memory card slot. Doing so may cause memory cards or the camera to malfunction. • When you carry a memory card, use a case to protect the card from electrostatic discharges. • Transfer important data to other media, such as a hard disk, CD, or DVD. • When you use the camera for an extended period, the memory card may become warm. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. • Use a memory card that meets the standard requirements. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Cautions when using memory cards • Avoid memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can cause memory cards to malfunction. • Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in the wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card. • Do not use memory cards that have been formatted by other cameras or by a computer. Reformat the memory card with your camera. • Turn off the camera when you insert or remove the memory card. • Do not remove the memory card or turn off your camera while the lamp is blinking, as this may damage your data. • When the lifespan of a memory card has expired, you cannot store any more photos on the card. Use a new memory card. • Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards to heavy impact or pressure. • Avoid using or storing memory cards near strong magnetic fields. • Avoid using or keeping memory cards in areas with high temperature, high humidity, or corrosive substances.177 Appendix > Maintaining the camera • Do not rest the device on flammable surfaces, such as bedding, carpets, or electric blankets for a prolonged period. • When the device is switched on, do not leave it in any confined space for a prolonged period. • Do not allow battery terminals to come in contact with metallic objects, such as necklaces, coins, keys, or watches. • Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. • Do not disassemble the battery or puncture the battery with any sharp object. • Avoid exposing the battery to high pressure or crushing forces. • Avoid exposing the battery to major impacts, such as dropping it from high places. • Do not expose the battery to temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F) or above. • Do not allow the battery to come in contact with moisture or liquids. • Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. Disposal guidelines • Dispose of the battery with care. • Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. • Disposal regulations may differ by country or region. Dispose of the battery in accordance with all local and federal regulations. Guidelines for charging the battery Charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. The battery can ignite or explode if not charged properly. About the battery Use only Samsung-approved batteries. Battery specifications Item Description Model BP1130 Type Lithium-ion battery Cell capacity 1,130 mAh Voltage 7.6 V Charging time* (When the battery is completely discharged) Approx. 215 min * Charging the battery by connecting it to a computer may take longer. Personal injury or death can occur if the battery is handled carelessly or improperly. For your safety, follow these instructions for proper battery handling: • The battery can ignite or explode if not handled properly. If you notice any deformities, cracks, or other abnormalities in the battery, immediately discontinue use of the battery and contact your manufacturer. • Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommend battery chargers and charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. • Do not place the battery near heating devices or expose to excessively warm environments, such as the inside of an enclosed car in the summertime. • Do not place the battery in a microwave oven. • Avoid storing or using the battery in hot, humid places, such as spas or shower enclosures.178 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Battery life Shooting mode Average time / Number of photos Photos Approx. 165 min/Approx. 330 photos Videos Approx. 110 min (Record videos at 1920X1080 resolution and 60 fps.) • The figures above are based on the CIPA test standards. Your results may differ depending on your actual usage. • Available shooting time differs depending on background, shooting interval, and use conditions. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. Low battery message When the battery has fully discharged, the battery icon will turn red and the "Low Battery" message will appear. Notes about using the battery • Avoid exposing batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the charging capacity of your batteries. • When you use the camera for an extended period, the area around the battery chamber may become warm. This does not affect the normal use of the camera. • Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. • In temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F, battery capacity and battery life may decrease. • Battery capacity may decrease in low temperatures, but will return to normal in milder temperatures. • Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Storing the camera for extended periods with the battery installed causes the battery to discharge. You may not be able to recharge a fully discharged battery. • When you do not use the camera for an extended period (3 months or more), check the battery and recharge it regularly. If you let the battery discharge continually, its capacity and life may decrease, which can lead to a malfunction, fire, or explosion.179 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Cautions about using the battery Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards from damage. Prevent batteries from making contact with metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage and may cause a fire or electric shock. Notes about charging the battery • If the status lamp is off, make sure that the battery is inserted correctly. • If the camera is on while charging, the battery may not fully charge. Turn off the camera before charging the battery. • Do not use your camera when you are charging the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. • Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. • Let the battery charge for at least 10 minutes before turning on the camera. • If you connect the camera to an external power source when the battery is depleted, using high energy-consuming functions will cause the camera to turn off. To use the camera normally, recharge the battery. • If you reconnect the power cable when the battery is fully charged, the status lamp turns on for approximately 30 minutes. • Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Charge the battery until the red status lamp turns off. • If the status lamp blinks in red, reconnect the cable, or remove the battery and insert it again. • If you charge the battery when the cable is overheated or the temperature is too high, the status lamp may blink in red. Charging will start when the battery cools down. • Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After charging is finished, disconnect the cable from your camera. • Do not bend or place heavy objects on the AC cable. Doing so may damage the cable.180 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Notes about charging with a computer connected • Use only the provided USB cable. • The battery may not charge when: - you use a USB hub - other USB devices are connected to your computer - you connect the cable to the port on the front side of your computer - the USB port of your computer does not support the power output standard (5 V, 500 mA) Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care • Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local regulations when you dispose of used batteries. • Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when they are overheated.181 Appendix Before contacting a service center If you are having trouble with your device, try these troubleshooting solutions before contacting a service professional. When you leave your camera at a service center, be sure to also leave the other components that may have contributed to the malfunction, such as the memory card and battery. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot turn on the camera • Ensure that the battery is inserted. • Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. • Charge the battery. The power turns off suddenly • Charge the battery. • Your camera may be in Power save mode or the display turns off automatically. (p. 153) • The camera may be turned off automatically to prevent the memory card from being damaged due to excessive heat. Turn on your camera again. The camera is losing battery power quickly • The battery may lose power more quickly in low temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F). Keep the battery warm by putting it into your pocket. • Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Recharge if needed. • Batteries are consumable parts that must be replaced over time. Get a new battery if the battery life is diminishing quickly. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot capture photos • There is no space on the memory card. Delete unnecessary files or insert a new card. • Format the memory card. • The memory card is defective. Get a new memory card. • The memory card is locked. Unlock the card. (p. 173) • Ensure that the camera is switched on. • Charge the battery. • Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. The camera freezes Remove the battery and insert it again. The camera heats up While using the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. The flash fires unexpectedly The flash may fire due to static electricity. The camera is not malfunctioning. The flash does not work • The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 94) • You cannot use the flash in some modes. The date and time are incorrect Set the date and time under the q menu. (p. 153) The display or buttons do not work Remove the battery and insert it again.182 Appendix > Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies The memory card has an error • Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again. • Remove your memory card, and then insert it again. • Format your memory card. See "Cautions when using memory cards" for more details. (p. 176) Your computer does not recognize an SDXC or UHS-1 memory card SDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. To use SDXC memory cards or UHS-1 memory cards that are formatted with the exFAT file system on a Windows XP computer, download and update the exFAT file system driver from the Microsoft website. Your TV or computer cannot display photos and videos that are stored on an SDXC or UHS-1 memory card SDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. To use SDXC memory cards or UHS-1 memory cards that are formatted with the exFAT file system, ensure that the external device is compatible with the exFAT file system before connecting the camera to the device. Cannot display files If you change the name of a file, your camera may not play the file (the name of the file should meet the DCF standard). If you encounter this situation, display files on your computer. The photo is blurry • Ensure that the focus option you set is suitable for the kind of shot you are capturing. • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • Ensure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the lens. (p. 170) Situation Suggested remedies The colors in the photo do not match the actual scene An incorrect White Balance can create unrealistic color. Select the proper White Balance option to suit the light source. (p. 76) The photo is too bright or too dark. Your photo is overexposed or underexposed. • Adjust the aperture value or the shutter speed. • Adjust the ISO sensitivity. (p. 75) • Turn off or on the flash. (p. 94) • Adjust the exposure value. (p. 102) Photos are distorted This camera can have minute distortion when using a wide-angle lens that enables shooting with a wide angle of view. This is normal, and does not cause malfunction. Playback screen does not appear on the connected external device • Ensure that HDMI cable is properly connected to the external monitor. • Ensure that the memory card is properly recorded. Your computer does not recognize your camera • Ensure that the USB cable is connected correctly. • Ensure that your camera is switched on. • Ensure that you are using a supported operating system. Your computer disconnects the camera while transferring files The file transfer may be interrupted by static electricity. Disconnect the USB cable and connect it again. 183 Appendix > Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies Your computer cannot play videos Videos may not play on some video player programs. To play video files captured with your camera, use the Multimedia Viewer program that you can install with the i-Launcher program on your computer. i-Launcher is not functioning properly • End i-Launcher and restart the program. • Depending on your computer's specifications and environment, the program may not launch automatically. In this case, click Start→All Programs→Samsung→ i-Launcher→Samsung i-Launcher on your Windows computer. (For Windows 8, open Start screen, and then select All apps→ Samsung i-Launcher.) Or, click Applications →Samsung→i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer. Cannot set the DPOF for RAW files You cannot set the DPOF for RAW files. Auto Focus does not work • Subject is not in focus. When the subject is outside the AF area, shoot by moving the subject inside the AF area and half-pressing [Shutter]. • Subject is too close. Step back from the subject and shoot. • The focus mode is set to MF. Switch the mode to AF. Situation Suggested remedies AEL feature does not work AEL feature does not work in t, M, i, and s modes. Select another mode to use this feature. Lens does not work • Ensure that the lens is properly mounted. • Remove the lens from the camera and re-mount it. External flash or GPS does not work Ensure that the external device is properly mounted and turned on. The date & time settings screen appears when you power on the camera • Set the date and time again. • This screen appears when the camera’s internal power source is completely discharged. Insert a fully charged battery and wait at least 72 hours in power off status for the internal power source to be recharged.184 Appendix Camera specifications Image Sensor Type CMOS Sensor size 23.5 X 15.7 mm Effective pixels Approx. 20.3 mega-pixels Total pixels Approx. 21.6 mega-pixels Color filter RGB primary color filter Lens Mount Type Samsung NX Mount Available lens Samsung lenses Image Stabilization Type Lens shift (depends on lens) Mode Off/Mode 1/Mode 2 Distortion Correct Off/On (depends on lens) i-Function E, Z (X1.2, 1.4, 1.7, 2.0) Dust Reduction Type Super sonic drive Display Type AMOLED with Touch Panel (C-type Touch Control Enabled) Size 3.31" (Approx. 84.0 mm) Resolution WVGA (800X480) 768 k dots (PenTile) Field of view Approx. 100 % Angle Tiltable (Up 90°, Down 45°) User display Grid Line, Icons, Histogram, Distance Scale, Level gauge Focusing Type Phase Detection & Contrast AF Focusing point • Total AF point: 105 points (Phase Detection AF), 247 points (Contrast AF) • Selection: 1 point (Free selection) • Multi: Normal 21 (3 X 7) points (Cross point 1), Close up 35 points • Face detection: Max. 10 faces Mode Single AF, Continuous AF, Manual Focus, Touch AF & Shutter AF Assist Lamp Green LED185 Appendix > Camera specifications Shutter Type Electronically controlled vertical-run focal plane shutter Speed • Auto: 1/6,000–30 sec. • Manual: 1/6,000–30 sec. (1/3 EV Step) • Bulb (time limit: 4 min) Exposure Metering system TTL 221 (17 X 13) Block segment Metering: Multi, Center-weighted, Spot Metering range: EV 0–18 (ISO100 · 30 mm, F2) Compensation ±3 EV (1/3 EV Step) AE lock CUSTOM key ISO equivalent • 1 Step: Auto, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200, ISO 6400, ISO 12800, ISO 25600 • 1/3 Step: Auto, ISO 100, ISO 125, ISO 160, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200, ISO 4000, ISO 5000, ISO 6400, ISO 8000, ISO 10000, ISO 12800, ISO 16000, ISO 20000, ISO 25600 Drive Mode Mode Single, Continuous, Burst (5M only), Timer, Bracket (Auto Exposure, White Balance, Picture Wizard) Continuous shooting • JPEG: High (8.6 fps), Normal (5 fps) • RAW: High (8.6 fps), Normal (5 fps) Burst shooting • 10, 15, or 30 frames per second • Up to 30 shots per shutter-press Bracket shooting Auto exposure bracketing (±3 EV), White Balance bracketing, Picture Wizard bracketing Self-timer 2–30 sec. (1 second interval) Shutter release SR2NX02 (via Micro USB port) (optional) Flash Type External Flash (Bundle with SEF8A) Mode Smart Flash, Auto, Auto Red-eye, Fill in, Fill-in Red, 1st Curtain, 2nd Curtain, Off Guide number 8 (based on ISO 100) (SEF8A) Angle of view 28 mm (35 mm film equivalent) Sync speed Less than 1/180 sec.186 Appendix > Camera specifications Flash EV -2–+2 EV (0.5 EV Step) External flash Optional Samsung external flashes: SEF42A, SEF220A Sync terminal Hot-shoe White Balance Mode Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent White, Fluorescent NW, Fluorescent Daylight, Tungsten, Flash WB, Custom Set, Color Temperature (Manual) Micro adjustment Amber/Blue/Green/Magenta 7 steps respectively Dynamic Range Off/Smart Range+/HDR Picture Wizard Mode Standard, Vivid, Portrait, Landscape, Forest, Retro, Cool, Calm, Classic, Custom1, Custom2, Custom3 Parameter Color, Saturation, Sharpness, Contrast Shooting Mode Smart Auto, Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, Manual, Lens Priority, Smart Smart mode Beauty Face, Best Face, Landscape, Macro, Action Freeze, Rich Tones, Panorama, Waterfall, Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks, Light Trace, Creative Shot Smart Filter Vignetting, Miniature, Colored Pencil, Watercolor, Wash drawing, Oil Sketch, Ink Sketch, Acryl, Negative, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow Size • JPEG (3:2): 20.0M (5472X3648), 10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824) (Burst mode only), 2.0M (1728X1152) • JPEG (16:9): 16.9M (5472X3080), 7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) • JPEG (1:1): 13.3M (3648X3648), 7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) • RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648) * 3D mode with 3D lens is available only with JPEG (16:9) 4.1M (2688X1512) or 2.1M (1920X1080). Quality Super Fine, Fine, Normal RAW standard SRW (ver.2.0.0) Color space sRGB, Adobe RGB187 Appendix > Camera specifications Video Type MP4 (H.264) Format Movie: H.264, Sound: AAC Movie AE mode Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, Manual Movie clip Audio on/off (Shooting time: Max. 29' 59'') Smart Filter Vignetting, Miniature, Colored Pencil, Watercolor, Wash drawing, Oil Sketch, Ink Sketch, Acryl, Negative, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow Size 1920X1080, 1920X810, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240 (For Sharing) Frame rate 60 fps, 30 fps, 24 fps (available only with 1920X810), 15 fps (available only with some Smart Filter options) Multi Motion x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 only), x0.5 (1280X720 (30 fps), 640X480, 320X240 only), x1, x5, x10, x20 Quality HQ, Normal Sound Stereo Edit Still image capture, Time trimming Playback Type Single image, Thumbnails (15/28), Slide show, Movie Edit Smart Filter, Red-eye Fix, Backlight, Resize, Rotate, Face Retouch, Brightness, Contrast Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Colored Pencil, Watercolor, Wash drawing, Oil Sketch, Ink Sketch, Acryl, Negative, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow Smart filter size • JPEG (3:2): 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824), 2.0M (1728X1152) • JPEG (16:9): 6.2M (3328X1872), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) • JPEG (1:1): 6.0M (2448X2448), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) Storage Media External memory (optional)*: SD card (2 GB guaranteed), SDHC card (up to 32 GB guaranteed), SDXC card (up to 64 GB guaranteed), UHS-1 card * Class 6 and above recommended File format RAW (SRW (ver.2.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.21), MPO (3D), DCF, DPOF 1.1 GPS Type Geo-tagging with an optional GPS Module (WGS 84) Feature Location name (English and Korean only)188 Appendix > Camera specifications Wireless network Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n support Dual Band Function MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Auto Backup, Email, SNS & Cloud, AllShare Play, AutoShare, Wi-Fi Direct NFC Yes Interface Digital output USB 2.0 (micro USB jack) Video output • NTSC, PAL (selectable) • HDMI External release Yes (micro USB) External microphone Yes DC power input DC 5.0V, 1A via micro USB Power Source Type Rechargeable battery: BP1130 (1,130 mAh) * The power source may differ depending on your region. Dimensions (W X H X D) 122 X 63.7 X 40.7 mm (without protrusions) Weight 284 g (without battery and memory card) Operating Temperature 0–40 °C Operating Humidity 5–85 % Software i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom * Specifications may change without notice to improve performance. * Other brands and products names are trademarks of respective owners.189 Appendix Glossary AP (Access Point) An access point is a device that allows wireless devices to connect to a wired network. Ad-Hoc network An ad-hoc network is a temporary connection for sharing files or an internet connection and between computers and devices. AdobeRGB Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket) This feature automatically captures several images at different exposures to help you capture a properly-exposed image. AEL/AFL (Auto Exposure Lock/Auto Focus Lock) These features help you lock the exposure or focus on which you want to focus or calculate the exposure. AF (Auto Focus) A system that automatically focuses the camera lens on the subject. Your camera uses the contrast to focus automatically. AMOLED (Active-matrix organic light-emitting diode) / LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) AMOLED is a visual display that is very thin and light, as it does not need backlighting. LCD is a visual display commonly used in consumer electronics. This display needs a separate backlight, such as CCFL or LED, to reproduce colors. Aperture The aperture controls the amount of light that reaches the camera’s sensor.190 Appendix > Glossary Composition Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) A specification to define a file format and file system for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA). Depth of field The distance between the nearest and farthest points that can be acceptably focused in a photograph. Depth of field varies with lens aperture, focal length, and distance from the camera to the subject. Selecting a smaller aperture, for example, will increase the depth of field and blur the background of a composition. DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) A format for writing printing information, such as selected images and number of prints, on a memory card. DPOF-compatible printers, sometimes available at photo shops, can read the information from the card for convenient printing. Camera shake (Blur) If the camera is moved while the shutter is open, the entire image may appear blurred. This occurs more often when the shutter speed is slow. Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, or using a faster shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod or the OIS function to stabilize the camera. Cloud Computing Cloud computing is a technology that allows you to store data on remote servers and to use them from a device with internet access. Color space The range of colors that the camera can see. Color temperature Color Temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin (K) that indicates the hue of a specific type of light source. As the color temperature increases, the color of the light source has a more bluish quality. As the color temperature decreases, the color of the light source has a more reddish quality. At 5,500 degrees Kelvin, the color of the light source is similar to the sun at midday.191 Appendix > Glossary Flash A speed light that helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point(in millimeters). Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. Histogram A graphical representation of the brightness of an image. The horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels. High points at the left (too dark) and right (too bright) on the histogram indicate a photo that is improperly exposed. H.264/MPEG-4 A high-compression video format established by international standard organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T. This codec is capable of providing good video quality at low bit rates developed by the Joint Video Team (JVT). EV (Exposure Value) All the combinations of the camera’s shutter speed and lens aperture that result in the same exposure. EV Compensation This feature allows you to quickly adjust the exposure value measured by the camera, in limited increments, to improve the exposure of your photos. Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) A specification to define an image file format for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA). Exposure The amount of light allowed to reach the camera’s sensor. Exposure is controlled by a combination of the shutter speed, the aperture value, and ISO sensitivity.192 Appendix > Glossary Metering The metering refers to the way in which the camera measures the quantity of light to set the exposure. MF (Manual Focus) A system that manually focuses the camera lens on the subject. You can use the focus ring to focus on a subject. MJPEG (Motion JPEG) A video format which is compressed as a JPEG image. MPO (Multi Picture Object) An image file format that contains multiple images in a file. An MPO file provides a 3D effect on MPO-compatible displays, such as 3D TVs or 3D monitors. Image sensor The physical part of a digital camera that contains a photosite for each pixel in the image. Each photosite records the brightness of the light that strikes it during an exposure. Common sensor types are CCD (Chargecoupled Device) and CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor). IP (Internet protocol) address An IP address is a unique number that is assigned to every device that is connected to the internet. ISO sensitivity The sensitivity of the camera to light, based on the equivalent film speed used in a film camera. At higher ISO sensitivity settings, the camera uses a higher shutter speed, which can reduce blur caused by camera shake and low light. However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise. JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) A lossy method of compression for digital images. JPEG images are compressed to reduce their overall file size with minimal deterioration of the image resolution. 193 Appendix > Glossary PAL (Phase Alternate Line) A video color encoding standard used in numerous countries throughout Africa, Asia, Europe, and the Middle East. Quality An expression of the rate of compression used in a digital image. Higher quality images have a lower rate of compression, which usually results in a larger file size. RAW (CCD raw data) The original, unprocessed data, collected directly from the camera’s image sensor. White Balance, contrast, saturation, sharpness, and other data can be manipulated with editing software before the image is compressed into a standard file format. Resolution The number of pixels present in a digital image. High resolution images contain more pixels and typically show more detail than low resolution images. Noise Misinterpreted pixels in a digital image that may appear as misplaced or random, bright pixels. Noise usually occurs when photos are shot with a high sensitivity or when a sensitivity is automatically set in a dark place. NFC (Near Field Communication) NFC is a set of standards for radio communication at very close proximity. You can use NFC-enabled devices to activate features or exchange data with other devices. NTSC (National Television System Committee) A video color encoding standard used most commonly in Japan, North America, the Philippines, South America, South Korea, and Taiwan. Optical zoom This is a general zoom which can enlarge images with a lens and does not deteriorate quality of images.194 Appendix > Glossary Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. A fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in motion. sRGB (Standard RGB) International standard of color space established by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for PC monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif. Vignetting A reduction of an image’s brightness or saturation at the periphery (outer edges) compared to the center of the image. Vignetting can draw interest to subjects positioned in the center of an image. White Balance (Color balance) An adjustment of the intensities of colors (typically the primary colors red, green, and blue), in an image. The goal of adjusting the White Balance, or color balance, is to correctly render the colors in an image. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi is a technology that allows electronic devices to exchange data wirelessly over a network. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) WPS is a technology that secures wireless home networks.195 Appendix Optional accessories Lens SAMSUNG 18-55 mm F3.5-5.6 OIS III SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 SAMSUNG 20 mm F2.8 SAMSUNG 30 mm F2 SAMSUNG 50-200 mm F4-5.6 ED OIS III SAMSUNG 60 mm F2.8 Macro ED OIS SSA SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS Lens SAMSUNG 85 mm F1.4 ED SSA SAMSUNG 12-24 mm F4-5.6 ED SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 [T6] 2D/3D External flash SEF42A SEF220A GPS GPS10196 Appendix > Optional accessories Shutter release (micro USB type) Microphone SR2NX02 EM10 Rechargeable battery Battery charger BP1130 BC3NX01 Camera bag Camera case Memory card Filter USB cable HDMI cable Strap • These illustrations may differ from your actual items. Refer to the user manuals of these optional accessories for details. • Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using another manufacturer’s accessories.197 Appendix A Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 167 AllShare Play 141 Aperture 16, 20 Auto Backup 133 Auto focus 80 B Battery Caution 177 Charging 34 Insert 33 Best Face mode 65 Bracketing 92 C Camera Connecting as removable disk 160 Connecting to PC 160 Disconnecting (Windows) 161 Layout 30 Camera specifications 184 Charging 34 Color space 148 D Date & Time 153 Depth of Field (DOF) 17, 22 Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) 114 DIRECT LINK 32 Display brightness 152 Display type 43 Drive 90 E Enlarging 113 Exposure Value (EV) 16, 102 F Fader 105 Files Deleting 111 Photo type 74 Protecting 110 Video type 104 Flash Bounce photography 27 Flash options 94 Guide number 26 Intensity 95 F-number 16 Focal length 21 Focus assist 88 Focus Peaking 88 I Icons Playback mode 42 Shooting mode 40 i-Function 61 i-Launcher 163 Image adjustment Adjusting photos 119 Red-eye 120 Retouching faces 120 ISO sensitivity 75 i-Zoom 63 L Lenses Layout 44 Locking 45 Markings 47 Unlocking 46 M Maintenance 170 Memory card Caution 173 Insert 33 Metering 97 MobileLink 129 Index198 Appendix > Index O One touch shot 87 Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) 89 Optional accessories Attach the GPS module 51 Connect the flash 49 Flash layout 48 GPS module layout 51 P Panorama mode 66 Photos Editing 117 Enlarging 113 Shooting options 73 Viewing on 3D TV 159 Viewing on camera 108 Viewing on HDTV 158 Picture Wizard 79 Posture 13 Power save mode 153 R Red-eye effect Playback mode 120 Shooting mode 95 Remote Viewfinder 131 Resolution Playback mode 118 Shooting mode (Movie) 104 Shooting mode (Photo) 73 Retouching faces 120 Rotating 118 Rule of thirds 24 S Service center 181 Settings 152 Shooting modes Aperture Priority 57 Lens Priority 60 Manual 59 Program 55 Recording 68 Shutter Priority 58 Smart 64 Smart Auto 53 Shutter speed 18, 20 Slide show 113 Smart filter Playback mode 121 Shooting mode 101 Smart panel 38 T Thumbnails 108 Timer 91 Touch AF 86 Touch screen 36 Tracking AF 86 Transferring files Mac 161 Windows 160 TV 158 U Unpacking 29 V Video Out 153 Videos Capturing 116 Options 104 Recording 68 Viewing 115 W White balance 76 Wireless network 123 3 3D mode 69199 Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278 - 0799 Appendix200 Appendix FCC notice Caution: Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorientate or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the distance between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Declaration of Conformity Trade Name : Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Model No. : Samsung NX300 Responsible Party : Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Address : 85 Challenger Road, Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660 Telephone No. : 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. RF exposure statements: This device is for handheld operation only. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. FCC ID:A3LNX300201 TA-2012/1802 APPROVED Model : NX300 Year of Manufacture : 2013 CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution: Any changes or modifications to the equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void user’s authority to operate the equipment. IC: 649E-NX300 This equipment may be operated in all EU countries. In France, this equipment may only be used indoors. Complies with IDA Standards DA100790 No.: ESD-1306913C TRC/SS/2013/17Please refer to the warranty that came with your product or visit our website www.samsung.com for after-sales service or inquiries. imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) Electric Range installation manual ENGLISH This manual is made with 100% recycled paper. Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 1 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:442_ Before you begin before you begin ANTI-TIP DEVICE WARNING: To reduce the risk of tipping the appliance, the appliance must be secured by properly installed anti-tip devices packed with the appliance. a) A child or adult can tip the range and be killed. b) Install the anti-tip device to the structure and/or the range at rear right (or rear left) of the range bottom. c) Engage the range to the anti-tip device by leveling leg at rear right (or rear left) of the range bottom. d) Re-engage the anti-tip device if the range is moved. e) See installation instructions for details. f) Failure to do so can result in death or serious burns to children or adults. AbouT ThIs mANuAl READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS COMPLETELY AND CAREFULLY. Important note to the installer • Read all instructions contained in these installation instructions before installing range. • Remove all packing materials from the oven compartments before connecting the electrical supply to the range. • Observe all governing codes and ordinances. • Be sure to leave these instructions with the consumer. Important note to the consumer Keep these instructions for the local electrical inspector’s use. • As when using any appliance generating heat, there are certain safety precautions you should follow. • Be sure your range is installed and grounded properly by a qualified installer or service technician. • Make sure the wall coverings around the range can withstand the heat generated by the range. • To eliminate the need to reach over the surface elements, cabinet storage space above the elements should be avoided. • The range should not be placed on a base. FoR YouR sAFETY WARNINGWARNING If the information in this manual is not followed exactly, a fire or electrical shock may result causing property damage, personal injury or death. WARNINGWARNING Before beginning the installation, switch power off at the service panel and lock the service disconnecting means to prevent power from being switched on accidentally. When the service disconnecting means cannot be locked, securely fasten a prominent warning device, such as a tag, to the service panel. WARNINGWARNING This appliance must be properly grounded. WARNING Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 2 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:4401 PREPARING TO INSTALL Preparing to install the range _3 preparing to install the range REmoVE PACKAGING Remove packaging materials. Failure to remove packaging materials could result in damage to the appliance. PREPARE Tools & PARTs What tools you will need Drill Adjustable Wrench Pliers 1/4˝ Nut Driver Phillips Screwdriver Flat Screwdriver Pencil Level What’s included with your range Template Anti-Tip Bracket Screws (2 ea) 4-Wire Cord or 3-Wire Cord (UL Approved 40 or 50 AMP) What’s not included Strain Relief (For Conduit Installation Only) Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 3 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:454_ Preparing to install the range ChECKING ThE INsTAllATIoN sITE Clearances and dimensions To install the range, refer to the following fi gure. For installation in CANADA, a Free-standing range is not to be installed closer than 12mm from any adjacent surface. CAUTION CAUTION This range has been designed to comply with the maximum allowable wood cabinet temperatures of 194°F. Make sure the wall covering, countertops and cabinets around the range can withstand the heat (up to 194°F) generated by the range. If not, discoloration, delamination or melting may occur. A B 36” 30” 24” 6” 25” 3” 24” 3” A : Cabinet opening 30” For U.S.A, 30”~31” For CANADA. B : Acceptable electrical outlet area Minimum dimensions IMPORTANT To eliminate the risk of burns or fi re caused by reaching over heated surface units, cabinet storage space located above the surface units should be avoided. If cabinet storage is to be provided, the risk can be reduced by installing a range hood that projects horizontally a minimum of 5” beyond the bottom of the cabinets. * 30” 30” ** 15” * 30” minimum clearance between the top of the cooking surface and the bottom of an unprotected wood or metal cabinet; or 24” minimum when the bottom of the wood or metal cabinet is protected by not less than 1/4” fl ame retardant millboard covered with not less than no.28 MSG sheet steel, 0.015” stainless steel, 0.024” aluminum or 0.020” copper. ** 15” minimum between the countertop and the adjacent cabinet bottom. Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 4 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:4602 CONNECTING THE POWER Connecting the power _5 connecting the power sTEP 1. mEETING ElECTRICAl CoNNECTIoN REQuIREmENTs CAUTION CAUTIONFor personal safety, do not use an extension cord with this appliance. Remove house fuse or open circuit breaker before beginning installation. This appliance must be supplied with the proper voltage and frequency, and connected to an individual properly grounded branch circuit, protected by a circuit breaker or fuse having amperage as specifi ed on the rating plate. The rating plate is located above the drawer on the oven frame. (Fig. 1 or Fig. 2) We recommend you have the electrical wiring and hookup of your range connected by a qualifi ed electrician. After installation, have the electrician show you where your main range disconnect is located. Check with your local utilities for electrical codes which apply in your area. Failure to wire your oven according to governing codes could result in a hazardous condition. If there are no local codes, your range must be wired and fused to meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70–Latest Edition. You can get a copy by writing: National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park Quincy, MA 02269 Effective January 1, 1996, the National Electrical Code requires that new construction (not existing) utilize a 4-conductor connection to an electric range. When installing an electric range in new construction, follow Steps 2 and 3 for 4-wire connection. You must use a 3-wire or 4-wire, single-phase A.C. 208Y/120 Volt or 240/120 Volt, 60 hertz electrical system. If the electrical service provided does not meet the above specifi cations, have a licensed electrician install an approved outlet. Use only a 3-conductor or a 4-conductor UL-listed range cord. These cords may be provided with ring terminals on wire and a strain relief device. A range cord rated at 40 amps with 125/250 minimum volt range is required. A 50 amp range cord is not recommended but if used, it should be marked for use with nominal 13⁄8” diameter connection openings. Care should be taken to center the cable and strain relief within the knockout hole to keep the edge from damaging the cable. • Because range terminals are not accessible after range is in position, fl exible service conduit or cord must be used. NOTE If conduit is being used, go to Step 4 on page 9. ALL NEW BRANCH-CIRCUIT CONSTRUCTIONS, MOBILE HOMES, RECREATIONAL VEHICLES AND INSTALLATIONS WHERE LOCAL CODES DO NOT ALLOW GROUNDING THROUGH NEUTRAL, REQUIRE A 4-CONDUCTOR UL-LISTED RANGE CORD. (Fig. 1) (Fig. 2) Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 5 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:476_ Connecting the power sTEP 2. ACCEssING ThE PoWER CoRD CoNNECTIoN Remove the rear access cover and loosen the screw with a screwdriver. The terminal block will then be accessible. Access cover Terminal block Specifi ed power-supply-cord kit rating Range rating, watts Specifi ed rating of power-supply-cord kit, amperes Diameter (inches) of range connection opening 120/240 volts 3-wire Power cord Conduit 8,750 - 16,500 40 or 50A 13/8” 11/8” Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 6 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:4802 CONNECTING THE POWER Connecting the power _7 sTEP 3. INsTAllING ThE PoWER CoRD For power cord installations, hook the strain relief over the power cord hole (13/8”) located below the rear of the drawer body. Insert the power cord through the strain relief and tighten the device. Strain relief Power cord Conduit connection plate • You must install the power cord with a strain relief. • Attach the strain relief to the 13/8” opening in conduit connection plate. Installing a 3-wire power cord WARNINGWARNING The neutral or ground wire of the power cord must be connected to the neutral terminal located in the center of the terminal block. The power leads must be connected to the lower left and the lower right terminals of the terminal block. 1. Remove the 3 lower terminal screws from the terminal block. 2. Insert the 3 terminal screws through each power cord terminal ring and into the lower terminals of the terminal block. Be certain that the center wire (white/neutral) is connected to the center lower position of the terminal block. 3. Tighten screws securely into the terminal block. DO NOT remove the ground strap connection. 4. Go to step 5 on page 10 and proceed with the installation. Neutral Ground strap terminal Black White Red Black White Red Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 7 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:498_ Connecting the power Installing a 4-wire power cord WARNINGWARNING The neutral wire of the supply circuit must be connected to the neutral terminal located in the lower center of the terminal block. The power leads must be connected to the lower left and the lower right terminals of the terminal block. The 4th grounding lead must be connected to the frame of the range with the ground plate and the ground screw. 1. Remove the 3 lower terminal screws from the terminal block. Remove the ground screw and ground plate and retain them. 2. Cut and discard the ground strap. Do not discard any screws. 3. Insert the one ground screw into the power cord ground wire terminal ring, through the ground plate, and into the frame of the range. 4. Insert the 3 terminal screws (removed earlier) through each power cord terminal ring and into the lower terminals of the terminal block. Be certain that the center wire (white/neutral) is connected to the center lower position of the terminal block. Tighten screws securely into the terminal block. 5. Go to step 5 on page 10 and proceed with the installation. Ground strap Ground plate Ground screw Neutral terminal Ground wire (Green) White Black Red Black White Red Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 8 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5002 CONNECTING THE POWER Connecting the power _9 sTEP 4. INsTAllING ThE CoNDuIT Remove the conduit connection plate from the rear of the drawer body and rotate it as shown below. The conduit hole (11/8”) must be used. 11/8” 13/8” 11 13/8” /8” 1. Prepare the conduit cord shown in Figure 1. 2. Install the conduit cord as shown in Figure 2. Conduit connection plate Strain relief Ring Body Figure 2 1” 31/2” 3/8” 1” 31/2” 3 wire 4 wire Knockout surface Figure 1 3/8” For conduit installations, insert the strain relief (not included) into the conduit hole (11/8”). Then thread the conduit cord through the body of the strain relief and fasten the ring. Reinstall the bracket. Installing a 3-wire conduit • Aluminum building wire may be used but it must be rated for the correct amperage and voltage to make the connection. Connect wires according to Step 4 depending on the number of wires. • Wire used, location and enclosure of splices, etc., must conform to good wiring practices and local codes. 1. Loosen the 3 lower terminal screws from the terminal block. 2. Insert the center bare wire (white/neutral) tip through the bottom center terminal block opening. On certain models, the wire will need to be inserted through the ground strap opening and then into the bottom center block opening. 3. Insert the two side bare wire tips into the lower left and the lower right terminal block openings. 4. Tighten the screws until the wire is fi rmly secured (35 to 50 inch-lbs.). Do not over-tighten the screws since it could damage the wires. 5. Go to step 5 on page 10 and proceed with the installation. Black White Red Ground strap Neutral terminal Wire tips Red White Black Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 9 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5110_ Connecting the power Installing a 4-wire conduit • Aluminum building wire may be used but it must be rated for the correct amperage and voltage to make the connection. Connect wires according to this Step 4 depending on the number of wires. • Wire used, location and enclosure of splices, etc., must conform to good wiring practices and local codes. 1. Loosen the 3 lower terminal screws from the terminal block. Remove the ground screw and ground plate and retain them. 2. Cut and discard the ground strap. Do not discard any screws. 3. Insert the ground bare wire tip between the range frame and the ground plate (removed earlier) and secure it in place with the ground screw (removed earlier). 4. Insert the bare wire (white/neutral) tip through the bottom center of the terminal block opening. 5. Insert the two side bare wire tips into the lower left and the lower right terminal block openings. 6. Tighten the screws until the wire is fi rmly secured (35 to 50 inch-lbs.). Do not over-tighten the screws since it could damage the wires. 7. Go to step 5 and proceed with the installation. Ground strap Ground plate White Black Red Neutral terminal Ground wire (Green) Wire tips White Black Red sTEP 5. REPlACING ThE ACCEss CoVER Replace the access cover on the range back. To replace the wire cover, insert double projections in the pockets located below the opening and tighten the screw. Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 10 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:53Installing the range _11 03 INSTALLING THE RANGE installing the range INsTAllING ThE ANTI-TIP DEVICE WARNINGWARNING To reduce the risk of tipping, the appliance must be secured by properly installing the Anti-Tip device packed with the appliance. • Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the bracket. • Unless properly installed, the range could be tipped by stepping or sitting on the door. Injury may result from spilled hot liquids or from the range itself. Anti-Tip bracket Screw must enter wood or concrete *approximately 21/32”(16.5mm) *NOTE: To install Anti-Tip bracket, release the leveling leg. A minimum clearance of 21/32”(16.5mm) is required between the range bottom and the kitchen fl oor. 1. Locate the bracket using the template The Anti-Tip bracket is packaged with a template. The instructions include information necessary to complete the installation. Read and follow the instructions on the sheet (template) for range installation. 2. Level the range Level the range by adjusting the leveling legs with a wrench. Lower range Raise range Leveling leg Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 11 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5412_ Installing the range 3. Check your adjustments Use a spirit level to check your adjustments. Place the level diagonally on the oven rack or surface cooktop, and check each direction for level. 1. Check direction 1. 2. Check direction 2. If the spirit level doesn’t show level on the oven rack or surface cooktop, adjust the leveling legs with a wrench. FINAlIZING ThE INsTAllATIoN • Move range close enough to the opening to plug into the receptacle. • Slide range into position insuring that the rear left(or rear right) leg slides under the Anti-Tip bracket. The range will sit 0” away from the back wall when properly installed. • Carefully tip the range forward to insure that the Anti-Tip bracket engages the back brace and prevents tip-over. • Turn on the electrical power. Check the range for proper operation as described in the user manual. Anti-Tip bracket Leveling leg DG68-00109F-01 Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 12 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:54un monde de possibilités Nous vous remercions d'avoir choisi ce produit Samsung. Afin de bénéficier du meilleur du service après-vente, enregistrez votre appareil sur le site suivant : www.samsung.com/register 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) Manuel d'utilisation Manuel d'installation FRANÇAIS CANADIEN Ce manuel est en papier recyclé à 100%. Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 1 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:552_ Avant de commencer avant de commencer DISPOSITIF ANTI-BASCULEMENT AVERTISSEMENT : Pour réduire le risque de basculement de l’appareil, ce dernier doit être sécurisé à l’aide des dispositifs anti-basculement correctement installés, fournis dans l’emballage. a) Adultes ou enfants peuvent faire basculer la cuisinière et être tués. b) Installez le dispositif anti-basculement sur la structure et/ou sur la cuisinière à l’arrière droit (ou arrière gauche) du dessous de l’appareil. c) Engagez le pied de mise à niveau de la cuisinière situé à l’arrière droit (ou arrière gauche) du dessous de l’appareil dans le dispositif anti-basculement. d) Engagez à nouveau le dispositif anti-basculement si la cuisinière est déplacée. e) Reportez-vous aux consignes d’installation pour plus d’informations. f) Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des brûlures graves ou des blessures mortelles chez l’enfant et l’adulte. A PrOPOS DE CE MANUEL LISEZ ENTIÈREMENT ET ATTENTIVEMENT CES INSTRUCTIONS. Note importante destinée à l'installateur • Lisez l'intégralité des consignes d'installation avant d'installer la cuisinière. • Retirez tous les éléments d'emballage des compartiments du four avant de raccorder la cuisinière à l'alimentation électrique. • Respectez tous les codes et règlements en vigueur. • Assurez-vous de laisser ces instructions à l'utilisateur. Note importante destinée à l'utilisateur Conservez précieusement ces instructions afin que la personne chargée du contrôle électrique puisse s'y reporter. • Comme pour tout appareil générant de la chaleur, certaines consignes de sécurité sont à respecter. • Assurez-vous que votre appareil est correctement installé et mis à la terre par un installateur qualifié ou un technicien spécialisé. • Assurez-vous que les revêtements muraux situés à proximité de l'appareil peuvent résister à la chaleur générée par celui-ci. • Pour ne pas avoir à accéder à l'espace au-dessus des éléments de cuisson, évitez d'y aménager des meubles de rangement. • La cuisinière ne doit pas être placée sur un socle. POUr VOTrE SÉCUrITÉ AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Si vous ne respectez pas scrupuleusement les informations contenues dans ce manuel, vous risquez de provoquer un incendie ou un choc électrique et, par conséquent, des dégâts matériels, blessures ou accidents mortels. AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Avant de démarrer l'installation, coupez l'alimentation au panneau de commande et verrouillez les dispositifs de débranchement de la mise en service ; cette précaution évitera toute mise sous tension accidentelle de l'appareil. Si vous ne parvenez pas à verrouiller les moyens de débranchement de la mise en service, fixez fermement au panneau de commande un dispositif d'alarme bien visible. AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Cet appareil doit être correctement mis à la terre. AVERTISSEMENT Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 2 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5501 PREPARATION DE L'INSTALLATION Préparation avant l'installation de la cuisinière _3 préparation avant l'installation de la cuisinière rETrAIT DE L'EMBALLAGE Retirez le matériel d'emballage. Tout matériel d'emballage non retiré risque d'endommager l'appareil. PrEPArATION DES OUTILS ET DES PIECES Outils nécessaires Perceuse Clé à molette Pince Tournevis à douille de 1/4˝ Tournevis cruciforme Tournevis plat Crayon Niveau Accessoires fournis Modèle Support anti-basculement Vis (2 ch) Cordon 4 fils ou 3 fils (homologué UL 40 ou 50 AMP) Accessoires non fournis Protection contre la traction (pour le branchement des gaines uniquement) Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 3 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:564_ Préparation avant l'installation de la cuisinière VÉrIFICATION DU LIEU D'INSTALLATION Dégagements et dimensions Pour procéder à l'installation de la cuisinière, reportez-vous au schéma suivant. Concernant les installations au CANADA, une cuisinière non encastrable ne peut pas être installée à moins de 12 mm de toute surface adjacente. ATTENTION ATTENTION Cette cuisinière a été conçue pour supporter une température maximale de 194 ºF, température maximale autorisée pour toute structure en bois. Assurez-vous que le revêtement mural, les plans de travail et les meubles voisins peuvent résister à la chaleur (jusqu'à 194 ºF) générée par la cuisinière. Dans le cas contraire, des éléments peuvent se décolorer, se décoller ou fondre. A B 36” 30” 24” 6” 25” 3” 24” 3” A : Ouverture du meuble 30” pour les Etats-Unis, 30”~31” pour le CANADA. B : emplacement autorisé pour la prise électrique Dimensions minimales IMPORTANT Pour éliminer tout risque de brûlure ou d'incendie lors de l'accès à l'espace situé au-dessus des éléments de cuisson chauds, évitez d'y aménager tout meuble de rangement. Si, toutefois, un meuble de rangement doit être monté, réduisez ce risque en installant une hotte d'aspiration assurant une protection horizontale d'au moins 5" au-delà du dessous du meuble. * 30” 30” ** 15” * dégagement minimal de 30” entre le dessus de la table de cuisson et le dessous d'un meuble en métal ou en bois non protégé, ou de 24” minimum si le dessous du meuble en métal ou en bois est protégé par un carton pâte inifugeant d'au moins 1/4” recouvert par au moins une feuille d'acier n°28 MSG, d'acier inoxydable de 0.015”, d'aluminium de 0.024” ou de cuivre de 0.020”. ** 15 ” minimum entre le plan de travail et le dessous du meuble adjacent. Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 4 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5602 MISE SOUS TENSION Mise sous tension _5 Mise sous tension ETAPE 1 : rESPECT DES EXIGENCES EN MATIErE DE rACCOrDEMENTS ELECTrIQUES ATTENTION ATTENTION Pour votre sécurité, n'utilisez pas de rallonge pour brancher l'appareil. Retirez le fusible de l'installation électrique ou ouvrez le disjoncteur avant de démarrer l'installation. Cet appareil doit être alimenté par la fréquence et la tension adaptées. Il doit également être branché sur un circuit individuel correctement mis à la terre et protégé par un disjoncteur ou un fusible dont l'ampérage est conforme à celui spécifi é sur la plaque signalétique de l'appareil. La plaque signalétique est située au-dessus du tiroir sur la structure du four. (Fig. 1 ou Fig. 2) Nous vous recommandons de confi er le câblage et le branchement électriques de votre cuisinière à un électricien qualifi é. Une fois l'installation eff ectuée, demandez à l'électricien de vous montrer l'emplacement de débranchement principal de votre cuisinière. Vérifi ez auprès de votre service public les codes électriques s'appliquant à votre zone. Le non-respect des codes obligatoires pour le branchement de votre four peut s'avérer dangereux. S'il n'existe pas de codes locaux, votre cuisinière doit être branchée conformément aux exigences du Code national électrique, ANSI/NFPA N° 70 (dernière édition). Vous pouvez en obtenir une copie en adressant un courrier à : National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park Quincy, MA 02269 Entré en vigueur le 1er janvier 1996, le Code électrique national exige que toute construction neuve (non existante) doit être équipée d'un branchement à 4 conducteurs pour les cuisinières électriques. Lorsque vous installez une cuisinière électrique dans une construction neuve, suivez les étapes 2 et 3 relatives aux connexions à 4 fi ls. Vous devez utiliser un système électrique à 3 ou 4 fi ls, monophasé CA de 208Y/120 V ou de 240/120 V (60 Hz). Si votre installation électrique n'est pas conforme aux spécifi cations ci-dessus, contactez un électricien agréé afi n d'installer une prise homologuée. Utilisez uniquement un cordon d'alimentation à 3 ou 4 fi ls fi gurant dans la liste UL. Ces cordons nécessitent des bornes rondes sur le fi l et un dispositif de protection contre la traction. Un cordon d'alimentation nominale de 40 A et de 125/250 V minimum est indispensable. Il n'est pas recommandé d'utiliser un cordon d'alimentation de 50 A, mais si toutefois vous en utilisé un, celui-ci doit être repéré pour être utilisé avec des ouvertures de connexion de diamètre nominal 13⁄8 ”. Veillez à bien centrer le câble et le dispositif de protection contre la traction dans le trou d'éjection afi n d'empêcher que le bord n'endommage le câble. • Etant donné que les prises de la cuisinière sont inaccessibles une fois la cuisinière installée, il est nécessaire d'utiliser une gaine ou un cordon fl exible. REMARQUE Si vous utilisez une gaine, suivez l'étape 4, page 9. TOUTES LES CONSTRUCTIONS DONT LES CIRCUITS DERIVES SONT NEUFS, LES MAISONS MOBILES, LES VEHICULES ET LES INSTALLATIONS DE LOISIRS DONT LES CODES LOCAUX NE PERMETTENT PAS UNE MISE A LA TERRE PAR UNE BORNE NEUTRE, NECESSITENT L'UTILISATION D'UN CORDON D'ALIMENTATION A 4 FILS FIGURANT DANS LA LISTE UL. (Fig. 1). (Fig. 2). Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 5 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:576_ Mise sous tension ETAPE 2 : ACCES AU BrANCHEMENT DU COrDON D'ALIMENTATION Retirez le panneau d'accès situé à l'arrière et desserrez la vis à l'aide d'un tournevis. Vous pourrez alors accéder au bornier. Capot d'accès Bornier Classifi cation de l'équipement nécessaire à la mise sous tension Classifi cation générale, watts Classifi cation de l'équipement nécessaire à la mise sous tension, ampères Diamètre (pouces) de l'ouverture de connexion de la cuisinière 120 / 240 volts, 3 fi ls Cordon d'alimentation Gaine 8750 - 16500 40 ou 50 A 13/8” 11/8” Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 6 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5802 MISE SOUS TENSION Mise sous tension _7 ETAPE 3 : INSTALLATION DU COrDON D'ALIMENTATION Pour les installations de cordons d'alimentation, branchez le dispositif de protection de câble sur l'orifi ce du cordon d'alimentation (13/8”) situé sous la partie arrière du tiroir. Insérez le cordon d'alimentation dans le dispositif et serrez-le. Protection contre la traction Cordon d'alimentation Plaque de raccordement des gaines • Le cordon d'alimentation doit être installé au moyen d'une protection contre la traction. • Fixez la protection à l'ouverture 13/8” située dans la plaque de raccordement des gaines. Installation d'un cordon d'alimentation à 3 fi ls AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT La prise de terre ou la prise neutre du cordon d'alimentation doit être connectée à la borne neutre située au centre du bornier. Les câbles d'alimentation doivent être connectés aux bornes inférieures gauches et inférieures droites du bornier. 1. Retirez les 3 vis de la borne inférieure du bornier. 2. Insérez les 3 vis de la borne dans les bornes inférieures du bornier en passant par chacun des anneaux de la borne du cordon d'alimentation. Assurez-vous que le fi l central (blanc/neutre) est relié à l'emplacement central inférieur du bornier. 3. Serrez fermement les vis dans le bornier. NE retirez PAS la connexion du conducteur de terre. 4. Reportez-vous à l'étape 5 de la page 10 et procédez à l'installation. Conducteur de terre Borne neutre Noir Blanc rouge Noir Blanc rouge Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 7 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:598_ Mise sous tension Installation d'un cordon d'alimentation à 4 fi ls AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT La prise neutre du circuit d'alimentation doit être connectée à la borne neutre située au centre inférieur du bornier. Les câbles d'alimentation doivent être connectés aux bornes inférieures gauches et inférieures droites du bornier. Le 4ème câble de mise à la terre doit être connecté au bâti de la cuisinière au moyen de la plaque et de la vis de masse. 1. Retirez les 3 vis de la borne inférieure du bornier. Retirez la vis et la plaque de terre et conservezles. 2. Coupez et éliminez le c